The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

2

TEUBNER'S

BIBLIOTHECA GLOTTICA.

I.

v»

%,.

{.!■ ■;•'.■:

'-in i-V

. \

i

I

v^ w/

THE

LITERATUEE

OF

AMERICAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES.

BY

HERMANN E. LUDEWIG.

X

WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS

BY PROFESSOR WM. W. TURNER.

EDITED BY NICOLAS TRUBNER.

LONDON:

TRUBNER AND CO., 60, PATERNOSTER ROW.

MDCCOLTIII.

PREFACE.

A NEW edition of Vater's '' Linguarum totius orbis index/'
after Professor Jiilg's revision of 1847, requires no apology.
The science of Philology has made great progress within the
last few years. Exotic languages are no longer considered as
mere matters of curiosity, but are looked upon as interesting
parts of the natural history of man, and as such receive their
share of the brilliant light which modern critical studies have
shed upon the natural sciences in general.

Ethnologists now understand how to appreciate the high
importance of language as one of the most interesting links of
the great chain of national affinities ; and the reciprocity exist-
ing between man, the soil he lives upon, and the language he
speaks, will become better understood the more our knowledge
of these interesting topics is extended.

Comparative philology has begun to be established upon solid
scientific foundations ; and the recent endeavours to establish
finally a uniform system of linguistic orthography will, when
generally received, give a new and important impetus to that
study, which must lead to most interesting results. In such a
state of progress, new literary guides are constantly required ;
and one of them, embracing the aboriginal languages of our
great western continent, is hereby offered to those who take an
interest in American linguistics.

VI PREFACE.

From the discovery of our continent, the languages of the
American Indians have always been, as they are still, an object
of high interest to missionary labour; and wherever the atten-
tion of the scientific world has been drawn to them, it was by
the results of the exertions of these men, who, inspired by
religious ardour, went out to teach the heathens, and, in their
zeal for Christianity, soon learned to master the diversity of
tongues.

It was, however, and is still, difficult to obtain access to these
results; the greater part of Indian grammars and vocabularies
existing either in manuscript only, or, when printed, having
been confined to the use of a particular nation, country, or
religious society. Thus it happened that the Jesuit, Lorenzo
Hervas, who zealously collected such grammars and vocabu-
laries for the linguistic part of his ^* Idea del universo,'^
could give notice of fifty-five American languages which were
before unknown to learned philologists, or at least unnoticed
by them.

After Hervas and Gilii, whose discoveries were diligently
revised and republished in Adelung^s and Vater's Mithridates,
Dr. Benjamin Smith Barton, of Philadelphia, drew the attention
of the scientific world to the languages of our Indians. The
historical societies of Massachusetts and Rhode Island, and the
American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, published, or
republished, the scarce works of Eliot, Cotton, Roger Williams,
Edwards, and Zeisberger; and the last-named Society com-
mitted to Stephen Duponceau the task of subjecting the Ameri-
can Indian languages to critical inquiries and studies. John
Pickering, Henry R. Schoolcraft, and, above all, the venerable
Albert Gallatin, continued these researches; and to Gallatin we
are indebted for a better classification and a comparative view
of the languages of the northern half of our continent and of
Mexico.

By the exertions of these gentlemen the science of Indian
philology has been actively promoted; and many officers of our

PREFACE. Vll

army and navy have paid attention to the languages of the
aborigines visited by them in their official explorations.

In this way the materials for a more exact knowledge of the
American Indian languages have been greatly increased ; and a
new inventory of our riches is undoubtedly wanted. This want
is the more felt^ because nearly all the Indian grammars and
vocabularies are exceedingly scarce ; and the greater part of
these materials is dispersed in books of voyages and travels,
historical and geographical collections, documents, and reports,
which are generally found only in public libraries.

How far it was possible to supply the want in this country,
where bibliographical researches are much more troublesome
and difficult than anywhere else, the following pages will show.
The interest felt in this country in collecting and publishing
notices concerning the languages of the aborigines of our con-
tinent is naturally greater than elsewhere; and the earlier,
therefore, these notices are published, the sooner we may expect
that those who are better acquainted with the subject will
submit them to critical examination, and supply the deficiencies
which they undoubtedly contain.

This made the oflfer for the publication of the following
bibliographical repertory, by their active and enterprising pub-
lisher, a welcome one. More welcome and, for the friends of
science, really gratifying must be the care bestowed by Mr.
Trubner upon this publication. With true love for the subject,
and with a scientific zeal not to be surpassed, he has revised
the manuscript, and supplied it with whatever his own know-
ledge furnished, aided by the ample means which London, and
Europe in general, offer to bibliographical researches, and made
many valuable additions which could not have been collected on
this side of the Atlantic. He has been a true co-operator in
the work now offered to the public.

Business, in our great commercial emporium of the new
world, leaves to the professional man but very little time for
minute literary researches ; and our larger libraries being open

Vlll PREFACE.

to the public only during business hours, but one of them could
be consulted while correcting the notices collected in the^course
of several years.

The friendly aid which the officers of the Astor Library and
of the American Bible Society lent for this purpose is thank-
fully acknowledged.

HERMANN E. LUDEWIG.

New Yokk, December, 1855.

CONTENTS.

PACK

THE AUTHOE'S PEEFACE . v

THE EDITOE'S ADVEETISEMENT . ix

BIOaEAPHICAL MEMOIE . xiii

INTEODUCTOET BIBLIOGEAPHICAL NOTICES xv

THE LITEEATUEE OF AMEEICAN ABOEIOINAL

LANOUAGES 1

ADDENDA . .210
INDEX . .247
LIST OF EEEATA 257

THE EDITOR'S ADVERTISEMENT.

Dr. Ludewig has himself «o fully detailed the plan and purport
of this work, that little more remains for me to add beyond the
mere statement of the origin of my connection with the publi-
cation, and the mention of such additions for which I alone am
responsible, and which, during its progress through the press,
have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole.
This is but an act of justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig ;
because, at the time of his death, in December, 1856, no more
than 172 pages were printed off, and these constitute the only
portion of the work which had the benefit of his v^-luable per-
sonal and final revision.

Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York in
1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he men-
tioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical
memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the
history of spoken language. As a first section of a more ex-
tended work on the Literary History of Language generally,
he had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of the
aboriginal languages of America. The manuscript had been
deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological Society at
New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it
at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in
Europe, under ray personal superintendence.

Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out
the trust thus confided to me, intending then to confine myself
simply to producing a correct copy of my friend's manuscript.
But it soon became obvious that the transcri])t had been hastily
made, and but for the valuable assistance of literary friends,

b

X THE editor's ADVERTISEMENT.

both in this country and in America, the work would probably
have been abandoned. My thanks are more particularly due to
Mr. E. G. Squier, and to Professor Wm. W. Turner, of Wash-
ington, by whose considerate and ^valuable co-operation many
difficulties were cleared away, and my editorial labours greatly
lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labour
nor expense in the attempt to render the work as perfect as
possible. With what success must be left to the judgment of
those who can fairly appreciate the labours of a pioneer in any
new field of literary research.

De Souza's great and valuable bibliographical work, of which
there is no copy in the library of the British Museum, has been
carefully and sedulously consulted by Mr. Squier, who culled
from it for my use all that bears upon the subject of American-
Indian languages.

Mr. Turner's additions will be found in the second portion of the
volume ; for so valuable did his corrections and suggestions appear
to me, that I determined to throw them, with some remarks of
my own, into a second alphabetical arrangement, similar to that
of the first. His additions are easily distinguished from those
the responsibility of which rests with myself, by being enclosed
within brackets, with the initials W. W. T. It would here be
out of place to do more than notice the value of the contribu-
tions of so eminent a philologist, who is pre-eminently distin-
guished at Washington as the highest authority in all matters
appertaining to the knowledge of the languages of the aborigines
of America. To this double alphabet a very full Index has been
added, and this was the more necessary, because, as in the in-
fancy of all science there will be difficulties, in this there is no
little confusion of names, which could only be reconciled by
proper references in the Index. In opening a field hitherto
almost untrodden, I may reasonably claim the reader's in-
dulgence for such defects as must ever attend a first attempt of
similar character. In all such cases facts have to be brought
together, and seeming contradictions to be reconciled. Then,
as in all branches of human knowledge, with such data to build

THE EDITOR^S ADVERTISEMENT. xi

upon, in the hands of master-minds, a key may be discovered to
the maze which, however imperfectly, is here placed before
the reader, and for which the merit of careful and pains-
taking industry may fairly be claimed. The defects alluded
to arise in a great measure from the diversity of spelling
adopted by the different nations of Europe to represent the
same sounds; for the reader must bear in mind that the
aborigines of America had no written alphabetical language,
and that it was by Europeans that the spoken words of the
various Indian tribes were first represented by distinct cha-
racters. This renders what I may perhaps be pardoned for
calling a linguistic geography of America almost necessary, in
which, as the same tribe is not unfrequently called by different
names, the localities in which each of the many Red Indian
tribes formerly dwelt should be noted with the utmost precision.

A map constructed on this principle would enable the reader
at one view to reconcile many apparent discrepancies, and to
ascertain the affinity between each language, many of which are
evidently mere dialects of one original tongue. As far as it was
possible, the Index has been rendered complete, so that the
reader will have little trouble in tracing any language he may
be in search of. Should he find references to more than he is
in quest of, he must consider it an error on the safe side, and
attribute it entirely to similarity of sound and the difficulty of
obtaining better materials.

As " Old Mortality^^ cleaned the inscriptions on the Cove-
nanters^ tombs, so did Dr. Ludewig endeavour to rub off the
rust of ages from the scattered remains of the aborigines
of America. Had it not been a labour of love like his,
it would not have been attempted. Unimportant as such
labours may seem to men engaged in the more bustling occupa-
tions of life, all must at least acknowledge that these records of
the past, like the stern-lights of a departing 3hip, are the last
glimmers of savage life, as it becomes absorbed, or recedes be-
fore the tide of civilization.
• I may here be permitted to give the titles of a few other

Xii THE EDlTOR^S ADVERTISEMENT.

books appertaining to the subject^ which did not come to hand
till the whole of the sheets of the manual had been worked oflF :—

Histoire des Nations Civilis^es du Mexique et de TAmerique
Septentrionale^ par TAbb^ Brasseur de Bourbourg. Vol. I.
Paris, 1857, 8vo. — Which, at pp. 44 — 73, contains a memoir
on Mexican writing, the materials of which were, for the
most part, supplied by M. Aubin. In the third chapter, at
page 62, are also some observations on the languages of Central
America.

Vocabulaire Fran9ais-Creole, et des Conversations Fran9aises-
Creoles. London, 1816, 8vo, pp. 113. — Which is simply a re-
print of Ducoeur-Joly^s Vocabulary.

In Schoolcraft^s History, Condition, and Prospects of the
Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V., p. 689, Appendix
No. 1 7, is a letter on the affinities of dialects in New Mexico,
by Governor William Carr Lane.

By the kindness of Mr. Thomas Wright, I have been favoured
with a sight of a manuscript grammar and vocabulary of the
Kariff, or Charrib language, as spoken in the Bay of Honduras.
It is written by Mr. Alexander Henderson, of Belize, Hon-
duras, and will probably soon be given to the public under the
auspices of the London Ethnological Society. Dr. Thomas
Rainy, of New York, is preparing a Dictionary of the Geral
Tongue of Para, in the Brazils, accompanied by a memoir; and
Dr. Fran9a, a Brazilian, has a dictionary of the Tupi language
in the press at Leipzig. Mr. E. G. Squier will shortly publish
a monograph on the aboriginal languages of Central America.

In conclusion, following the good and honest example of
Aldus Manutius, and the printers of old, I would respectfully
suggest to the reader the propriety of correcting with a pen the
errata, pointed out in the subjoined list, prior to his consulting
the work itself.

NICOLAS TRUBNER.

London, 5<A October, 1857.

BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR. "

Hermann Ed. Ludewig, though but little known in this
country, was held in considerable esteem as a jurist, both in
Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden
in 1809, with but little exception he continued to reside in his
native city until 1844, when he emigrated to America; but
though in both countries he practised law as a profession, his
bent was the study of literary history, which was evidenced by
his '* Livre des Ana, Essai de Catalogue Manuel,^' published at
his own cost in 1837, and by his " Bibliothekonomie,^' which
appeared a few years later.

But even whilst thus engaged, he delighted in investigating
the rise and progress of the land of his subsequent adoption,
and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of
the peopling of America, gained him the highest consider-
ation, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a inan of original
and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann's
'^ Serapseum/^ and amongst the chief of his contributions to that
journal may be mentioned those on " American Libraries,^' on
the "Aids to American Bibliography,'^ and on the ^'Bopk-trade
of the United States of America.^' In 1846 appeared his
^^ Literature of American Local- History,*' a work of much im-
portance, and which required no small amount of labour and
perseverance, owing to the necessity of consulting the many and
widely-scattered materials, which had to be sought out from
apparently the most unlikely channels.

These studies formed a natural induction to the present work

XIV BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.

on " The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages/^ which
occupied his leisure concurrently with the others, and the print-
ing of which was commenced in August, 1856, but which he
did not live to see launched upon the world; for at the date
of his deaths on the 12th of December following, only 172
pages were in type. It had been a labour of love with him
for years; and if ever author were mindful of the nonum
prematur in annurrij he was when he deposited his manuscript
in the Library of the American Ethnological Society, diffident
himself as to its merits and value on a subject of such paramount
interest. He had satisfied himself that in due time the reward
of his patient industry might be the production of some more
extended national work on the subject : and with this he was
contented ; for it was a distinguishing feature in his character,
notwithstanding his great and varied knowledge and brilliant
acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to
drudgery if needful, if he , could in any way assist in the pro-
mulgation of literature and science.

Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of many of the
most distinguished European and American literary societies ;
and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars
both in America and Germany, as will readily be acknowledged
should his voluminous correspondence ever see the light. In
private life he was distinguished for the best qualities which
endear a man^s memory to those who survive him^he was a
kind and aflfectionate husband and a sincere frien^. Always
accessible, and ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied
to him for advice upon matters appertaining to literature, his
loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends ; and
in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her
learned men in America — a genuine type of a class in which,
with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined
a painstaking and plodding perseverance, but seldom met with
beyond the confines of " the Fatherland.^'

N. T,

INTRODUCTORY BIBUOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, i Occidental, Nautica i Geogra-
fica .... por el Licenciado Aktokio de Leon, Eelator del
Supremo i Eeal Consejo de las Indias. Madrid, Juan Gonzalez,
1629, 4to, pp. 80, 188, xii.

The well-known Spanish liistorian, Don Andres Gk)nzale8^Baroia,' enlarged
this small Tolume to a folio of about 1172 pages, wliich ho published midcr
the following title : —

Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, y Occidental, Nautica y Geogra-
fica, de Don Antonio de Leon Pinelo, del Consejo de S. M. : en
la Casa de Contratacion de Sevilla y Coronista mayor de las Indias.
Anadido y enmendado nuevamente. Madrid, Prancisco Martinez
Abad, 1737—38. Three parts in 1 vol. fol.

Notwithstanding the confusion and prolixity of this work, the notices it
contains are very interesting, and their critical revision would bo a useful and
meritorious undertaking.

The 18th chapter of the Biblioteca Occidental, " Autoros que han esorito
en Lenguas de las Indias" (pp. 104 — 110 of the first, col. 719—788, and
fol. 918 — 920 of the second edition), contains the bibliographical and literary
notices concerning American aboriginal languages, and mentions many worki
on that subject, which undoubtedly exist stiU in manuscript, but have never
"been collected.

NicoLAi Antonio, Bibliotbeca Hispana Vetus, complectens Scrip-
tores qui ab Octaviani Augusti Iraperio, usque ad annum M,
floruerunt, studio et curis Josepbi Saenz, Cardinalis de Aguirro.
Momcd, 1696, 2 vols, in fol.

The title contains a gross misprint. The work comprising the authors
until the year 1500, it ought to read, " usque ad annum Ml)" (IBOO), instt^ad
of M (1000). Antonio died without the means for prhiting tliis work. Tlu^
were defrayed by the Cardinal de Aguirre, who cntrustt^d the cditorHliij) to
Emmanuel Mars, a learned Valentian. The authors are arranged in clirono-
logical order; tables are added to faeiUtate the ubc of tlic work. Tlie

XVI INTRODUCTOBY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

" Bibliotheca Nova," although published first, is but a sequel of the " Biblio-
theca Yetus," of which a reprint likewise has appeared at Madrid, in 1788,
under this title : —

Bibliotheca Hispana Vetus, sive Hispani Scriptores qui ab
Octaviani Aagusti Aevo ad annum Christi MD floruerunt. Auctore
D. NicoLAO AwTOino Hispalensi I.C., Ordinig S. Jacobi equite,
patriae ecclesisB canonico, regionim negbtiorum in urbe et romana
curia procuratore generali, consiliario regie. Curante Francisco
Perezio Bayerio, Valentino, Sereniss. Hisp. Infantum Caroli III.
Begis filiorum institutore primario, Eegiae BibliothecsB Palatino-
Matritensis PraBfeeto, qui et prologum, et auctoris vitse epitomen,
et notulas adjecit. Tomi II, folio. Matriti, Ibarra, 1788.

Ejusdem Nicolat Antonio, Bibliotheca Hispana Nova, sen His-
panorum qui sive Latina, aut populari, sive alia quavis lingua scripto
aliquid consignaverunt. BomcB, 1672, 2 vols, in foL Typis Nicolai
Tinassii.

Nicolas Antonio was bom in 1617, at Sevilla, studied at Salamanca, and
returned to Sevilla, composed his Bibliotheca Hispana in the convent of the
Benedictines, where the abbot, Benedict de La Serra, had accumulated a
splendid library. When it was sufficiently adyanced he took it to Rome,
where he completed and printed it. He died at Madrid, in 1784. Antonio,
agreeable to the custom prevalent at that time, arranged the names of the
authors according to the alphabetical order of their Christian names. This is
a great inconvenience, which is only partially removed by the addition of a
number of tables. A new edition was published at Madrid, by Franc.
Perez Bayer, a learned Valentian ; the title of which is,

Bibliotheca Hispana Nova sive Hispanorum Scriptorum qui ab
anno MD ad MDCLXXXIV floruere notitia. Auctore D. Nicolao
Antonio Hispalensi I.C. Ordinis S. Jacobi equite, patriae ecclesise
canonico, regiorum negotiorura in urbe et romana curia pro-
curatore generali, consiliario regie. Nunc primum prodit recognita
emendata aucta ab ipso Auctore. Tomi II. Matriti, Ibarra, 1783.

The two works together have long and favourably been known as the
"Bibhotheca Hispana." It has always been regarded as one of the best
workf of the kind, and continues to enjoy a great reputation among savants.

Eelandi, Hadbiani, Dissertationum Miscellanearum Partes
Tres. Ultrajecti, 1706-7-8.

These Dissertations are thirteen in number, one of them treating "De Linguis
Amerjcanis.'*

De la Langue Americaine. (Pp. 458 — 490 of Yol. II, of P.
Lafiteau, Meurs des Sauvages Amerieains. Faris, Saugrain aiiie,
et Ch. Hocherau, 1724, 2 vols. 4to.)

INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XVU

Eev. Dr. Malcolme, Letters, Essays, and other Tracts, illus-
trating the Antiquities of Great Britain and Ireland ; together with
many curious discoveries of the affinities between the language of
the Americans and the ancient Britons in the Greek and Latin, etc.
Also, specimens of the Celtic, "Welsh, Lish, Saxon, and American
languages. Edinburghy 1738, 8vo. Some copies, London, 1744, Svo.

Essai sur les Bapports des Mots, entre les Langues du Nouveau
Monde et celles de I'Ancien (pp. 489 — 560 of Vol. VIII of Monde
Primitif analise et compare avec le Monde Moderne, consider^ dans
divers objets concemant THistoire, le Blason, les Monnoies, les Jeux,
les Voyages des Pheniciens autour du monde, les Langues Am^ri-
caines, etc., ou Dissertations Melees remplies de D^couvertes in-
teressantes ; avec une carte, des planches', et un Monument de T Ame-
rique. Par M. Court de Gebelin. Paris, 1773 — 1782, 9 vols. 4to.

On the Connection of the Indian Languages with the Hebrew.
(Arguments V. and VI. pp. 37 — 80 of: James Adair, The History
of the American Indians, particularly those nations adjoining to the
Mississippi, East and West Elorida, Georgia, South and North
Carolina and Virginia, etc. etc. London, Edward and Charles Dilly,
1776, 4to.)

D. Lobenzo Heevas, Idea del Universo. Cesena, Gregorio

Biasini, 1778—1781, XXI vols. 4to. Vol. XXII, Fuligno, 1792, 4to.

The principal interest of this work consists in the linguistic notices given
in the same. They are contained in the following volumes : —

Vol. XVII (1784), Catalogo delle Lingue conosciuti e notizia
deUa loro affinita e diversita.

Of this volume, the following enlarged Spanish edition was published by
the author : Catalogo de las Lenguas de las naciones conocidas y numeracion,
division y clases de estas segun la diversidad de sus idiomas y dialectos.
Madrid^ Imprenta de la Administracion del real Arbitrio de Benefioencia, 1800
—1805, 6 vols. 4to.

Vol. XVIII (1785), Origine, Eormazione, Mecanismo ed Armonia
degH Idiomi.

Vol. XIX (1786), Aritmetica delle Nazioni.

Vol. XX (1787), Vocabulario Poliglotto con Prolegomeni sopra
piu di CL Lingue.

Vol. XXI (1787), Saggio pratico delle Lingue con Prolegomeni
ed una raccolta di orazioni dominicali in piu di trecento linguo o
dialett).

c

will INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Storia Antica del Messico cavata da' migliori storici Spagnuoli, e

da' manoscritti, e dalle pitture antiche degl' Indian! : divisa in dieci

libri, e corredata di carte geografiche, e di varie figure : e dissertazioni

sulla terra, sugli animali, e sugli abitatori del Messico. Opera dell*

Abate D. FaAircrsco Satbbio Claviqebo. 4to, 4 vols., plates.

Cesena, 1780.

Clavigero was bom about the year 1720, at Vera Cruz, in Mexico, and at
the age of seventeen entered into the order of the Jesuits. Wlien the order
was suppressed, in 1767, he retired to Cesena, like most of the other Jesuits of
Spanish America, to whom the Pope had given an asylum, where he under-
took this important work, which was received by the learned of Europe with
great applause. It contains in the last volume a Ust of the authors of gram-
mars and dictionaries in the languages of Anahuac. The work was trans-
lated into the following languages : —

Into English under the following title —
Clavigero. The History of Mexico, collected from Spanish
and Mexican Historians, from Manuscripts and Ancient Paintings
of the Indians, illustrated by Charts and other Copperplates ; to
which are added Critical Dissertations on the Land, the Animals,
and Inhabitants of Mexico. By Abbe D. Fbancisco Saverio
Clavigero. Translated from the original Italian by Charles CuUen,
Esq., in two volumes, pp. xl and 940, 4to. London, 1789.

Into German, fix)m the English translation of Cullen —
G-eschichte von Mexico, aue Spanischen und Mexicanischen
G-eschichtschreibem, Handschriften und Gemalden der Indian er
zusammengetragen und durch Karten und Kupferstiche eriautert,
nebst einigen kritischen Abhandlungen iiber die Beschaffenheit des
Landes, der Thiere und Einwohner von Mexico. Aus dem Italian-
ischen durch den Bitter Karl Cullen ins Engliache und aus diesem
ins Deutsche iibersetzt, 2 Bde. mit Kupfern und Karten. Leipzig,
1789 —90, Schwickert, 8vo.

Into Spanish—
Clavigeeo. Hisioria Antigua de Megico : sacada de los mejores
historiadores Espanoles y de los manuscritos y de las pinturas
Antiguas de los Indies ; dividida en diez libros ; Adornada con Mapas
y Estampas, E illustrada con Dissertaciones sobre la tierra, los
Animales y los Habitantes de Megico escrita por D. Ebancisco
Save BIO Clavigero ; y traducida del Italiano por Jose Joaquin de
Mora. Two vols., pp. xxxvi and 882, 8vo. London, 1826.

Saggio di Storia Americana o sia storia naturale, civile e sacra
de* regni, e delle provincie spagnuole di terra firma nell' America

INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XIX

meridioaale, descritta dell' Abate Filippo Salvadore GiLir. Bowa,
Perego, erede Salvioiii, 1780—1784, 4 vols. 8vo.

Gilii was one of the Jesuits bwiished, like all the other members of his
order, from America. The third volume of his work, bearing the title, " Delia
Eeligione e delle Lingue degli Orinochesi e di altri Americani," published in
1782, contains interesting details and notices concerning American Indian
languages.

Theodor JAN KiEwiTCH DB MiRiEwo, Sravnitel niy Slovar, etc.
(Comparative vocabulary of all the languages aud dialects.) St.
Petersburg, 1790—1791, 4 vols. 4to, in Eussian.

Pallas haying published, in 1786 and 1789, the first part of the Vocabu-
larium CatharinEBum (a comparative vocabulary of 286 words in the languages
of Europe and Asia), the material contained therein was published in the
above edition in another form, and words of American languages added. The
book did not come up to the expectations of the Government, and was there-
fore not published, so that but few copies of it can be found.

William Marsden, A Catalogue of Dictionaries, Grammars, arid
Alphabets, in two parts. I. Alphabetical Catalogue of Authors.
II. Chronological Catalogue of Works in each Class of Language.
London, 1796, 4to, pp. vi. 156.

Privately printed, and very scarce ; contains but little about American
languages. See also the Bibliotheca Marsdeniana. London, Printed by J. L.
Cox, 1827, 4to.

B. Smith Barton, New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and
Nations of America. Philadelphia, 1797, 8vo.

Reprinted (second edition, corrected and enlarged), ibid. Printed for the
author by John Bjoren, 1798, 8vo. Pp. cix (preliminary discourse) j 133
(comparative vocabularies of 70 words) j 32 (appendix, containing notes and
illustrations).

Mithridates, oder allgeraeine Sprachenkunde mit dem Vater-
Unser als Sprachprobe in beiuahe 500 Sprachen und Mundarten,
von JoHANN Chbistoph Adeltjng. Vol. I. Berlin, Voss, ] 806, Svo.
Continued (from Adelung's papers) by Dr. Johatsn Seveeih Vateb.
Vols. II, III, and IV. Ibid, 1809—1817, 8vo.

The second and third parts of the thu'd volume (1813 and 1816) contain
the languages of America.

A. J. VON Krusenstern, Woertersammlungen aus den Sprachen
einiger Voelker des oest lichen Asiens und der Nordwestkueste von
Amerika. St. Petersburg, Academic der Wissenschaften, 1813, 4to,
pp. xi. 68.

XX INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Jo. Seteeik Yater, Linguarum totius orbis Index Alphabeticus,

quarum GrammaticaB, Lexica, Collectiones Vocabulanim recensentur,

patria siguificatur Historia adumbratur. Berlin, Xicolai, 1815,

8vo, pp. X. 259.

Text in Oerman and Latin. Embraces all the known languages of the
world, and giyes the bibHographical notices contained in the first two volumes,
and the first part of Tolume III of the Mithridates.

A new and enlarged edition, in German only, was published under the
following title: —

LiteratuT der Grammatiken, Lexica und Woertersammliingeii
aller Sprachen der Erde, von Johann Severin Vateb. Zweite voUig
umgearbeitete Auagabe von B. Jiilg. Berlin, Nicolai, 1847, 8vo, pp.
xxii. 592.

An Enquiry into the Language of the American Indians. (Chap.
Ill, pp. 89 — 107 of: Elias Bofdinot, A Star in the West, or an
humble attempt to discover the long lost ten tribes of Israel. Tren-
ton, N. J. Fanton, Hutcheson, and Dunham, 1816, 8vo, pp. 312.)

Biblioteca HispaDO- Americana Septentrional. Catalogo y Noticia
de los literatos, que o nacidos, o educados, o florecientes en la
America Septentrional Espaiiola, ban dado a luz algun escrito, o lo
han dexado preparado para la prensa. La escribia El Doctor D. Jose
Mariano Beuistain de Souza, del claustro do las universidades de
Valencia j Valladolid, Caballero de la orden Espaiiola de Carlos III,
y Commendador de la Real Americana de Isabel la Catolica, y Dean
de la Metropolitana de Megico. Megico, 1816 — 19, 3 vols, folio.

De Sou7.a*8 is by far the most important work for the literature of New
Spain tliat haw over bt»on composed. It comprises 3687 biographies, and
althoup[b, like tnont Spanish works of the kind, singularly uncritical, yet it is a
perfect, trcafiiirc m regards the cultivation of science and literature in Mexico and
tiie a(\jn(HMii countries. The work is extremely scarce, and appears to be
altogotlicr unknown in Europe.

P. E. i)V PoNOEATJ, Report made to the Historical and Literary
Committee of the American Philosophical Society by their Corres-
ponding Secretary on Languages of the American Indians. Phila-
delphia, IS 19, 8vo.

Reprinted as Chap. XY, "Language of the Indians," in James Buchanan's
Sketches of the History, Manners, and Customs of the North American
Indians. 2few York, Will. Boradaile, 1824, 2 vols. 12mo. Vol. II, pp.
43 — 77 ; pp. 79 — 82, ibid : Catalogue of manuscript works on the Indians
and their languages, presented to the American Philosophical Society, or
deposited in their Ubrary.

INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XXI

John Pickering, Essay on a Missionary Ortbograpby for the
Indian Languages of North America. Cambridgey 1820, 4to.

Arcbaeologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of tbe
American Antiquarian Society. Published by direction of tbe
Society. Yol. I (pp. 436;, Worcester, MoBsachuseUs, 1820 ; Vol, II
(pp. xxxy 573, map), Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1836.

Sat, T., Vocabularies of Indian Languages (pp. Ixx— Ixxxviii of
Astronomical and Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of
Indian Languages taken on tbe Expedition for Exploring tbe
Mississippi and its Western Waters, under tbe command of Major
S. H. Long, 8vo. Philadelphia, 1822.)

Adrien Balbi, Atlas Etbnograpbique du Globe, ou classification
des peuples anciens et modemea d*apr^s leurs langues ; pr^c^d6
d*un discours sur Tutilite et I'importance de T^tude des langues,
etc. Paris, Rey and Gravier, 1826, fol.

Table XXY contains the " Division ethnographique de 1' Am^que et tableaa
g^nferal des langues Americaines ;" and Table XLI, "Tableau poljgloite
des langues Americaines," gives a vocabulary of 26 words in about 120
American languages and dialects.

" Of the Language of tbe Indians," Cbapter VI (pp. 106 to 114)
of: A View of tbe American Indians, tbeir general Character,
Customs, Language, Public Festivals, Religious Rites, and Tradi-
tions ; showing them to be the descendants of tbe Ten Tribes of
Israel ; the language of prophecy concerning them, and the course
by which they travelled from Media into America. By Isbael
"WoBSLET. London, 1828, 12mo, pp. xii and 186.

On the Languages of the American Indians. (Chap. II, pp. 88
— 631 of: J. H. M*CuLL0H, jun., Researches, Philosophical and
Antiquariau, concerning the Aboriginal History of America. Fielding
Lucas, jun., 1829, Svo.)

John Pickerino, Indian Languages of America. Appendix

(pp. 581—600) to Vol. VI of the "Encyclopedia Americana,"

Philadelphia, 1836, 8vo. Also, with separate title, " Remarks

on the Indian Languages of North America,*' s. 1. Philadelphia,

1836, 8vo.

German translation (by Mrs. Prof. Eobinson), Ueber die Indianischcn
Sprachen Amerikas. Aus dem Englisclien des Nord-Amerikaners llerm
John Pickebing, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von Talvj.
Leipzig^ Vogel, 1834, Svo, pp. viii, 79, 1,

XXll INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A LBEBT Gallatin, A Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the
United States, East of the B/Ocky Mountains, and in the British and*^
B/Ussian possessions in North America. Pp. 1 — 422, of Yol. II of
the Archaeologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of the
American Antiquarian Society. {Cambridge, printed for the Society
at the University Press, 1836, 8vo.)

Sect. VI, Indian languages, pp. 1 — 208. Appendix of grammatical notices,
and specimen of transitions and conjugations, pp. 211 — 302.

VocabularieSy pp. 306 — 406. Select sentences, pp. 408 — 421.

P. E. DTJ PoNOEAU, Memoiro sur le Systeme grammatical des
Langues de quelques nations Indiennes de I'Amerique du Nord.
Faris, 1838, 8vo.

Alcide d'Ohbignt, THomrne Americain (de TAm^rique m^ri-
dionale) consider^ sous ses rapports physiologiques et moraux.
Paris, Pitois-Levrault & Co., 1839, 2 vols. 8vo, and Atlas.

Beise des Prinzen Maximilian zu "Wied. Ooblenz, 1839,
1841, 2 vols. 8vo. , Vol. II, pp. 645 — 653, particularly on the lan-
guage of signs.

On this same subject see —

Indian Language of Signs, Appendix B, pp. 27 — 1288 of the first volume

of: Account of an Expedition &om Pittsburgh to the Rocky Mountains, per-

. formed in the years 1819, 1820, .... under the command of Major

Long, M. T. Say, and others, by Edwin James, Botanist and Geologist to

the Expedition. London, Longman, Hurst, etc., 1823, 3 vols. 8vo. And

William Ditnbab, On the Language of Signs among certain North
American Indians. Letter to Th. Jefferson, dated Natchez^ June 30, 1800.
Pp. 1 — 8 of: Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Vol. VI,
Part I. {Philadelphia^ J. Aitken, 1804, 4to.)

EuGEKB A. Vail, Notice sur les Indiens de TAmerique du Nord.
Paris, Bertrand, 1840, 8vo, plates, pp. 244. (Des Langues Indiennes,
pp. 40- 58.)

Particularities of the Indian Languages. (Pp. 92—97, and com-
parative view of the Indian and Asiatic Languages, pp. 100 — 103 of:
John M^Intosh, The Origin of the North American Indians, etc.
JSew York, Napis and Cornish, 1843, 12mo, pp. 311.)

Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, 8vo, Vol. I
(pp. viii and 492), 1845 ; Vol II (pp. clxxxviii, 298, two maps), 1848 ;
Vol. Ill, Part I (pp. 202), 1853. Mw York,

A. Gallatik, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico,
Yucatan, and Central America. Pp. 1 — 352 of Vol. I of the

/

INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XXlll

Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, {^ew York,

Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo. )

Sect. I. Languages, pp. 1 — 48. Appendix. Grammatical notices, pp. 215
—304.

Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Ex-
pedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. Under
the command of Cliarles Wilkes, United States Navy. By Hobatio
Hale, philologist of the expedition, 4to (pp. xii, 666, map). Fhila-
delphia, 1846. (The Languages of North-Western America, on pp.
533 to 656.)

A. Gallatik, Hale*8 Indians of North- West America, and
Vocabularies of North America, with an Introduction. Pp. xxv —
clxxxviii, 1 — 130 of Vol. II of the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society. {Miv York, Bartlett and Welford, 1848, 8vo.)
Introduction III, Philology j Vocabularies, Grammar, pp. cviii — cxliv.
Hale's Indians of North- West America. Philology, pp. 25 — 70 ; Vocabu-
laries, 71—130. *

H. B/. ScHOOLCBArT, A Bibliographical Catalogue of Books,
Translations of the Scriptures, and other publications in the Indian
Tongues of the United States ; with brief critical notices. Washing-
ton, C. Alexander, printer, 1849, 8vo, pp. 28.

Contains a catalogue raisonnS of the Indian works in the Indian bureau of
the department of the interior.

It is reprinted with a few additions, pp. 523 — 551 of Vol. IV of the illus-
trated work on the Indian Tribes of the United States, published by order
of the Q-ovemment of the United States.

Historical and Statistical Information respecting the History,
Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States.
Collected and prepared under the direction of the Bureau of Indian
Affairs, per Act of Congress of March 3, 1847, by Henry E.
SoHOOLOBATT, LL.D. Published by authority of Congress. Parts I
to V, 4to (with illustrations). Philadelphia, 1851 to 1855.

H. B. ScHOOLCBAFT, Indian Languages of the United States.
(Pp. 340 — 345 of History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. II.)

PaAifcis LiEBEB, LL.D., Plan of Thought of the American
Languages (pp. 346—349 of History, Condition, and Prospects of
the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II).

H. B. ScHOOLOBAET, Observations on the Manner of correspond-
ing Words in the Indian Tongue. (Pp. 371 — 385 of History, Con-

XXIV INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

dition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United Stat(
Vol. IV.)

H. E. ScnooLCBArT, Indian Numerals. (P. 712 of Histoi
Condition, aAd Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United Stat^
Vol. V.)

Catalogue of Books in the Astor Library relating to the La

guages and Literature of Asia, Africa, and the Oceanic Island

New York, Astor Library Autographic Press, 1854, 8vo, pp. 8, 42^

Contains, on pp. 179 — 187, also books on the languages of the Ameiic
Indians.

An Examination of American Languages, on pp. 53 to 72 o
Archaeology of the United States; or. Sketches, Historical and Biblii
graphical, of the Progress of Information and Opinion respectir
Vestiges of Antiquity in the United States. By Samuel. F. Have:
Pp. iv. and 168, 4to. Washington, 1856.

BIBLIOTHECA GLOTTICA.

ABENAKI, WAPANACHKI.

Eastern Indians. This is the name given by Europeans to the
Indians of New England, Canada, and Nova Scotia. Tribes of
the Abenakis are the Micmacs, Souriquoisy AmeriscoggtnSy
EtcheminSy and Penohscots. The Abenakis proper lived on the
Kennebek river ; their principal place was Nanrantsouak (Nor-
ridgewock).

WOEDS AND TOCABULABIES.

Hebyas, Saggio, p. 233.

Pbofesbob T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape,
etc.; note 15, pp. 135 — 145, to John Pickering's edition of: Dr. Edwards's.
Observations on the Mohegan Language, in Vol. X (second series) of the : Collec-
tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Boston, Phelps and Farnham, 1823,
8vo ; reprinted, Hid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 815.

Father SEBASTfAN Easles, A Dictionary of the Abenaki Language in North
America, published from the original manuscript of the author, with an intro-
ductory memoir and notes by John Pickering. Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to ;
forms part (pp. 370 — 574) of : Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences. New Series, Vol. I. Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to. The original
MS. in the Harvard Library, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

No. IV, 14 of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc.. Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana; and (partly) under
O, IV, 5, p. 109 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the Ameri-
can Ethnological Society.

Langue des Abenaquis, p. 514 of Vol. VIII of: Ant. Cofet de Gebelin,
Monde primitif. Paris, 1773, 4to. Reprinted in : J. B. Scherer's Recherches His-
toriques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, lamo, pp.
327, 328.

William Willis, The Language of the Abenaquis, or Eastern Indians (extracts
irom Basics, and list of Indian geographical names). Art. VI, pp. 93 — 117, and

//

Z ABIPONES — ACCAWAY.

E. E. POTTEB, appendix thereto, Art. VIII, pp. 185—193, 195, of VoL IV of
the : Collections of the Maine Historical Society. Portland^ 1856, 8yo.

OBAMMABS AKD OBAMMATIGAL l^OTICES.
P. P. WzOKUlLAiir, Wobanaki kinzowi awighihan. Boston, 1830, 870.

ABIPONES.

Formerly of the Province of Cfhaco, now of Paraguay, east of
the Parana river ; were divided into three tribes, the Naguegt-
gagt^hee, the Mucahee, and the Jaconaiga.

WOBDS AND VOCABULABIES.

HsBTAS, Origine, Tab. L et seq.

Hebtas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq.

HsBYAS, Saggio, pp. 105, 106 ; and Toba Abipona, p. 105.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 450.

MABTI5 DoBBizHOFPEB, Presbjter et per XVIII annos Paraguariae mission-
arius, Historia de Abiponibus, equestri, bellicosaque Paraguarise natione,locupletata
copiosis barbarum gentium, urbium, fluminum, ferarum, amphibiorum, insectorum,
serpentium prscipuorum, piscium, ayinm, arborum, plantarum, aliarumqueejosdem
proyincisB proprietatum obseryationibus. Vienna, de Kurzbeck, 1784, 3 vols. 8vo.
Translated into —

a. Oerman:

M. DoBBiZHOFFEB, G-eschichte der Abiponen (by Professor Kreil). Wten^
1784, 3 vols. 8vo.

b. UnglUh:

An Account of the Abipones, an Equestrian People of Paraguay. From
the Latin of Mabtih Dobbizhopteb, eighteen years a missionary in that
country (by Miss Coleridge). London, Murray, 1822, 3 vols. 8vo.

The vocabulary and grammar to be found in Vol. II, p. 161 et seq. of the
Latin edition.

Mithridates, Vol. IIX, pp. 478, 497, 505, 606.

OBAMMABS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
M. DOBBIZHOPPEB, 1. c, Vol. II, p. 161 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 498—501.
A. D'Obbigny, L' Homme Am6ricain, Vol. II, p. 117.

ACCAWAY.

Indian Tribe of Guyana, on the banks of the Demerara, belongs
to the Caribi-Tamanakan stock.

ACH A6UAS — AOLEOMUTES. 3

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabolary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in the four Indian
Languages of British G-ujana, Accaway. By Will. Hillhouss, in the : Journal of
the Royal Geographical Society of London. London^ 1832, YoL H, pp. 247, 248.
Reprinted, pp. 155, 156, of Vol. V of : R. Montgomery Martin's British Colonial
Library (West Lidies, Vol. II). London^ 1844, 12mo.

Yocabulary of Five Indian Nations in Guyana, Ackoway, in appendix No. Y,
pp. 164, 165 of: F. A. Yan HExmEL, El Dorado. New York, J. Winchester,
1844, 8yo.

Sib Robebt H. Schombuboe, Yocabulary of Eighteen Words, compared with
Eighteen other Guyana Languages and the Lingoa geral, pp. 97, 98 of the : Swansea
Meeting Report of the British Association in 1816. London, Murray, 1849, Svo.

Yocabulary of Eighteen Words (eight not in Schomburgk), compared with
Arawak, Caribisi, and Warau, pp. 297, 298 of : W. H. Bbett, the Indian Tribes of
Guyana. New York^ Rob. Carter and Brothers, 1852, l2mo.

ACHAGUAS.

Wandering Tribe, on the banks of the Middle Orinoco and the
Casanare.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. XII, LI et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. HI, p. 631.

ADAIZE.

On the Red River, near Natchitoclies. Only forty men in 1805.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No.Xni, ]8of the Comparative Yocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305 —
367 of the Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the United States, East of the
Bocky Mountains, etc., by Albebt G-allatin, in Yol. II of the : Archeeologia
Americana. Cambridge University Press^ 1836, 8vo ; and No. D, XIII, pp. 95 —
97, of the Yocabularies in Yol. II of the ; Transactions of the American Ethnolo-
gical Society.

The Adaize words given after MS. notices of Sibley.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 278.

AGLEGMUTES, AGOLEGMUTES.

In Russian America, at the mouth of the rivers Nuschagak and
Naknek. They belong to the Esquimaux. (Tchouktchi Ameri-
cans of Balbi.)

ALEUTANS.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Chromtsohenko's Voyage along the Coast of the Russian Possessions in Ame-
rica — in the : Northern Archives for History, Statistics, and Travels. (In the Rus-
sian language.) St Pe/er«5«r^, 1824, Nos. 11 — 18.

Translated into German in the : Hertha of 1825, Vol. II, pp. 218—221.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, Ko. 859. (Tchouktchi or Agle-
mutes propre, de I'Ue de Nurriwok et de Tile de St. Laurent.)

ALEUTANS.

In Russian America, on the islands between Alyaska and
Kamsehatka. The inhabitants of these islands speak diflferent
dialects.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. BiLLTNOS, Voyages (Russian edition). St Petershurg, 1811, 4to, pp. 121—129.

Martin Sauer, An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to
the Northern Parts of Russia by Commodore Joseph Billings. London^ T. Cadell
and W. Davies, 1802, 4to, pp. 9 — 14 of the appendix. (Appendix No. II, Vocabu-
lary of the Languages of Kamsehatka, the Aleutan Islands, and of Kadiak.)

Vol. II, pp. 296 —303, of the French translation by F. Castera. Paris, 1802,
2 vols. 8vo. Pp. 399 — 406 of the German translation. Berlin^ 1802, 8vo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 340, 341 ; Vol. IV, pp. 251—255.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 858.

Aleutian Abecedarium, s. 1. e. a. St. Petersburg^ 1839 or 1840. Sro.

I. VENiAikiiNOV. Aleutian Vocabulary (Russian). St. Petersburg ^ 1848.

Aleutan Vocabulary (noted "not* in America"), under X 2, p. 130 of the Voca-
bularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Some (18) Aleutian and Kamskadale words compared in Samuel G-. Drake,
the Book of the Indians. 9th edition. Boston, Benjamin B. Mussey, 1845, Svo,
Part I, p. 16.

Twenty-one Esquimaux words compared with Aleutian, pp. 110 — 113 of the
Esquimaux Vocabulary, published by the British Admiralty.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

I. Veniaminov, bpyt Qrammatiki Aleutsko lisjevskago jasikii. St. Peter S'
burg, 1846-8.

Ueber die Sprachen des Russischen Amerika's, nach Veniaminov. Pp. 126 — 143
of Vol. VII of: A. Eeman, ArcHiv fur wissenschaftiche Kunde von Russland.
Berlin, Reiraer, 1819, 8fo.

ALGONQUIN. 5

ALGONQUIN (CHIPPEWAY).

The Algonqmns, as a tribe of the great Algonquin stock, were
once powerful on the northern shores of the lakes and the St.
Lawrence river:

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

New Voyages to North America To which is added a Dictionary of the

Algonkine Language, which is generally spoken in North America. ... By Babon
Lahontan, Lord- Lieutenant of the French colony at Placentia, in Newfoundland.
Done into English — a great part of which never printed in the original. London^
1703, 2 vols. 8vo. Reprinted, London, 1735, 2 vols. 8vo.

Translated, under the inspection of the author, from the French original,
published in the same year under the title : Nouveaux Voyages de M. le U abon
DE Lahontan dans 1' Amerique septentrionale. A la Mayp^ 1703, 8vo ; second
edition, iij^., 1705, 8vo. The second volume bears the title: M^moires de
r Amerique septentrionale, oula suite des Voyages de M. le Baron de Lahon-

TAN avec un petit dictionnaire de la langue du Pays. Tom. II. A

la Haye, 1704, Svo ; second edition, ihid., 1705, Svo. Both volumes under one
title : Noureaux Voyages, etc. A la Haye, Fr^res Honore, 1709, 2 vols. 12mo.
The : Petit Dictionnaire de la Langue des Sauvages Algonkins, s. 1. e. a.,
Svo, in the ; Bibliotheca Heberiana, Vol. VI, p. 72, No. 163, is apparently taken
from a copy of Lahontan's work. The vocabulary is reprinted on pp. 214 —
219, in : Hadb. Relandi, Dissertationes Miscellaneee. Trajecti ad Rhenum^
1706-7, 3 partes, Svo.

The work of Lahontan has been translated also into Oerman and into
Dutch, (Reisen naar America, van Baron Lahontan. Haag, 1739, Svo.)

Hebyas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq.

Hebvas, Aritmetica, p. 114.

Hebvas, Origine, p. 37, Tabb. XLVIII, L, LI et seq.

Hebvas, Saggio, p. 233.

J. Long, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader .... to
which is added .... a Table, showing the Analogy between the Algonkin and
Chippeway Languages. London, printed for the author, sold by Eobson, Debrett,
& Co., 1791, 4to. Algonkin Vocabulary, pp. 185 — 211.
Long's Voyages have been translated into —

a. German, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Hamhurgy 1791, Svo.

b. French, by Billecocq. Paris, an II (1793), Svo.

Examples of the Knisteneaux and Algonquin Tongues, pp. cvii — cxvi of: Alex-
andeb Mackenzie, Esq., Voyages from Montreal on the River St. Lawrence,
through the Continent of North America to the Frozen and Pacific Oceans, in the
years 1789 arid 1793. London, T. Cadell, jun., and W. Daves, (tc, ISOl, 4to.
Reprinted, New York, 1802, Svo ; and Paris, Levrault, 1802, 2 vols. Svo.

6 ALGONQUIN.

Translated into —

a. German. Mamburg^ 1802, 8yo.

b. Frenchy by F. Cast^ra. Paris^ Dentu, 1802, 3 vols. Svo.

The Vocabulary is also printed on pp. 261 — 274 of : Tableau Historique et

Politique du Commerce de PeUeteries dans le Canada avec un Vocabu-

laire par F. Cast^ra. Pom, Dentu, 1807-8.

Smith Babton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 8, pp. 343, 346, 416, 417 (from Lahontan, Smith
Barton, Long, and Mackenzie).

Vocabulary of the Algonquin Langue, pp. 579 — 602 of: Travels through the
Canadas, etc. By Geobge Hebiot, Esq. London^ R. Phillips, 1807, 1 vol. 4to,
pp. xi and 602.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, Ko. 818.

J. Edwabds, Observations on the Language of the Mubhekanew Indians. A
new edition, by J. Pickering. Boston, 1823, 8vo.

Reprinted from : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society,
Vol. X of the second series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823,
8vo, pp. 81—160.

Algonkin words in the Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the
Lenape stock, communicated by Pbofessob Say, pp. 135 — 145.

No. 10 and IV jS of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty- three Nations,
pp. 305—367, and No. IV jS, p. 368, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Sixteen
Tribes, pp. 368—372 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of the : Archseo-
logia Americana.

The " Old Algonquin," after Lahontan ; the " Modern Algonquin," after
Mackenzie. The former partly reprinted under No. IV (2), p. 106 of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.

Affinities of the Satsika or Blackfeet Language with those of the Algonkins,
pp. cxiii, cxiv ; and

Affinities of the Shyenne with Languages of the Algonkin Family, pp. cxiv., cxv
of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Rev. M. Heczeweldeb, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape and
Algonquin. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.

Rev. Fbed. Babaga, Dictionary, etc, (see Chippewa).

A MS. Vocabulary of the Algonquin, in French, written at Michimilimac, in 1740
to 1748, by a Jesuit Missionary (1 vol. folio, pp. 582), is in the possession of
Hugh Ramsay, Esq., of Montreal.

Comparison of the Language of the Ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with
the Algonquin Language (Chippewa, Natic), pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of: School-
cbaet's Indian Tribes of the United States.

ALLENTIAC ^ANDAQUIES.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. HI, part 3, pp. 412, 413.

Note of D. FiOBiLLO to two Algonquin Songs, given by John Dunne, in his
Notices relative to some of the Native TrilJes of North America. Transactions of
the Boyal Irish Academy. Tom. IX, p. 130.

P. E. DiTFONOEAir, M^moire sur le Syst^me Chrammatical des Langues de
quelques Nations Indiennes de TAmferique du Nord. Paris, 1838, 8vo.

H. E. SOHOOLOBAFT, An Essay on the G-rammatical Structure of the Algon-
quin Language, pp. 351 — 442 of Vol. II of the : Indian Tribes of the United States.

H. B. SoHOOLOSAPT, Observations on the Manner of Compounding Words in
the Indian (principally with Algonquin examples), pp. 371 — 381 of. Vol. IV of
the : Indian Tribes of the United States.

ALLENTIAC.

A Chilian language, spoken by the Guarpos Indians of the pro-
vince of Cuio.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Linrs DE Valdiyia, Arte G-rammatica, Vocabulario, Catecismo y Confess
sionario en Lengua Chilena y en las dos Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, que son
las mas generales de la Provincia de Cuio en el reyno de ChUi, y que hablan los
Indios Guarpes y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo.

Bbtjnet, IV, p. 547 — ^who mentions the same author's : Arte de la Lengua de
Chile, published 1606 at Lima — ogives a similar title as the above after Antonio,
II, 67, but dated Lima, 1608, 8vo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
LiTTS DE Valdivia, SCO under Vocabularies.

ANDAQUIES.

Indians of Nueva Granada, territory of Mocoa (formerly depart-
mento del Assuai), between the rivers Caquetsl and Putnmayo.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Andaqui and Spanish Vocabulary, taken in 1854 by the Presbytero Manuel
Mabia AxBis. Pp. 27 — 29 of: Los Indios del Andaqui. Memorias de un yiajero
publicadas por Jose Maria Vergara i Vergara i Eyaristo Delgado. Popayan,
imprenta de la Matricariji, 1855, 16mo, pp. 29.

ANTIS — APINAGES.

ANTIS.

Brazilian Indians on the eastern slope of the Andes.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Antis, du Rovers Oriental des Andes (Echoratos), Yocabulaire, No.
XVI, pp. 290, 291 of Cabtelnait, Vol. V, Appendice.

APACHES.

The great Apache nation roams over the triangular space
included between the puellos of New Mexico, the river Colarado,
and the Gila ; they extend, also, into the State of Chihuahua,
and even farther south. They are related to the great Atna-
pascan family. The Navajos and TiHalenos belong to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Vocabulary — of the Copper Mine Apaches — has been taken by John B.
Babtlett, the United States' Boundary Commissioner.

Vocabularies of the Apache and Micmac Languages. The Apache by Dr. Charles
C. Henry. New Mexico, 1853. Pp. 578—589 of Vol. V of: Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States.

Prop. W. W. Titener, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Apache (from Bartlett's MS. Vocabulary), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Dogrib,
Tacally, Umkwa, Hoopah, and Navajo, pp. 84, 85 of the Export upon the Indians,
added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Boute near the 35th Parallel,
in Vol. II of the : Pacific Bailroad Reports. Washington^ 1855, 4to.

APIACAS.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Arinas.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Apiacas. Vocabulaire, No. VIII, pp. 276 — 278 of Castelnait,
Vol. V, Appendice.

APINAGES.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Tocantins River. Martius
(Catalogue of Indian Tribes, No. 80, h) calls them ApinageSy
and mentions them as a tribe of the Ges or Gez nation, of which
he names nine tribes.

ARAUCANS. 9

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Apinages (Bio Tocantins). 1. Fartie donn^e par le Commandant
du Fort S. Joao das duas Barras, pp. 270, 271. 2. Fartie recueillie dans les
Aldeas du Tocantins, pp. 271—273. Vocabulaire, No. V, pp. 270—273 of
Castblnaxt, Vol. V, Appendice.

ARAUCANS.

The aborigines of ChilL who call themselves Auca, Moluches,
or Chilidugu. They are divided into Pikunche, or Puelche ;
Pehuenche, to which the Auca or Moluches proper belong, and
Huilliche, D^Orbigny distinguishes the sedentary (Araucanian)
and roving (Auca) tribes.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabula Linguae Chiliee, in : Casf. Bablaei, rerum per octennium in Brasilia et
alibi noper gestarum sub preefectura comitis J. Mauritii NassovisD Historia.
Amstelodami, Jean Blaey, 1647, folio. Edit, secunda. Clivis^ 1660, 8yo.
(Vocabula Ghilensia, pp. 479—491.)

German Translation — Barlaei Brasilianisehe Geschicbte, etc. Cleve^ 1659,
8vo.

A View of the Cbilesian Language (Vocabulary), pp. 635—639 of: John
OoiLBY, America, being the latest and most accurate Description of the New
"World, &c. London, printed by the author, 1671, folio.

Vocabulary, after Ellas Hebkmann, p. 629, in : Pr. O. D. (Dapper) Die un-
bekannte neue Welt oder Beschreibung des Welttheils America. Amsterdam^
1673, folio. From this vocabulary the words given by : J. R. Fobsteb, in his
Observations made during a Voyage Bound the World {London^ Eobinson, 1778,
4to), are said to be taken.

De Chilensium lingua et Vocabularium dictionum Chilensium, in : Geo. Marc-

gravii Tractatus Brasiliee .... quibus additi sunt illius et aliorum com-.

mentarii do Brasiliensium et Chilensium indole et lingua ; pp. 288 — 290 of : His-
toria Katuralis Brasiliae (Lugduni JBatavorum et Amstelodami, Fr. Hackius,
1648, folio), which contains the works of Guil. Piso and Geo. Marcgravius,
on the Natural and Medical History of Brazil, published by Johannes de Laet; and
pp. 82 — 34 of: Guil. Piso de Indiee utriusque re Naturali et Medica. Lugduni
Satavoruniy Elzevir, 1655, folio.

Langue du Chili, pp. 535, 536 of Vol. VIII of: Cottbt de Gbbelin, Monde
Primitif. Taris, 1773, 4to.

Hebyas, Origine, pp. 37, 164, 166, and Tabb. LI, LII et seq. (Chilena, Tab.
XLTX.)

c

10 ARAUCANS.

Hebyas, Aritmetica, p. 95.

Hesyas, Vocabulario, p. 161 et seq., 220 (Araucana 6 Chilena).

Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 402 (Comparison of the Araucanian, Greek, and
Latin Languages), 422, 423.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 439.

Wh. Mabsden, Miscellaneous Works. London, 1834, 4to, p. 104.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words. Pp. 162—164 of Vol. I of : A. D'OBBiGmr,
L*Homme Am^ricain.

Vocabulary Araucano and Chileno, pp. 652, 653, of: Hoeatio Kale, Ethnogra-
phy and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Ijea and
Blanchard, 1846, 4to.

Diccionario Chileno y Hispano, compuesto por el E. P. Mis. Andb. Febbes,
&c. Enriquecido de voces i mejorado por el B. P. Er. Hernandez F. Calzada.
Edicion hecha para el servico de las misiones .... bajo la inspeccion del R. P.
Misionero Fr. Miguel Anjel Astraldi. Santiago, imprenta de los Tribiinales,
1846, 8vo, pp. 92.

The Spanish part nnder the title — Diccionario Hispano Chileno, compuesto por
el P. Andbes Febbes. Enriquecido por el P. Hernandez F. Calzada. Edicion
hecha bajo la inspeccion del P. Pr. Miguel A. Astraldi. Santiago, imprenta del
Progreso, 1846, 8vo, pp. 112.

Breve Diccionario de algunas palabras mas usuales (Spanish and Chileno).
Appendix of 29 pp. to: A. Febbes, G-ramatica de la Lengua Chilena, edition by
Calzada and Astraldi. Santiago, 1846, 8vo.

A vocabulary, or specimens of the language of the Pehuenche, may be found in :
Descripcion de la Naturaleza de los Terrenos que se comprenden en los Andes posei-
dos por los Peguenches .... por P. Luis de la Cbuz, Alcala Mayor Provincial del
ilustre Cabildo de la Concepcion de Chile. Primera edicion. Buenos Ay res, imprenta
del estado, 1835, folio. Forms part of the first volume of : Pedro de Angelis,
Coleccion de Obras .... relativos k la Historia de la provincia del Rio de la
Plata. Buenos Agres, 1835-7, 6 vols.

■ See also the works and grammars of Febbes, Valdiyia, Falkneb, Gilii,
MoLiifA, Hayestadt, Vidatibe.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Luis de Valdiyia, Arte y Gramatica general de la Lengua que corre en todo el
Beyno de Chile, con un Vocabulario en la Lengua de Chile. Lima, Fr. Canto,
1606, 8vo.

P. Ain>BES Febbes, e. S. J. Arte de la Lengua general del Reyno de Chil^, con un
Dialogo Chileno Hispano ; y un Vocabulario a que se afiada la Doctrina Christiana
y por fin un Vocabulario Hispano Chileno. Lima, 1765, 4to, pp. 682. Bepnnted:
Adicionada i correjida por el R. P. Fr. Ant. Hernandez Calzada de la Ordea de

ARAUCANS. 11

Francisco. Edicion hecha para el serricio de las misiones por orden del Supremo
Gobiemo i bajo la inspeccion del B. P. Fr. Miguel Anjel Astraldi. SanUoffO,
imprenta de los Tribxmales, 1&46, 8to, pp. 330.

Extracts given by A. Gallatin, pp. 258—264, 277, of VoL 11 of the : Ar-
chseologia Americana.

Thomas Falknee, A Description of Patagonia and the Adjoining Parts of South
America, containing .... an Account of the Language of the Moluches, with a

Grammar and short Vocabulary Hereford, 1774, 4to, maps, pp. 144, The

grammar and vocabulary, pp. 132 — 144.

Translated (extracts only ?) into —

a. German, by Schack Hermann Ewald. Ootha, Ettinger, 1775, Svo.
(Grammar and Yocabularies, pp. 163 — 181.)

b. French f par M. B Geneve. Farts, Dufort, 1787, 2 vols. 24mo,

pp. 160, 135. Eeprinted at Farts, 1788.

c. Spanish, T. Falsines, Descripcion de la Patagonia. Primera edicion
Espanola. Buenos Jyres, imprenta del estado, 1835, folio, pp. vii, 63. Forms
part of Vol. I of the: CcUeccion de Obras y Documentos relativos ^ la
Historia antigua y modema de las provincias del Bio de la Plata, por Pedro
de Angelis. Buenos Ayres, imprenta del estado, 1835-7, 6 vols.

The extract ** of the Patagonians," made by Thos. Pennant, and printed
for him privately at George Allan's Darlington Press (1788, 4to) — which is
also reprinted in the appendix of the : Literary Life of the late Thos. Pen-
nant, by himself, London, 1793, 4to — seems not to contain the above gram-
mar and vocabulary.

(Abbe Vidaitbe ?} Compendio della Storia Geografica Katurale e Civile del
Beyno de Chile. Bologna, 1776, 8vo.

Qerman translation — Kurzgefaszte Geschichte des Kdnigreichs von Chile.
Von C. F. F. Hamhurg, 1782, 8vo, pp. 115—119.

Bebnabdi Hatestadt, e. S. J. Chilidugti sive res Cbilenses vel descriptio status
turn naturalis tum civilis tum moralis regni populique Chilensis, inserta suis locis
perfecta ad Chilensem linguam manuductione. MonasteHi Westphalia, 1777,
2 vols. 8vo, pp. 952, map, and two plates of music.

Divided into seven parts, of which the first is a very ample grammar of
the Chilian tongue, the fourth an ample vocabulary of the same language, with
which the fifth — a Latin vocabulary — corresponds. The author was for
twenty years a Jesuit missionary in Chili.

In Vol. Ill of : Saggio di Storia Americana 6 sia storia naturale civile e sacra
de' regni e delle provincie Spagnuole di terra firma nell' America meridionale.
Descritta dall' Abate Filippo Salvadoee Gilii (Roma, Perego, Erede Salvioni^
1780-84, 4 vols. 8vo), which, under the title of: Dalla Beligione e delle Lingue
degli Orinocchesi e di altri Americani, 1782, contains the linguistic part of
the above work ; a grammar is given, pp. 261 et seq., and a short vocabulary,
p. 383.

Giov. Ign. Molina, Saggio sulla Storia naturale del Chili. Bologna, 1782, 8vo.
Grammar and Vocabulary, pp. 334 — 367. Molina has used two MS. grammars of
Gabeieii Vega and Pieteo Gaeeeta.

12 ARDA — ARRAPAHOES.

, f*'

The work of Molina, followed in 1787 by : Saggio della Storia civile del (Mi
{Bologna, 8vo), was translated into —

a. Spanish, by D. Domingo Jos. de Arquellada Mendoza. Madrid^ 1788^
2 vols, small 4to.

b. French, by M. Graval, M.D. Paris, N^ de la Rochelle, 1787 (or
1789), 8vo.

0. English, with notes and appendix, by an American gentleman. Mid-
dletown, Connecticut, 1808, 2 vols. 8vo. (By WilL Shaler or Rich. Alsop ?).
Eeprinted with notes and appendices, etc. Lotidon, Longman, 1809, 2 vols. 8vo.

The second edition of the original appeared under the title : Saggio dcUa
Storia del Chili. Seconda edizione accresciuta. Bologna, 1810, ^to. Portrait
and maps.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 397—416.

A. D*Oebignt, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. I, p. 399.

ARDA.

According to Alcedo, the Ardas are a tribe of Indians living
between the Rivers Napo and Maranon, in the province of
Quijos, not far from Quito.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Doctrina Christiana, y explicacion de sus misterios en nuestro Idioma Espanol y
en Lengua Arda. Madrid, 1658, 12mo, pp. 28.

The Lord's Prayer in the Arda Language : —

Daygue, mito, etepi, evota, agai, sanctificado, soro, oii vgua, mito me, k
lortome guanuque, oririque, numo, aysague, enumo, agai, oju, mito, vepa,
ve, toe, naueie, ayale, gui, matedo, numo, miu, ayale, a joti rnisi^ erique^
mayaiho, nurebo, vreminoe, oig, vodutinau, vrrenuL Ajnen.

ARRAPAHOES.

Indians on the Kanzas River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. E, VII, pp. 96, 98 of the Yocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

John S. Smith, Vocabulary, pp. 446 — 459 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of
the United States, Vol. II.

Vocabulary, headed Ahnenin, in possession of Gallatin ; collated by Dr. Prichard
and Dr. R. G. Latham. Notice of Arrapaho in Vol. II of: Transactions of American
Ethnological Society, apparently made whilst this Vocabulary was out of the poa-
sessor's hand, as the language is there called Atsina,

ARRAWAKS. 13

ARRAWAKS.

Indians of Guyana, on the banks of the Berbice and Surinam
Rivers. (See J. E. Fabri, Geographisehes Magazin. Dessau and
Leipzig, 1785, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 33—47.)

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Words compared with Yaio and Shebay, pp. 642, 643, of: JoAV. DB Last,
NoYus Orbis seu Description is Indise Occidentalis, libri XYIII. Lugduni
Batavoruniy Elzevir, 1633, folio.

IVench translation, ihid.^ 1640, folio.

Deutscb Arawakisches Woerterbucb, znsammengestellt dnrob Thsophiltts
ScHiTMANii^ (between 1748 and 1755) . MS. in possession of the Moravian com-
xniinity at Paramaribo.

Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. IH, pp. 697, 698.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLT, No. 585.

Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. London, 1832, 8vo.
Vol. II, pp. 247, 248 : Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in
the four Indian Languages of British Guyana, Arawaak, etc., by William Hill-
house, Esq., Surveyor. B^printed in Vol. V of : B. Montgomery Martin's British
Colonial Library (West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12rao, pp. 155, 156.

Table comparing Twelve Words of the Arrowack, Atovay, Maypure, Moxos, and
Quichua. Appendix VI, p. 166, of: J. A. Van Heuyel's El Dorado. New Yorh^
J. Winchester, 1844, 8vo.

Arrawak Numerals, p. 30 of : Bebnan's Missionary Labours in British Guyana.
London, 1847, 8vo.

A Dictionary, Arrowack and German — Ajrowakisch Deutsches WSrterbuch.
Vermehrt, 1803, durch Theodoe Schultz, in 1 vol. of 622 pp., 4to — is de-
posited in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.

Sib Bobebt H. ScHOMSUBas:, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Arawaak
Words, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the : Beport of
the British Association. Swansea, 1848, 8vo.

Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Warau, Caribisi, and Accaway,
pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. Bbett's Indian Tribes of Guyana. New York, 1852, 12mo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

C. QiTANDT, Moravian Missionary among the Arrawacks, from 1769 to 1780,
Nachricht von Suriname und seinen Eiuwolmern, sonderlioh den Arawaken,

Warauen und Karaiben und von der Sprache der Arawaken, von der

G-ewfichsen und Thieren des Landes, und Geschaften der dortigen Missionarien.
Goerlitz, s. a. (1807), 8vo. With map and two plates.

1 4 ATHAPASCA ATNA^S.

MithridatcB, Vol. HI, pp. 666—674.

H. C. FocKE, Jets over da Arrowakken en bunne taal, pp. 42 — 53 of: West-Indie;
Bijdragen tot de Bevordering ran liet Kennb der Nederlandsch West-Indisdw
Kolonien. Vol. I. Haarlem^ 1855, 8vo.

Deutsche Arawakkische Spracblchre, zusammengestellt durch Thsophilub
Schumann, Missionair zu Klosterbergen (between 1748 and 1755). MS. in
possession of the Moravian community at Paramaribo.

Grammatikalische Satze von der Arawakischen Sprache von Theodos Sohitltz.
MS. in 12mo, pp. 173.

Deposited by the author in the Library of the American Philosophioal
Society at Philadelphia.

ATHAPASCA, ATHABASCA, TINNE, DTINNE.

This great family of nations, to which the Kenaize are nearly
related, occupies the whole of the northern limits of North
America, together with the Eskimos. The principal nations
belonging to the Athapasca family are the ChepewyanSy TahkaUy
Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatskanas, and TJmpquas. The
Navajos and Ticorillas seem to belong to the same stock.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Phrases and Ghrammatical Forms (Chippewyan firom Dir Ponceau's collection),
pp. 215, 216, of Yol. II of the : Archaologia Americana.

Vocabulary (Tacullies, Cheppeyans, Sussees), ihid.^ pp. 305 — 367.

J. C. E. BusCHMANN, Ubcr die Verwandschaft der Kinai-idiome mit dem grossen
Athapaskischen Sprachstamme (mit Worttafel) , pp. 231 — 236 of the ; Monatsbe-
richte der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1854.

J. C. E. BuscHMANN, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm. Berlin^ F. Diimmler,
1856, 4to, pp. 149 — 319. (From : Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-Historischen
Klasse der KSniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1855.) Contains : Wort-
Tcrzeichniss der athapaskischen Sprachen, pp. 174 — 222 j and : Grosses Wort-
▼erzeichniss des athapaskischen Sprachstammes oder der Kinai- athapaskischen
Sprachen (compared with Koloschian), pp. 223 — 320.

ATNA'S.

On the Atna, or Copper River, in Russian America.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Some (1 1) "Words compared with Ugalenze and Kolosch, p. 99 of Vol. I of : K. E.
TON Bas, and Gb. yon HEL]knsiiSEN, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Bussischen Beiohs

J

ATNAH ATTAKAPAS. 15

iind der angraenzenden Laender Asiens. St. Petersburg ^ Press of the Academy,
1839, 8vo.

ATNAH, OR KINN INDIANS.

Chin Indians (Shoushwap, Flat-head). On the Caledonia River,
west of the Rocky Mountains.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Pp. 257, 258 of: Alexandeb Mackenzie's Voyages from Montreal to the
Pacific Ocean, &c. London^ 1801, 4to.

And p. 418 of the Oerman translation of the same. Published at Hamburg^
1802, 8vo. Reprinted in A. Gkllatin's Synopsis, Yol. II of the : Archseologia
Americana, p. 378, under XXIII (58). Also Yol. II of the : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vocabularies I, XXIII, p. 118. And
partly in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 216.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 773.

Atnah and Noosdalum Words compared, p. 157 of R. Q-. Latham's Languages
of the Oregon Territory. Pp. 154 — 166 of Vol. I of the : Journal of the Ethno-
logical Society of London. Mdinhurgh^ 1848, 8vo.

Atna, or Shoushwap Vocabulary in J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North
American Indian Languages — Kutani, Flathead, Okanagan, Atna, pp. 199 — 206
of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. Xom^on, 1850.

Flathead (as dialect of Atnah) Vocabulary, ibid.

Okanagan (as dialect of Atnah) Vocabulary, ibid.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapaskan and Ejnai (among them the Atnah)
lianguages, pp. 269 — 318 of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstanmi. BerUn^
1856, 4to.

ATTAKAPAS, OTAEA.PA.

Indians of Louisiana.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. XV, 50 of: Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305 —
367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis in Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana ; and in
D, XV, pp. 95, 97 of Vol. 11 of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.

J. S. Vatbb, Analekten der Sprachenkuud6. Leipzig, 1821, 8vo, No. 2, pp. 63 — 72,

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 758.

Vocabulary of the Atacapas, by Maetin Dubalde. MS. in the Library of
the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.

An Attakapa Vocabulary has been collected by John R. Babtlbtt, United
States Boundary Commissioner.

16 ATURB — ^AYMARA.

ATURE.

Indians of Venezuela, speaking the Saliva language; now
nearly extinguished.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. S. GnJi, Saggio di Storia Americana. Boma, 1780 — 1784, Vol. Ill, Sto.

AYMARA.

Indians of Bolivia, the north-westerly provinces of the Argentine
Republic, and of Southern Peru. The Aymara language bears
a close resemblance to the Quichua ; many words are the same
in both languages, and their grammatical construction is likewise
very similar. Of the various dialects of the Aymara language
spoken by the Kanchts, Kasnas, KollaguaSy Karankas, Charcas,
PacasaSy and Lupakas, the two latter are the most cultivated.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Lttdoyico Bebtonio, Yocabulario en la Lengua Aymara. Impresso en la casa
de la Compania de Jesus en Juli Puehlo, en la Proyincia de Chucuito, por
Francisco del Canto, 1612, 4to.

Wolfgang Bayeb, Oratio Aymara cum versione Latina (at continuatione).
In : G-. Q-. von Murr, Journal fur Kunst und Litteratur. Niirnherg (1775 —
1789, 17 vols. 8to), Vol. I, pp. 112—121 ; Yol. II, pp. 277—334 ; and
Yol. Ill, .pp. 55 — 104. Wolfgang Bayer was a Jesuit missionary among the
Aymaras of southern Peru.

Hebyas, Origine, pp. 37, 177, and Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.

HsBTAS, Aritmetica, pp. 101, 102.

Hbbtas, Saggio, pp. 89, 90.

Hervas, Yocabulario, pp. 161 et seq. ^

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 2, pp. 537, 538, 647.

Bausi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 460.

Yocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Yol. I of : A. D'Okbigky,
L*Homme Am^icain.

GRAMMARS AKD GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. LxTDOTico BsBToyio, Arte y G-rammatica copiosa de la Lengua Aymara.
Bomcty Zannetti, 1608, 8vo. New edition, enlarged (by D. de Gualdo ?).

LuD. BsBTONio, Arte de la Lengua Aymara, oon una sylva de plirases
de la misma lengua, y su declaracion en romance. Impressa en la oasa de Im

BANIWA BATEM-DA-KAI-EE. 1 7

Compania de Jesus en JuU Pueblo, en la Provincia de Chucuyio, por Fran-
cisco del Canto, 1612, 4to, pp. X, 1618.

Bbuket, VoL I, p. 305, mentions : Libro de la vida y milagros de nuestro
Sefior Jesu Christo, en la Lengua Ajmara y romance. Impressa en la casa
de la Compania de Jesus, etc., 1612, 4to.

P. LuDOYico BsBTOino, Arte Breve de la Lengua Aymara, para introduction
del arte grande de la misma lengua. Soma, 1603, 8to.

P. Diego de Tobbes Ettbio, Arte de la Lengua Aymara. Lima, 1616, Svo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 535—546.

A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 320 — 323.

BANIWA.

Indians on the Amazon and the Rio Negro. Wallace names
Baniwas, of the Rio Isauna^ of Tomo-Maroa, and of Javita :
of whom the first two speak kindred languages ; the third,
however, a language totally diflerent from the others. Martius
(VII, 233) calls them Manibas, Banibas, and Mantvas.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary (of ninety-eight words), pp. 521—541 of: Alfbed R. Wallace, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. Londoii, Beeve & Co.,
1853, Svo.

BARRE.

Indians on the Amazon. They speak a language similar to that
of the Baniwas of Isanno and Tomo-Maroa^ and also of the
Uainambuas and Tariana,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary (of ninety-eight words), pp. 621 — 541 of: Alfbed R. Wallace, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. London, Beeve & Co.,
1853, Svo.

BATEM-DA-KAI-EE.

Indians of the north-western part of California, on the head of
Eel River. The name above given is that of the valley in
vrhich this and other bands reside.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Vocabulary, by George Qibbs, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp.
434—440.

18 BAYANO — BETOI.

BAYANO.

Indians of the Isthmus of Panama, about the River Chepo.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Bebthold Sesmann, Vocabulary in his article on the Aborigines of the IsthmoB
of Panama. Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1,
pp. 179—181.

BEAVER INDIANS.

In the Hudson's Bay territory.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary, pp. 323—328 of Vol. II of: John M*Lean*s Notes of Twenty-five
Years* Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, Bentley, 1819. 2 yols. 12mo.

Duphoate Vocabulary in J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North American
Indian Languages — Beaver, I and II ; Chipewyan, I and II ; Sikanni dialect of
New Caledonia, pp. 192 — 198 of Proceedings of : Philological Society, VoL IV.
London, 1850.

BETHUCK.

Language of an extinct tribe of Indians of the Algonkin stock.
Dr. R. G. Latham had a vocabulary lent to him by Dr. King,
Secretary of the Ethnological Society, but without an account
of its origin. From internal evidence he satisfied himself that
it was Bethuck, i. e., aboriginal — not Eskimo, nor yet Micmac,
but a branch of the Algonkin, per se. See Report of British
Association for the Advancement of Science — Southampton
meeting.

BETOI.

On the River Cassanare, in New Granada, of the same stock as
the Ele and Yaruro Indians. The Situga and Airiko speak
dialects of the Betoi.

«

WORDS AND V0CABULAR1K8.

Hesyas, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
Heevas, Saggio, p. 109.
Hebvas, Origine, Tab. XLIX.

1

BLACKFEET. 19

Heevas, Aritmetica, p. 106.
Mithridates, Vol. HI, part 2, pp. 645, 650.
Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI. No. 647.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. Joseph Guicilla gave his grammatical notes on the Betoja language to his
successor, P. Jos. Padilla. Hervas prevailed upon Padilla, when retired from his
missionary labours, to write down what he knew of the grammatical structure
of this language. Adelung has used the letter of Padilla to Hervas.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill,, part 2, pp. 640—647.

BLACKFEET, SATSIKAA.

Pieds fioirs / Blood or Paegan Indians of the Algonkin stock ;
the most powerful tribe of the north-western prairies on the
sources of the Missouri and the Rocky Mountains. They are
divided into — 1. Satsikaa^ or Blackfeet proper. 2. Kahna, or
Blood Indians, '^ Indiens du Sang.^' 3. Piekans, Paegans, Pica-
neux. 4. Small Robes,

WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES.

Edw. TTmpeeville, The Present State of Hudson's Bay. Containing .... a
specimen of five IndiaU languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8vo. Table to p. 202.
German translation — Mit Erauterungen, von E, A. W. Zimmermann.
Selmstedtj Fleckeisen, 1791, 8vo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254 (from Umfeeville).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 770. Paegan ; Pied noir.

No. XXI, 56 (p. 373) of the Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in
Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana (from Umpbeyille).

Beise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. Coblentz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols.
4to. Vol. I, pp. 584 et seq. ; Vol. II, pp. 480 — 486.

Blackfeet Vocabulary, Appendix, pp. 262 — 265 to Vol. II of: Geo. Catlin,
Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North American
Indians. London, 1841, 2 vols. 8vo.

Blackfeet Vocabulary (and Lord's Prayer), on the last two pages of the last two
leaves of: Oregon Missions and Travels over the Rocky Mountains, 1845-6,
by Eatheb p. J. de Smet, e. S. J. New York, Edw. Dunigan, 1847, 12mo.
pp. 408, 4to.

Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, No. 13, Z. Satsikaa
(Blackfeet), pp. 569—629 of: Horatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United
States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, and

20 BODEGA — BRAZILIANS.

C. IV, pp. 88, 90, 92, 94, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society. ^_

Aflinities of the Satsika or Blackfeet Language with those of the Mgtftjsfi^
pp. CXIII, CXIV of Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Satsika, or Blackfeet Vocabulary (Upper Missouri), by J. B. Monobovie, on
pp. 494—505 of Vol.11 of: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United States.
Miscellaneous Tocabularies.

J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North- American Indian Languages — ^Black-
foot I and II — Nipissing, Shawnee, Brunswick. Pp. 102 — 1 13 of : Proceedings^of
the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850. Duplicate Vocabulary of
Blackfoot. The words of forms of speech were collected partly by Howse himself
and partly by such missionary and commercial agents as were known to have
the requisite opportunities ; the same list of names and phrases being transmitted
to all.

BODEGA.

Indians of California, who call themselves Olamentke.

WOKDS AND VOCABULAKIES.

KosTEOMiTONOV, Woerter aus zwei Sprachen Neucalifomiens (Bodega and Sever-
novzi), pp. 234 — 254 of Vol. I of: K. v. Bae und Ge. v. Helmeesen, Beitrage
Zur Kenutniss des russischen Beichs und der angr&nzenden Lander Asiens. St,
Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. (Russian, German, and Bodega. Printed in Bussian type.)

BRAZILIANS,

Or rather, Tupis. The diflferent tribes of the Tupis are named,
and a map of the wanderings and extension of this once
numerous and mighty people given, in: Dr. C. F. Ph. von
Martius, Abhandlung von dem Rechtszustande unter den Ur-
einwohnern Brasiliens. Munchen, F. Fleischer, 1832, 4to, map^
pp. 86, 20. (The Appendix gives, on 20 pp., a view of the
different Indian peoples, tribes, and hordes of Brazil.) Their
language was called " lingoa geraP^ (general language) by the
Portuguese, and eight different dialects of this language are
enumerated by Vater, viz., the dialects of the — 1. Tappen, in
the province of Rio Grande do Sul. 2. Petiguaren (anthropo-
phagi), in the provinces of Paraiba and Ceara. 3. Tupmaba,
on the shores of the Rio Real, in the province of Sergipe.
4. Kdheteriy on the shores of the river S. Francisco, in the

1

BRAZILIANS. 21

province of Pernambuco. 5. Tupmmqums (the people first
met with by Cabral), in the interior and on the coast of the
province of Espiritu Sancto, at Porto Segnro and Ilheos.

6. TapigucBy on the sea-coast from St. Paolo to Pernambuco.

7. Tummimioi and Tamoice, near Rio Janeiro. 8. Tupinambas,
the largest of the tribes, in the provinces of Maranhao and
Gran Para, speaking the most generally diffused dialect.

Martius divides the Tupis into north, south, west, east, and
central Tupis, and names, besides this people, 245 different larger
or smaller tribes living within the Brazilian empire.

Adelung calls the Tupis the North Guarany, and considers
their language as a part of the Guarany language.

words and vocabularies.

" Aucans Mots des Feuples de l*Isle de Brezil.*' On four pages at the end of
Ant. Fabre's Extract of the MS. of Pigafetta*s Voyage, in the Ambrosian
library of Milan. This extract bears the title : Le Voyage et Navigation, faict
par les Espaignoles es isles de MoUucques, des isles qiulz ont trouve au diet voyage,
des roys dicelles, etc. Parity Simon de Colines, s. a., small 8vo. Black letter
(see BauNET, Vol. Ill, p. 743).

The manuscript of Pigafetta was published in 1800, by Dr. Charles
Amoretti : Frimo Viaggio intomo al globo terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della
navigasione alle Indie orientali per la via d'occidente, fatta sulla squadra del
Capitano Maggalianes negfl anni 1519— 1522, del Cavaliero Antonio Fig a-
PETTA. Milano, 1800, 4to.

JFrench translation — Fremier Voyage autour du Monde par le Chevalier
Figafetta, sur Tescadre de Magellan, pendant les ann^es 1519 — 1522 j suivi
de I'extrait du traite de navigation du m^me auteur et d'une notice sur le
Chevalier Martin Behaim, avec la description de son globe terrestre. Paris,
Jansen, 1801, 8vo, pp. 64, 415, maps and plates (the vocabulary, p. 241).

The extract of Fabre has been translated into Italian, and pubUshed in the
rare collection — II Viaggio fatto dagli Spagniuoli atomo al mondo, s. 1. 1536,
4td (Brxtnet, Vol. IV,.p. 603— before : P'^enezia, 1534, 4to?), wherein it is
printed on the last leaf. It is also reprinted in the first volume of Giam-
battista Kamusio Kaccolta di Navigazioni e Viaggi. Venezia, G-iunti, 1550,
1559, 1556, 3 vols, folio, and often afterwards.

Brazilian words and a conversation in Brazilian are given by: Jean de Lery,
Histoire d'un Voyage fait en la Terre du Bresil, dite Am^rique ; contenant
.... les moeurs et fa^jons de vivre ^tranges des sauvages Amferiquains, avec un
coUoque de leurlangue, s. 1. (d laRochelle). Frinted by Anthony Chuppin, 1578,
8vo, engravings. Reprinted very often. Translated also into Latin, English,
Dutch) and German.

The Brazilian words and conversation are reprinted in the : Allgemeine

22 BRAZILIANS.

Historie der Beisen zu Wasser und zu Lande. Amaterddm, 1747 — 1774:
21 vols. 4to, maps, plates, in Vol. XVI, pp. 263 et seq.

Words from Lery and from Dutch notices, page 599, of: Joan db Last, Novus
orbb seu descriptionis Indiee occidentalis, Libri XVIII. Lugduni JBatavorum,
Elzevir, 1633, foUo.

Translated into French {Ley den, Elzevir, 1640, foL), and Dutch {Leyden^
Elzevir, 1644, folio).

Dictionariolum nominum et verborom lingiue Brasiliensis maxima conmnis
(collected by Emaxubl db Mobaes), cap. XI of : 1. G-eorgii Marggravii de
Leibstad, Tractatus topograpbicus et meteorologicus Brasilise, cum eclipsi solan,
quibus additi sunt illius et aliorum commentarii do Brasiliensium et Cbilensium
Indole et lingua — in : Historia Naturalis BrasilisB (edid. Joan de Laet). lAiydwd
and Anistelodami, F. Hackius, 1648, folio, pp. 276 et seq. And in: G. Fisonis De
Indiffi utriusque re naturali et medica, Libb. XIV. Lugduni Batavum, Elzevir,
658, fol., pp. 22 — 24. 2. O. Dapper, Die unbekannte neuwe welt. Amsterdami,
1673, fol., p. 412. (In Dutch, translated by Amoldus Montanus : De nieuwe en
onbekende weareld. Amsterdam, 1671, folio). 3. John Ogil by, America. London,
1671, see pp. 485 — 487. 4. Had. Kelandi, Dissertationes miscellanefle. Trajecti
ad Rhenum, 1706, 1707, 3 vols. 8vo, Vol. Ill, p. 173.

Brazilian words are given by Ans. Eckart, in his Additions to : Pedro Cudenas,
Description of Brazil, in: Chrietoph Gottlieb von Murr, Beisen einiger Mis-,
sionarien der Geselhchaft Jesu in America. Nwrnherg, Zeh, 1785, 8vo, pp. 614,
map and plates, pp. 419 et seq.

Hebvas, Origine, Tab. XLIX et seq.

Hebyas, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Tupi and Brasile volgare.)

Hebvas, Saggio, p. 98. (Tupi.)

Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 450, 451, 458, 460, 603 (from Hervas, Laet^
Moraes, and Eckart).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 492. Brazilien, Lingoa geral,
Tupinamba, Tupi.

Diccionario Fortuguez e Brasiliano ; Obra necessaria aos ministros do altar que
emprehenderem a conversao de tantos milhares de almas que ainda se achao dis-
spersas pelos vastos certoes do Brazil, sem o limie da Fe, e Baptismo, etc. For
# # # primeira parte. Lisboa, 1795, small 4to, pp. 79.

Some Brazilian songs are given in : Relacion de la Real Tragi-comedia con que
los padres de la Compania de Jesus de Lisboa recibieron a Felipe II de Fortugal.
Lisboa, 1620, 4to.

A Glossary of Tupi Words, pp. 629 — 639 of: John LuccoCK, Notes on Rio de
Janeiro and the southern parts of Brazil, taken during a residence of ten years
in that country, from 1808 to 1818. London, printed for Sam, Leigh, 1820, 4to
(some copies have the date altered into 1822), plates, pp. 639.

The author announces at the end of his book, that he is about to publish a

BRAZILIANS. 23

" Grammar and Dictionary of the Tupi Language." These works were never
published. The MSS. are deposited in the Library of the Q^ographical and
Historical Institute at Eio de Janeiro.

Sib Robeet H. Schombueqk, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of
the Lingua geral, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the :
Report of the British Association, Swansea Meeting, 1848. Londotiy 1849, 8vo.

A Vocabulary of the : Langue de Nouros, Idiome de la Lengua geral, given
in : Fbancis de Castelnaxt, Expedition dans les Parties Centrales de TAmerique
du Sud. Paris, A. Bertrand, 1850, 1851, 6 vols. 8vo. Vol. V, Appendix Vo-
cabulary, No. 13, pp. 285, 286.

Vocabulary of the Lingoa geral. Tableau and Remarks on the Vocabularies,
by R. G. Latham. Appendix, pp. 529 — 534 (534 — 536, Comparison of the
Lingua geral with the Tupi, Tupinamba, Mundrucu, Omagua, Guararri, and
pp. 539 — 541, with Languages of Guyana), of : Alpeed R. Wallace, A Narrative
of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro, with Account of the Native Tribes.
London^ Reeve & Co., 1853, pp. viii, 541.

Lista de Voces de la Lengua general del Brasil. Appendix to the MS.
Zeona Dictionary, in the possession of Colonel Joaquin Acosta, of Nueva
Granada.

A MS. " Vocabulario das Linguas Brasilica e Portugueza," on 200 pp.,
together with a " Doutrina e perguntas dos Mysteries principaes de nossa santa
Fe na Lingua Brazila," in Portuguese and Brazilian dialogues, stated to be written
by the Rev. P. Mabcos Antonio about 1750, is in the British Museum,
collection of King George IV, No. 223. (See Fbed. Fbano. de la Figaniebe,
Catalogo dos Manuscriptos Portuguezes existentes do Museu Britannico. Lisboay
imprenta nacional, 1853, 12mo, pp. 184, 185.)

Vocabulario Brazileiro para servir de Complemento dos Diccionarios da Lingua
Portugueza, por Braz da Costa Rubim. Mio de Janeiro^ 1853, 1 vol. 8vo.

Vocabulario Portuguez e Brazileiro, por Sr. Leonardo da Silveira das Dores
Castello Branco. MS. in the Library of tl e Historical and Geographical Institute
of Rio de Janeiro.

Vocabulario da Lingua geral, usada hoje em dia no Altos Amazonas. Por Sb.
Bb. Antonio Gon^alves Dias. Pp. 553 — 576 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de
Janeiro, Tom. XVII.

Words in : Informa^ao dps Casamentos dos Indios do Brazil* pelo Padbe
Jose de Anohieta, pp. 254 — 263 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro.
Second series, Tom. I, No. 2.

Forty-three Words of the Language spoken by the Indians das Brenhas de Mu-
cury, pp. 451, 452 of : Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. I,
No. 4.

Paraviana Words, pp. 252 — 256 of: Rela9ao Geographica-Historica do Rio
Branco da America Portugueza. Composta pelo Bachabel Fban Cisco Xayieb
Bibeibo db Samfala, in : Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series,
Tom. VI, No. 18.

2^1* BRAZILIANS.

Dimonario ds Lingua geral dos Indios do Brazil ; reimpresso e angmentado
com dirertot Yocabularios e offerccido a S. M. Imperial, por JoAO JoaQitik da
HiLTA G17IMARE8. Bahia, 1854, pp. 106, 8vo.

Diccionario Portuguez e Brazileiro, contendo o Yocabulario dos Indigenas
Cajuafl. Por Sr. Babao i>b Antonina. MS. in the Library of the Hiatorical
and Geographical Institute of Bio de Janeiro.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

JoflX DB AvoniBTA, Arte de Grammatica da Lingoa mab usada na Costa do
BnuiiL Coimbra^ 1595, imall Bvo., pp. 120.

Estracti therefrom are given in Chapter X of the : Tractatus Brasilia of
MarggraviuH, in : De Lingua Brasiliensium e Grammatica P. Jos. de Anchieta,
e. f, J., and in Bolandus, in their above-mentioned works.

A Brazilian Grammar, Yocabularj, and Catechism, by Emanttel Yega, a Mis-
sionary, is mentioned by Adelung, in his Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 2, p. 442,
as written but not printed,

P. Lviz FiotTEiBA, Natural de Almodovar, Arte da Grammatica da Lingua
do Brasil. Lisboa, 1681, 8vo. Beprinted by Miguel Deslandea. Idshoa, 1687,
Svo, and .... 4th edition. Lishoa, 1795, small 4to.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 2, pp. 422—446, 452—457.

Langue Br^silienne, Monumens de la Linguistique du Brasil composes au Xvii
8i5cle. Note 6, pp. 855 — 359, to : Une F^te Br^silienne c^l^r^e k Bouen, 1550
(Article do Vhudivaw Denib), in the : Bulletin du Bibliophile, 9me s^rie, Nos.
10, 11, 12. JParis, Techener, 1849, 8vo, pp. 355—359.

See also the 9th note to the same article : La Chanson de Montaigne, Po^ie
dos Tupinambas. Drames des Missionaires, vers Tupiques compost par
eux, pp. 864—379. Also printed separately. Paris, 1850. And : Parecer
da Commissao da Historia sobre o opusculo : Une F6te Brfezilienne, etc.,
pp. 443—449, Yol. XI Y of: Bevista Trimensal de Bio de Janeiro.

Grammatica da Lingua gcral dos Indios do Brazil, pelo Padre Lviz Figusiba,
reimprossa por Joao Joaquim da Silva Guimares. Bahia, 1851, 1 toI. Syo.

Memoria sobre a necesidade do Estudo e Ensino das Lenguas Indigenas do
Brazil Por Feanoisoo Adolpho de Yabnhagen. MS. in the Library of the
Historical and Geographical Institute of Bio de Janeiro.

Remarks on the Language of the Tupis, in Section IX of: Historia geral do
Brazil, por Fbanoisoo Adolpho db Yabnhagen. Yol. I. Rio de Janeiro,
Laemmert, 1856, 8?o.

Bemarks on the Lingua geral and on Tupinamba, in Section YIII of: Historia
geral do Brazil, por Fbancisco Adolpho db Yaenhagen.. Yol. I. Bio de Janeiro,
Laemmert, 1856, Syo.

Ethnographia Indigena, Linguas, Emigra^oes, e ArcheBologia. Por Sr. F. A. de
Yabnhagen. Pp. 366 — 376 of: Beyista Trimensal do Bio de Janeiro. Second
aeries, Tom. Y, No. 15.

BUGBE — CADDOES. 25

Collec^ao de Etymologias Brazilicas, pop Pb. Fbanoisoo DOS Peazebes
Mabanhao. Pp. 69 — 80 of : Beyista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series,
Tom. I, No. 1.

BUGRE.

Brazilian Indians. Balbi, who calls them Bougres, says that
they are cannibals.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulario da Lingoa Bugre (in Portuguese and Bugre), pp. 60— -77 of Vol.
XV of: Beyista do Instituto Historico e Gkographico do BrazU. JBto de Janeiro^
typ. Laemmert, 1852, 8to.

CABAROS.

Brazilian Indians of the Aldeas on the River Tocantins.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Gabaros (Aldeas du Tocantins). Yocabulaire, No. YI, pp. 273, 274
of: CASTBLNAir, VoL V 5 Appendice.

CADDOES. CADODAQUIOUS.

Indians on one of the branches of Red River. Their language
is spoken by the Nandakoes^ Nabadaches, and Inies or Tachies,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 8, p. 277.

No. 61, XYI, of the Comparative Yocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 805—

367, and Supplementary Yocabulary of Caddo (six languages),

pp. 381—397, by Geobgb Gbay. Also, "Conjunctions," p. 272, and "Select
Sentences," in Caddo, pp. 409, 411, 413 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, in Yol. II
of the : Archffiologia Americana.

Part of XYI, 51, reprmted under E, XYI, pp. 96—98 of the Yocabularies
in Yol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Captain B. B. Maboy, ir.S.A. Specimen of the Caddo and Witchita
Iianguages, pp. 709—712 of Yol. Y of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.

Caddo Yocabulary of Twenty Words, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple,
p. 70 of the Beport upon the Indian Tribes, added to his Beport on the Boute
near the 35th Parallel, in YoL II of the : Pacific Baiboad Beports. WasUngton,
1855, 4to.

E

26 CAUITA — CALIFORNIANS.

CAHITA.

In the northern parts of Mexico.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Nouyelles Annales des Voyages. Farisy 1841, 8vo. Vol. IV, pp. 262 — ^287.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Leogua Cahita. Mexico^ 1737, 12mo.

CAHUILLOS. CA-WI-OS.

Californian Indians residing near the Pacific, between the
sources of the San Gabriel and Santa Anna.

Cahuillo Vocabulary, taken by LiETTTENAirT A. W. Whipple, pp. 71 — ^76 of
the Report upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant Whipple, Thomas Ewbank,
and Professor W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the
route near the d5th parallel, in Vol. 11 of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Wask-
ingtotiy 1855, 4to, and

Twenty-eight Cahuillo Words compared 'with Kechi, Netela, and Kizh. Ihid.^
p. 77.

CALIPORNIANS

In general. See—

R. G^. Latham on the Languages of New Califomia, pp. 72—86 of VoL VI of:
Proceedings of the Philological Society, London^ 1850 ; G. Gibbs' Obseryations
on some of the Indian Dialects of Northern California, pp. 420—423 of VoL III of:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. See also, pp. 99 — 177 of the
same Tolume, the Journal of the Expedition of Colonel Redick M'Kee, United
States Indian Agent, through North-western Califomia, performed in the summer
and fall, 1851, by Geob^e Gibbs.

The United States Boundary Commissioner, John R. Bastlett, has taken the
following Yocabularies in Califomia : —

Deguino or Comeya^ at San Diego.

KecM, Mission of San Luis Rey.

Ban Luis Obispo, Mission of same name.

SL*hana.,.\

Tehama,,,

Coluz ^in the Country watered by the Sacramento Riyer.

Noana ..

IHggers. .

Diggers of Napa Valley.

Makaw of Upper Califomia.

CAMACANS — CANADA. 27

In a letter, he says; "The name of Diggers is applied to all the California
Indians bj the people (whites) generally, and it is difficult to get the real names of
the tribes. Half the time the natives will give one the name of their chief or
captain.'* " '

Languages of California, by Adam Johnson. Pp. 406 — 415 of Vol. IV of:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, gives vocabularies and words
of the following tribes : — Tuolumne tribes, pp. 407 — 413. Co-co-noofu on Mercedes
Biver, p. 413. Indians at King's Kiver and about Tulare Lake, pp. 413, 414.
Indians near to Mag Beading, on the upper waters of the Sacramento B^ver,
pp. 414, 415.

CAMACANS.

Camacaes MongoyoZy or Monxocds Indians of the Capitania de
Bahia^ Brazil (Martius, No. 11).

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Beise des Pbinzen Maxikilianzu Wied Neuwied nach Brasilien. Ftan^furt
am Main, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, p. 327—330.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 505, 507 (Oamacans^ Spix-
Martius).

CANADA.

Early travellers give words- of the Indian tribes inhabiting
Canada under the name of Kanadians.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

SahtteIi de Chahplain, Les Yojages de la Nouvelle France occidentale, dite

Canada, flutes par I)e Champlain et toutes les decouvertes qu'il a faites

en ce pays depuis 1603 jusqu'au 1629, ensemble la relation de tout ce qui s'est
pass^ & la Nouvellc France en 1631. Paris, S. Lemure, Collet, X632, 4to.

Contains the translations of : F. Ladeshe's Doctrine Chretienne, in Canadian^
by BreboBuf ; and of Prayers, by Masse. Brebosufs translation had been
printed at Rouen, 1610, 8vo.

Vater states that the edition — Paris, Collet, 1627, 8va — contains the same
linguistic pieces.

Hebvas, Yocabulario Foliglotto, pp. 239, 240 (numerals).

Smith Babtok, New Views, &c. — Comparative Vocabularies.

Langues du Canada, pp. 499—504 of Vol. VIII of: Cottet de Gebelin,
Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Vocabularies taken from Sagard, Lahontan,
liafiteau, and Louis Vincent. Reprinted, pp. 313 — 319 of: J. B. Scherer's Re-
cherches Historiques et G^ographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet,
1777, 12mo.

28 CANISCHANA— CARIB8.

CANISCHANA.

Warlike tribe of the Moxos stocky on the rivers Mamore and
Maehupo^ in Bolivia.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
A. D*Obbigny, L'Homme Am^rieain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; II, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D*Obbignt, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, pp. 245, 246.

CARAJAS.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Araguay [Carayas of
Martius, No. 78).

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Langue des Carajas (Rio Araguaj), Vocabulaire, No. 4, pp. 268 — ^270 of: Cas-
TELNAF, Vol. V, Appendice.

CARIBS.

Originally inhabiting the lesser Antilles, they settled, after their
expulsion, on both sides of the Orinoco, particularly in the
Sierra Paryme. There are — 1. Caribs proper ^ who call them-
selves Kartna, Kalina^ or Kalinago ; the Galibis of French
Guyana are the principal tribe ; the Tuapoka and Kunaguara,
on the lower Orinoco, are closely related to the Galibis,
2. Yaoi, on the Island of Trinidad and the opposite shores of
Venezuela. 3. Guachire or Guaiqueries, on the Island of St.
Margarita and around Cumana ; they are the most advanced in
civilization. The Avarigotes, PurugotoSy and Acherigotes are
said to speak the Carib language likewise. Humboldt calls the
Caribs the *^Buchares of the New World.^^ The words used
by the men are often diflFerent from those used by the women.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Veritable Relation de tout ce que s'est fait et pass^ au Voyage que Mons. de
Bretignj fit & TAinerique occidentale. Avec une description des Moeurs et des
Provinces de tous les Sauvages de cette grande partie du Cap de Nord ; un Dic-
tionnaire de la Langue, et un avis tr^s necessaire & tous ceux qui veulent babiter ou

CARIBS. 29

faire habiter oe Fajs-1&, on qui d^sirent d'y ^tablir des Colonies. Le tout fait sur
ces lieux par Paul Botbb, Escuyer, Sieur de Petit Fuy. Faria, 1654, small 8vo.
The " Dictionnaire," pp. 193 et seq.

P. PiEBBE Pellefbat, Belation des Missions des E. P. de la Compagnie de
J6sus dans les Isles et dans la Terre ferme de TAm^rique meridionale. Ayec une
introduction h, la Langue des Galibis, sauvages de la Terre ferme de TAm^rique
m6ridionale. Farts, Cramoisy, 1655, 12mo.

Brunet (Vol. Ill, p. 664) says that the "Introduction is sometimes
found separate from the Belation."

Voyage de la France equinoxiale en Tisle de Cayenne, entrepris par les Francois
en Tannee 1652. Divisee en trois livres. Le premier contient T^tablissement de
la Colonic, son embarquement et sa route jusqu'es k son arriv^ en Tisle de Cayenne.
Le second, ce qui s'est pass^ pendant quinze mois que Ton a demeur^ dans le pays.
Le troisi^me traitte du temperament du pays et de la fertility de la terre et des
moeurs et fa9ons de faire des sauvages de cette contr^ ; avec un dictionnaire de la
langue du mSme pays. Far M. Antoine Biet, Sup^rieur des Prdtres qui ont
pass^ dans le Pays. Farts, Clousier, 1664, 4to.

Adelung, in his Mithridates (III, 684), says that the yocabulary of Biet is,
with a few exceptions, the same as the one given by Boyer.

Histoire naturelle et morale des Isles Antilles de TAm^rique ; enrichie de plu-
sieurs belles figures de raretez le plus considerables que y sont 6crit«s ; avec un
Vocabulaire Caraibe. HoUerdam, A . Leers, 1658, 4to.

This book, which has been several times reprinted and translated, is known
as : M. de Kochevobt's History of the Antilles. Brunet (II, p. 585) names
Louis de Poincy and Cesab de Bochefobt as the authors. Du Tertre,
who, at the same time prepared a history of the Antilles (published afterwards
at Farts, Jolly, 1667 — 1671, 4 vols. 4to), says that General Louis de
Foincy placed his notes and a vocabulary, made by P. Kaimond Bbetok,
in the hands of a young clergyman, M. de Bochefort of Botterdam, who
had been twice in the West Indies. The dedication of the work is signed
" L. DE P.," which Barbier explains as Louis de Foincy.
Beprints —
Seconde Edition : revue et augment6e. Motterdam, 1665, 4to.
Histoire Naturelle des lies Antilles, par M. de Bochefobt. Lyon, 1667,
2 vols. 12mo.

Dernier Edition : augment^e par Tautheur d'un B^cit sur .... la Virginie, le
Harie Land et la Caroline. Rotterdam, 1681, 4to.

Is the edition of 1665, with but a new title and the ** B^cit " annexed on
p. 44.

Translations —
a. ISnglish:
The History of the Caribby Islands, with a Caribbian Vocabulary. Ben«
dered into English by John Davis, of Kidwelly. London, printed for
Thomas Dring and John Starkey, 1666, folio, pp. 8, 351, 10, 5,

Scarce, because a great proportion of the copies was consumed in the
great conflagration of London. The vocabulary, on ten not-numbered
pages, after p. 351.

30 CARIBS.

b. Oerman:
Frankfltrt-oihthe'Mainf 1668, 2 yols. 12mo. Ibid., 1688, 2 vols. 12mo.

c. Dutch :
Botterdam^ 1662, 4to.

Dictionnaire Garaibe-Fran^ois et Frar^ois-Caraibe, mesl^ dc quantit'' 41-'^
remarques historiques pour reclaircissement de la langue, par \g P« ttiOOfOf^
Bbeton, de rOrdre des Fr^res Pr^heurs, Missionnaire. Auxerrey Gillet Bonqatf^ ''
1663, 1664, 1665, 3 tomes in 2 yoIb. 8to.

(Annexed is — forming the volume of 1664 — the same author's: Petit
Catichisme, ou Sommaire des trois premieres parties de la doctrine chr^-
tienne, traduit du Francois en la Langue des Caraibes Insulaires. Auxerre^
Gilles Bouquet, 1664, 8vo.)

New titles. Ihid., 1665, 1666, 2 vols. 8vo.

N.B. Temaux Compans, in his : Biblioth^que Am^ricaine {ParU^ A.
Bertrand, 1837-8), No. 830, p. 143, names a : Dictionnaire Caraibe-Fran9aifl,
par le Pebe Leclebcq — Sennes, 1665— which must be a mistake.

Dictionnaire Q-alibi, pr^sente sous deux formes — I. Commen^ant par le mot
Fran9oi8 ; II. Commen^ant par le mot Qalibi ; pr^^d^ d'un Essai de G-rammaire
par M. D. L. S. (De la Sauvage). Paris, Banche, 1763, 8vo.

Good compilation from the above dictionaries. Makes part of: M. Di
Psefontaine, Maison rustique, h Tusage des habitants de la partie de la
Fnmce ^quinoxiale connue sous le nom de Cayenne.

Langues des Caribes et des Qalibis, pp. 505— 514 of Vol. VIII of : Cotjbt di
Gebelin, Monde Primitif. PariSf 1772, 4to. From Eochefort and P. Breton.
Beprint, pp. 319 — 327 of: J. B. Schebeb, Eecherches Historiques et G^gra-
phiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris^ Brunet, 1777, 12mo.

Vocabulaire Fran^ais et Galibi, k Vusage de ceux qui voyagent dans les contr^es
de la Guyane et k Cayenne, pp. 371 — 400 of: Voyage k la Guyane et k Cayenne,
fait en 1789 et dans les ann^es suivantes, par L. M. B., Armateur. Paris^ Tom.
VI (1798), 8vo, pp. 400.

No actual voyage, but a mere superficial compilation made by Louis Prad-
homme, from other writers.

Hebvas, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 237,241 (Tiumerals).

Hebyas, Saggio, p. 112.

Hebvas, Origine, Tnbb. L et seq,

Smits Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. (Galibi, Caraibes.)

Will. Hillhofse, Vocabulary of Eighty-two Noims and Numerals (1 — 10) in
the four Indian Languages of British Guyana. Caribisce, pp. 247, 248 of VoL II
of the : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London. Lottdon^ 1832,
8vo. Reprinted in Vol. V of : Montgomery Martin's British Colonial Library
(History of the West Indies, Vol. II). Xonion, 1844, 12mo, pp. 155, 156. ,

Colonel Gilinpo, Carib Vocabulary (of Central America), seventeen wordi

CAKIBS. 81

\

Wind numerals, 1 — 10, p. 291 of Vol. Ill of the : Journal of the Boyal Geographical
Bocietj of London. London^ 1833, Syo.

Alcide D'Obbi0NY, L*Homme Americain. Faris^ 1839, 2 vols. 8to, Vol. II,
V pp. 276—899.

^ Mithridates, Vol. IH, pp. 656, 681, 696, 698.

(From Bojer, Pelleprat^ Breton, and Biet, with comparison of the Yaoi
from Laet, and the ArowacJe from Laet and Quandt.)

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 576 (Caribe pr^s du Cap Nord
— Guyane Fran^aise — He Dominique — He Guadeloupe).

Gtjstaye db EichthaIi, Bapport des Langues Caribe et Polyn^sienne (pp. 253
— ^269), and : Eapport des Langues Caribe et Ouolofe (pp. 990 — 304), of Vol. II of
the : M^moires de la Soci^t^ Ethnologique. PariSy Veuve, Dondey-Dupr^, 1845,
8yo ; with comparative vocabularies, viz., Caribe and Guarani, p. 256, note 1 ;
Caribe and Polyn^sien, pp. 261, 262; Caribe, Sioux, and Polyn^sien, p. 264;
Caribe and Ouolofe, pp, 303, 304.

Some C^an'^^^e Words compared with Mohegan and Hebrew. Pp. xxvlLi — zxx
of: EzBKiEL Sanfobd, A History of the United States before the Revolution, with
some account of the Aborigines. I'Mladelphia, Anthony Finley, 1819, 8vo.

Same, compared with Mohegan, Greek, and Hebrew. Pp. 102, 103 of : Elias
BouDiKOT, A Star in the West, etc, Trenton, N. J., 1816, 8vo.

A. D*Obbignt, L' Homme Americain. Vol. I, p. 162 (GaUbi, Kitemoca, Yaois),
Vol. II, p. 274 (Caribs), and Tab. to p. 276 (Galibi and Caribs of the Antilles).

A short Yaoi Vocabulary, compared with Shebay and Arrowac. Pp. 642, 643
of: Joan, de Laet, Novus orbis. Lttgduni Batavorum^ 1633, folio.

Sib Bobebt H. Schombitbqk, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of
Twelve Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanakan stock, viz., Caribisi, Accaway, Macusie,
Arecima, Soerikong, Waiyamara, Gxiinau, Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa,
Pianoghotto, and Tiverighotto. Pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of Eighteen Lan-
guages^and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana. (British Association
Beport, Swansea meeting, 1848.) London^ 1849, 8vo.

Sib Bobebt ScHOMBUBas, A Vocabulary of the Maiongkong Language. Pp.
217 — 223 of Vol, IV of the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London^
1850, 8vo.

Sib Bobebt Sohombttb&i:, Guinau Vocabulary, and- affinity of words in th^
Guinau with other languages and dialects in America, in his " Contributions to
the Philological Ethnography of South America." Pp. 208—237 of Vol. Ill of
the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London^ 1848, 8vo.

Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Arawak, Aceaway, and Warau.
Pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. Bbett, Indian Tribes of Ghiyana. New YorJc^ 1852,
12mo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. PiEBBE Pellspbat. See Vocabularies above.

32 CATAWBA— CAYAPOS.

P. Bayhond Brbtok, Ghrammaire Caralbe. Auxerre, Gilles Bonqxiet, 1668,

870.

D. L. S., Essai de Grammaire Galibi's. See Vocabularies ab3ve.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 685—696.

(From the extncts made by P. Sebast. Garcia from the MS. Grammar of
P. Ebbn. XncszTEz.)

On the Carib language as spoken bj females, see : Chbistofh Meinebs, G«s-
chichte des weihlichen G^schlechts. Manover, Helwing, 1788 — 1800, 4 yoIb. 8to,
Vol. I, pp. 47 —

CATAWBA— KUTAHBA.

Indians of Tennessee and South Carolina.

VrORDS AND YOCABULARIES.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparatiye Vocabularies.

3iithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from Smith Barton).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 794.

No. VII, 41, of the Comparatiye Vocabulary, pp. 305 — 867 to : A, Gallatin's
Synopsis (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II).

(From Shith Babton and MS. authority of J. L. Milleb.)

And No. D, VIII, pp. 94—96 of the Tocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society.

Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Waccoa of North Carolina, and
the Catawba of South Carolina. Pp. f 57, 558 of Vol. V of : Schoolobapt's Indian
Tribes of the United States.

CATHLASCONS.

On the Columbia River, Oregon. Nearly related to the Chinooks
and Haeltzueks.

WORDS AMD VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary by John Soottleb, M.D. Pp. 243, 245, 247 of Vol. XI of the:
Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, 8to.

CATAPOS.

Indian tribe of the Aldeia S. Jos6 de Messamedes, in the Bra-
zilian province of Goyaz.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. E. PoHL, Eeise im Innem yon Brasilien, Weimar, 1832, 2 yols . 4to. Vol. I,
p. 447.

CAYUB4BAS — CAYUGA. 33

CAYUBABAS.

Indians of " los Moxos/^ in north-eastern Bolivia, on the Rivers
Mamore and Yaciima, Mission Exaltacion.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.

HsBYAS, Yocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 63, 64.

Hebyas, Aritmetica, pp. 102, 103.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 571, 576.

Balbi^ Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 466.

A. D'Obbigutt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 162, 164 j Vol. II, p. 208.

GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Americain. Vol. II, pp. 255, 256. *

CAYUGA, GOGOYANS, QUEUGUES.

Tribe of the Iroquois, and one of the original five nations.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebyas, Vocabulario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals;.

Smith Babton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies, and p. 20 of the
Appendix to the edition of 1798.

And from him. No. V, e, of the : Vocabularies to A- Gallatin's Synopsis
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 376).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, Part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335 (from Babton and Dean).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 799.

Cayuga Vocabulary, by Bev. Adam Elliot, of Tuscarora. Appendix L, pp.
271 — 277, to : Henry R. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. New York^
Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo.

Also : New York State Documents, No. 24, in Senate, January 22, 1846 ;
and pp. 393—400 (Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois) of the same
work, edited as a book : Albany^ Pease and Co., 1847, 870. And pp. 482 —
493 of Vol. II of : Schoolcbaft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

An extract from this Vocabulary is given under R. V. 4, p. 115, of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of: American Ethnological ii^ociety's Transactions.

F

34 CEKIS — CUAYMA.

CERIS.

Indians of Sonora, occupying the Island of Tiburou, in the Gulf
of California.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Yocabulary has been taken by John K. Babtlett, United States Bonndarf
Conunidsioner (see : Personal Narrative, Vol. I, pp. 463 — 466).

CHAPACURA, HUACHI.

Indians of Bolivia, near the Mission Carmen, on the Rio Blanco.
The Quitemoca tribe speak a different dialect.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Am6ricain, Vol. II, pp. 220, 221.

CIIAYMA.

Indian nation of Venezuela, department of the Orinoco, on the
rivers Guarapiche, Areo, and Caripe, province of Cumana; once
powerful, now nearly extinct. Their language is closely related
to the Tamanaca.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Fbancisco de Tauste, Arte j Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Indies
Chajmas, Cumanagotos, Cores, Parias y otros diversos de la provincia de Cumans
6 neuva Andalusia : oon un tratado a lo ultimo de la doctrina Christiana j catecismo
de los misterios de nuestra Santa Fe ; traducido del Castellano en la dicha Lengua
Indiana. Madrid, Bern, de Villa Diego, 1680, 4to, pp. 16, 187.

A. YOK Humboldt and A. Bonfland, Vojage aux Regions Equinoxiales du
[N'ouveau Continent. Paris, SchdU and Dufour, 1799-1840, 4 toIs. 4to ; and AtlaB
in folio. Edition in 8vo, ibid, 1816-1831, 13 vols.
German translation :
A. YON Humboldt and A. Bonfland, Keise in die Aequinoctial Gegenden
des Neuen Continents. Stuttgart and Tubingen, 1818, 8vo, pp. 213-^229,
258—261.

A. D'Oebigny, L' Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 136.

CHEMEHNEVIS — CHEPEWYAN. 35

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. Feancisco de Tafste, see Vocabularies.
Humboldt and Bonpland, see Vocabularies.

CHEMEHNEVIS.

A band of Pah-titalis (Utahs of the River), belonging to the
great Shohonee family.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Chemehnevi Vocabulary, taken by Lieut. A. W. Whipple, pp. 71—76 of
the Ecport upon the Indian Tribes, added to his : Report on the Route near the
35th Parallel (Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington^ 1855, 4to).

CHEPEWYAN.

Vater calls this language the foundation of all the North
American dialects — a kind of court tongue spoken by the chiefs
of the diflFerent nations. The first attempt at a grammar is
said to have been made at Cazenovia, by a chief of the name of
Sahgah-jewagah-Bahweh. Gallatin ranks theChepewyan among
the Athapascan family of languages — a theory adopted likewise
by Prichard, Latham, and Buschmann.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of the Indians on the north-west part of the Hudson's Bay, p. 206
— 211 of: Abthtjb Dobbs, An Account of the Countries adjoining to Hudson's
Bay in the north-west part of America ; containing, etc. etc. — to which are added

V Vocabularies of the languages of several Indian nations adjoining to

Hudson's Bay. London^ 1744, 4to, map, pp. 211. Reprint, pp. 181, 182, 183
of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin^ 1856, 4to.

Example of the Chepewyan Tongue, pp cxxix — cxxxii of : Alex. Mackenzie,

Voyages from Montreal through the Continent of North America

Z/ondon^ Cadell, jun., and Davis, 1801, 4to, maps, pp. yiii, cxxxii, 412, 2. Reprint,
pp. 180, 181 — 183 of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin^
1856, 4to.

P. 145 of the Oerman translation printed at Kamhurghy 1802, Svo.
Pp. 304—310 of the French translation, by Cast^ra. BariSy Dentu, 1807,
8vo.

Mithridates, VoL III, part 3, p. 424 (from Mackenzie).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 821.

Vocabulary after Mackenzie, No. 6 (III) of the Comparatiye Vocabulary of

36 CHERENTES.

Fifty-three Nations, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., pp. 306 — 367 of VoL II of:
Apchseologia Americana. Reprinted under M. Ill, 1, p. 105 of the Yocabularies,
in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Peofessob W. W. Tueneb (from Mackenzie), Comparative Vocabulary of
Twenty-five Words of Chepewyan, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, Umkwa, Hoopah,
Tacully, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes,
added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report (Vol. II of the : Pacific Bailroad
Reports). Washington, 1855, 4to.

Vocabulary of the principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the
Hudson's Bay Territory — Chippewayan, pp. 323 — 328 of Vol. II of: Johk
M*Lean, Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory.
London, R. Bentley, 1849, 3 vols. 8vo, pp. 308 and 328.

J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Chepe-
wyan, I and II J Beaver, I and IT j Sikanni Dialect of New Caledonia (pp. 191 — 198
of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1854).

Sir John Richardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition (London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo),
contains in Vol. II the following Vocabularies : —

Vocabulary of the Chepewyan Tongue (by Mrs. MTheeson), with Cree and
English Translations, pp. 387 — 395.

Kutchin and Chepewyan Vocabulary, pp. 382 — 385.

J. H, Lefeot, a Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dogrib Words, pp. 400, 401.

Mes. M'Pheeson's Vocabulary reprinted, pp. 174—177, 182, 183 of : Busoh-
mann, Alhapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856. 4to.

Chepewyan, compared with TahcuUy, Kutchin, Dogrib, Sussee, Tlatikanai, and
Umpqua (pp. 174 — 222) ; and, compared with the same, the Kinai languages,
Koloschian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269 — 318 of: BrsCHMAiw, Athapaskischer
Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Q-rammatical Notices on the Chippewyan Language, as Athapasca, are giyen
by A. Gallatin, pp. 215, 216, 269 (Cheppeyan) of Vol. II of: Archseologia
Americana.

CHERENTES, CHAVANTES.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Tocantins (and the
Araguay) — Martius, No. 75, 76, Xavantes, Xerentes. They
are total savages, and hostile to the other tribes of Brazilian
Indians.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Ch^rentes ou Xerentes de la Riviere de Tocantins, province de Qojaz
(Chavantes). Vocabulaire II, pp. 262—264 of: Castelnaf, Vol. V, Appendice,
and :

CH£ROK££. 37

Langue des Chayantes da Bio Tocantins (dialeote de ceUes des Ch^rentes), pro.
Tince de Gojaz. Vocabulaire III, pp. 264 — 268. Ibid.

CHEROKEE, CHILAKE.

The Cherokees, at the beginning of this century, still lived
south of the Ohio, in sixty-four towns or villages, divided into
Ottare (Mountain Cherokees) and Ayrate (Cherokees of the
Valley). They are now west of Arkansas

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. Adaib, History of the American Indians. London^ 1775, 4t.o, pp. 43, etc.
German translation — Breslau^ 1782, 8vo.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Uocabularies.

T. Say, Yocabularies of Indian Languages, pp. Ixx — Ixxxviii of : Astronomical
and Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the
Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the
command of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8to.

LxriGi Castiglioni, Viaggio negli Stati TJniti dell' America Settentrionale, fatto
negli anni 1785, 1786, e 1787. Milano, 1790, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. I, pp. 259—266.
Oerman translation, by A. M. Petersen. Memminffen, 1793, 2 vols. 8vo ;
Vol. I, pp. 322—328.

Annual Report on the Civilization of the Indian Tribes. Kewhavenf 1824, 8vo,
pp. 58—62.

No. VIII, 42, of the Comparative Vocabulary of fifty-three nations, pp. 307^
367 of Vol. II of: Arclueologia Americana (by Boitdinot and Wobcesteb).

Beprinted under B, IX, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88 of the vocabularies in Vol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Pp. 398—404 Supplementary Vocabulary in Cherokee (393 Words, by Rev.
S. A. Wobcesteb) ; and pp. 914 - 420, Select Sentences, ibid,

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 791.

The Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia possesses the
following MSS., presented to it by Thomas Jefferson : —
Vocabulary of the Cherokee, by Judge Campbell.

Vocabulary of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw, by Benjamin Haw£IK3.
Vocabulary of the Creek, Chicasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw, by the same.

Cherokee numerals (1—300 njillions) by William Butleb. Pp. 209—211,
VqI. II. of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

38 CHETIMACHA.

OBAMMABS AKD QBAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Cherokee Alphabet. Boston^ s. a., folio.

John FiCKEBiNa, Bemarks on the Indian Languages of North America^ b. L,
1836, 8vo. Keprint of an article in the : Encyclopsedia Americana, VoL VI
(1831).

German translation — Ueber die Indianischen Sprachen Amerika's iibersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen begleitet yon Talvj (Mbs- Robinson, wife of Dr. Sobio-
son, of New York). Leipzig^ Vogel, 1834, 8vo, pp. viii, 80. (Cherokee,
pp. 44 — 51, and note 5, pp. 58 — 72 on SequoyaVs Alphabet.)

John Piceebing, A Grammar of the Cherokee Language. Boston^ Misnon
Press, 1830, 8vo.

Only four sheets (pp. 9 — 40) printed ; by the invention of Sequoyah's new
alphabet, the work was stopped in its further progress.

Kurre Grammatik der Tscherokesischen Sprache. Von Dr. H. C. vON DXB
Gabelentz, pp. 257 — 300 of: Hoefer's Zeitschrift.

Extracts from John Pickering's Grammar, and answers to grammatical queries,
by Bev. S. A. Wobcester, missionary to the Cherokees, pp. 239—250. Cherokee
Transitions, p. 276; and Notes to the Transitions, pp. 291 — 294. New Cherokee
Alphabet, p. 301 of A. GtiUatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Ame-
ricana.

JR>ey. S. A. Wobcester's Bemarks on the Principles of the Cherokee, in answer
to questions transmitted under the direction of the Bureau of Indian Affairs. Pp.
443—456 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Cherokee Primer. Park Hill, Ark. Mission Pi-ess, John Candy, printer, 1840,
18mo, pp. 24. Beprinted, ibid., 1846, 18mo, pp. 24.

Cherokee Alphabet, p. 11 ; brief specimens of Cherokee Grammatical forms.
Pp. 12, 13, 30—32, 95, 96, 111, 112, 142—144 of Vol I of: The Cherokee Mes-
senger (Nos. I — XII, August, 1844, to May, 1846), Cherokee Baptist Mission
Press, 8vo.

Cherokee Alphabet, one sheet in piano. Printed at the same press. H. Upham,
printer.

CHETIMACHA. .

Indians of Louisiana.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulaire de la Langue des Chetimachas, pp. 73—84 of: J. S. Vateb,
Analekten der Sprachenkunde. Leipzig, 2* Heft, 2te Haelfte, 1821, 8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 759.

No. 49, XIV, of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty -three Nations, pp. 305 —

CHIAPANECAS — CHIMANO. 39

367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana
(from Duralde), and No. D, XIV, pp. 95 — 97 of Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.

A Vocabulary of the Chetimachas by Maetin Dfkaidb. MS. in the Library
of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.

CHIAPANECAS.

Indians of the Mexican province of Chiapas.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Fe. de Cefeda, Artes de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinacanteca
MexicOf 1560, 4to.

CHIKKASAS, CHICACHAS.

Indians of Alabama, on the Mobile River, now of Arkansas.
The Conchas of Plorida West spoke the same language; also
the Mohilians.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Pp. 38 et seq. in : J. Adaie, History of the American Indians. London^ 1775,
4to, pp. 464.

German translation — Breslau, 1782, 8vo.

Smith Babton, New Yiews, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.
(Chikkasah, Conchac, Mobilian.)

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, K^o. 789.

No. IX, 44, of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305 —
367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana. (By A.
Gallatin, from a Cbicasa boy.)

Benjamin Hawkins, Vocabulary of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and
Choctaw. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 295—302.

CHIMANO, KULINO, TIKUNA.

Indian tribes in the southern part of Hyabary, province of
Solimoes, Brazil. A part of the Chimanos live in the south of
Nueva Granada, on the shores of the Putumajo River^ and are
called Tikuna.

40 CH1MMESYAN8— CHINUK.

W0KD8 AND VOCABULARIES.
Balbi, Atlas Etlmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 539.

CHIMMESYANS.

Indians of the north-west coast, from 55° 30' to 53° 30' north
latitude. Their language is similar to that spoken by the
Tacullies or Carriers.

WOBDS JlSJ> VOCABULABIES.

Vocabulary, by John Scoulee, pp. 231, 233, 235 of: Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society of London, Yol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; and

H. XX, p. 103, of the Yocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society.

CHINANTEKA, CINAKANTEQUA.

Indians of Oajaca, Mexico, in the partidos of Quiechapa^ Jala-
log, and Chuapan.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Fb. be Cefeda, Artes de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Oinacanteoa.
Mexico, 1560, 4to.

CHINUK.

Indians of Oregon, on the right bank of the Columbia River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

C. S. Bafinesqfe, Atlantic Journal and Priend of Knowledge. PhiladelplM,
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 134.

Gabb. Fbanchebe, Eelation d'un Voyage ^ la C6te Nord-ouest de rAm^que
septentrionale dans lea ann^s 1810—1814. Montreal, 1820, 8vo.

JSnglish translation, by J. V. Huntington — New York, Kedfield, 1854^
12mo ; and in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., Appendix, Miscellaneous Vocabu-
laries, No. XXVIII, 63, p. 379 of Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana.

Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London^ 1841|
Svo, pp. 243 — 245, 247 : Vocabulary, by John Scouleb, M.D,

Tshinuk Words ; see Vocabularies of North-western America in : HoBATio
Hale's Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Fhiladeljshia, Lea and Blanchard, 1840, 4to, pp, 569—629.

CHIPPEWAY. 41

Hale, 1. c, mentions two dialects of Chinuk —

Watlala (or Upper Chinooks), divided into Watlala proper (Cascade
Indians) and Nihaloitih (Echeloots) ; and Chinooks proper, divided into
Tsliinuk, Tlatsap (Clatsops), and Wakaikams (Wahkyecums).

See also pp. 636 — 650 of the above work for a Vocabulary of, and Treatise
on, the ** Tshinuk" jargon, or Trade Language.

The Tschinuk (Watlala) Vocabulary of the above work (R) is reprinted
under U, XXVI, p. 121, of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II.

The Chinuk Vocabulary (Q) of the same work is reprinted under C,
XXVI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95,»6Mi.

Words used in the Chinook Jargon, pp. 147 — 152 of: Joel Palmer, Journal of
Travels over the Eocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia Biver, made
during the years 1845 and 1846, containing .... also .... about 300 Words of
the Chinook Jargon .... Cincinnati^ P. A. and H. P. James, 1847, 12mo, pp. 189.

A short Vocabulary of the Clatsop Dialect. See pp. 343, 344 of : Ten Years in
Oregon, by D. Les and E. H. Fbost, late of the Oregon Mission of the Methodist
Episcopal Church. New Torky 1844, 12mo.

Vocabulary of the Chenook Language, as spoken about Fort Vancouver, pp.
336—338 of: Rev. Samxtel Paekeb, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the
Rocky Mountains. Ithaca^ New Tork, 1838, 12mo.

Chinook Vocabulary (Appendix), pp. 342 — 349 of: ALEXAin)EB Ross, Adven-
tures of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia River ; being a Narrative of
the Expedition fitted out by John Jacob Astor, to estabhsh the Pacific Fur
Company ; with an Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific.
London, Smith, Elder, and Co., 1849, 12mo, map, pp. 352.
(P. 349, Words of the Chinook Jargon.)

Vocabulary of the Chinook Trade Jargon, in Note 1 (pp. 548—551) to the
article^ "Philosophy of Utterance," pp. 543 — 551 in Vol. V of: Schoolobaft's
Indian Tribes of the United States.

(Some further reports on this jargon are expected at Washington.)

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Pp. 562—564 of: HoBATio Hale's Ethnography and Philology of the United
States Exploring Expedition. PhiladelpMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1847, 4to. He-
printed on pp. 56 — 58 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,

Voi.n.

Pp. 635—646 of: Hale's Ethnography, etc. Article headed—" The Jargon, or
Trade Language of Oregon." Beprinted (partly) on pp. 62 — 70 of the : Transac-
tions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

CHIPPEWAY, OJIBWAT.

The principal dialect of the great Algonquin stock. The
eastern Chippeways are called Sautetiz, or Ojibois.

G

43 CHIPPKWAY.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Chippeways, pp. 521, 522, of Vol. VIII of: Couet de Gebeldt,
Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to.

A abort Vocabulary of tbe Chippeway Langnage, in : Jonathait Oabteb, Three
Years' Travels through tbe Interior Parts of North America, for more than Pire

Thousand Miles, containing an Account of the Great Lakes,

with a concise History of the Genius, Manners and Customs of the Tndiam
inhabiting the lands that lie adjacent to the Heads and to the Westward of the

Great River Mississippi London, 1778, 4to, map and plates, pp. 544 (the

Vocabulary, pp. 420 and following). Second edition, London, 1779, Svo. Keprinted
at Dublin, Vl*7% Svo. Third edition (by Dr. T. R. Lettsom), with an Account of
the Author. London, 1781, 8vo. Reprinted at Philadelphia in 1789, Sro.
Another Philadelphia reprint, by Joseph Cruikshank, 1789, 12mo, pp. xyi, 282.
(The Vocabulary on pp. 215 — 223.) A third Philadelphia edition, by Key and
Simpson, 1796, 12mo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 393 — 405.) A Boston edition,
1797, 12mo; and one printed at Charlestown, Massachusetts, 1802, 12mo.
Reprinted again under the title : J. Cabyeb's Travels in Wisconsin, from the
third London edition. New York, Harpers, 1838, 8vo, map and plates, pp. 376.

Phrench translation, by M. de Montucla. Paris, 1784, 8vo.

German translation — Hamburg, 1780, 8vo (the Vocabulary on pp. 350 and
following).

J. LoNa, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and GDrader, describing

the Manners and Customs of the North American Indians to which is

added, a Vocabulary of the Chippeway Language ...... and a Table, showing

the Analogy between the Algonkin and Chippeway Languages. London^ Debrett,
Egerton, and Co., 1791, 4to.

The EngUsh and Chippeway Vocabulary, pp. 218 — 295 ; the Comparative
Vocabulary, pp. 184 — 211. (A. Gallatin calls this " Eastern Chippeway.")

Chrman translation — Hamburg, 1791, 8vo.
Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

B. D. (Baudby des Loziebes), Voyage ^ la Louisiane et sur le Continent de
TAm^rique septentrionale, fait dans les ann6es 1794 & 1798. Parity Denta,
1802, 8vo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 353 and following.)

Fbofessob T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of Various Dialects of the Lennape
Stock of North American Indians (Forty-five Words in Fifteen Dialects, among
them Chippeway). Pp. 135 — 145 of: De. Edwabds' Observations on the Mohe-
gan Language, published by John Pickering, in Vol. X of the second series of:
Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Boston, Phelps and Famham,
1823, Svo. B>eprinted at Boston, by Little and Brown, 1843, Svo.

Annual B>eport on the Civilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven^ 1824^ Sro,
pp. 55—57.

Indian Vocabularies— Chippeway or Chippewa. Part 4, pp. 449 — 469, of (he

CHIPPEWAY. 43

Appendix to Vol. II of: Will. H. Kbatikcf, Narratiye of an Expedition to the
Source of the St. Peter's River, Lake Winnepeck, Lake of the Woods, etc. etc.,

performed in the year 1823 under the command of Stephan H. Long.

Philadelphia^ Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8yo, map and plates. Beprinted at
London^ by Whittaker, 1825, 2 vols. 8vo.

Vocabulary of the Algic, or Chippeway Language, pp. 487 — 493 of the Appendix
to : Thomas L. McKenney, Sketches of a Tour to the Lakes, of the Character
and Customs of the Chippeway Indians, and of Incidents connected with the
Treaty of Fond du Lac ; also, a Vocabulary of the Algic, or Chippeway Language,
formed in part, and, as far as it goes, upon the basis of one furnished by the Hon.
Albert Ghdlatin. Baltimore^ Fielding Lucas, 1827, 8vo, plates, pp. 494.

Ojibway Words and Phrases, pp. 399—418 of: Db. Edwin James, A Narrative
of the Captivity and Adventures of John Tanner, United States Interpreter at the
Saut de St. Marie, during Thirty Years' Besidence among the Indians. New York,
Carvill, 1830, 8vo, plates, pp. 426 (pp. 294—312, 899—417).

Henby R. Schoolcbapt, A Vocabulary of Words and Phrases in the Chippe-
way Language (comprising the Letters A and B, and stating at the end that cir-
cumstances prevented the insertion of the remainder of this Vocabulary), on
pp. 203 — 210 of his : Narrative of an Expedition through the Upper Mississippi
to Itaska Lake, the actual Source of this River. New York, Harpers, 1834, 8vo,
maps, pp. 307.

Words under IV, 8, of: Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, in
A. Gallatin's Synopsis in : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II,'pp. 305—367. Re-
printed under A, IV, pp. 78, 80, 82, of Vol. II of : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions. (From Schoolcbapt, James, and KEATiNa.)

Eastern Chippeways, under IV (e) of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Sixteen
Tribes. Ibid., pp. 369 (from J. Long). Reprinted under N, IV, 3, p. 107 of the
Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II, pp. 414»
416. Ibid, "Select Sentences."

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 416, 416 (from Cabveb, Long, and Baitdby

DES LOZIICBES).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 818 (Chippeway propre ou
Ochippeway).

Reise des Pbinzen Maximilian zu Wied in das Innere Nord Amerika's
in den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol.
II, pp. 592—599.

Translated into Ihrench. Farie, Bertrand, 1843, 3 vols. 8vo.

Sauteu or Ogibois Vocabulary (Eastern Chippeways), in the Vocabulary of the
Principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the Hudson's Bay Territory,
pp. 323—328 of Vol. II of: John M'Lean, Notes of a Twenty -five Years' Service
in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London^ Bentley, 1849, 2 vols. 12rao,

Rby. M. Heckeweldeb, Comparative Vocabulary of Lenni-Lennape proper.

14 CHIPPEWAY.

the Miusi Dialect, the Mahicanni, Katick, or Nadic Chippeway, Shawano, and
Nanticoke. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.

Numerals of — I. Ojibway of Chegoimegon, by William W. Wabbext (1—
bilUon, and 1—10 in the Pillagers, or Northern Ojibway Tongue), pp. 211
— 213. n. Chippewa of the Upper Mississippi, by M. Fairbanks (1 — 100,000),
pp. 216—218. And Ojibway (Vocabulary), Analytical Forms, with Comments,
pp. 412 — 416, 417—419 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. III.

Vocabularies I, Algonquin Group. Ojibwa of St. Mary's, by Q-. JoHirsTOV;
Ojibwa of Grand Travene Bay, by Ret. P. Dofghebtt ; Ojibwa of Saganaw, by
G. MoRAN; Ojibwa of Michilimackinac, by W. Johnston, on pp. 458 — 169 of
Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Bet. Fred. Baraoa, A Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language, explained in
English. This language is spoken by the Chippewa Indians, as also by the Otawai,
Potawatamies, and Algonquins, with but slight differences. For the use of mis-
sionaries, etc. Cincinnati, printed by Jos. £. Heemann, 1853, 12mo, pp. Tii, 662.

Comparatire Vocabulary of Pamptico, Natic, and Chippewa (ef Michigan),
pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

A Lexicon of the Algonquin Language, part 1, Chippewa, A, pp. 565 — 669. IbO.

Comparatiye Chippewa and Mahican Vocabulary of Twenty-two Words, p. 620.
Ilid.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Edwin Jambs, Outline of the Paradigma of a Chippeway Vocabulary ....
8. a Albany, folio.

A. Bingham, Ojibwa Spelling-book, according to the improyed orthography of
Edwin James. Albany, 1825, 8to.

Henry A. Schoolcraft, Two Lectures on the Chippewa Substantiye. Pp.
169—202 of: Narrative of an Expedition .... to Itasca Lake. New Torkf
Harpers, 1834, 8vo, map, pp. 307.

Part of a course of Lectures on the Grammatical Structure of the Indian
Languages, delivered before the St. Mary's Committee of the Algic Society.
The continuation of these lectures (Lectures III and IV) is published in;

Henry A. Schoolcraft, Oneota, or the Bed Race of America New

York, Surges, Stringer, and Co., 1844-45, 1 vol. (Nos. 1 — 8) Svo, pp. 612
(pp. 93-104,221— 232).

Gallafdet, Picture-definer and Reading- book. Boston, Crocker and Brewster,
for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1835, 12mo, pp.
123.

Ojibwa SpeUing-book, designed for the use of native learners. Printed for the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions. Boston, Crocker and
Brewster, 1885, 12mo, second edition, pp. 127. Third edition, ibid., 1846, 12mo,
pp. 96.

CHIQUITOS. 45

Chippewaj Nouns (from Sohoolobapt*s Lectures), pp.244 — 248 of: A. Gal-
latin's Sjnopsis, etc., in Vol. II of : ArchsBologia Americana. Chippewa Tran-
sitions, ibid.y p. 289.

IRey. G. a. Belcotjbt, Frincipes de la Langue des Sauyages appel^s Sauteux.
QuebeCf imprimerie de Frechette and Co., 1839, 12mo, pp. 146.

A Chippeway Primer, compiled by the Bev. Peter Dottgheety. Printed for
the Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church. New York, John
Westall, 1844, 12mo, pp. 44. Second edition, ibid., 1847, 12mo, pp. 123.

Short Reading Lessons in the Ojibway Language, translated by the Bet. Peteb
DoiJGHEBTT. New TorJc, John Westall and Co., 1847, 12mo.

Joseph Howse, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined an
Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, Bivington, 1844, 8vo, pp. xx, 324.

Edwin James, M.D., Essay on the Chippeway Language. Bead before the
American Lyceum, at the third annual meeting, in the city of New York, May 3rd,
1833, pp. 73—80 of No. V of; The North American Savages (September, 1835),

870.

Bet. Feed. Bakaga, missionary at L*Ance, Lake Superior, A Theoretical and
Practical Grammar of the Otchipwe Language. Detroit, printed by Jabez Fox,
1851, 12mo, pp. 576.

The Transitions called " Chippeway," in : J. S. Vateb, Analekte;i der
Sprachkunde. Leipzig, 1821, 8vo. Heft 2, pp. 15 — 20, are " Delaware."

Bey. Thomas Hitblbut, A Memoir on the Inflections of the Chippewa Tongue.
Pp. 383—396 of Vol. IV of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Conjugation of the Verb " Waub." See pp. 291 — 388 of : Schoolcbapt's Indian
Tribes of the United States.

Original Words of Indian Songs literally translated. Chippewa. Pp. 559*-
564, ibid.

Etymology (Chippewa), pp. 593 — 600, ibid.

Some Data respecting the Principles of the Chippewa and Mahican Languages,
in a series of letters written during the years from 1822 — 1827. Chippewa. Pp.
601-618, ibid.

CHIQUITOS.

In South America, on the Upper Paraguay, between the Chaco
and Brazil.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Gilii, Saggio, etc., Vol. Ill, pp. 244—248, 334—339 (from the MS. notices of
Padbe Camano).

Hebvas, Vocabolario, pp. 163 et seq.

46 CHOCTAW.

Hebyas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 99 — 101.

Mithridates, VoL III, pp. 554, 570.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 463.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words. Vol. I, p. 164, of : Alcide D'OBBiaVT,
L'Homme Am^ricain. Paris, 1839, 2 toIs. Syo. VoL II, p. 136, three words of
the Cuciquia dialect.

Vocabulaire, No. XIV, Langue des Chiquitos, in : Fb. de Castelztau, Exp^
tion. Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 286—288.

Vocabulario de la Lengua Chiquita. Parte 1' : Espailol y Chiquito. 1 toL 4to,
of nearly 700 pages. Parte 2^ : Chiquito y Espauol del Pueblo de S. XaYier (where
it was composed by the Jesuits). One Yol. folio, of about 700 pages, two oolumns
on CYcry page. MS. in the possession of M. Alcide D'Orbigny.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

GnJi, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 244-248, 334—339.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp 559—563.

D'Oebigny, L'Homme Ani^ricain, Vol. I, pp. 134—136 ; VoL II, pp. 161—
163, and p. 180 (Cur uminaca tribe), p. 182 (CoYareca tribe),p. 184 (CuraY^ tribe),
p. Ifife (Tapiis tribe).

CHOCTAW, CHAHTAH.

Indians of the Appalachian stock. Their language is closely
related to those of the Chikasas and of the Muskoghees. The
French in Louisiana used the Choctaw language for their com-
munications with other Indian tribes. They live now west of
Arkansas.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

LxTiGi Castiglioki, Yiaggio negli Stati Uniti dell' America settentrionale^ etc
Milanoy 1790, 2 yoIs. 8yo (Vol. I, pp. 259—266).

Oerman translation by A. M. Petersen. Memmingen^ Seiler, 1793, 8to
(pp. 322—328).

Smith Babton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 298, 304, 305.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XI, No. 790.

Choctaw Numerals, by John Deennen, United States Agent, pp. 204 — ^206 oC
Vol. 11. of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Some Words from the Language of the Choctaws (18, of which 14arenamera]8)i
by Lewis Brantz, 1785, p. 347 of Vol. Ill of the same work.

CHOLO. 47

No. IX, 43, of the : Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307 — 367) to A. GALLi.TiN*s
Synopsis in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana (from Wright's Spelling-book),
and : Chocta Vocabulary, by Alfbed Weight, ibid., pp. 371—396. Also : Com-
paratiye Vocabulary of the Chocta and Muskoghee (97 words out of 600 which
hare certain affinities), ibid., pp. 405, 406.

No. IX, 43, reprinted as B, X 1, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88, of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II. of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The com-
parative vocabulary, ibid., p. cxii.

MS, Vocabularies of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw ; and of the Creek,
Chickasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw — ^both by Benjamin Hawkins — are in the
Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 300—302 (from Adaib, pp. 38, 39, 41, 44,
68, 70—73).

A Spelling-book written in the Chahtah Language, with an English translation.
Second edition, revised. Cincinnati, printed by Morgan, Dodge, and Eisher, 1827,
8vo.

(yhahta Holisso. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, for the American Board of
Commissioners for Eoreign Missions, 1830, 12mo, pp. 108. Third edition, revised,
ibid., 1835, 12mo, p. 72.

Chahta Holisso, it im Anumpuli ; or, the Choctaw Beader. For the use of
native schools. Union, printed for the American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions, by John F. Wheeler, 1836, 12mo, p. 123.

Cmrs Btington, An English and Choctaw Definer for the Choctaw Academies
and Schools .... 18mo, pp. 252. New York, 1852.

Cybtts Btinqton, Choctaw Vocabulary, pp. 62 — 64 of the : Eeport upon the
Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Keport in Vol. II of:
Pacific Bailroad Beports. Washington, 1855, 4to.

CHOLO, CHOCO.

Indians of Nueva Granada, from the Gulf of San Miguel to
the Bay of Choco, and thence, with a few interruptions, to the
northern parts of Equador.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Cholo Vocabulary, by Dr. Edward Ctjllen j and Comparison of the Cholo
with the Languages of the Oronoco, by Dr. E. Q-. Latham, p. 190 of part 2 of
Vol. XX of: Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society. London, John Murray,
1851, 8to.

Pp. 179—181 of: Berthold Seemait, The Aborigines of the Isthmus of
Panama, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. UI, p. 1.

48 CHONDAL — CHOW-E-SHAK.

CHONDAL.

Language spoken by the Indians of Chontales, on the northern
shores of the Lake of Nicaragua.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

E. Geo. Sqxtieb, Nicaragua New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 toIs. 8to.

Vol. II, pp. 314, 324, 325 (from Jul. Fboebel), and : Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society, Yol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106-^110.

CHOROTEGANS.

Indians of Nicaragua to the north of the Mexican inhabitants
of Nicaragua (the Niquirans), between the Pacific Ocean, Lake
Managua^ and the Gulf of Fonseca. They are divided into —
Chorotegans proper, or Dirians ; NagrandanSy in the plain of
Leon ; and Orotinans, in the district of Guanacaste.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

E. Geo. Sqitieb, Nicaragua New Tork^ Appleton, 1852, 2 toIs. 8fo.

Yol. II, pp. 320 — 333, Dirian from Masaya ; and : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Yol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106—110.

CHORTI.

On the banks of the Motagua, in Guatemala. A language
related to the Maya and Poconchi.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A short Yocabulary, taken by John L. Stephens, at Zacapa, is given in:
A. Gallatin's Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico. (Yol. I of: Trans-
actions of the American Ethnological Society.) New York, Bartlett and Welford,
1845, 8vo, pp. 9, 10.

CHOW-E-SHAK.

Indians of north-western California, on the head of Eel River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Geobge Gibbs, Yocabulary, Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
YqL in, pp. 434-440.

CHUNTAQUIROS COCHIMI. 49

CHUNTAQUIROS, PIROS.

Brazilian Indians in the neighbourhood of Santa Rosa^ in the
province of Goyaz.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Ohuntaquiros ou Firos (Simisenchis) du Village de Santa Bosa.
Vocabulary, No. XVII, pp. 290, 291 of: Castelnait, Vol. V, Appendice.

CINALOA, OU SINALOA.

According to Hervas, three languages were spoken by the Indians
of the Mexican State of Cinaloa — the Tubar, the Zoe, and the
Hiaqui, which latter was the principal one. De SouzA^mentions :
Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, por P. Luis Bonifaz.
BoNiFAZ was missionary to the Indians of Cinaloa, between the
years 1602 and 1644. He died in the latter year at Valladolid,
in Michoacan; but probably left his MS S. in some of the reli-
gious establishments of the city of Mexico.

COBEU.

Indians on the Amazon.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alpbed R. Wallace,
a Narrative of Trayels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London^ Beeye and Co.,
1853, 8yo.

COCANAS.

Brazilian Indians on the Upper Amazon (Cocuannas of Mar-
Tius? No. 224).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Cocanas de Nauta. Vocabulaire, No. XIX, pp. 293, 294 of:
Castelnait, Vol. V, Appendice.

COCHIMI.

Indians of Upper California, near the Mission St. Xaverio.
Related to the Laymons.

50 COCOMARICOPAS — COCONUCOS.

WORDS AND VOCABULAUIES.

Kebyas, Yocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq.

IIebyas, Aritmetica, p. 113.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 125, 233—237 (Dialect of St. Gtertrudis).

HsBYAS, Origine, Tab. L et seq.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 185, 198, 199, Cochimi and Cocliimi-Lajmoii
of the Missions S. Xaverio and Jos. Comandii ; S. Borgia and S. Gertrudis (from
IIebyas).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 826.

A. Fobbes, History of California. London^ 1839, 8yo.

OBAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 192—198.

COCOMARICOPAS.

Indians of Sonera, near the River Gila.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Short Vocabulary (Apache ?), collected by Liexttekant Emoby, p. 109 of Vol
II of : American Ethnological Society's Transactions.

A Vocabulary of the Cocomaricopa Language has been taken by JoHir H. Babt-
LETT, the United States Boundary Commissioner.

Cocomaricopa Vocabulary, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, p. 94 of the
'Beport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Keport on the Boute near the 35th
Parallel, in Vol. II of : Pacific Bailroad Reports. Wcuhington^ 1855, 4ito.

COCONUCOS.

Indians of the province of Cudinamarca in Nueva Granada.
The Polindaras and Guambias are kindred tribes.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Notices and some Words of the Coconucos, Polindaras, and Guambias, given on
pp. 43 — 45 of: Tommaso C. de Mosqueba, Memoria Sobre la G^ografia Fisiea
y Politica de la Nueva Granada. Nuevo York, imprenta de J. W. Benedict,
1852, 8vo.

English translation, by Theodore D wight. Ibid,, 8to.

COCOPA8 — COMANCHE8. 5 1

COCOPAS.

Indians of Sonora, between the Rio Gila and the Gulf of Cali-
fornia.

WORDS AND YOCABULARIES.

A Yocabulary has been taken by Johk B. Babtlett, United States Boundary
Commissioner.

COMANCHES.

Indians of Texas, belonging to the great Shoshonee or Snake
family. They range from the sources of the Brazos and Colorado,
rivers of Texas, over the great Prairies, to the waters of the
Arkansas and the mountains of Rio Grande. They are also
called Hietana, Jetans, and Paducas.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Comanche Names and Numerals, on pp. 273, 274 of: Wm. Bollaebt*s Ob-
servations on the Indian Tribes in Texas, in Yol. II of : Journal of the Ethno-
logical Society of London. London, 1850, 8to.

De. Keinbich Bebohaus, Uber die Verwandtschaft der Schoschonen, Komant-
schen und Apachen, in : Fhjsikalischer Atlas ; Gcographisches Jahrbuch, 1851.
N. III. Gotha, Justus Perthes, 4to, pp. 48 — 62, map. Vocabulary, pp.
51-53.

Captain B. B. Mabcy, Yocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Coman-
ches and Witchitas. Appendix H, pp. 273 — 276 of : Bandolph B. Marcy and Geo.
B. M'Clellan, Exploration of the Bed Biyer of Louisiana, in the year 1852. Wash-
ington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8to. (33rd Congr., 1 Sess., House Exec.
Doc.)

Comanche Vocabulary, by Bob. S. Neighbobs, Esq., pp. 494 — 505 of Vol. II
of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Bob. S. Neighbobs, The Na-ii ni or Comanche of Texas ; their Traits and
Beliefs, and their Divisions and Intertribal Belations. Ibid,, pp. 125—134.
(Comanche Numeration, pp. 129, 130.)

Comanche Vocabulary, taken from Jesse Chisholm, a Cherokee, by Lieutenant
A* W. Whipple, pp. 71—76 of the Beport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to
his Beport on the Boute near the 35th Parallel, in Vol. II of: Pacific Bailroad
Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.

A Comanche Vocabulary has been collected by John B. Babtlett, the United
States Boundary Commissioner.

52 CONCHO— CORA.

CONCHO.

A dialect of the Mexican language. Bishop Juan Espinosa,
Franciscan, of the p^o^ince of Zacatecas (Mexico), and Bishop
of Santiago de Chile, wrote, according to Arlegui and De Souza :
Arte y Vocabulario completo del Idioma Concho.

CONIBOS.

Indians of the Pampa del Sacramento, on the left banks of the
Ucayale.

WORDS AND TOCABULARIES.

Words, pp. 286 and 292 of: Indiens Conibos, par M. de Saint Cbioq, pp. 274
— 295 of Tome YI of the fourth series of: Bulletin de la Soci^t^ de G^ographie;
Paris, A. Bertrand, 1853, 8vo.

COPEH.

Indians of north-western California, at the Putor Creek.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

George Gibbs, Yocabulary in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. Ill, pp. 428—434.

CORA.

Indians of New Mexico, near the Missions of Najarit. Their
language resembles very much the Mexican.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Jos. DE Obtega, Yocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Cora. Mexico^ 1732,
4to. Fifty-two leaves.

Hebyas, Yocabolario Foliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

Kebyas, Saggio, p. 121.

Hebvas, Aritmetica, pp. 111—113.

Hebyas, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 48, 49, 118, 120, 121, 178, Tabb. XLIX,
L, LI et seq. (Gives also Nayarit words.)

J. S. Vateb, Proben, etc. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo, pp. 353 — 373.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 703.

COROADOS COSTANOS. 53

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Doctrina Cristiana, Oraciones, Confesonario, Arte j Yocabulario do la Lengna
Ck>ra, por P. JosR Ortega. Printed by the Bishop of Guadalaxara, Sr. Don
Nicolas Gomez de Ceirantes, 1729.

Yocabukrio del P. Joseph de Ortega. Mexico, 1732, 8to. The preface
contains grammatical notices.

Mithridates, Yol. ITT, part 2, pp. 131—138.

COROADOS, COROPOS.

Two Indian tribes on the banks of the rivers Paraiba and
Pomba, in the Brazilian provinces Rio de Janeiro and Minas
Geraes.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

. EsCHWEGE, Journal fiir Brasilien. Weimar y 1818, 8vo, V Heft.
Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 498, 4>99.

CORREGUAJES.

Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly
departamento del Assuai).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabulario Correguaje Espanol. Taken by the Presbytero Manitel Mabia
Alsis, in 1854. Pp. 21-^24 of : Los Indies del Andaqui. Popayauy 1855, 16mo.

COSTANOS.

Califomian Indians on the Bay of San Francisco, and formerly
under the supervision of the Mission Dolores. There were five
tribes : Ah-wash-tes, Ol-hones (called, by the Spaniards, Cos^
tanos, or, Indians of the coast), AUtah-moSy Ito-mo-nans, and
Tu-lo-mos. A few other small tribes round the Bay speak the
same language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Costanos Yocabulary, by Pedbo Alcantara, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes
of the United States, Yol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Yocabularies, pp. 494 —
505, and Note, p. 506.

54 COSTA RICA — CREOLE.

COSTA RICA, TALAMANCA.

Many Indian tribes inhabit Costa Rica, and especially the part
thereof bordering on the Atlantic, tlie so-called district of Tala-
manca. Galindo names six, Juarros twenty-six different
tribes and nations.

words and vocabularies.

Db. Xabl Schebzeb, Sprache der wilden Indianerst&mme dcrBlanoos, Yalientes
und Talamanoas entlang der Ostkiiste zwisehen dem Rio Zent und Bocca del Toro
im Staate Costa Rica. Pp. 28—35 of Vol. XXV of: Sitsungsberiohte der
Philosophisoh-HistoriBchen EJasse der Kdniglicben Akademie der Wissenschaften.
Vienna, 1855, 8vo. Also, with separate title : Sprachen der Indianer Centni
Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8to, pp. 11.

Also, pp. 573—576 of: Die Republik Costa Rica in Central Amerika xnit
besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Naturrerhaltnisse und der Frage der Deutschen
Auswanderung und Colonisation. Reisestudien und Skizzen aus der Jahien 1858,
1854, Ton Db. Mobitz Waqneb und Db. Kabl Schebzeb. Leipzig^ 1855, 8ro.

CREOLE

Is the general name given in the West Indies to Negro corrup-
tions of European languages. Thus the Negroes of Surinam,
originally an English colony, speak Creole, or Negro-English;
those of Guadaloupe and Martinique, French colonies, N^ro-
French, etc. ; and, consequently, the following divisions naturally
present themselves ; — Negro-English, ^ Negro- Portuguese^ Negro-
Dutch, Negro- Spanish, Negro-French.

I. NEGRO-ENGLISH—

Called, by the Negroes, " Ningre-tongo,^^ " NingrCy^ and also
'' Bakra^^ —\s> the language used by the Negroes among them-
selves in the Dutch colony of Surinam, and with their European
masters. The language is not now what it originally was, viz.,
a broken or corrupted English, but it has expanded into a
Negro-English-Dutch language. Its gieneral structure is English,
and very many words are of English origin ; but those words
which in course of time were superadded, with the new ideas they
were meant to express, are not taken from the English, but the
Dutch language, from which the Negro-English recruits itself

CREOLE. OO

constantly ; whilst many words, originally English, have fallen
into disuse, and been supplanted by corresponding Dutch ones.
The Moravians have had a mission among the Negroes of
Surinam for the last century. Their translation of the New
Testament into Negro-English was first printed in 1829, and
again in 1846.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

C. L. ScHiTMANir, Neger-Engliscli iind Deutsches Woerterbuch. Editio tertia,
1783.

MS. in the possession of the Moravians of Paramaribo.

H. C. FoCKE, Neger Engelsch Woordenboek. Leyden^ P. H. v. d. Heuvel, 1855,
Svo, pp. xiii, 160.

Deutsch-Neger-Englisches WSrterbuch. Nebst einem Anhang Neger-Englische
Spriichworter enthaltend, von H. B. WuLLSCHitAEGEL. Lohau^ 1856, 8vo, pp. x,
340.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Pp. 257, 258 of Vol. II of: Captain J. Qc. Stedmau's Narrative of a Five
Years' Expedition against the Bevolted Negroes of Surinam. 2 vols. 4to, London^
1796.

Gemeenzame Leerwyze over het Bastard og Neger-EngUsch op een gemakelyke
Wyze te leeren verstaan en sprecken. Door G. C. W. Paramaribo^ 1798, 12mo,
pp. 150.

Page 117 of: Coxtnt Albert von Sack's Beschreibung einer Beise nach Suri-
nam, etc. 1 vol. 4to, Berlin^ 1821.

Grammatical Bemarks on Negro-English, in an article on the Negro-English
New Testament in : Edinburgh Christian Instructor, Dec, 1829.

A Philological Analysis of the Negro-English Language, in : Wm. Greenfield's
Defence of the Surinam Negro-English Version of the New Testament, etc. io»-
dony Bagster, 1830, 8vo, pp. 80.

A. HELMiGh VAN DER Vegt, Proeve eener handleiding om het Neger-Engelsch,
zoo als hetzelve over het allgemeen binnen de Kolonie Surinam gesproken word.
A-msierdanif 1844, 8vo.

Kurzgefasste Neger-Englische Grammatik, von H. B. Wullschlaegel. JBaut-
zetif gedruckt bey Ernst Moritz Mouse, 1854, 8vo, pp. 67.

H. B. WxTLLSOHLAEGEL, Jcts ovcr de Neger-Engelsche Taal en de Bijdragen tot
hare Ontwikkeling en Literatuur, door de Zendelingen der Evangelische Broeder-
gemeente geleverd. Paramaribo, 1854. Pp. 286 — 295 of: West IndiS, Bijdragen
tot de Bevordering van de Kennis der Nederlandsch West Indische Koloni^n
Eerste Deel. Saarlem, 1855, Svo.

56 CREOLE.

II. NEanO-POETUGUESE.

Among the first settlers of Surinam were, besides Englishmen,
many Portuguese Jews, whose numerous slaves soon adopted, in
an imperfect manner, the language of their masters, speaking a
broken Portuguese, which has now vanished from the colony with
the wealth of those who originally introduced it. At the present
time it is only spoken by one tribe of the free Bush Negroes, the
so-called Saramaccans, on the Upper Surinam, descendants of the
Plantation Negroes, who, at the time of the treaty of the peace
in 1760, inhabited the forests on the Upper Saramacea^ deep in
the interior. These Saramacca Negroes, at least those among
them who hold intercourse with the colony, understand, besides
their own ^' Djoe-tongo'^ (Jew^s language), the Negro-EngUsh
language. No printed specimens known.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

C. Ij. Schxtmann, Woerterbuch der Saramacca Negerdprache, 1778. MS. in
the possession of the Moravian Missionaries at Paramaribo.

in. NEaRO-DFTCH—

Generally, but erroneously, called Danish-Creole — ^is spoken on
the Danish West Indian Islands — St. Thomas, St. Croix, and
St. John. There is a wide difference between this language and
the Negro-English of Surinam. It is Dutch in its structure, as
well as in the vocabulary, and the number of Danish, French,
English, etc., words received into it is very trifling. The first
book in the Creole of the Danish West Indies was printed in
1761. It contained the Litany and several hymns. The Creole
New Testament was first published at Copenhagen, in 1781,
next at Barby, in 1802, and again at Copenhagen, in 1818.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

C. G. A. Oldendobfs Gbscldchte der Mission der Eyangelischen Bruder auf
den Caraibischen Inseln S. Thomas, S. Croix, und S. Jan. Kerausgegeben Ton
J. Jac. Bossart. Barhy and Leipzig^ 1777, 8vo, plates. Vol. I, pp. 424—434.

Specimens of this jargon are given in two versions of the Lord's Prayer in:
Mithridates, Vol. II, pp. 252, 253, from the translation of the New Testament,
published, Cojp&nhagen^ 1781, Svo, and JSarhy^ 1802, Svo.

CREOLE. 57

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL N0TICK8.

J. C. Knfoos, Kreool A B C Buk. S, Croix, 1770, 8vo.

J. M. Grammatica over de Creoolske Sprog pa de Danske Eilande i America.
KJobei^aun, 1770, 8vo.

Oldendobps Geschiclite der Missionen (see Vocabularies above) .

IV. NEGRO-SPANISH.

The Spanish-Creole language, a broken Spanish, interspersed
with some Dutch words, is spoken by the Negroes of the Dutch
island of Curasao. ' We possess no information about a Creole
language of Cuba — the words given in the Glossary (below
mentioned) lending no countenance to the acceptation of a
special Cuban-Creole tongue. A translation of the Gospel of
St. Matthew into the Creole of Cura9ao was printed in 1844,

WORDS AND VGCABULARIKS.

G^meenzame Zamenspraken ((.Conversations in Dutch and the Creole of Curasao).
Door J. J. FuTHAir. Santarosa, Curagao, 1853, pp. 66, 12mo.

Glossary of Creole Terms in common use in Cuba, and of those relative to
Slavery and the Trade in Slaves, pp. 184 — 188 of: Poems, by a Slave in the Island
of Cuba, recently Uberated ; translated from the Spanish, by K. "R. Madden, M.D.
liondon, 184)0, 8vo.

Note. — A Grammar of the Dutch Language, for the use of the Negroes of
Curasao, is published under the title : Froeve eener Kollandsche Spraak-
kunst, ten Gebruike der Algemeene Armenschool, in de Gemeente van de
H. BosA, op Cura9ao. Door J. J. Futman. Santarosa, Curciqao.

V. NEGRO-FEENCH.

French-Creole of San Domingo, Guadaloupe, Martinique, and
of Trinidad. A poem in the Creole of Trinidad, printed as a
fly-sheet, is in the possession of his Highness the Prince Louis
Lucien Bonaparte. A Monsieur Borde, of Trinidad, is said to
have written a Creole Grammar.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

S. G. DuccBirE-JoLT, Manuel des Habitants de St. Dominque, contenant un

Precis de THistoire de cette He depuis sa D^ouverte suivi du premier

Vocabulaire Fran9ais-Cr^ole et de Conversations liVan9ai8e8-Cr6oles. Part*, 1802,
2 vols. 8vo.

I

58 CROWS — CUMANA.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Cat&ihisme en la Langue Creole ; prekH^ld d*un Essai de Grammaire but Vldkmt
unt6 dans lea Colonies Fran9ai8e8. Parity impr. Yrajet de Surcy, 1842| I8110
(pp. 7-20).

Creole Proverbs are given in: Yictob Schoelcheb, Les Colonies Franfaisei;
TAbolition Immediate de TEsolavage. Pam, Fagnerre, 1842, 8yo.

CROWS, UP-SA-RO-KA, CORNEILLES.

Indians of the Missouri territoiy and Oregon. They are divided
into three different tribes^ s][)eaking different dialects^ viz.:

1. Kikatsa, or Crow proper, on the banks of the Yellow Stone;

2. AhnahawaySy or Ahwahawaya (Black-shoes or ^' Soulien
noirs'^), between the Mandans and Minetarees; and^ 3. AUa-
kaweahy or Paunch Indians ('^Indiens ventrus^^), on the Snake
River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Say, Vocabularies, p. LXXIX.

Fbinzen Maximilian zu Wied, Beise in das Innere Nord Amerikas in 1832-
1834. Coblem, Iloelscber, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 490.

No. VI, o, of the Miscellaneous Vocabularies to A. GhiIlntin*B Sjmopcii, eie.,
in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, p. 377 (from Sat).

Upsaroka Vocabulary. B, VI (Sioux), 3, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89 of the Vooabolaziei
in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis-
souri Minetares and those of the Sioux, pp. cxv, cxvi of : American Bthnologioal
Society's Transactions, Vol. II.

Upsaroka and Mandan Words compared (no affinity) : ScHOOLCfiAirr'B Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 255, 256.

CUMANA.

A province of Venezuela. See also under Chayma.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Diccionario de la Lengua de Cuman& ; y Arte de la Misma, del P. YavguaB.
Corregido y aumentado por Fr. Matias Blanco, 4to. Burgos^ 1683.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte de la Lengua Cuman&, por Fb. Manuel Yanguas, 4to. Bmrgo9, 1683.

CUNACUNA — DAHKOTAH. 59

CUNACUNA.

Independent Indians of Nueva Granada^ on the south-easterly
side of the Isthmus.

WORDS AND YOCABULAKIKS.
Balbi, Atlas EUmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 616.

CURETU.

Indians on the Amazon. Martius (VII, B, 198) calls them
Coretds, and says that they are settled on the Upper Apaporis.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Balbi, Atlas Etbnographiqae, Tab. XLI, No. 520. (Coreta.)

Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521 — 541 of: Alfbed B. Wallacb, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. London^ Reeve and Co.,
1853, 8?o (p. 536, Comparison with the Curetu Words given by Balbi).

CUSHNA.

A Califomian tribe on the mountains of the South Yuba.
Their language is common to most of the tribes inhabiting the
upper portion of the Sacramento valley.

WORDS A>*D VOCABULARIES.

Oushna Yocabulary, by Mb. Johnson, United States Agent, in : Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States, Yol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Yocabu-
laries, pp. 494 — 505, and Notes, pp. 506 — 508.

DAHKOTAH, SIOUX, NADOWESSIER.

Indians between the Missouri and Mississippi, of which eleven
tribes are mentioned. Hecke welder thinks they are Iroquois,
but Cass claims them as a separate nation. The Assmipoils
(Assinibules, Stone-Indians), on the Lake Winnipeg, are said to
be a separate tribe of the Sioux. Formerly they were called
Issati,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Nodowessiens. Pp. 552, 523 of Yol. YIII of: Court de GEBELiy,
Monde Frimitif. Faris, 1772, 4to.

(30 DAIIKOTAII.

Jonathan Cabyer, A Short Vocabulary of the Naudowessie Language, in:
Three Years* Travels through the lutcrior Parts of North America. London, 1778;
8vo, pp. 420 et seq.

In other editions— DMi/i», 1779, 8vo, pp. 405— 412; Philadelphia, 11^
12mo, pp. 223—228 ; Ibid, 1796, 8vo, pp. 288—292 ; German translation,
Hamburg^ 1780, 8vo, pp. 356 and following.

B. (a.fdby) D. (es Loziekes), Voyage h. la Louisiane. Parity Dentu, 1802;
8vo, pp. 348 et seq. (from Cabyeu and B. D).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 265.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

Dacota, or Sioux, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix, part 4^
Vol. IT, pp. 449— 459 of: Wm. II. Keating, Narrative of Major S. H. Long,
Sf^ond Expedition. Philadelphia^ Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8to.

(In Chap. VIII of Vol. I, pp. 376— 439, an accurate " Account of the Dacotu;
or Sioux Indians," is given.) The Vocabulary is prepared by Pbof. Sit,
and printed in the vocabularies added to tlie Astronomical and Meteorologiod
Becord of this Expedition : Philadelphia^ 1822, 4to, pp. Ixxii — Ixzxviii.

A Vocabulary of the Sioux Language, pp. 152 — 172 of: Caxeb Atwateb,
Bemarks made on a Tour to Prairie du Chicn, thence to Washington Citj, in
1829. Columbus, Isaac N. Whiting, 1831, 12mo.

Sioux Vocabulary in : Geo. Catlin's Letters and Notes on the Manners, Cni'
toms, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. LondonvA
New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262-
265.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 774 (Sioux, Dacotah, Yanotou).

Dakota Vocabulary, by a member of the Dakota Mission (S. R. BiaOB). JTm
Yorky printed by R. Craighead, 1852, 8vo, pp. 120.

Reprint of the English-Dakota part of Riggs' Dictionary. (See Gramman;
under Riggs.)

No. VI, Sioux (thirteen dialects, Nos. 33—40, m, n, o, p, q. Among them,
No. 34, Dakotah), in the Comparative Vocabulary, etc., to : A. GALi^Tor's Synoptiii
etc. (Archajologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367, 374, 377, 379).

No. 34, reprinted under B, VI, 1, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89, of the Yocabolariei
in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,

M^moires de la Soci6t^ Ethnologique. Paris, 1845, 8vo, Vol. H, p. 264.

Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Hii'
souri Minetares and those of the Sioux. Pp. cxv, cxvi of the: TranaaotionB of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Dakota Numeration (1 — billion), by Phiiander Pbescott, in : Sdioolcnft'i
Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 206—208.

Indian (Dahkotah) Names and Writing. III. Preliminary Bemarks, pp. xxif—
xxviii of: Mrs. Mary Eastman, Dahcotah ; or, Life and Legends of theSiooS
around Fort Snelling. New York, Wiley, 1819, 12mo.

DARIEN. 61

Ed. Umpeevillb, The Present State of Hudson's Bay . . . , London, 1790,
8vo, pp. 195, 196, and Table to p. 202.

He calls them As-sin-e-po-e-tuc, or Stone Indians (from Umfreville).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 263—265.

VI, m., in A. Q-allatin's Comparatiye Vocabulary, aboye quoted, p. 374.

Keise des Pbinzen Mazdoliak zv Wied. Coblem, 1839, 1841, 2 vols. 4to,
Vol. II, pp. 474—480.

B. T. DsNia, of Port Union, Assiniboin Vocabulary, pp. 416 — 429, 432, and
numerals, pp. 429 — 431, of Vol. IV of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Budiments of the Q-rammar of the Sioux Language, pp. 149 — 151 of: Caleb
Atwateb's Bemarks (see Vocabularies).

Sioux Dahcota Dialect ; from MS. Grammatical Notices of Gen. Cass, pp. 251,
252 of: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. 11).

Sioux Spelling-book, designed for the Use of Native Learners. Boston,
Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 12mo, pp. 22.

Stephen Biggs and Gideon H. Pond, The Dakota First Beading-Book.
Cincinnati, Kendall and Henry, 1839, 18mo, pp. 50.

Bet. S. W. Pond, Wowapi Inonpa. The second Dacota Beading-Book.
Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 12mo, pp. 54.

S. B. Biggs, Wowapi Mitawa, Tamakece Kaga. My Own Book. Boston,
Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 18mo, pp. 64.

The printers compiled : A Mother's Primer, and Child's Picture-defining
and Beading Book (after T. H. Gallaudet).

S. B. Biggs, Dakota Tawoonspe, or Dakota Lessons; a book designed for
schools. Louisville, Ky., 1850, 12mo, p. 96.

Grammar and Dictionary of the Dacota Language, collected by the Dakota
Mission. Edited by S. B. Biggs, Missionary of the American Board of Com-
missioners for Foreign Missions, under the Patronage of the Historical Society of
Minnesota. Accepted for publication by the Smithsom'an Institution, December,
1851. New Yorky Craighead, printer, 4to, pp. xii, 412.

Grammar, pp. 1— 64j Vocabulary, 65—278; Dakota-English, 279—3385
English-Dakota.

S. B. Biggs, Address on the Dakota Language, pp. 123 — 142 of : Annals of the
Minnesota Historical Society for the Year 1850-1, St. Baul, D. A. Bobertson,
printer, 1851, 8vo.

DARIEN.

The aborigines of the Isthmus have been hitherto known under
the names of Dariel, Urabac, and Idihae^ Their language was

02 DEGUINUS.

said to be similar to the Cunacuna. Later researches have
shown that four tribes — the Sataneric, Manzanillo, or San
Bias Indians y Choloy and Bayano — inhabit the Isthmus^ who
speak different languages.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Lionel Wafer, A New Voyage and Description of tlie JsthmaB of Americii

giving an Account of the Indian Inhabitants, their

Language, etc. London, James Knapton, 1699, Svo^ map, plates, pp. Tiii, 22 1^ H
pp. 181, 182, 187, 188.

French translation, by Montirat, in : G. Dampier, Tojage autonr dt
Monde. Amsterdam, 1705, 8to, p. 250 and following, *

German translation, in : Allgemeine Historic der Eeisen, Tol. XY, p. 280
and following.

Smith Babtox, Xew Views, etc. — Comparatire Vocabularies.

IIebyas, Aritmetica, pp. 106, 107.

Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 708.

BiLBi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, "So. 631.

X.B. — The words gi?en by Wafer correspond with the Bayano given by

Sceman.

DEGUINOS, DTEGENOS.

The Indians round San Diego — Deguinos, Dieffenos^^-were in a
savage state, and their language almost unknown. Bartlett
says that they are also called CoiJirya ; but Whipple asserts that
the Comeya, a tribe of the YuiJias, speak a different language.
Different dialects were spoken near San Juan Capistrano
(Father Boscara calls the aboriginal inhabitants of San JoiAi
Capistrano the Acagchemem nation), San Gabriel, San Luia
Obispo, and San Antonio.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabularies of San Diego, San Juan Capistrano, pp. 246, 248, 250 ; San Luis
Obispo, San Antonio, pp. 247, 249, 251, by Db. John Soouler, in : Journal of tho
Boyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London^ 1841, 870, pp. 246 — ^851.

Bcprinted, San Diego, W. 2, San Luis Obispo, W. 4, San Antonio^ W. 5, p. 129
of Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

The Names of the Months in Acagchemem are giyen in : F. Boscaba*S CHiinig-
chinich, pp. 303, 304 of : A. Eobinson's Life in California. New York^ Wiky
and Putnam, 1846, 12mo.

Nos. 15 {San Raphael), 16 (Kizh, at San Gabriel), and No. 17 {NeielOj otSamJmaM
Capistrano) of the Vocabulary of Laugungcs of North-western America, pp, 669

DEL.V\VARE. 63

— 629, in : Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Explor-
ing Expedition. PhiladelplUa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. Ilnd.^ pp. 533, 634 :
Vocabulary of Languages spoken at the Missions, "Xa Soledad and San MigueV^

Nos. 15, 16, 17, reprinted under U, p. 128, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The words of the l^Iissions :
La Soledad and San Miguel, ibid.^ p. 126.

Twenty-eight Words of Nctela and Kizh compared with Cahuillo and Keohi,
by Peofessob W. W. Tubneb, p. 77 of : Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added
to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report (in Vol. II of the Pacific Kailroad
Keports. WaaTungtony 1855, 4to).

Des Langues Kizh et Netela de la Nouvelle-Califomie, by Dr. Bfschmann, in :
Monthly Beport of the Koyal Academy of Sciences of Berlin, for September and
October, 1855.

Diegeiio and English Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple from
Tomaso, the chief the Tribe, pp. 5, 6, of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Extract from
a Journal of an Expedition from San Diego, California, to the Bio Colorado, from
September 11 to December 11, 1849. (Congress Documents, 31 Congress, Second
Session, Senate Executive Documents, No.l9). Beprinted, pp.95 to 101, and Diegeno
numerals, by Lieutenant W. A. Whipple, compared with those given by Dr.
Scouler, pp. 103 of: Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's B^ort upon the Indian Tribes,
etc. (Vol. II of Pacific Bailroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Also re-
printed on pp. 103, 104 of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. II.

Twenty-eight Kechi Words (from Baetlett) compared with Cahuillo, Netela,
and Kizh, p. 77 of: Beport upon the the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A.
W. Whipple's Beport (Vol. II of Pacific Bailroad Beports. Washington,
1855, 4to).

Vocabularies of the Deguino or Comeya, at San Diego ; Kechi, at San Luis Bey
and San Luis Obispo, have been taken by John B. Baetlett, the United States
Soundary Commissioner.

See also under Califomians and Cahuillos.

DELAWARE, LENAPE, LENNO-LENAPE.

Belonging to the Algonquin stock. The following are men-
tioned as the three original tribes : — 1. The Unami, or Wanami
(Turtle tribe) 2. The Unalachtgo (Turkey tribe). 3. Minsi,
Ministiy or Munseyi (Wolf tribe).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Hebtas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals, etc.)

Smith Bahtov, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and " Specimen
of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of the Six
Nations.** Ibid., Appendix, p. 20.

In the vocabularies he gives also Canestoga (or Susquehahnocs) words.

64 DELAWARE.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374—376.

(From a MS. Vocabulary of the Bussian General Buttlab, and from
Smith Babton.)

Words, Phrases, and Short Dialogues in the Language of the Lenni-Lenape and
Delaware, pp. 451 — 464 of Heckeweldeb's Account, in Vol. I of: Transactions
of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society.
Philadelphia^ printed by Abraham Small, 1819, 8to.

Pbof. T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape (or
Delaware) Stock of North American Indians, together with a Specimen of the
Winnebags (or Nipegon) Language.

(Contains forty-five words in the Language of the Mohegan, Lenape, Shaw-
anese, Nanticoke, Narraganset, Mansel, Massachusetts, Penobscot, Abnaki, St.
Francis Indians, Messisaugers, Algonkins, Chippeway, Knistenaux, Winne-
bagos.) Printed, with notes, in J. Pickering's edition of D. Edwards' Observa-
tions on the Mohegan Language in : Collections of the Massachusetts His-
torical Society. Vol. X of the second series. Boston^ Phelps and Famham,
1823, 8vo, pp. 135—145, 146, 148. Beprinted, Boston^ Little and Brown^
1843, 8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 810 (Delaware and Minsi).

No. IV, Nineteen of the Comparative Vocabularies of Fifty-three Nations in A.
Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367.
(From Heceeweldeb and Zeisbergeb.)

Beprinted under A, IV, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of :
American Ethnological Society's Transactions.

CuMHiNGS, Indian Agent, Delaware Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, Languages ; 1, Algonquin group, pp. 470 —
481.

Vocabulary of the Delawares in 1792. From the papers of James Madisok.
Ihid.^ Vol. UI, pp. 424 — 427, Delaware (and Iroquois) words.

Geo. Henby Lossbiel, History of the Mission of United Brethren among the
Indians in North America. Translated from the Qerman by Christian Ignatius
Latrobe. London, 1794, 8vo.

A Collection of Words in English, Magna, Delaware, and Mohikan (by Bbt.
John Ettwein, compiled in 1788, from Zeisberger's work, for General Washington)^
pp. 41 — 44 of : Bulletin of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. I. Phila*^
delphia, 1848, 8vo.

Bey. Mb. Heceeweldeb, A Comparative Vocabulaiy of the Lenni-Lenape and
Algonquin.

Bev. Mb. Heceeweldeb, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape
proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, and Nanti-
coke.

Bev. Mb. Hecbeweldeb, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape
and Miami, or Twightwee.

DELAWARE. 65

Kby. Mb. Heoebweldeb, Names of Various Trees and Plants in the Language of
the Lenni-Lenape, or Delaware, distinguishing the Dialect of the Unamis and MinsL
The above four manuscripts are in the Library of the American Philo-
sophical Society at Philadelphia.

Memorandum of the Names and Significations which the Lenni-Lenape, other-
wise called the Delaware, had given to Rivers, Streams, Places, etc., within the
States of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Maryland, and Virginia ; together with the
names of some chieftains and eminent men of this nation. Taken from MS. papers
of the Key. John Heoeeweldeb, during his mission among the Indians of Penn-
sylvania. Presented to the Historical Society of Philadelphia, by Maurice C.
Jones, of Bethlehem. Pp. 121—135, 139—154 of Vol. I of: Bulletin of the His-
torical Society of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, printed for the Society, 1818, 8vo.

Comparative Vocabulary of Lenape- Algonquin, Copte, Archipel, and Temate,
pp. 280 — 284 of: Q-USTA.Y de Eichthal, Rapport entre quelques Langues Am^ri-
oaines et le Copte. Langue Lenape- Algonquin, pp. 272 — 289 of Vol. II of the :
M^moires de la Sooi^t^ Ethnologique. Paris, Veuve Dondey-Duprd, 1845, 8vo.

Delaware Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple from the Chief
of the Black Beaver Tribe. Pp. 50 — 60 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes,
by Lieutenant Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Prof. W. W. Turner, added to
Lieutenant Whipple's Beport on the Route near the 35th Parallel in Vol. II of :
Pacific Railroad Eeports. Washington, 1855, 4to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Dayid Zeisbbbg-eb, Essay of a Delaware Indian and English Spelling-book, for
the use of the schools of the Christian Indians on Muskingum River. Phila-
delphia, Miller, 1776, 12mo. Beprinted, Philadelphia, 1806, 12mo.

Dayed Zeisbebg-eb, Grammar of the Language of the Lenni-Lenape, or Dela-
ware Indians. Translated from the German MS. of the late Rev. David Zeisber-
ger, for the American Philosophical Society, by Peter Stephen Du Ponceau, with a
preface and notes by the translator. Philadelphia, James Kay, 1827, 4to, pp.
188,1.

Translated in 1816. Forms part of (No. 2 of part 1) Vol. Ill of: Trans-
actions of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia, for pro-
moting useful knowledge, second series. Philadelphia, printed by James
Kay, jun., 1840, 4to, pp. 65—251 (pp. 65 — 96 : the translator's preface).
Presented to the Society, 2nd December, 1816. The MS. of the translation
Qn folio, pp. 140) is in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at
Philadelphia.

On the Indian Languages (Delaware and Iroquois), pp. 18 — 23 of: Losseiel's
History of the Mission, etc. (see Vocabularies above).

N.B. — Pp. 19, 20, more particularly on the Delaware.

John PiOEEBUfa, Remarks on the Indian Languages of North America, s. 1.,
1836, 8vo.

Reprinted from Vol. VII of the : Encyclopaedia Americana.

German translation by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8vo.

K

66 DOGRIB INDIANS.

P. E. Dttponcbau, M^moire sur le Sjst^me Ghrammatioal des Langues de qoel-
ques Nations Indieimes de rAm^rique du Nord. ^aris, 1838, 8to.

E. A. Yail, Notice sur lee Indiens de FAm^rique du Nord. Faris^ 1840, 8vo,
pp. 50.

Grammatical Notices — Delaware (from Zeisbebgeb), pp. 220 — 224. Delaware
Transitions, pp. 267, 268, 282—288 j and Comparative View, p. 289. Notes, pp.
294 — 298 of: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 369—372.

Lenapi Wawipoetakse ave Apwatuk. First Lessons in Delaware. J. Meekeb.
Baptist Shawanoe Mission, 1834, 18mo, pp. 48.

Lenapee Spelling-book. Shawnee Mission, J. Meekeb, for the Baptist Society,
1834, 12mo, pp. 24.

Chapter IX, Language, No. Ill, Lenape, pp. 106 — 112 of : Hecebweldxb's
Account of the History, etc., of Indian Nations. VoL I of: Transactions of the
Historical and Literary Committee of the American PhUosophioal Society. Fhila-
delphia^ printed by Abraham Small, 1819, Sro.

DOGRIB INDIANS.

Indians of the northern part of North America, between
Martinis Lake and the Coppermine River. They call them-
selves Thing-e-ha-dtinne,and belong to the Dtinne or Athapaskan
stock. The " Manvais Monde ^^ and Slave Indians are tribes
belonging to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Dogrib Vocabularies, collected at Fort Confidence (pp. 395, 396), at Fort Simp-
son (p. 397), and by Mb. O'Beian, of the Hudson's Bay Company (p. 898).
Mauvais Monde and Slave Vocabulary (pp. 399, 400). J. H. Lefboy, Vocabulary of
Chepewyan and Dogrib Words (pp. 400, 401), and Dogrib Vocabulary, from
Babbett, pp. 401, 402 of: Sir John Eichardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition,
Vol. II. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.

Tlie same reprinted and compared with the other Athapaskan and Kinai Lan-
guages, pp. 179—222, 269—318 of : Buschjcann's Athapaskischer-Sprachstamm.
Berlin, 1856, 4to. ^

Peofessob W. W. TuawEB, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Pogrib (from Eichabdson), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, TacuUy, Umkwa, Hoopah,
Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : B-eport upon the Indian Tribes, added to
Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Beport in Vol. II of: Pacific Kailroad Beports.
Washington^ 1855, 4to.

EHNEK ENOEREKHUNO. 67

EHNEK.

Indian band of north-western California, at the mouth of the
Salmon ot Quoratem River. The language reaches from
Buffalo Creek to Clear Creek, thirty or forty miles above the
Salmon, varying, however, from point to point ; on the Salmon
it extends to the sources. They are a tribe of the Pehtsik
Indians.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GsoROB GiBBa, Yocabulaiy in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of tho United States,
YoL in, pp. 44(>--445.

ELE.

In South America, on the banks of the River Casanare. Their
language has much affinity to that of the Betoi and Yarara.
The Ququaro speak a dialect of the Ele.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Giui, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III.

ENGEREKMUNG.

Called by the Portuguese Botokudos, by others Amoves, Aimbores.
In Brazil, south of the Rio Pardo, in the provinces Minas Geraes
and Espiritu Santo. A plain language, without gutturals, but
with many nasals. The Gherins of Almada sur le Taipe are a
tribe of the Botokudos.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Mithridates, Vol. I \^ p. 459.

J. S. Vateb, Proben Beutscher Yolksmundarten : Dr. Seetzen*s Linguistischer
Nachlass. Leipziff, 1816, 8to, pp. 352—374.

Pbinz Maximilian ztj Wied Neuwied, Beise nach Brasilien in den Jaliren,
1815-1817. Frank/wi-am-Main, BrSnner, 1819-1821, 2 vols, 4to, and Atlas.

IVench translation, par F. B. B. Eyries. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1821,
3 Tols. 870, and Atlas.

Peinz Maximilian zu Wied Neuwibd, B«ise in das Innere Nord Amerika.
Cohlenz^ Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, and Atlas, Vol. I, p. 588.

68 ESKELEN.

AnansTE de Saint-Hilaibe, Yoyago dans lea Provmcee de Bio de Janeiro efc
de Minas Geracs dans le District des Diamans et but le Littoral du Br^sil ; suiri
dc Notes sur quelquos Plantes charact^ristiques et d'un Precis de rHistoire des
K^Tolutions de TEmpiro Br68ilion. Paris, Gide, 1830-1633, 4 vols. 8vo.

Alcidb D'Obbiony, L'Homme Am^ricain. Farit^ 1839, 2 yols. 8vo, YoL I,
p. 164.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 501.

A. D'OsBiGyr, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, p. 164.

Yocabidaire de Botecudes, d'aprfes M. Mabcus Pobtb, pp. 379 — 382 of: Note

sur les Botecudes, accompagn^ d'im Yocabulaire de leur Langne et de quelques

Bemarques, par E. F. Jomabd, pp. 377 — 381 of: Bulletin de la Soci^t^ de Geo-

graphic de Paris, Tome YI, de la 3™« serie. ParU, Arthur Bertrand, 1846, 8to.

Por^u^ttf«6 translation — Pp. 107 — 113 of: Bevista Trimensal do Bio de

Janeiro, 2* ser., Tom. II, No. 6.

Deux Yocabulaires dc la Langue de* Botecudos, recucillis par M. Yictob Bi-
NAULT de Barbaccna. A. Langue des Nak-nanouks (Habitans des Montagues),
pp. 248 — 252. B. Langue des Juporocas, Boutomoras et Craikmouses, pp. 253,
254 J and Note, pp. 259 — 262 of Yol. Y of: Castelnau, Yoyage, .Appendioe.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A. D'Orbightt, L*Homme Am^ricain, Yol. II, p. 347.

ESKELEN, ESLENES.

Californian Indians, east of Monterey. The EkMemaches are
said to be a tribe of the Eskelen, and to speak the richest idiom
of all the Californian Indians.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Jean-Fbanc. Galaup de la Pebouse, Yoyage autour du Monde (1786-1788),
r6dig6 ct public par M. L. A. Millet-Mureau. Parts, imprimerie de la B^publique,
an Y (1797), 4 toIs. 4to, and Atlas. R^imprim^, Paris, 1798, 4 vols. 8vo. (In
Chap. 12 of Yol. I.)

English translation — London, Bobinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to, and Atlas.
German translation — Berlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8vo, Yol. I, p. 388.
The linguist of the Expedition wtis De la Manon. He collected words
of the JEcclemaches dialect.

J. F. BoTTBaoiNG, Relation d'un Yoyage recent des Espagnols sur les Cdtes
Nord-ouest de TAmerique septentrionale. Paris, 1789, 3 vols. 8vo. Second
edition, 1792 ; third edition, Paris, 1803.

German translation — Jena, 1789, 8vo. Reprinted in : Arcblyes Litt^raires
de I'Europo, 1804, No. 4, p. 87.

Relacion del Yiage hecho por las Goletas Sut61 y Mexicana en el afio de 1792,

ESKIMO. 69

para reconocer el estreclio de Fuca ; con una introduccion en que se da noticia de
las Expediciones executadas anteriormente por los Epauoles en busca del pays de
nordeste de la America de Orden del Rey. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 180^
8to, pp. clxviii, 185, Atlas.

Pp. 172, 173, and p. 127 of Vol. II of: American Ethnological Society's
Transactions.

A. DE Humboldt, Essai politique de la Nouvelle Espagne. Paris, Schoell,
1811, 2 vols. 4to (or 5 vols. 8vo) ; often reprinted.

Yol. I, p. 322, of the 4to edition gives Eskelen numerals from the MS. of
P. Lasfen.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 (Eslenes, from BouBOOiNa j Ecclemaches,
from De Li. Manon, in La Perouse).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 831.

ESKIMO.

North of 60° northern latitude. The three principal dialects of
the Eskimo are those of — 1. The Karalis, Gteenlanders, 2. The
Eskimo proper^ on the shores of Labrador. 3. The Western
Eskimos.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of English and Eskimo Words, pp. 203—205, and "A Short
Yocabularj of the Language spoken among the Northern Indians inhabiting the
north- west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at different times from the
mouths of Sabiana and Zazana, two Indians, who were on board II. M. S. the
* Furnace,* in the year 1742. By Edwabd Thompson, Surgeon of said shii)."
Pp. 206 — 211 of: Abthub Dobbs, An Account of the Countries adjoining to
Hudson's Bay, in the north-west part of America .... to which are added
. . . . y Vocabularies of the Languages of several Indian Nations adjoining to
Hudson's Bay .... London, 1744, 4to, pp. 211, map.

Hans EasDE, Det gande Grdnlands nye Perlustration. Kjohenhavn, 1741, Svo.
(Chap. XVII of the language, with a short Vocabulary.)

English translation — A Description of Greenland. London, 1745, 8vo.
French translation — Description et Histoire Naturelle du Groenland, trad,
en Fran9ais par D. R. D. P. (Des Roches de Parthenay). Copenhague et Oenhve,
1763, 8?o.

German translation — Beschreibung und Naturgeschichte von Groenland
In's Deutsche iibersetzt von J. G, Kriinitz. Berlin, Mylius, 1763, 8vo.

J. Andebson, Nachrichten von Island, Groenland und der Strasse Davis.
Mamhurgh, 1746, 8vo, pp. 285—325.

Pafl Egede, Dictionarium Groenlandico-Danico-Latinum, completens primitiva
cum Buis derivatis quibus interjectse sunt voces primari® e Kirendo Angokkutorum
adomatum.. HafnicB, typ. orphanotr. Reg. Gottfr. F. Kisel, 1750, 8vo, pp. 16, 312.
Greenland, pp. 1-207 j Danish, pp. 208-263 ; Latin, pp. 264—312.

70 ESKIMO.

Langue des Esquimaux ot dos Q-roonlandais, pp. 4d4 — 498 of Vol. Vlll of:
CouBT DE Gebelin, Mondo Frimitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Yooabolaiy taken from
]fioEDE. Reprint, pp. 30G — 312 of: J. B. Scherek, Becherches Hiatoriqaes et
Geographi(iuc8 siir le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12iiio. Ibid.
** Eskimo and Greenland Words eomparcd."

nEBYAS, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L, et soq. (Groenland).

nERYAB, Saggio, p. 126, 127.

Table to show the Affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalaska and
Norton Sound, and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux. Appendix TI to
Vol. Ill of : A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction
of Captains Cook, Clabee, and Gobs, in H. M. S. *' Resolution*' and " Disooveiy,"
in the years 1776—1780. London, l7&i, 3 vols 4to, and Atlas. Duhlim^ 1784, 3
vols. 870, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555.

And in Vol. I, p. 308, of: Peteb Simon Pallas, Neue Nordische Beitraege
zur Physikalischen und Gteographischen Erd-und Voelkerbesohreibung,
Naturgeschichte und Oekonomie. St, Petershwrg^ Logan, 1781 — 1796, 7
vols. 8vo.

Eskimaux-English Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expedition. Published
by order of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. Compiled by Captain
John Washington, R.N. London, John Murray, 1850, 12mo, oblong. Pp. xvi,
160 : pp. 2—109, English-Eskimaux ; pp. 115—160, Eskimaux-English; pp. 110—
113, Comparative Table of a few (21) Words of the Eskimaux (or Innuit), Chuckchi,
Aleutian, and Kadjak Languages, chiefiy from Balbi and Klapboth.

J. Long, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader .... to
which is added .... a List of Words in the .... and Esquimaux Tongues.
London, Robson, Debrett, and Co., 1791, 4to, p. 183 (twenty-two words).

German translation, by G. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1792, 8vo ; and by
A. W. Zimmermann. Hamburg, Hoffman, 1791, 8vo.

Captain William E. Paret, R.N., Journal of a Voyage for the Discovery
of a North-west Passage, etc. London, 1821, 4to.

Captain William Edwaed Paeet, R.N., Journal of a Second Voyage for the
Discovery of a North-west Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific, performed in
the years 1821, 1822, and 1823, in H. M. S. " Fury" and " Hecla." Published
by authority. London, Murray, 1824, 4to, pp. 600, pp. 559—569. Reprinted,
Neto York, W. E. Dean, printed for E. Duyckinck, C. Long, and others, 1824, 8vo,
pp. XX, 464.

On the Eskimaux Language (of Melville Peninsula and the adjoining
islands, more particularly Winter Island and Igloolik), pp. 451 — 457. Voca-
bulary of Eskimaux Words and Sentences, pp. 459—464. Eskimaux Names of
Places, p. 464.

Otho Fabbicius, Den Groenlandske Ordbog, forbedret og fordget. Kjdhenhavn^
C. F. Schubert, 1804, 8vo, pp. viii,795 (pp. 10—544, Gronl. Danish; 646—796,
Danish Register).

Words are also given in the same author's : Fauna Grcenlandica.. Safnia^
1780, 8vo.

ESKIMO. 71

Captaik F. W. Bbbchxt, B.N^ Namtire of a Toyage to the Pacific and
Belirmg*9 Strait, to co-operate with the Polar Expeditions, performed in H. M. S.
''Blossom," in the jears 182^, 1828. LoMdom, 1831, 4to, pp. 742 ; also, 2 toIs.
Svo.

Vocabulary of Words of the Western Esquimaux, pp. 620 — 627 of the 4to
edition, and YoL II, pp. 366—383 of the 8vo edition.

Appendix to the Narratire of a Second Voyage in Search of a North-west Passage,
by SiB John Ross, C.B. London, 1835, 4to, pp. 376, plates.

Names of M! ammalia. Birds, and Fishes, in : CAPTAnr W. A. Grjlah, Narrative
of an Expedition to the East Coast of Ghroenland, sent by order of the King
of Denmark in search of the lost Colonies. Translated by C. Gordon Mac-
dougall. London^ Parker, 1837, 8to, pp. 16, 199. Appendix No. II, B, pp.
178—180.

Mithridates, Vol. HI, pp. 340, 431, and part 3, pp. 422, 424, 454, 455, 462
(from Egede, Andebson, Dobbs, and Loso), VoL IV, pp. 251 — 253.

Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 — 5) of the Behring Strait, Eskimo, Kadjak,
Igloolik Eskimo, and Unalachka Languages compared, p. 123 of: VoN Baeb and
Von Helmesen, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Bussischen Beichs, Bd. 1. SL
'Peiersburff, Academy of Sciences, 1839, 8vo.

No. 1, 1, 2, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations in A. Galla*
tin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367 ; and Com-
parative Vocabulary of Sixteen Tribes. J6»(2., pp. 368 — 372 (Hudson's Bay, 1;
Kotzebue Sound, 2 ; Greenland, a).

(From Pabbt, Beechey, Egede, and Cbantz)

Eeprinted, I 1, under A I, pp. 78, 80, 82 ; I 2 a, under L I, p. 104, of the
Vocabularies in Vol, II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 856. Groenlandais propre —
Esk. d. L Baie du Prince Regent (Ross) ; Esk. (Dobbs) j Esk. d. I'lle d'Hiver
(Parry).

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (Greenlanders,
Esquimaux).

Comparative Table of the Dialects spoken by the Bebring*s Strait and Labrador
Eskimo, pp. 369—382 of Vol. II of : Sib John Riohabdson, Arctic Exploring
Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. Svo.

Note. — The Behring's Strait Eskimo, or Kuskutchcwak, from Wbangel ;
the Labrador Coast Eskimo from a Vocabulary of Rev. P. Latbobb.

GEAMMABS AISTD GBAMMATIOAL NOTICES.

M. WoELDiEE, Meletema de Linguse GrcBnlandicse ejusque a ceteris liDguiff
differentia, in: Semestria Societatis Hafhiensis. KafnitB, 1746, part 2, pr
137 et seq.

En Groenlandsk A B D Bog. Kjobenhavn, 1760, Svo. Reprinted, Katiitsio'

72 FLATHEADS.

marsut attuaromarsuUo Malligekseit. OnadaUy 1835, 8ro. Kje ndg. red Stb£5-
BEBO. Kjobenhavtif Missions Collegium, 1849, 8vo, pp. 20.

Paul Egede, Grammatica Qroenlandico-Danico-Latina. Ha^nuBf 1760, 8to.

Dayid Cbantz, Historic von Groeuland onthaltend die Beschreibung dea Landes
und seiner Einwohner, insbesondere die G^schichte der dortigen Mission zu Xbu
IIekbnhut und Lichtenfels. Barhy and Leipzig, Kummer, 1765, 8fo. Fortset-
zung, ibid , 1770, 8vo. Second edition, ihid., 1770, 8vo, pp. 277—287. Beprinted
in Vol. XX of : Bibliothek der neuesten Beisebeschreibungen. JPrankfuri and
Leipzig, 1779-97, 21 vols. 8vo.

JEngliah translation— The History of Greenland, including an Account of
the Mission carried on by the United Brethren in that country. London^
ll&I, 2 vols. 8yo. Beprinted, -with a continuation to the present time, Notes,
and Appendix. London, Longmans, 1820, 2 vols. 8vo.

Eani. TaoBHALLEBEN, Schema Conjugationis Groenlandicse verborum in ok, vok
et rpok desinentium. HafnuBy 1776.

Otho Fabbicius, Forsoeg til en forbedret Groenlandsk Grammatica. Kjoben-
havn, 1791, 8vo. Andet oplog, ihid,^ C. F. Schubert, 1801, 8vo, pp. viii, 388.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 435, 447, 452-454.

A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, Appendix,
No. I, pp. 211—214.

(From Cbantz and the Mithridates).

Brief Sketch of the Eskimaux Grammar, pp. xi, xvi of: Eskimaux-Enghsh
Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expeditions. London^ John Murray, 1850,
12mo, oblong.

Sah. Kleinscsmtdt, Grammatikder Groenlandischen Sprache, mit theilweisem
Einschluss des Labrador Dialectes. Berlin, Beimer, 1851, 8vo, pp. 10, 182.

6h*ammatical Notices concerning the Eskimo Dialects of Behring's Strait and
the Labrador Coast, pp. 364 — 368 of Vol. 'II of: Sib Johk Biohabdsok's
Arctic Exploring Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.

The Grammar of Koenigsee, 1780 ; exists only in MS.

FLATHEADS, SELISH.

(atnah, shouschwap.)

Indians of the Rocky Mountains and Oregon ; divided into many
tribes, of which the Salish, Pondea^ays, aiid Spokein Indians are
the most important

WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Peinz Maximilian zij Wied, Eeise in das Innere Nord Amerika's in 1832
bis 1834.. Cohlenzy Hoelscher, 1838—1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 501, etc.

I'LATUEADS. 73

Ko. XVin, 53, of the : GomparatiTe Vocabulary of Fifty -throe Nations. A.
Gallatin's Synopsis, Vol. II of : Archoeologia Americana, pp. 303 — 367.
{ScUish, from a MS. authority in Duponceau's Collections.)

Vocabulary of the Tsihaili-Selish family, in four branches (northern, middle,
western, and southern), pp. 569 — 629 of : H. Hale's Ethnography and Philology
of the United States Exploring Expedition. Fhiladelphia^ Lea and Blanchard,
1846, 4to, map.

Hale divides the four branches of the Selish into the following languages : —

1. NosTHEBir Bbanch: —

a. E. Shushwapumsh (Shushwaps, Atnahs).

N.B. — A short Atnah or Chin Indians Vocabulary is given by A. Gallatin,
under No. XXIII, 58, of his Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty- three Nations,
p. 378 (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), from Mackenzie, pp. 257, 258 of
liis Voyages. London^ 1801.

b. F. SelisJk or Flatheads^ divided into three dialects : —
aa. c, Kullespehn (or Ponderays — Pend d'Oreilles).

bb. d, Tsakaitsitlin (Spokan Indians),
cc. e. Soaiatlpi (Kettle-falls).

c. G. SkUsuish (Coeur d'al^ne).

d. n. Fishwaus (Piscous).

2. Middle Branch: —

I. SJcwale (Nasqually).

3. Western Branch : —

a. J. Tsihailish (ChickaiHs, Chilts), divided into : —

aa. yi Tsihailish,
bb. g. KwaiantL
cc. h, Kwenaiivitl,
b. K, Kawelitsh (Cowelits).

4. Southern Branch: —

L. Nsietshawus (Killamuks).

In the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, the Vocabu-
laries of O, H, I, J, K, are given under T, XXIII, pp. 118, 119 ; the Vocabulary
li, under U, XXIII, p. 120 ; the Vocabulary F, under C, XXIII, « SoUsh Flatheads,"
pp. 88, 90, 92, 94.

Ad. 3, a, a short Vocabulary of this language, called " Checalish,** is given by
Messrs. D. Lee and J. H. Frost, pp. 341 — 343 of their : Ten Years in Oregon,
jyjeio Torkf J. Collord, printer, 1844, 12mo.

A short Vocabulary of the Flathead Language, and the Lord's Prayer in the
Flathead and Pend d*Oreille language, are given on the last, not numerated, pages
of: P. P. «F. DB Smet, e. S. J., Oregon Missions and Travels over the Rocky
Mountains in 1845-1846. New York, Edw. Dunigan, 1847, 12mo, pp. 408, 4to.

Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of: R. G. Latham, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory pp. 154 — 166 ; and

Chikeeles and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of: Dr. John Scoijleb, on the Indian

L

7-Jj FOX ISLANDS — GE.

Tribes inhabiting the North- West Coast of America, pp. 228—252 of: Journal of
the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Grammatical Kemarks on the Language of the Tsihaili-SeUaik tadlf, in : H.
Hale, Ethnology and Philology of the United States Explori]ig Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, 4to, map, pp, 585 — 542 ; and

Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, pp. 26 — 34.

FOX ISLANDS.

Russian America; continuation of the Aleutan Islands. See
Unalaschka,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Cap-
tains Coob:, Claek, and Qoeb, in the years 1776 — 1780. London, 1784, 3 vols,
4to. Vol. II, A.ppendix 6.

J. Billings, Voyages (Eussian edition). St. Petershwfff 1811, 4to, pp. 121 —
129.

Mithridates, Vol. I, p. 567.

K. E. YON Baeb und Gb. yon Helmebsen, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des
Biussischen Keiches und der angraenzenden Lander Asiens. St Peterahurg, VoL I,
1839, 8vo, p. 259.

FUCA STRAIT.

Between the territory of Washington and the southernmost part
of Vancouver's Island,

WORDS and vocabularies.

Varias Falabras del Idioma que se habla en la boca S. del Canal de Fuca j siis
equivalentes en Castillano, p. 41 of : Belacion del Viage hecho por las goletas
Sutil y Mexioana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca. Mcidrid,
imprenta real, 1802, 8vo.

This Vocabulary is reprinted under No. XXIV, 59, of the Comparatiye
Vocabulary in A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II,
p. 378).

GB, GES, GEIKO (JAHYCOS).

People living on the sea -shores of the Brazilian provinces
Maranham and Gram Para. They are divided into several

I OUAQUES QUARANI. 75

^ tribes^ of which Martius (iv, 80) names nine, among them the
A.o-g^s, Cran-ges, Canacata-ges, Ponkata-ges, and Paycob-ges,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. B. TOK Spix and K. F. Ph. von Mabtius, Reise in Brasilien. Munchen,
1823—1831, 3 vols. 4to.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI^No. 613.

GUAQUES.

New Granadian Indians^ inhabiting the plains on the rivers
Caqueta, Oteguasa, Caguan, and Putumayo, in the territory of
Mocoa (formerly departmento del Assuai).

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Vocabulario Ghiaque-Espanol, taken by the IPresbytero Manuel Mabia Albis,
in 1854, pp. 24 — 27 of: Los Indios del Andaqui. Popayan^ imprenta de la
Matricaria, 1855, 16mo.

GUANAS.

Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-Grosso, on the banks
of the Paraguay. Martius (No. 29) calls them also Guanans,
says that they live between the Paraguay and the Sierra de
Chainez, and thinks that they are related to the Cahdns or Coa-
huanas (men of the wood), whom the Guaycurus call Cayu-
bdbas,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Gkianas (Rio Paraguay), Vocabulary, No. YIT, pp. 274—276 of:
Castblnau, Vol. V, Appendice.

GUARANI.

The most extended nation of southern Brazil and the Argen-
tine Republic, Paraguay, and Uruguay. They were christian-
ized by the Jesuits, under the dominion of whom they lived,
enjoying a theocratic form of government. Adelung (in
Mithridates) distinguishes — 1. South Guarani, or Guarari pro-
per, in Paraguay. 2. West Guaranty or Chiviguana and
Guarayi. 3. North Guaranty or Tupi (see Brazil). Martius
(I, A) calls the southern Tupis, Guaranis.

76 GUARANI.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

ALPnoNSUS Babzena, Lexica et prsecepta grammatica, item liber confessionis
et precum in quinquo Indorum Linguis, quarum usus per Americam australem,
ncmpe Puquinica, Tenocotica, Catamareana, GuaraDica, Natixana, sive Mogaznana*
PeruvicBy 1590, folio.

This title is given by Brunet (Vol. I, p. 259) from : Sotwell, Bibliotbeca
Societatis Jesu Nath. Bibadeneirae. Rome, 1676, foHo, p. 33.

P. Antonio Euiz (de Montoya^ Tesoro de la Lengua Q-uarani que se usaen
el Peril, Paraguay y Rio de la Plata. Madrid^ Juan Sanchez, 1639, 4to j consists
of 8 and 407 numbered leaves.

The author had resided thirty years among the Guaranis. He published
also : Catecismo de la Lengua Guarani. Madrid, 1640, 8vo.

Vocabulario de la Lengua Guarani, por el P. Antonio Ruiz ; revisto y aumentado
por otro Religioso. En el pueblo de 8, Maria la Mayor, VJ2t2,, 4to.

This is apparently a nevr edition of the Vocabulary annexed to : Arte de la
Lengua Guarani of P. Rniz.

GiLii, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 249, 357 and following.

Christoph Gottlieb von Mubr, Journal zur Kunstgeschichte und zur Allge-
meinen Literatur. liwrnherg, Zeh, 1775-1790, 17 vols. Svo, Vol. IX, p. 98.

Hervas, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.

HeryaS, Aritmetica, pp. 95, 96.

Hervas, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, 49, 55, 56, 78, 136, 178, Tabb. XLIX,
L et seq.

Hervas, Saggio, pp. 95, 98.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 458, 459, 466. (From Gilii and Hervas )

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 490.

J. A. VAN HeuvEl, El Dorado j being a Narrative of the circumstances which
gave rise to the reports in the sixteenth century of the existence of a rich and
splendid city in South America. New York, Winchester, 1844, 8vo, Appendix V,
pp. 164, 165.

Alcide D'Orbi&nt, L'HommeAm^ricain. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. I,
p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 276 (Guarani of Paraguay and Guarayos of Bolivia compared
with Carib, Galibi, and Oyampis),

Six Words of the Pullah, Archipel, and Guarani Languages compared, p. 115
of Vol. I of: Mdmoires de la Socidt^ Ethnologique. Paris, Dondey-Dupre,
1841, 8vo.

Deux Vocabulaires de Dialectes du Guarani. Vocabulaire XI. Langue de Cayo-
was (Dialecte du Guaranis), pp. 282, 283. Vocabulaire XII. Langue des Guarani
du Paraguay, pp. 288—290 of Vol. V of: Castelnaxt, Voyage, Appendice.

GUARPES — GUAT08. 11

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. AwTONio Ruiz de Montota, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Guarani.
Madrid, 1640, 4to.

The Arte was again published under the following title : Arte de la Lengua
Guarani, con los Escolios, Anotaciones y Apendices, del P. Paulo Restivo
e S. J. Sacados de los papeles del P. Simon Bandini y otros. En el pueblo
de Santa Maria la Mayor ^ 1734, 4to. Title given by Febdikand Denis, in :
Bulletm du Bibliophile, IX™e Serie, Nos. 10, 11, and 12. Pam, Techener,
1849, 8vo, p. 358. Brunet, Vol. IV, p. 148, puts the date at 1724, from the
Catalogue of Chaumette.

Mithridates, VoL III, pp. 432—437, 457.

A. D'Obbigny, L' Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, pp. 299—302. Ibid.^ pp. 325
(Guarayos), p. 336 (Chiriguanos), pp. 342, 343 (Sirionos).

GUARPES.

Indians of the Chilian province Cuio, who are said to speak
the Allentiac or Mikokayac languages.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.

liTJTS DB Valdivia, Arto Grammatica, Vocabulario, Catecismo y Confessionario
en Lengua Chilena y en las dos Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac que son las mas
Generales de la Provinci^ de Cuio en el reyno de Chile, y que Hablan los Indios
Guarpes y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo. (See Allentiac^

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Lxrrs de Valdivia— (see Vocabularies).

GUASAVA.

A language spoken in the department of Michoacan, in Mexico
(according to De Souza). Latham (Varieties of Mankind) says
the Guazave language is mentioned as being that of the coast
of Cinaloa. Whether it was different from the Maya dialect is
doubtful.

WOEDS AND YOCABTJLABIES.

Arte 6 Grammatica de la Lengua Guasaye, por P. Feenando ViLLAPAifE, de la
Compauia de Jesus. MS.

GUATOS.

Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-grosso, on the Rio
Paraguay. (On the Tacoary and Araguaya; of a fairer com-
plexion than the other Indians. Martius, No. 32).

78 GUAYKURU.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue de8 Guatos. Vocabulary, No XII, pp. 283 — 285 of: CASTELNAr,
Vol. V, Appendice.

GUAYKURU, MB AY A.

South American Indians of the province Cujaba, on the left
banks of the Paraguay, who call themselves Eijiguaijegi, The
Spaniards called them ^' Cavalleros/^ because they were excellent
horsemen. Their language has two principal dialects — the
Mbaya and the Enakaga, and is said to bear much affinity
to the Baskish language. A similar language is spoken by
the neighbouring Juiadge^ Kochaboth, Guentuse, and even
the Payaguas, who, besides, have their own very difficult
language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GiLn, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 367—371.

Heevas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 221—223.

(From the Spanish missionary P. Jose Sanchez Labeadoe's MSS.)

Heevas, Aritmetica, p. 99.
Heevas, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq.
Heevas, Saggio, pp. 106, 107 ; and Payagua, p. 228.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 505, 506.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 545 (Payagua-Guaycuru, Guay-
curu-Mbaya).

Castelnau, Voyage, and Vol. V, Appendice, Vocabulaires, No. X, Langue des
Guaycurus, pp. 280, 281.

On the Payaguas, see : Fragments d'un Voyage au Paraguay ex^cut^ par Ordre
du Gouvernement j lus h, FAssemblee (de la Society de Olograph ie) G^n^rale du
23 D^cembre, 1853, par Alpeed Demeesat, pp. 5—31 of Vol. VII of the fourth
series of : Bulletin de la Soci^t^ G^ographique. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1854,
Bvo. (Pp. 30, 31, Words and Phrases.)

A few PayagwA Words, and some Account of the Payagwas, by Charles
Blachfoed Mansfield, Esq., M.A., Clare Hall, Cambridge ; with Eemarks by
Robert Gordon Latham, M.D., pp. 496—504 of : Paraguay, Brazil, and the Plate.
Letters written in 1852-1853, by C. B. Mansfield, Esq., M.A., map, portrait,
and illustrations. Cambridge, 1856, 1 vol. 12mo, pp. xxii and 504.

GUENOA GUYANA. 79

GRAMMABS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 482—488.

A. D'Obbigny, L*Hoxmne Am^ricain, Vol. IT, p. 120 of the : Lenguas or Juiadge
Dialect.

GUENOA.

Indian nation, on the eastern banks of the Uruguay River, south
of the Guarani Missions.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 228-229.
HsBYAS, Catalogo, p. 46.

GUYANA.

The principal tribes of British Guyana, besides the Accaways,
are the Atorays^ the Macoussies, and the Tiberacottes. Sir
Egbert Schomburgk enumerates, besides the Liagua Geral,
the Arawaak, Warau, and Taruma, the following dialects, as
spoken in Guyana, viz. : — 1. Of the Caribi-Tamanaken stock, the
Caribisi, Accaway, Macusi, Arecuma, Soerigong, Waiyamara,
Guinau, Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa or Maopityan, Piano-
ghotto, Tiverighotto. 2. Of the Wapisian-Parauana stock, the
Wapisian or Wapityan, Atorai, Taurai or Dauri, of all of which
he gives a comparative vocabulary of eighteen words.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES,

Vocabularies of the Languages of Five Indian Nations in Guyana — ^Accoways,
Atoray, Macoussie, Tiberacottis, Guarano. Appendix No. V, pp. 164, 165 of;
J. A. VAK Hetjvel's El Dorado. New TorJe, Winchester, 1844, 8vo.

P. 166, ibid., Comparison of the Arrowak, Atoray, Maypure, Moxos, and
Quichua.

Sib Bobebt H. ScHOMBUBaE, (Vocabulary and) Remarks to accompany a
Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes
inhabiting Guiana, pp. 96 — 99 of the : Report of the Eighteenth Meeting of the
British Association for the Advancemeut of Science, held at Swansea, in August,
1848. London, J. Murray, 1849, 8to.

Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in the Four Indian Lan-

8() HAEELTZUK HAIDAH.

guagcs of British Guiana— Arawaak, Accaway, Caribisce, Warow, by Williak
IIiLLnouBE, pp. 247, 248 of Vol. II of : Journal of the Boyal G^graphical Society
of London. London, John Murray, 1832, 870.

HAEELTZUK, HAILTSA.

Naass Indians of the north-west coast, from 50"* 30' to 53° SO*
northern latitude. Dialects of their language are spoken by
the Billechoola, and the inhabitants of Mackenzie's IHendly
Village.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Alexandeb Mackenzie, Yojagcs from Montreal through the Continent of
North America. London, 1801, 4to, p. 376.

Beprintod, London, 1802, 2 vols. Svo, YoL II, p. 273. German transla-
tion. Hamburg, 1802, 870, p. 545. Beprinted under No. XXYI, 61, of the
Yocabularics to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (p. 378 of Yol. II of the : Archsologia
Americana).

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 216 (Friendly Yillage, from Mackenzie).

Yocabularics, by John Scouleb, M.D., of Haeeltzuck and Billechoola, pp. 230,
232, 234. Chimmesyan, pp. 231, 233, 235 of Yol. XI of: Journal of the Boyal
Geographical Society of London (1841), 8vo.

ITailtsa Yocabulary, by A. Andeeson, p. 634 of: Horatio Hale's Ethnography
and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and
Blanchard, 1846, folio.

The Yocabularics of Mackenzie and Andeeson, reprinted in the Yocabuhi-
rics in Yol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, sub. H,
XX (Naa8s),p. 103.

Billechoola, Friendly Yillage, Fitz-Hugh Sound, Haeltzuk Words, p. 155 of :
B. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of YoL I
of the : Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh^ 184S, 8to).

HAIDAH.

Indians of Queen Charlotte's Island. A branch of this tribe,
the Kyganies [Kigarnies) live in the southern part of the
Archipel of the Prince of Wales.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabulary of Kigarnee, Casamee, Skittageets, Camshava, and Words of other
tribes on the north-west coast (from MS. authorities of Stuegis and Bbyant).
No. XXYIII, 64, of the Yocabularics to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Arobseologia
Americana, Yol. II, p. 880).

HAITI — HITCHITTEES. 81

Vocabulary by Dr. John Scouler, pp. 231, 233—235 of Vol. XI of: Journal
of the Boyal Geographical Society of Loudon. London^ 1841, Svo.

HAITI.

The aborigines of this island (San Domingo) are extinct.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Gii.n, Saggio di Storia Americana, Yol. Ill, pp. 220—227.

(Collected Haitian Words (from Oviedo, Piedro Mabttb, and Acosta).
Supplements, see in : Barthol. de las Casas, Begionum Indicarum accuratissima
descriptio. FranJcofurtiy 1598, 4to, pp. 8—10.

C. S. Rafinesqite, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. PhiladeVphia^
1832, 1833, 8vo, pp. 50 et seq.

Comparative Taino Vocabulary of Hayti, pp. 230—253 of: C. S. Rafinbsque,
The American Nations. Phil<idelphia, 1836, 12mo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 3.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Abdc^daire Haytien; suivi d'un Precis Hislorique, Chronologique et G^ographique
STir I'Isle de Haiti. JParw, 1839, 8vo,

The Haytian or Taino Language restored, with Fragments of the Dialects of
Cuba, Lucagas, Boriquen, Eyeri, Casiri, Araguas. Grammatical Notices and Com-
parative Vocabularies (pp. 215 — 259 of: C. S. Baeinesque, The American
Nations ; or, OutUne of their General History. Philadelphia, printed for the
Author, 1836, 12mo.)

HITCHITTEES.

A branch of the Creek confederation, on the rivers Chatahsochee
and Flint.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. X, r, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseo-
logia Americana, Vol. II, p. 377.)

From MS. authority of M. Eidge, a Cherokee.

Numerals of the Hitchittee or Chel-o-kee Dialect (1 — 1000), spoken by several
tribes of the great Muscogee race. By Captain J. C. Casey, United States Agent,
Florida; pp. 220, 221 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.

M

82 llOCHELAGA — HUAST£KA.

HOCHELAGA.

An extinct tribe of Canada, speaking a dialect of the Mobawk
language. Montreal is situated on tbe place wbere tbis tribe
formerly resided.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

R. Hacklutt, Collection of Voyages. London, 1599, 3 vols, folio ; VoL II,
p. 231.

Gt. B. Bamtsio, NaTigationi e Yiaggi. Venezia, 1606, 8 rols. folio ; YoL III*
p. 385.

A short Yocabularj (from Gabtieb), pp. 48, 49 of: John de Laet, OrbiB Notvi.
■Lugduni Batavor., Elzerir, 1633, folio.

From De Laet, reprinted in A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archaeologia Americaiui,
Yol. II, p. 376, under Y, i3), and Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 335—397.

See also : Jacqtjes Cabtieb, Brief B^it de la Navigation faite ^a Isles ds
Canada, Hoehelaga, Saguenay et autres, et particuli^rement des Moenrs, Lan-
gage et C^r(»monies des Habitants d'icelles. Paris, Ponce lUffet, 1545, 8to ;
Rouen, 1598, 8vo \ and Italian, Prima Relatione della Navigatioifte di Jaqnes
Cartier, in : Ramusio, Yol. III.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 804.

Smith Babton, New Yiews, etc. — Comparatiye Yocabulaiy.

HOO-PAH.

Indian tribe on tbe lower part of tbe Trinity River, in north-
western California. Tbeir language extends to tbe south fork.

WORDS AND vocabularies,

Geobge Gibbs, Yocabulary in: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United
States, Yol. Ill, pp. 440—445.

Pbopessob W. W. Tubneb, Comparative Yocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Hoopah (from Gibbs), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Dogrib, Umkwa, Tacullj,
Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85, of : Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to
Lieutenant A. W. Whipple'43 Report, in Yol. II of: Pacific Railroad Bepoita.
Washington^ 1855, 4to.

HUASTEKA.

Mexican Indians, north-east of Vera Cruz and tbe city of
Mexico, in tbe State of Tamaulipas, near tbe Rio Panuco.

HUD80N*S BAY INDIANS. 83

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

AiiDBEAS DB Olhoz, Grammatica et Lexicon Lmgus Mexicans, TotonaqusD
et Huastecse. Mexiciy 1560, 2 vols. 4to.

Neither Bich nor Temaux Gompans, nor even Brunei, givos the title of this
book. Brunei (III, p. 559) elates only that Antonio, in his BibHotheca
KoTa, Vol. I, p. 81, names sereral linguistic publications of Olmoz, but does
not giro their titles. De Sousa makes the same remark, but gives no titles
either, ...

Cablos de Tapia Zentevo (see Ghrammars).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 8, pp. 15, 123, 124.

J. S. Yater, Proben der Deutsehen Yolksmundarten und andere

Spraohforschungen. Leipzig^ Fleischer, 1816, 8vo, pp. 353 — 375.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 704.

Nouvelles Annales de Voyage. Paris, 1840, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 9—37.

A . G-ALLATiN, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc. (American
!Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 9, 10, Comparatiye Table to p. 114,
and Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 298—304).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Andkeas de Olmoz (see Vocabularies).

Cablos de Tafia Zenteno, Arte la la Lengua Huasteca. Mexico^ 1747, 4to.

Cablob de Tapia Zenteno, Noticia de la Lengua Huasteca con Catecismo y
Doctrina Christiana. Mexico, imprenta de la Bibliotheca Mexicana, 1767, 4to,
pp. 10, 128.

(Pp. 1—47, Grammar; pp. 48 — 88, Vocabulary; pp. 89—128, Catecismo
and Doctrina.)

An extract of this work is given by A. Gallatin in: Collections of the
Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 276 — 286, and also in:
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 106—113.

HUDSON^S BAY INDIANS.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

BowBiE, A Dictionary of the Hudson's Bay Indian Language, s. I. e. a., 1776,
two sheets in folio.

A short Vocabulary of the Language spoken among the Northern Indians
inhabiting the north -west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at different times
from the mouths of Babiana and Zazana, two Indians who were on board H. M. S.
" Furnace," in the year 1742, by Edwabi> Thompson, surgeon of said ship.

(Pp. 206—211 of: Abthub Dobbs, An Account of the Coimtries adjoining
Hudson's Bay. London, 174Ai, 4to.)

si-

ll I' RON8.

PiiOFKHSOR W. W. TcRXER, C»)mparative Vocabulary of Twenty-fire Wordiof
1 1 11 U'jii'd Bay (from Dobbs), ChL»pi»wyan, Dogrib, TaciUly, (Jmkwa^ Hoopah,
NuFujo, and Apiiclic, pp. Sir, 85 of: Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Beport apon
the Indian Tribcd; mlded to his Report ou t ho Route near the 35tli Parallel, in
Vol. II of : rucific Railroad Report*. Washington, 1853, 4to.

A Specimen of sundry Indian Languages spoken in the inland parts of Hudson*!
Bay, between that coast and the coast of California. Table to p. 202 of: Edwabd

L^MFKEViLLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to wMch are added

a Specimen of Five Indian Languages London^ Walker, 1790,

8vo, pp. 230.

German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmcrmann. Selnutedi, 1791, Sro.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 419, 422, 424 (from Dobbs).

LiEUTEyAXT Edwabd Ghappell, B.X., Narrative of a Voyage to Hudi(»*i

Bay, in H. M. S. *' Rosamund," containing some Account of the Tiibfls

inhabiting that Remote Region. London, Mawman, 1817, 8to, map, 4 platei,
pp. 12, 280.

IIURONS, WYANDOTS.

Formerly of Canada. Belonging to the Mohawk stock.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Dictionnairo de la Langue Iluronne, on 72 leaves, in : Fbebb GabbieIi SaGABD
TiiEOUAT, Lo Grand Voyage du Pays des Hurons, situ6 en TAm^riqae, reni la mer
douce 5s demiers conlins du Canada, avec un Dictionnaire de la Langue Huronne.
Paris, Denis Moreau, 1632, 870, 92 leaves, and pp. 380.

'I'he Dictionary is sometimes found separately, and the work occasional^
bound in two volumes, the first of which is dated 1631.

Court do Oebelin has extracted Fifteen Words from Sagabjd Thxoiut:
Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII, p. 501.

N. DE Lahontan (sec Algonquin).

IIeiivas, Saggio, pp. 231, 232.

Smith Baston, New Vie wg— Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 335, 336, 337 {Huron, from Saoabd;
Wyandot, from Smith Baeton).

A. Gallatut, Synopsis, etc., Comparative Vocabulary, V, 26 ^ (p. 372 of Vol
II of: Archajologia Americana). The Wyandot is No. 26 of the Comparative
Vocabulary, pp. 307—367, and is reprinted under A, V, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of VoL II

of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions.

John Piczeeino, in the Encyclopajdia Americana, 1831. Translated iuto Qtr"
man by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8vo.

P. E. DUPONCEAU, Mdmoire sur le Systbmc Grammatical des Langues de
quelques Nations Indiennes de I'Am^rique du Nord. Parity 1838, 8vo.

lAKOXS. 85

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 802, 803 (Wyandot Iluroii).

John JonySTOX) of Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Indian Tribes
inhabiting Ohio (Archajologia Americana, Yol. I, pp. 292 — 297).

Keprinted, with some additions, in the Comparative Vocabiilarj of the
Iroquois, pp. 393 — 400 of: II. B. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois.
Albany^ Pease and Co., 1817, 8vo.

See also : Cofbt de Gebelin, Monde Primitif, 4to {Paris, 1772), Vol.
VIII, pp. 499—504.

Wyandot numerals (1—3,000,000), by William Walkeb, pp. 218—220 of
Vol. II of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Hurons,
Iroquois, Mohawks of Amherstburg, Stone Indians ; pp. 113 — 121 of: Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Fbe£E Gabriel Saqabd Theodat (see Vocabularies above).

From Sagabd, extracted by Professor Fiorillo, of GSttingen, in Mithridates,
Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 323—329.

De la Langue (des Hurons), Vol. IT, pp. 458 — 490 of: P. Lapiteait, Moeurs
des Sauvages Americains. Paris, 172-1, 2 toIs. 4to.

Supplementary Notices to Sagard are given by : General Par?ons, Discoveries
made in the Western Country. (Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences, Vol. IT, part 2.) Boston, L793, 4to, pp. 124 et seq.

Grammar of the Huron Language, by a Missionary of the Village of Huron
Indians at Loretto, near Quebec ; found amongst the papers of the Mission, and
translated from the Latin, by John Wilkie ; pp. 94 — 198 of Vol. II of: Trans-
actions of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec. Quebec, printed by
Thomas Cary and Co., 1831, 8vo.

lAKONS, LOWER KILLAMUKS.

Indians of Oregon, on the shores of the Pacific, north of the
Umpqua River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. 8, T, of the Vocabularies of North, western America, pp. 569—629 of: IIoR.
Haxe, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blancliard, 18 16, folio.

F. XXVin, pp. 99, 101, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.

86 ILLIX0I8 — low AYS.

ILLINOIS.

Indians formerly of Illinois, l)elongiiig to the Algonqain stock.
The Mackenzles are closely related to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

IIkbvas, Saggio, p. 233.

Smith Bakton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 363, 364 (only two Words).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographiquc, Tab. XLI, No. 808.

No. IV, 22, in : A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. Comparative Yocabiilaiy
(Archajologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305—367), after an anonymous French MS.
in Duponceau*s Collection, and partly) under O, IV, 2, p. 112, of the Vocabu-
laries in Vol. II of ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

INGANOS.

Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly
departamento del Assuai).

WORDS and VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulario Ingano-Espaiiol, taken by the Presbyter Maituel Mabia Albis,
in 1854 ; pp. 20, 21, of : Los Indies del Andaqui. Popayan^ imprenta de la Matri-
caria, 1855, 16mo.

INKULUCHLUATE, KANGJULIT.

In Russian America, on the rivers Chulitna, Kuskokwim, and
Kwichpack. They belong to the Eskimo stock.

WORDS and VOCABULARIKS.

Vocabulary of Twenty Words, p. 119 of: K. E. voN Bab and G. VON Hblmbb*
SEN, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des fiussischen Keiches, Band I. St, Peter^hurg^
1839, 8vo.

Sagos KIN, Kwigpak Vocabulary (compared with Tchwagmjute, Kuskokwirojute,
Kadjak, and Naraoller Languages), pp. 488—512 of Vol. VII of: Erman, Archiv
fur wissenschaftliche Kenntniss von Eussland. Berlin^ 1849, 8vo.

lOWAYS.

Indians on the River Des Moines.

IQUITOS IROQUOIS. 87

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. VI, n, of the Comparatiye Vocabulary in A. Q-allatin's Synopsis (Archseo-
logia Americana, Vol. II), p. 376. From Cass' MS. authority.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Bev. Messrs. S. M. Irvin and Wm. Hamilton, An Iowa Grammar, illus-
trating the Principles of the Language used by the Iowa, Otae, and Missouri
Indians. Iowa Mission (Presbyterian) 1848, 18mo, pp. 152.

Iowa Primer, ibid.y only eight pages (17 — 24) printed, containing Dissyllables
and Trisyllables, with English explanation.

Remarks on the Iowa Language, by Rev. Wm. Hamilton, pp. 377—406 of
Vol. IV of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

IQUITOS.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Amazon.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.

I/angue des Iquitos, Vocabulary No. XXI, pp. 295, 296 of: Castelnatt, Vol. V^
Appendioe.

IROQUOIS.

The great league of five (afterwards six) nations — Senecas^
jMohawks^ Onondagos^ Oneidas, Kayugas, and Tuscaroras. For
books on their languages^ see under the different nations.

V

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Specimen of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of
the Six l^ations, p. 20 of tlie Appendix to Smith Babton, "New Views (edition
of 1798), and Comparatiye Vocabularies.

J. Loir&, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to
which is added .... A List of Words in the Iroquois, etc. Tongues. London,
Bobson, Debrett, etc., 1791, 4to, pp. 184—194, 212—215.

* Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 336, 337.

Iroquois Words, pp. 22, 23 of: Geo. Henkt Loskiel, History of the Mission of
the United Brethren among the Indians, translated by Oh. Ign. Latrobe. Xo»-
don^ 1794^ 8vo.

A small Collection of Agoneasean Words (the Jgoneaseah are the five nations),
pp. 271 — 275 of Vol. II of: James Maccaxjlet, History of the State of New
Tork. New Tork^ Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 yols. 8yo.

88

ITE JTONAMA.

Coinimrutivf Vix'iibuliiry uf the Iroquois (and its Cognate, the Wyudot),
p]). 31)3— kX) of: IIknky K. SciiooLCBATT, Notes on the Iroquois. AJUaiift
Ernnhirt H. rftts«»jiinl Co., 1817, 8vo.

A Vociibulary of Gco^'nipliifal Names of the Five Nation*^ compared with the
Fri'iicli Nnmos of the suiiii* places, \* prefixed to : Coldek'b History of the FifB
Indian Xutiond of Canudn. Second edition. London^ John Whiston, Loekjo^
Davis, and John Ward, 1750, 8ro, pp. xv, xri. Many reprints, among others, oi

pp. xi, xii of: An Account of Confi-renced held between Major-Genml

Sir William Johnr>on and the Indian Nations. London^ A* 3d&r,

175C, 8vo.

J. IIow.SE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages — Iroqnoii
(Languaf^c of the Iroquois Indians of CaughnaTassa and St. Begis), Moha«fc%
Ilurons (Amiierstburg, Stone Indians), pp. 113 — 121 of: Proceedings of tb
IMiilological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1856.

Dictionnairo Iroquois et Francois, M, S, C, N, etc., folio, in the Mazarin Libmy
at Furis. (See Haknel, Catalogiis MSS., etc., p. 328.)

GUAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL .NOTIChS.

Langnnge of the Iroquois, etc., with a Table exhibiting the Dialectical Yaristiini
of the Language of the Iroquois, as illustrated in their geographical names; Chi^
II, Book III, pp. 391* — 111, and Schedule, explanatory of the Indian Ibp
(geographical names), Appendix I, pp. 465 — 474 to: Lewis H. MosaAir, LeagHB
of the Ilo-de-no-san-nee, or Iroc^uois. Rochester, Sage and Brother ; New York,
Mark Newman and Co., 1851, Sv^o.

The Language of the Iroquois, Appendix, pp. 298—301 of: Mnv^NiB Mtbtu,
The Iroquois ; or, the Briglit Side of Indian Character. New York, Appletonib
1855, 12mo.

ITE, ITENES.

Iiidcpcndcnt Iiidiaus of Bolivia, on the frontiers of Brazil, on
the wcstcni banks of the River Guapore.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'OiiuioNY, L' Homme Araericain, Vol. I, p. 16i ; Vol. II, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OiiBiGNr, L'llommo Am6ricahi, Vol. 11, pp. 259, 260.

ITONAMA.

Indians of the province "los Moxos/' in Bolivia, on the
Noiiama and Maehnpa rivers. Missions Magdalena and San
Ramon.

lURIS — KACHIQUEL. 89

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
Hebvas, Saggio, pp. 92, 93.
A. D'Oebiont, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. I, pp. 162—164 ; Vol. II, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 572-576.
A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, pp. 239, 240.

lURIS.

Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro. Marti us
(VII, 196) calls them Yuris, and gives the names of ten tribes
— among them the Tucano-Tapuiija.

WORDS AND Vv>CABULARIES.

Vocabularj (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alfred R. Wallace,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. London, Reeve and Co.,
1863, 8vo.

KACHIQUEL.

Indians of the province of Sold a, in Guatemala. The Kiche
(Quiche), and Zutugil (and Poconchi), belong to the same stock.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Benedict db Villacanas wrote, according to Adelung (Mithridates, Vol. Ill,
port 3, p. 5, note **), a Vocabulary and a Grammar of the Cakohiquel lan-
gruage, of which he was Professor at the Univorsitj of Guatemala. Juarros does
not, however, mention his name.

Numerals in the Kachiquel Language (1 — 100), by Colonel Galindo, p. 214
of Vol. XVIII of the First Series of: Bulletin de la Soci^t6 de Geographie*
Taris, 1832, 8vo.

Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Paris, 1840, 8vo, pp. 8—36.

Compendio de Nombres en la Lengua Cakchiquel ; por el P. Fb. Pantaleon db
Gttzman, cura del itinero por el Real patronato en esta dootrina y Cura de S.
Marie de Jesus Fache. £n 20 dias del mes de Octubre, 1704. MS. in 4to,
pp. 336, in the possession of £. G. Squier,

Hbbtas, Saggio, pp. 226, 227.

I)b. Kabl Schebzeb (see Popoluka).

Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Guatemalteca que se llama Cakchiquelchi.
MS. in 4to of 500 pages (of the 17th century), in the Imperial Library at Paris.

N

90 KADJAK.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Benedict de Yillacanas (see Yocabularies aboTo).

P. F. Alonzo Flobes, Arte de la Lengua Kakehiquel j paralelo de las qaaftio
Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy integran en el reyno de Goathemala. AntifUi
Quatemaloy 1753.

Althougli Juarros (1, p. 343) states that this " Arte " vras printed, and had
proTed ver}' useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, when
the Abb6 Brasseur de Bourbourg wrote from Guatemala that he bad obtained
four copies (see E. G. Squicr's letter in the London Atheneeumy DecembaS,.
1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Kachiquel with the
Quiche and Zutugilf all three being dialects of one parent stock. Flores wai
Professor of the Kakehiquel language at the San Carlos University of Ghute>
mala.

Arte du las tres Lenguas — Cacchiquel, Quiche y Yutuhil ; per el B. P. Fsil
Fbancisco Ximexez, del orden de predicadores.

Second division of the Padre*s great work on the history, languages, and
antiquities of Guatemala, existing, in MS. only, in t' e University Library of
Guatemala. (For an account of this MS. see N. Triibner*s paper on Central
American Archaeology, in the London AtJienceumy May 29, 1856, No. 1492.)

Arte de Lengua Kakchikel del usso de Fr. Estevan Torresano Pre^- Ano de
1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris.

KADJAK.

Island of Eussian America. The inhabitants^ called Konages^
belong to the Eskimo stocky and speak a language similar to that
of the Tschugazzi.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. Billings* Voyages (in Russian). St, Petersburg ^ 1811, 4to, p. 121.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 458, 459, 466—468; Vol. IV,
pp. 251 — 255. (From notices taken by Sobeok, Besanoff, and officers of the
Bussian-American Company.)

Vocabulary of the Languages of Kamtshatka, the Aleutan Islands, and of
Kadjak, Appendix, No. 2, pp. 9 — 14 of: Martin Safeb, Account of the Expe-
dition to the Northern Farts of Bussia .... performed by Commodore

Joseph Billings, in the years 1785 to 1794. London^ Cadell, jun., and Dayia,
1802, 4to.

French translation, by J. Cast^ra. Paris, 1802, 2 toIs. 8ro j Vol, II,
pp. 804-311.

German translation. Berlin^ 1802, 8to, pp. 399—406.

KAWITSCHEN. 1)1

Vocabulary of the Languages of the Islands of Cadiack and Oonalashka, tlie
Bay of Kenay, and Sitka Sound, Appendix III, pp. 329 — 337 of: Uret
liisiANSKT, A Voyige round the World in the Years 1803, 1804, 1805, and 1806.
London^ John Booth, 1814, 4to.

Chromtschenko, Journal kept during a Cruise along the Coast of Russian-
America, in : Northern Archives for History, Statistics, and Voyages (in Russian).
8L Petersburg, 1824, 8vo, Nos. 11—18.

Translated into Oerman in : Hertha, 1825, pp. 218—221.

Klafroth, Asia Polyglotta, pp. 324, 325.

Baubi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 857« (Tschougatohi, Konega,
Tschougazzi propre, Konega d'lle Cadjac.)

Vocabularies to A. Gtillatin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana
No. 1, b (from Klafboth) , p. 368.

Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 — 5) of Kadjak compared with TJnalachka and
[Eskimo, p. 123 of: K. E. vox Baer and Gr. yon IIelmbrsen, BeitrUge zur
Kenntnias des Russischen Reiches und der angranzenden L&nder Asiens, Vol. I.
St, Petershwrg, 1839, 8vo.

Jyak Veniaminoy, Samjetschania o Koloschenskom, Kadjacks-kom Jasikaa.
St. Petersburg^ 1839, 8vo.

Sitka and Kadjack Words compared, p. 163 of: R. G. Latham, The Languages
of the Oregon Territory ; pp. 154 —166 of Vol. I of: Journal of the Ethnological
Society of London. Edinburgh, 18 iS, 8vo.

Eskimo and Kadjak words (21) compared, pp. 110 — 113 of the Eskimo and
[English Vocabulary of H. B. M. Admiralty. Zondouy 1850> 12mo, oblong.

Saooskin, Kadjak Vocabulary compared with Kangjulit dialects, Tschagmjute
and Namoller languages, pp. 488—512 of Vol. Vll of: Erman, Archiv fiir wissen-
schaftliche Kunde von Russland. Berlin, Reimer 1849, 8to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A few Notices from J. Veniaminov, pp. 142, 143 of : Erman's Archiv, Vol.
VII (1849).

KAWITSCHEN.

North of Fraser^s River, on the north-west coast, and on the
opposite shores of Vancouver's Island. Their language bears
affinity to that of the Haeeltzuk.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Kawitchen Vocabulary, by Dr. John Scouler, in : Journal of the Royal Geo-
grapbirai Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 242, 244—246.

9:2 KKUr.S — KINAI.

KEllES, QUERES.

Pueblo Indians, linng at San Diego and the neiglibouring
pueblos. The Kiwomi (Ki-o-a-me) or Teguas (Tiguex) at San
Domingo; the Cochitenitj or Quime, near Sandia and Isleta;
and the Acoma, are tribes belonging to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Kcres Vocabularies— XIIT, Kiwomi; XIV, Cochitemi; XV, Acoma — taken by
Lieutenant A. W. Whipple. Pp. 86 — 89 of Chap. V of the : Beport upon
the Indian Tribes, bj Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Prof. W.
W. Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Beport on the Route near the
35th Parallel (Vol. II of the Pacific Kailroad Reports. Wculnngtoity 1855, etc.,
4to).

See al-.o " Pueblo Indians," Lieutenant Simpson's Vocabulary, Ko. 1.

KICHAIS, KEECHIES, KEYES.

Indians of the Great Prairies, related to the Pawnees, living on
the Canadian River, near Chouteau's old trading-house.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Kichai Vocabulary, pp. 65 — 68 of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thos. Ewbank,
and Prof. W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes j added to Lieu-
tenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II
of the Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to).

Fifteen Kichai Words compared with the Pawnee, Ricaree, Witehita, and
Hueco. Ihid.y pp. G8, 69.

KIKKAPU, UKAHIPU.

Tribe of the Shawanoe nation, between the Mississippi and Lake
Michigan.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Smith Babton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies ; and from him, in ;
Mlthridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 363.

KINAT, KENAI, KENAIZE, TTYNAI.

Indians of Russian America at Cook's Inlet and the Lakes
Iliamna and Kisshick. Their language belongs to the great

KINAI. 93

Athapascan (or Tinne) family. They call themselves " Tnaina'^
men. Sagoskin distinguishes four dialects of the Kinai lan-
guage, among which are the Inkilik, Inkallt, and Ingelmut,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

WSrtersammlung aus der Sprache der Kinai (from Davidoff and Rezanopp), pp.
69—68 of: J. von Krusenstern, Woertersammlungen aus den Sprachen einiger
Vfilker dee datlichen Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste TOn Amerika. St. Petersburg,
1813, 4to.

Chtostov I Davidofp, Puteschestwie w Ameriku (Voyage to America, in
Bussian), St, Petersburg, 1810, 1812, 2 toU. 8vo. Vol. II, Appendix, pp. xiii —
xxTiii.

German translation, by C. J. Schultz. Berlin, 1816, 8vo.

Vocabulary of the Languages of the Bay of Kenay, Appendix No. Ill, pp. 329 —
337 of: Ueet Lisiai'skt, A Voyage round the World in the Years 1803 — 1806.
London, John Booth, 1814, 4to.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 230, 231, 235, 237, 238. (From
Besakoff, Davidoff, Lisianskt, and others.)

H, 4, of the Comparative Vocabularies, pp. 305 — 367 to A. Gallatin's Synopsis
(Vol. II of the Archeeologia Americana, from Resanoff).

Beprinted under No. F, II, pp. 99, 101 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of :
American Ethnological Society's Transactions.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 854, 855 (Ougagliakmuzi-Kinaia,
Kinaitsa).

Vow Weangel, in : K. E. von Par and Gr. von Helniersen, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Bussbchen Reichs und der angranzcnden Lander, St. Petersburg,
1839. Vol I, p. 259.

Ttynai Vocabulary (of the Dialects Inkilik, Inkalit, and Ingelmut), from L.
Sagoskin's Travels (m Russian). St, Petersburg, 1817-48, 2 vols. 8vo. Pp. 481
— 487 of Vol. VII of : A. Erman, Archiv fiir wissenschaftliche Kenntniss von
Bussland {Berlin, Reimer, 1849, 8vo) ; and also in Vol. I of the: Denkschriften
der Bussischen Geographischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg {Weimar, 1849,
8vo), pp. 3 . . . — 3 . . . The Inkilik and Inkalit Vocabularies reprinted in : BusCH-
MAITn's Great Comparative Vocabulary, Athapask. Sprachst. Berlin, 1856, 4to,
pp. 269—318.

Wortverzeichniss der Xinai Sprache (from Davidoff, Resanoff, Weangel,
Xbfsenstebn, and Lisiansky), pp. 233—249 ; and Grosses Wortverzeichniss des
Athapaskischen Spraehstammes oder der Athapaskischen und Kinai-Sprachen,
pp. 269 — 318 of: J. C. E. Btjschmann, Der Athapa^kische Sprachstaram. Berlin,
1856, 4to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 232—236.

!> I KIOWAVS — KMSTEXAUX.

KIOWAYS.

Koviii<; Indians of Texas.

W0KD3 AND VOCABULARIES.

A Vocabularv of tlioir Language has been taken bj the United States Boun-
dary- CoInIlli^nioJ^t»^, J«)iiN R. Baktuett.

Kiowiiy Vo<'al>iilarv, taken from ^AmlresNuilares, a Mexican, who was five jean
a <'ai»tin» aniouir f lein, bv Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, on pp. 78—80 of Lieu-
teiirint Wliipplc, Thomas Kwbauk, and Prof. W. W. Turner's Report upon thelndiaa
THIm's, added to Lieutenant Whipple' ;< Report on the Route near the 35th ParaM
(Vol. II. of the Pueifie Railroad Reports. Washington^ 1855, -ito).

Also : Sev(Miteen Kioway Words compared with Shoshonee Affinities. ZAMl.,p.80.

KNISTENAUX, KllISTENAUX, CREES.

(Called also KUllsteno, nortlicramost tribe of the Algonkin
stock, l)ctw(;cu the llockv Mountains and Hudson's Ba?.
Kindred dialects are spoken by the Nelieihawa^ Monsonik,
Nanawchk, Ahbitihhe, and were spoken by the Atttkameg, who
have entirely disappeared.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Edwaud Umfiieville, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which

are added A S^ieeimen of Five Indian Languages London^

Walker, 17'J0, 8vo, i)p. 179 et seq.

German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann, Hetmstedty 1791, 8fo }
gives the dialect of the Nehethawas or Kalisteno.

Names of the Moon, and Examples of the Knistenaux and Algonquin
Tongues, pp. ev, cvi, cvii — cxvi of: Alexander Mackenzie, Voyage from Mon-
treal through the Continent of North America Ix^ndon^ Cadell,

jun., and Davis, 1801, 11 o.

French trauHlution, by J. Castora. PariSy Dentu, 1807, 8vo, pp. 261 — 274.
German translation. Hamburg^ 1802, 8vo, pp. 118 et seq.

N.B. — Tlie Knistenaux Vocabulary is reprinted, pp. 133 — 141 of: New

Travels among the Indians of North America ; being a compilation

from Lewis and Clark, and .... others, with a Dictionary of the Indian
Tongue. Compiled by William Fisiieb. Philadelphiay James Sharan,

1802, 12mo. Also in the popular book : Events in Indian History

also an Appendix containing an Indian Vocabulary, Philadelphia^

G. Miles and Co., 18 i2, 8vo, pp. 529 - 53G.

KMSThXAUX. 95

A Specimen of the Cree or Knistenaux tongue, which is spoken by at least three-
fourths of the Indians of the north-west country on the oast side of the Rocky
Mountains, pp. 385 —403 of : Daniel William Harmon, A Journal of Voyages
and Travels in the Interior of North America .... to which are added ....
considerable Specimens of the Two Languages most extensively spoken ....
Andocer^ Massachiisetts, Flagg and Gould, 1820, 8vo.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 418, 419 (from Mackenzie), and the Nehethwa
(from Umfreyille).

Killisteno, or Cree, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix
(part 4, pp. 449— 459 of Vol. II) to: William II. Keating, Narrative of an
Expedition to the Sources of St. Peter's Biver .... performed in the year 1823
.... under the command of Stephen II. Long, Major, U. S. T. E. Philadelphia,
Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo.

Vocabulary taken by Professor Sat, and printed also in the : Astronomical
and Meteorological Records, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in
the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and the Western Waters, under
the command of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia^ 1822, 8vo, pp. Ixx, Ixxxviii.
And in the Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape
.... together with a Specimen of the Winnebago, pp. 135 — 148 of the
reprint of; Dr. Edwards, Observations on the Mohegan Language; pp. 81 — •
160 of: Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, second series,
Vol. X Boston^ Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo. Reprint, Boston^ Little
and Brown, 1843, 8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 819. (Knistenaux propre, Cree).

IV, 7, of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 805—367 of A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archeeologia Americana (from Harmon and
Mackenzie). Beprinted, partly, under N, IV, 1, p. 106 of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Beiso des Prinzen Maximilian zf Wied in das Innere von Nordamerika in
den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, 1839, 1811, 2 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 505
—511.

Vocabulary of the Principal Indian' Dialects in use among the Tribes in the
Hudson's Bay Territory .... Cree, pp. 322—328 of Vol. TI. of: John McLean,
Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Company. London,
Richard Bentley, 1849, 2 vols. 12mo.

Vocabulary of the Chipewyan Tongue, with Cree and English translations, pp.
387—395 of Vol. II of: Sir John Richardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition.
London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.

Note, — The Cree from a very full alphabetical MS. Vocabulary, found by
Bichardson at the Caultere House (trading port).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

J. HowsB, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined au
Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, 1844, 8vo.

U*\ kOLlM II WKS — KOLCSCHES.

KOLTSCIIANKS, G.VLZAXES.

Iiifliari ii;itir)ii of Russian Aincrica^ north of the River Atna.
Divided into inanv tribes.

W()]lIlS AND VOCABL'LAKIKS.

\'o'<' WiMNGiii., in: K. K. von Bar and G. ron Helmenen, Beitnge znr
k'<-riiitrii<tn tU-.A HM»i*'i-r]uni Kiichs und der angr&nzenden Lander Anen^ S.
I'i-Urnhurn, IHlJll, Svo ; Vol. 1, p. 25(1.

Ilf'priritf;d in tlif?Or<->tt Com pa rat ire Vocabulary pp. 2Sfd — 318 of: BrsCHMUJf
AtliApatkiif'rh'T Sprucli^tainm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.

KOLUSCHES.

In RiiMsiari America, at Sitka Bay and Norfolk Sound. The

Tticliinh'itanH bdonj^ to them.

WOKIJS AND VOCABULAUIKS.

(\. KoKHTKic, Ofm.'hiclito der lUnscn an der Xordvrestlicben und Xordostlicben
Ku^fo vofi Am»;riku. Jiertin, 1791, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 142 et acq. (firom
VtmiunK), I.w, Ifltl, 175, 210 (Croin J^ixox).

A \ityn\tt', round \\w World, but more particularly to the North-west
(/'oanf. of Arn'Tifii, pfTfonnod in 1785 — 1788, in the '* King George," and
"(^ii'MMi (;)inrlottc," (/*aptaiii.s Portloek and Dixon. By Captaik Gcosei
l)f xo.v. f^fnidon^ Oouldin^, 1789, 4to, pp. 32, 360, 48, twenty-two plates.
Fftiiu'h tratiHlaiion, by M. Ltibas. ParU^ 1789, 2 vols. 8vo,
Sarn<:, hy ('aptuin NATHANIEL PouTLOCK. London, Stockdale, 1789, 4to,
jip 150, iwr.uiy platisn.

Ahrid^Minit. of Porl.Iork and Dixon's Voyage. ZroncToit, Stockdale, 1789,
Hvo, pp. 272, rriup and piat^',. Now title, ibid., 1791, 8vo.

Voya;;f! antour du Monde p(Midant les ann^os 1790, 1791 et 1792, par I<. Mab-
r;iiANi) ; \tr^Wu\ii d'lino Introduction iliiitoriquo .... par C. L. Claret Fleurieu.
puriit iriipriiiuTJo di; la RApuliliquc, 1799, 4 vols. 4to. Vol. I, pp. 587 et seq.

Voya^n do La PorouHo nulour du Monde, public conformement au Decret du 22
Avrd, 1791, i;!, r^-iVit^r. par L. A. Milet Mureau, General de Brigade. I^ariSy 1797,
2 voIm. 4to, itn'l atlan.

(/rrmna trariMlation — Jierlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8to; Vol. T, p. 339.

('irvoHTov I Davidokf, Putoscliestwie w Aniericu, S6. Petershurgy 1812, 2 vols.
Hvo. Appendix, pp. 1 et wjq.

Wftrtersammlung aus der Spracho dor Koljuschen (from Bsza^OPF, LisiAlfSKY,
and othorn), pp. 47 — 55 of: J. v. Krusenstem, "VVoertersamnilungen aus den
Spracben einigor Volkor dcs o»tlicbon Asions und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika.
St. Peterthurg, 1813, ito.

KONZA — KULA-NAPO. 97

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 224, 226—228, 235, 237 ; Vol. IV,
pp. 251—253.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 851, 852 (Kolouches, Tchinkitans).

No. XXVII, 62, of Vocabularies to : A. Q-allatin's Synopsis, etc.. Vol. II of:
Arcbseologia Americana, p. 371 (from Davidoff).

No. G-, XVIII, 1, p. 102 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
. American Ethnological Society.

Nossow, Koloschian Vocabulary (German, Eussian, and Kolosch), in Kussian
letters, pp. 271 — 274 of: K. E. von Bab and Ge. von Helmebsen, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Bussischen Beichs und dcr angranzenden Lander Asiens. St. PeterS'
burg, 1839, 8vo, Vol. I.

Eleven Words compared with Atna and Ugalenze, p. 99, ibid.

JvAN Veniaminov, Sapiski ob ostrovach Unalaschkinskago otdjela. (Notes on
the Islands of the District of Unalaschka). St. Petersburg y 1840, 3 vols. 8vo.

JvAN Veniaminov, Samjetschania o Koloschenskom i Kadjackskom. St, Peters-
hurg, 1846, 8vo.

W. ScHOTT, Etwas liber die Sprache der Koloschen in : Erman*s Archiv fiir
die wissenschaftliche Kunde von Bussland. Berlin, 1843 j Vol. Ill, pp. 439 — 445.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan, Xinai, and Koloschian Languages,
pp. 269—318 of: Bttschmann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
W. SOHOTT, Etwas iiber die Sprache der Koloschen (see Vocabularies above).

KONZA, KANZE, KANSAS.

Indian tribe belonging to the Dacota stock, like the Sioux and
Osage, on the northern banks of the Kansas River.

WORDS and vocabularies.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies (Akansas).

T. Sat, Vocabularies, pp. LXXII — LXXVIII of: Astronomical and Meteoro-
logical Becords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition
.... of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia^ 1822, 8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 778.

Beise des Pbinzen Maximilian zf Wied, etc. Coblenz, 1839. 2 vols. 4to j
Vol. II, p. 604.

KULA-NAPO.

One of the Clear Lake Bands in north-western California.

Their language is spoken by all the tribes occupying the Large

VaUey.

o

98 KUSKOKWIMES — KUTANAE.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Gbobge Gibbs, Yocabulary, in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. Ill, pp. 425—434.

KUSKOKWIMES, TCHWAGMJUTES, KUSKUT-

SCIIEWAK, OR KUSHKUKCHWAKMUTES.

Tribe of Russian America, between the rivers Nnshagak,
llgajak, ChiJitna^ and Kuskokwina, on the sea-shore.

WORDS AxND VOCABULARIES.

Von Wbangel, Kuskokwim (Russian and German) Vocabulary, pp. 259—276
of: K. E.Ton B'At and Gr. yon Helmcrsen, Beitr&ge zur Kenntniss des Bussischen
Beichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens. S6. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo, VoL I|
printed in Eussian letters. The Names of the Months and of some Planets an
given ; ibid.y pp. 134, 135.

Beprinted in the Comparative Table of the Dialects spoken by the Behriog'i
Strait and Labrador Eskimos (the former called Euskutchewak), pp. 369 — 882
of Vol. II of : Sib Josn Ricuabdsox's Arctic Exploring Expedition. Loudon,
1851, 2 vols. 8vo.

SAG03KIN, Tchwagmjute and Kwigpak Vocabularies (compared -with Knskok-
wime, Kadjak, and Namoller), pp. 488 — 512 of Vol. VII of: Erman's Archiv for
-wissenschaftlicho Kunde yon Kussland. Berlin, 1849, 8yo.

kutanIe, kittani, kitunaha,

OR KUTNEHA, COUTANIES, FLATBOWS.

Indian tribe near the sources of the Mary River, west of the
Rocky Mountains.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Beise des Pbinzen Maximilian zu Wied, Coblenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vole. 4to ;
Vol. IT, pp. 511-513.

Vocabulary, 2 D of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 — 629
of: HoBATio Hale's Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expe-
dition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.

E, XXII, and pp. 97, 99 of the Vocabularies, Vol. II of the : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society.

Vocabulary in J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Lan-
guages — Kutani, Flathead, Okanagan, Atna; pp. 199 — 206 of: Proceedings of
Philological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850.

KUTCHIN— LENCA. 99

KUTCHIN, LOUCHEUX.

Indians of North-western America, on the banks of the Yukon
or Kutchi-Kutchi. They belong to the Athapascan family.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of the Kutcbin, of the Yukon or £utchi-Kutchi. Drawn up by Ma.
M'MiJBBAY ; to which the Chepewyan Sjnonymes were added by Mrs. MTheesoit.
Pp. 382 — 385 of Vol. II of: Sir John Bichardson's Arctic Exploring Expedition.
London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.

Reprinted and compared with the Athapascan and Kinai Languages, pp. 179 —
222, 269—318 of: fiuschmann, Athapaakischer Sprachstamm. Berlin^ 1856, 4to.

LAYMON.

Indians of California^ near Loretto, related to the Cotchimi.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 234—237.

P. DucBTTB, in : Christoph. Q-ottl. von Murr, Journal zur Kunstgeschiclite und
zur allgemeinen Literatur. NUrnberg, 1775 — 1790, 17 vols, 8toj Vol. XII,
pp. 268 et seq.

Chbistoph. Gottl. von Mfbb, Nachrichten von verschiedenen Landem des
Spanischen Amerika, aus eigenhandigen Auftiatzen eiuiger Missionarien der GcscU-
Bchafb Jesu herausgegeben. Halle, Hendel, 1809, 2 vols. Svo ; Vol. II, p. 394,

Mithridat«8, Vol, III, part 3, pp. 198, 199, Cochimi-Leymon (from P.
Duobxje).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 194—198.

LENCA.

Spoken by the Indians of the same name, inhabiting principally
the central parts of Honduras (Central America), especially the
departments of Comayagua and Tegucigalpa. For an account
of them see "Notes on Central America, particularly the
States of Honduras and San Salvador, etc." By E. G. Squier.
8vo. New York, 1855. Note C of Appendix.

1(K)

LULE — LUTUAMI.

There are several dialects of the Lcnca language^ viz., Guaji-
qiicro^ OpatorOj Intibucat^ and Similaton, of all of which Squieb
presents vocabularies. Sec pp. 371 — 373 of the Spanish edition
of the work above ([iioted, viz. : " Apuntamientos sobre Centro-
America, partieularmeutc sobre los Estados de Honduras y San
Salvador, etc., por E. (Jr. Squier, Antiguo Ministro de los
Estados Unidos cerca de las Republicas de Centre- America;
tradiicidos del Ingles por un Ilondureiio (Don Leon Alvarado)."
Paris, 1850, imprenta de Gustavo Gratiot. 8vo, pp. xii and
384-, maps and plates.

LULE.

Once a powerful nation in South America (Paraguay, near the
River Vermejo), perhaps identical with the Mataras, who were
much feared by the Spaniards. They were divided into Ltde,
IsiftinCy Tokistine, Oristiney and TonocoU, Their language
bears a close rcsomblancc to the Vilela.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Ai^TONio MAcnoNi DE CoBDEBiA (Frocurator-generalof the Jesuits in Paisp
guay), Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Lule y Tonocote. Madrid^ 1732, 12ino.

Heevas, Origino, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 49, 121, Tabb. XLIX, li et seq.

Hebvas, Saggio, pp. 102, 103.

IIebvas, Vocabolorio Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq., 223.

Heevas, Aritmetica, pp. 97, 98.

Mithridates, Vol. IV, pp. 508, 516, 517.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 456.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. ANToyio MAcno>'i de Coedebia (sec Vocabularies above).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 510 — 512, 514 — 516 (from the extract made by
llervas, from Maohoni).

LUTUAMI, CLAMETS.

Also TlamatL Indians of south-western Oregon, near the
Clamet Lake.

w '•■

MACONIS MAHA. 101

WORDS AND V0CABULARIK8.

No. 9, IT, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569—629 of: Hos.
Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
PkiladelpUa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio j and F. XXIX, pp. 98, 100 of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

MACONIS.

Brazilian Indians, nearly exterminated by the Botocudos. The
remnants of this tribe live now near Porto Seguro, in the
province of Espiritu Santo.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Keise des Peinzen Maximilian zu Wied Neuwied. Frankfurt^ 1820, 1821,
2 vols. 4to J Vol. II, pp. 323—325.

BaIiBI, Atlas Ethuographique, Tab. XLI, No. 503 (Maconi de Minas Novas).

MAHA, OMAHA.

On the junction of the Platte and Omaha rivers and the Mis-
souri. They belong to the Sioux-Osage family. The Ponchas
(JPoncars, Puncaws) speak a kindred dialect.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

T. Say, Vocabularies of Indian Languages, pp. Ixxii — IxxTiii, Ixxxi— Ixxxii, in :
Astronomical and Meteorological Records, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages
taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters,
under the command of Major S. II. Long. Philadelphia^ 1822, 8vo j pp. Ixx —
Ixxxyiii.

Balbi, Atlas Ethuographique, Tab. XLI, No. 779 (from Say).

A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, No. VI, 39, pp. 305 — 367 of : Archseo-
logia Americana, Vol. II ; and S, VI, 5, p. 117 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Beise des Pbinzen Maximilian zu Wied, etc. Cohlenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 yols.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 599—612, 632.

102 MAIA.

MAIA, MAYA.

Language of tlie Indians of Yucatan. The Puctunc is a dialect
of this language spoken in the southern part of Vera Paz.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebtas, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.

Hesyas, Saggio, pp. 115, 116.

Hebyas, Aritmetica, pp. 110, 111.

Hebvas. Origine (Yucaten) pp. 29, 41, 48, 121, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et aeq.

P. Fedbo Beltban de Santa Bosa Mabia, Arte de el Idioma Maya reducido t
succinctas rcglas y Semi-lexicon Yucateco. Mexico^ Bernard de Hogal, 1746, 4to.

Pebfecto Baezo, Yocabulario de las Lenguas Castellana j Maya, pp. 215^
217 of Vol. XVIII of the First Series of the : Bulletin de la Society de Qeographie.
Paris, 1832, 8vo.

Maya Numerals (1—10) and five "Words in the Puctunc Dialect, given by
Colonel Galindo, pp. 213, 214 of Vol. XVIII of the First Series of the : Bulletin
de la Society de Geographic. Paris^ 1832, 8vo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 23.

Malte Bbun, Gcnialde von Amerika und seinen Bewohnern. Uebersetzt yon
Oreipel. Leipzig, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo.

Yocabulaire Maya, avec Ics noms de nombre et quelques phrases ^ ToBage des
voyageurs (Spanish, French, and Maya), pp. 79 — 90 (89, 90i phrases) of: Fred.
Waldeck, Voyage Pittoresque et Archeologique dans la province de Yucatan.
Paris, Bellizard, Dufour, and Co., 1838, folio.

Pp. 29 — 33, ibid., in a list of cities, villages, etc., in Yucatan, the signifies-
tion of many of the names is given.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 676.

A brief Maya Vocabulary (English and Maya, with the Numerals annexed),
Appendix, pp. 255 — 263 of: B. M. Nobman, Earables in Yucatan. New York,
J. and II. G. Langlcy, 1842, 8vo (third edition, ibid., 1843, 8vo), plates, pp. 304.

A. Gallatin, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, YucatAn and
Central America, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I
(New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo), Article I, pp. 1—352 ; pp. 9, 10,
104, 108, 298—304.

Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1840, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 9 — 37.

According to tlie notices given by Cogolludo, the historian of Yucatan
{Madrid, 1G88, folio), several MS. Dictionaries and Vocabularies have been com-
piled of the Maya Language ; the principal one having been that of Frat Axokzo

MAINAS. 103

DB SoLANA (" Tin Vocabulario Muy copioso "), and particularly that of Feay
Antonio de Citjdad Beal, which was called the " Calepino," and which, according

to CogoUudo, held more than " 1200 pliegos de limpio."

■i

Another Vocabulary is mentioned to have been written by Feay Bebnabdino
DE Valladolid, who was known by his perfect pronunciation of the language.

In Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 16, besides the above, Andbeas de AvENDAffo
is mentioned as having compiled a Maya Vocabulary. CogoUudo says nothing of
this author. •

GBAMMABS AND OBAMMATIOAL NOTICES.

The Grammars of Fbay Louis de Villalpando, improved by Archbishop
Land A, those by Fbay Julian de Quabtes and by Fkay Juan Coeonel exist,
or rather have existed, merely in MS. CogoUudo mentions, besides, an " Arte mas
Breve," compiled by Feay Juan de Azevedo.

Fbancis Gabriel de San Bonaventuea, Arte del Idioma Maya. Mexico,
1560, 8vo.

Norman, p. 240, says that this Grammar is founded upon the one of
Villalpando, improved by Landa. In Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 16,
an edition {Mexico, 1684) is mentioned, from which Hervas, assisted by the
Missionary Don Bodriguez, had made an extract, the MS. of which Adelung
made use of.

P. Pedeo Beltban de Santa Eosa Maeia, Arte de el Idioma Maya reducido
a succinctas regulas y Semi-lexicon Yucateco. Mexico, Bernardo de Hogal,
1746, 4to,

An Extract from this Grammar is given in Chapter XIV of : B. M. Norman,
Kambles in Yucatan {Neio York, F. and H. G. Langley, 18i2, third edition,
1843, ibid., 8vo), pp. 241 — 249 ; and also in : A. Gallatin, Notes on the Semi-
civilized Nations of Mexico, Yucatan, and Central America, in Vol. I of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society {New York, Bartlett
and Welford, 1845, 8vo), Article I, pp. 45 — 47, and Appendix No. 1 (3),
pp. 252 — 268 ; for which Article also MS. notes of Don Pig Pebez, Gefe
politico of Peto, Yucatan, given in 1842 to John L. Stephens, have been used.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 13 — 23 (taken from the above-mentioned
extract ft Hervas from San Bonaventuea).

A Yucatecan Grammar, translated from the Spanish into Maya, and abridged
for the Instruction of the Native Indians, by the Rev. J. Ruz, of Merida.
Translated from the Maya into English by John Kingdom, Baptist Missionary,
Selize, Honduras. Belize, printed at the Baptist Mission Press, 1847, 8vo, pp. 68.

MAINAS.

Indians of South America, on the banks of the rivers Pastazas,
Nukurai^ and Chambira.

101 MAIPVRE8.

WORDS AND VOCABCLABZES.

IlEBVAft, Ssiggio, p. 9( (Lingua di Ccrros).

IlERVAtt, Catal. (1. Ling , pp. 61, 62 (List of the Known Languages (16) in fhs
provimtrs of Maynas and Maranou).
Uertab, Origine, Tabb. XLVIIT, L et seq.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridatcs, Vol. Ill, pp. 592, 595, 596.

MAIPURES.

Indians of the Upper Orinoco and on the banks of the Ventuari.
Th(;ir language is very generally spoken in the Orinoco regions,
and particularly in the Mission of Atura. Dialects are spoken
l)y the Avanes, Kavei^es, Parenes, Guypunaviy and Chirupa.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

QiLJT, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 44, 35 ; Vol. Ill, pp. 185 — 375.
TranHluted in Ch. Q. Tun Murr, Brcisen einiger Missionarien der Gesellschaft
Jcsu ill America. Nurnberg^ 1785, 8vo ; pp. 106 et seq.

M itliridutc8, Vol. Ill, pp. 610, 617, 018, 628, 629, 631 (Maipure, Avanoe, Eayere,
and Quypuiiuvoo).

Hkuvab, Origine delle Lingue, pp. 80, 104, 120, 121, and Tabb. XII, XIII, L,
LI ct Bcq. ; and for the Dialect of the Avanes, pp. 164, 165, Tabb. XIII, LI et seq.

IIkuvah, Saggio, pp. 110, 111 j and Avanes, pp. 87, 88.

] Tku VAH, Vocabolario Foliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

IfEUVAfl, Aritmeiica, p. 104.

A. VON HuMBOLj^T, Keiso, Vol. IV, p. 128.

]3alu[, Atlas Kthnographiqiie, Tab. XLI, No. 611 (Maypure).

Home (7) Maipure Words compared with Arrowack, Atoray, Moxos, snd
Quidiua, in Appendix VJ, p. 160 of: J. A. van Heuvee, El Dorado. New Torkf
Winchester, 1841-, 8vo.

A. lyOiimusYf L' Homme Am6ricain, Vol. II, p. 274.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 614—623.

'\

MAKOBV — MANAOS. 105

MAKOBY.

^Indians of the Chaco, on the banks of the Vermejo River, by
descent and language related to the Abipones.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebyas, Vocabola'jrio Poliglotto, pp. 16(1 et seq.

(He used for this the MS. of the Missionary Eaimund Tebmeyeb.)

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 497, 505, 506.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
- Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 496, 497, 501, 502, 504, 505.

MALALIS.

Indians of the Brazilian province Minas Geraes, who speak a
language very difficult to pronounce (Martius, I, No. 7).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Seise des Pbinzen Maxibciliak zu Wied Nettwied nach Brazilien, in den
Jahren 1815—1817. Frankfurt, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to j Vol. II, pp. 321—
323.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 508.

MAME (POKO-MAMP).

Indians of Guatemala, speaking a language related to the
'Kachiquel.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

¥ray HiEBOinrMus Labios, Arte de la Lengua Mame. Mexico, 1697*

TerDaux.-Compans (Biblioth^ue Am^ricaine, p. 60, No. 306) gives the
following title : Arte de la Lengua Mame, por Fr. Hieron. Larios, s. 1., 1607.

MANAOS, MONOAS.

Brazilian Indians of the province of Para, between the rivers
Vratriyz, and Chinara, and particularly on the Rio Padavari
**^»-R.xros, VII C, No. 228, and Voyage, Vol. Ill, p. 1125).

106 MANDANS— HAQUAS.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Dialogues in Manao and Portuguese, " Cademo da doatrina pellALiugaa Modm
ou dos Manaos," and " Compeudes da doutrina cliristaa que se manda ensiiur
com preccyto, anno do 1710," on twenty pages, in MS. No. 223 of the King
George lY Collection, British Museum (see Fked. Fuanc. di ul FiOAnni,
Catalogo dos Manuscript os Portuguezes existentes no Museu Britannico. LUiou,
imprensa nacional, 1853, 12mo, p. 185).

MANDANS, WAHTANI.

Indians of the Upper Missouri, nearly extinguished by the small
pox in 1838.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES,

C. S. Bafinesque, Atkntic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. PhUadelfSMf
1832, 8fo; p. 132.

A. Gallatin, Synopsis, etc., in YoL II of: Archojologia Americana, Appendix
No. lY, Yocabularies, VI, p. 379.

(Names of chiefs, from the treaty of the Mandana with the United Statesi
July, 1825, with corresponding Minetare words.)

Mandan Vocabulary, Appendix B, pp. 262—265, Yol. IT. of: Geo. Catid^
Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North Amerieu
Indians, fourth edition. London and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 Tob>
8vo.

Eeise des Pbinzen Maximilla.n zu \Yied. Cohlenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 Tols.4to,*
Yol. II, pp. 514—562.

James Kipp, Mandan Yocabulary, pp. 446—459 of Yol. Ill of : Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States ; and

Mandan and Upsasoka, and Mandan and Minetare Words compared, iiu'-t
pp. 256, 256.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Roiso des Pbinzen Maximilian zu Wied. CoMenz, 1839—1841, 2 vols.4to >
pp. 614-562.

MAQUAS.

Hxtiuct tribe of the Iroquois in eastern Pennsylvania vcm-^
wcstiTU New York. Their language, as it appears by the old^
vocabulary, bears some affinity to the Wyandot and MohaW

MA8CHACARIS MASSACHUSETTS. 107

t a later period we find the Onondaga sometimes called
laqua.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabnla Mahaknassics, pp. 155—160 of: Lutheri Gathechismos Ofwersatt
la American Yirginiske Spraket. Stockholm, 1693, 12mo.

A Collection of Words (English, Maqua, Delaware, Mohican) bj Ber. John
£ttwein, from Zbisbebgeb's MSS. (pp. 41—44 of No. 1, Yol. I, of the : Bulletin
of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, printed for the Society,
1843, 8to).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

The Library of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia has the
following MSS. :—

Dayid Zeisbebgeb, Essay of an Onondaga Grammar, or a short Introduction
to learn the Onondagua, aUas Maqua, Tongue, 4to, pp. 67.

Chr. Pyrlsub, Affixa nominum verborum LingusB Maquaicse, 4to, pp. 25.

Chr. Pyklxus, Adjectiva, nomina et pronomina Lingus MaquaicsB, cum
nonnullis de yerbis, adyerbiis et prffipositionibus ejusdem Linguse, 4to, pp. 86.

MASCHACARIS.

Indians of the Brazilian province of Porto Seguro, on the
banks of the rivers Pardo, Belmonte, and Santa Cruz.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hdse des PRnrzBN MAXiiiiLiAN zu Wied Neuwied. Frankfurt, 1820, 1821,
2 Tols. 4to ; Yol. II, p. 319.

Salbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 502 (Machacali des bords du
Jiquitinhonha).

MASSACHUSETTS INDIANS, NATICK.

These Indians belong to the Algonquin stock — ^were formerly
very numerous^ but are now much reduced in numbers. The
•JkTontaynards and Skoffi^ west of Hudson's Bay, are. related to
them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

JOHir Eliot (see Ghrammars, second edition. Appendix, pp. xlix — liv).

JOSIAH Cotton, Yocabulary of the Massachusetts (or Natick) Indian Language.
Xldited, from the original MS. (in Cambridge), by John Pickering, pp. 147—267

108 MASSACHUSETTS.

of Yol. II of the Third Series of: CollectionB of the ICassachiuetts Historical
Society. Cambridge^ printed by E. W. Metcalf and Co^ 1830, 8to. (Copies
with separate title : Cambridge^ 1829, 8to.)

Contains: Pp. 148 — 151, Notice ofthe MS., with Bemarks on the Author's
Ethnography aud the Pronunciation of the Language, by J. P. ; 155 — 213,
Vocabulary ; 244 — ^257, Appendix (from Eliot's Primer).

Specimen of the Mountaineer or Shesbatapoosh-Shoish, Skoffie, and Micmao
Languages. Vocabulary from an Indian boy, Gkibriel, pp. 16 — 33 of Vol. VI of
the First Series of : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society for tho
year 1799. Boston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8vo.

Smith Bakton, New Views, etc.— Comparatiye Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389 (from Eliot), and Skoffies and
Moimtaineers, ibid., pp. 418, 419.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 613.

Comparative Vocabulary (of Forty-five Words) of various Dialects of the
Lenape (or Delaware) stock of the North American Indians, by T. Say, in Note
15, pi^l35 — 145, to John Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on
the Mohegan Language, in : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society,
Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Famham, 1823, 8to.
Rjprinted, Boston, Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo ; pp. 81 — 160.

Scoffies (from Gabkiel), No. IV, g, Sheshatapoosh (Indian boy, Gabrid),
Labrador, No. IV, 11, aud Massachusetts (from Eliot and Cotton), No. IV, 15,
of A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305—367, 369 of Vol. II of: Archao-
logia Americana.

Also, under O, IV, 1 (Sheshapootoeh), 2 (Skoffie), p. 100, and P, IV, 1 (Mas-
sachusetts, p. 108), of the Vocabularies, in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society ; and an extract, Article I of the Appendix, p. 491,
to : John W. de Fobbest, History of the Indians of Connecticut. Sartfltri,
Hamersley, 1852, 8vo.

SiLis Wood, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns of Lon^
Island. Brooklyn, 1824, 8vo. Reprinted, ibid., Spooner, 1828, 8vo.

James Micauley, History of New York. New York^ Gould and Bank^
1829, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. II, pp. 264, 265 (from Wood).

Rev. M. Heoeeweldeb, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape proper ^
the Minsi dialect, the Machicanns, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano, ai^^
Nanticoke. MS. in the Library of tho American Philosophical Society at PhiU^
delphia.

Vocabulary of the Massachusetts Indians, extracted from Eliot's translatic
pp. 288—299 of Vol. T of : Henry Schoolcraft, Historical and Statistical
formation respecting th3 History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Trit::^
of the United States. Collected under the direction of th3 Bureau of
Affairs. Fhiladelphia, Lippincot, Grambo, and Co., 1851, 4to.

MATAGUAYA — MATLACIN6A. 109

Comparatiye Yocabulary of Pamptico of North Carolina, Natic or Massa of
Massachnsetts, and Chippewa of Michigan, pp. 556, 557 of Vol. Y of: School-
Osapt's Indian Tribes of the United States.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

The Indian Grammar begun ; or, an Essay to bring the Indian Language into
Hules, for the help of such as desire to learn the same, for the furtherance of the
Gospel among them. Bj John Eliot (Isaiah 33, 19, 66, 18 ; Dan. 7, 14 ;
Psalt. 19, 3; Mac. 3, 11). Camhridffe, printed by Marmadukc Johnson, ]666,4to.
Beprinted, with Notes and Observations by John Pickebino and Dtjponceau, in :
Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. IX.
Boston, 1832, 8yo ; pp. 223—366.

Contains: Pp. 223 — 242, the Massachusetts Language: Introductory
Obserrations, by John Pickeuinq ; dated Salem, July, 1821.
Pp. 243 — 312, reprint of Eliot's Grammar.

Pp. (313 — 341) i — xxii. Notes and Observations on Eliot's Grammar.
Addressed to John Pickering, by Peteb S. Dtjfonceau.

Pp. (342 — 360) XXX — xlviii. Supplementary Observations, by the Editor.
Pp. (361 — 366), xlix — liv. Index of Indian Words in Eliot's Grammar;
including Select Words from his Translation of the Bible.

There are separate copies of this edition mentioned (Brunet, II, p. 173) ;
dated Boston, 1822, 8vo.

[Extracts from Eliot's Grammar are given in : J. H. M'Culloch's Researches
concerning the Aboriginal History of America. Baltimore, Lucas, 1829, 8vo ;
Chap. H, on the Languages of the American Indians, pp. 42 — 53.

The Indian Primer. Boston, 1720, 12mo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 381—387.

E. A Vail, Notice sur les Indiens de I'Amferique du Nord. Paris, 1840, 8vo ;
p. 55, Conjugation.

MATAGUAYA.

Indians of the Gran Chaco, belonging to the Pampeen or Pata-
gonian stock.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Amcricain, Vol. II, pp. 109, 110.

The Padres of the Mission of Tanja have compiled a MS. Vocabulary of
this language.

MATLACINGA.

A Mexican language, mentioned by Prichard as being spoken
in the valley of Toluca, in Mexico. De Souza mentions : —

110 MAY0RUNA8— MENIENO.

"Arte y Dicciouario de la Lengua Matlazinga^ j Sermones
y (':itc(*isiiio en diclia Lengua, por Pr. Andres Castro."
Castro went to [Mexico in 1542, and not only learned the
Nahuatl (Mexican), but also the Matlazinga and Toluca, irhich
Di: SouzA characterises as ^'Lengua la mas dificil de la Nueva
Espana/' lie died in the Convent of Toluca, in 1577, leaving
his !MSS. in the Library of Santiago, Tlatelueo^ where thej
were seen by Ue Souza.

According to the same authorify. Fray Diego Basalanque,
who was elected, in 1623, Provincial of the Convent of San
Luis Potosi, jNIcxico, and who aftenvards retired to the Convent
of Charo, composed both a grammar and dictionary of the Mat-
lazinga language. De Souza also mentions that a volume of
Sermons, in the ilatlazinga, was composed by the Pr. Geronimo
Bautista, Franciscan, in the year 1562, in the College of
Tlateluco, in Mexico. He adds, " This language is one of the
most difficult of New Spain ;'' and also states that the volume
above referred to exists in the library of the CoUege just men-
tioned.

MAYORUNAS.

Brazilian Indians of the province do Rio Negro, on the banks
of the llio Yavari (Martius, No. 18Jj, and Vol. Ill, p. 1195

of his Voyage) .

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Majorunas civilises (k T Amazon), Vocabulary XXV, pp. 299|
8vo, of: Castel^au, Vol. V, Appendice.

Langue des Mayorunas sauTages (au Yavari), Vocabulary XXVI, pp. 800,
301 of: Castelnaf, ibid,

MENIENG.

Indians of the Brazilian province of Espiritu Santo, on the
banks of the llio Belmonte. They speak now the Portuguese
language, but used formerly a dialect of the Kamakan.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Eeise des Peinzen Maximilian von Neuwied, etc. Frankfufi^ 1820, 1821i
2 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 212.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No, 506.

MENOMONIES — MEXICAN. Ill

MENOMONIES.

[ndians of the Algonkin stock, north of Green Bay, Wisconsin,
between the Chippeways and Winncbagos.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Oomparison of Words and Sentences in the Dialects of the Ottawaws and Mc-
nomonies, pp. 392 — 398 of: A NarratiTe of the Captivity and AdvoDturcs of John

Tanner, daring Thirty Years' Bcsidenco among the Indians Edited by

Sdwin James, M.D. New York^ a. and C. and H. Carvill, 1830, 8vo.

Kg. rV, 25, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Ghillatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in Vol. II of: Archieologia Americana, pp. 305—367, from D. Doty (MS.),
James, and Notices in the Department of War, United States. Kcprintcd under
O, IV, 5, p. 113, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of tlie : Transactions of the Ameri-
can Ethnological Society.

Menomony Vocabulary, by Mr. Beuce, Indian agent at Green Bay, pp. 470 —
481 of VoL II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

MESSISSAUGER.

Indians of the Algonkin stock, south of Lake Superior.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Smith Babtoit, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 415, 416 (from Smith Baston).

No. IV, f, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, Vol. II of: Archajo-
logla Americana, p. 375 (from Smith Barton).

Comparative Vocabulary, etc., of T. Say (Notes to John Pickering's edition of
Edwards's Observations on the Mohcgan Language, in : Collections of the Massa-
chusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boston^ printed by Phelps and
Famham, 1823, 8vo. Beprintcd, Boston, Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo ; pp. 135 —
145.

MEXICAN, NAHUATL, AZTEK.

«

The Mexican language, properly called '^Nahuatl," seems to
have been used from the valley of Mexico down to Nicaragua,
It was spoken originally by the Nahuatlacs, occupying the valley
of Mexico, or Anahuac ; and the Tolteks, in subjugating the
Nahuatlacs, are said to have adopted their language. The

112

MEXICAN.

Spaniards, finding the Aztcks at the head of the Chichimek
Empire, the denomination "Azteks" has also promiscnoiuly
been nsed for ilcxican, or Xahuatl. The languages spoken by
the Ni([uirans of Niearagua, and the Tlascalteks of San Salvador
are dialects of the Nahuatl.

WORDS AND VOCABULAKIE8.

Andres de Olmos (see Grammars).

Frat Alonso de Molika, VocabuLirio en Lengua Castellana 7 Mezioana, con-
puesto por cl muy rovercnclo Padro Fr. Alonso de Molina, de la Orden del bna
aveiiturando nucstro Pudre San Francisco. Dirigido al may excelente Seiior
D. Martin Enriquez, yisorrcy desta Nueva Espanna. En Mexico^ en ca» ds
Antonio Spinosa, 1571, 2 parts, in 1 toI. folio.

First part : Yocabulario en liCngua Castellana y Mexicana, 4to, 126 letTM.

Second part : Yocabulnrio en Lengua Mcxicana y Castellana, 2, 162 leaTO.

The Dcdioition is dated 1569. The: Yocabulario en Lengua Gaatellanay
Mexioniia (Mexico, 1555, 4to), mentioi^ed by Antonio in his BibUoteei
llispaua Nova, I, 37, may therefore be a miatake, and refer to the Vocabnlaiy
of De Olmos, annexed to the Grammar of the same author.

Didlogos en Lengua Mcxicana, por Fb. Elias de San Juan Bautista. Mmeo,
1598, 8vo.

Pedro de Arenas, Yocabulano Manual de las Lenguas Castellana y Mexicaxu.
MpxicOy Henrico Martinez, s. a. (privilege, dated 1611), small 12mo. fieprinted,
ihid., 1728, in 12mo, and 1793, in 12mo.

Yocabulario Manual de las Lenguas Castellana y Mexicana, en que se oontienen
las palabras, prcguntas y respuestas mas comunes y ordinarias que se suelen
ofrecer en el trato y comunication entrc Espafioles k Indies. Compaesto por
Pedro de Arenas. Reimpreso en Pvebia, en la Imprenta del Hospital de S.
Pedro a cargo del C. Manuel Buen Abad. Ano de 1831, 12mo ; pp. 11,131.

Two parts : Spanish-Mexican, pp. 1 — 93 ; Mexican-Spanish, pp. 94 — ^181.

A short Yocabulary, p. 241 of: Joan, de Laet, Kotus Orbis. Xtf^dtfm Saior
vorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio.

GiLiT, Saggio di Storia Americana, Yol. Ill, pp. 228, 355 et seq.

Diccionario Espafiol y Mexicauo, pp. 248, 8vo, 1742 (sine looo et auctore) ; in
the collection of C. A. Uhdo, Esq.

Ant. Court de Gebelin, Monde Primitif, Yol. YIII. Paris, 1772 ; pp.' 628,
521,, 525. Reprinted on pp. 332—334 of: J. B. Scherer, Becherohea Histo-
nques et G^ographiques sur le Nouvcau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo.

R. Forsteb, Bemerkungcn auf seiner Reise um die Welt. Berlm, 1788, 8t«S
p. 251.

Hervas, Saggio, pp. 116^118.

MEXICAN. 113

HxBTAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

Hebtas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 120, 121, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI
et seq.

Hebvas, Aritmetica, pp. 63, 64, 107—109.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, gi?es also words
of the Indians of Colhua.

KouyeUes Annales des Voyages, Paris, 1840, 8vo ; Vol. IV, pp. 8 — 36,

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 701 (Azt^que).

' Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 87, 88, 105, 106, 212, 213.

A. G-ALLATIK, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc., Vol. I of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Neto York, Bartlett and
Welford, 1845, 8vo; pp. 9, 10, 298—304.

E. G, Sqitieb, Nicaragua. New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo j Vol. II,
p. 314 (compared with Niquiran, which is a Mexican dialect).

American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. Ill, p. 101.

Kahual Vocabulary of the Balsam Coast (San Salvador) and of Tzalco,
pp. 851, 352 of : E. 0-. Squieb, Notes on Central America, particularly the States
of Honduras and San Salvador. New York, Harpers, 1855, 8vo.

Aztec G-lossary in : Evangeliarium, Epistolarium eULectionarium Aztecum, sive
Mexicanum, ex antiquo oodice authographoBEBNABDiNi Sahagun^ii depromptum,
nunc primum cum interpretatione, adnotationibus, glossario edidit B. Biondelli.

This important monument of the ancient Aztec language will be published
at Milan, in 5 parts, 4to, vnth fac-similes.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Akdbxb db Olmoz, Ars et Vocabularium Mexicanum. Mexiciy 1555, 4to.

Brunot (III, p. 559) gives this title from Equiara.

Vater gives the following title: A, de Olmoz, Grammatica et Lexicon
LingusB Mexicans, Totanacee et Iluaxtecse. Mexico, 1555, 1560; 2 vols. 4to.

In the Mithridates, III, 3, p. 92, the same title is given, but added to it :
Cum Catechismo, Evangeliis, Epistolisque Mexicanice. Mexico, 1560, 2 vols.
4to.

Olmoz also wrote a Vocabulario Megicano, an Arte and Vocabulario in the
Totonaca language, and an Arte, Vocabulario, Catecismo, Confessionario, and
Sermons in the Huaxteco or Huasteca language.

The Vocabularium Mexicanum {Mexici, 1855 4to) is sometimes mentioned
as a separate work.

AiiONSO DE Molina, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana y Castellana. Mexico, en
■ casa de Petro de Ocharte, 1571, 8vo.

Fadbb Antonio del Rincon, dela Compaiiia de Jesus (Natural de S. Puebla
de Ids Angelos), Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1595, small 8vo. Ee-
'printed) ibid,, 1598, 12mo.

Q

Ill MEXICAN.

D. P. DiEOO DE Galdo Guzhax, del Orden da S. Aag., Arte Mexkuo i
Gramatica do la Lengua Mexicana. En Mejico^ yidua do Bernardo Calderon, 164S,
8vo (Mitliridatcs, III, 3, p. 91, " 16^42," 8yo).

HoBACio Carocqi, Arte Mexicano Gopioso, para que sin maeatro se paedi
aprender la Lengua. Mexico^ 1645, 4to.

^rithridatcs, III, 3, p. 92, gives the same title, but in Latin : ArsCopio-
sissima Lingiuc Mexicans ut sine magistro possis iUam condisoere. JfensJ^
1615, 4to.

The following may be either an extract from or a new edition of the boolc :—

Compendio del Arte dc la Lengua Mexicana del P. HoBACio Cajioohi

dispuesto con brevedad, claridad y propiedad por el P. Ignatio de Faiedek
Mexico, en la imprenta de la Biblioteca Mexicana, 1759, 4to, pp. 24, 202.

Padke F. Augustin de Vetancubt, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. JfiscioSi
1673, 4to, 49 leaves.

Arte de la Lengua Mexicana, compucsto por el Bachilleb Dok AirroiTO
Vasquez Gastelu El Eey de Figuecoa, Catredr&.tico de dicha Lengua en loi
Keales CoUegios de San Pedro y San Juan. Sacalo a luz por orden del illustr. Sr.
Dr. D. Manuel Fernandez de Santa Cruz, Obispo de Puebla. JFuehla de ha
Angelas, 1689, 4to, 53 leaves. Bcprinted, Mexico, 1693, 4to. Beprinted, Gcnr*
rcgido segun su original, por el Br. D. Antonio de Olmeda y Torre. Metko^
1716, 4to. Another edition, Puebla, 1726, 8vo, pp. 55.

■

Arte de la Lengua Megicana segun el Dialecto de los Pueblos de la Nueva Gil-
licia, por Fb. Juan Gueeba. Mexico, 1699, 4to.

Fbancisco de Avila, Predicador, cura ministro por su Majestad del Pueblo de
la Milpar y lector de Idioma Mexicaua, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana y breves platicas
de los mysterios de N. Santa Fe catolica y otras para exortacion de su obligation
a los Indios. Mexico, 1717, small Svo, pp. 78.

P. F. Manuel Pebez, Arte de el Idioma Moxicano. Mexico, pp. 98.

Cablos de Tafia Zenteno, Arte Kovissima de la Lengua Miexicana. Mexico,
Viuda de Bernardo Hogal, 1753, 4to, pp. 22, 58.

D. Jose Augubtin de Aldama y Gueyaba, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana.
Mexico, en la imprenta de la Biblioteca Mexicana, 1754, 4to.

GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Yol. Ill, pp. 228 et seq., 355 et seq.

Batael db Sakdoyal, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1810, 8vo,
pp. 62.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 93—104.

Nouvelles Annalos des Voyages. Paris, 1840, Svo ; Vol. IV, pp. 8 — 36.

Consulta a los estudiosos sobre la Lengua Mexicana, in the : Museo Mexicano.
Mexico, 1843, Svo ; No. 2, Vol. I (April 15, 1843), pp. 251—253.

A. Gallatin, Grammatical Notices Mexican Language, Appendix 1

to his Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, in Vol. I of the : Transao-

MEXICAN. 115

tionB of the Amerioan Bthnologioal Society. New Torh^ Bartlett and Welford,
1845, 870; pp. 215—245.

(From the Grammars of CABOCni and Tapia Zexteno.)

JoH. Kabl £d. Buschmakk, Uber die aztekischen Ortsnamon. Erete Abthcilung.
SerUn^ Diimmler, 1853, 4to, pp. 205. More particularly pp. 20 — 37, 140 — 172
(the Aztek Language in Nicaragua).

MANUSCRIPTS.

Arte de la Lengua Megicana, per Fb. Alonso Banoel, provincial de Tula
(1529—1546), according to De Souza.

FoGHBB (Fb. Juan) was one of the earliest ecclesiastics of Mexico, where he
died, 1572. Wrote, according to Torqucmada : Arte de la Lengua Megicana.

Fa. AsTONio Padilla Dayila, native of Mexico, and Member of the Imperial
Convent of that city in 1576, wrote: Arte para uprciider la Lengua Megicana;
which is highly spoken of by Fiuelo and Antonio.

Arte de la Lengua Chichimeca, Diccionario de la Misma, y Catecismo en la Misma,
por P. DiXGO Diaz Fangua, natural de Durango. Pangua died 1631, leaving,
according to De Souza, this M3.

Don Babtolhi Alya translated three poems of Lope de Yega into Mexican,
-which, according to De Souza, are preserved in the Library of the College of San
Oregorio, in Mexico.

Slementos de la Gram&tica Megicana, por Don Antonio Tobab Cano y
MoOTSZUHA, 1662. MS , according to Eguiara.

Tocabularios y Diidogos Megicanos, por Juan Fbancisco Ibaqobbi. Written
about the year 1780, and, according to De Souza, in the Library of the University
of Mexico.

Arte -de los artes, 6 Florilegio de los artes de la Lengua Megicana, que se han
jEIscrito ; y en que con nuero y facil modo se ensefia su Gramatica, por Fb.
Antonio Bosa Lopez Figueboa. MS. in the Convent of San Francisco, in
Mexico.

- Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Megicana, preparados para las perusas, por
!Fbay Diego Osobio, Cura de Chalco y de S. Jose de Megico.

Beglas para apreuder con facilidad la Lengua Megicana, por Fb. Bebnabe Paez,
Catedrdtico de Idioma Megicano en la Uni?er8idad de Megico. MS., according to
iEguiara.

Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Megicana, por lUmd. D. Fb. Juan Ayoba,
Obispo de Miohoacan ; mentioned in the Cronica de la Provincia de San G-regorio.

Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Megicana, por Fb. Fbancisco Solcedo. 4to,
in the Library of the Franciscan Convent of Guatemala.

Arte, Vocabulario, y Catecismo Megicanos, por Illm6. D. Fe. Fbancisco
XncxNEZ, primero Obispo de Oaxaca. Died in Mexico, and, according to De Souza,
was the first who composed a grammar of the Mexican language.

116 MIAMI.

Arte de la Lengua Megicana, y Diccionario trilingue Latino, Espanol, y Meg-K_
cano, por Fb. Beeitardino Sahagun. MS., probably in the Conyent of S»^^»
Francisco, in Mexico.

Meecado (P. Nicolas), Jesuit of Mexico, 1700: went us Missionary fc^<;
Cinaloa, where he was the first to discover that the Indians of the south coa.^^
spoke a dialect of the Mexican, in consequence of which he wrote : Arte de la
Lengua Megicana, segun el dialecto que usan los Indios de la Costa del sur <2«
Cinaloa.

MIAMI.

Indians of the Algonquin stock, formerly of the eastern part of
Upper Louisiana, now west of the Mississippi. The lUinm
and the Piankashaws are related to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

C. F. VOLNET, Tableau du Climat et du Sol des Sitats Unis d'Am^rique, suivi

d*eclaircissements sur les sauvages. Paris, 1803, 2 vols. 8to ; Tome II,

p. 433.

Nouvelle edition, Paris, 1822, 2 parts in 1 vol. 8vo, p. 402.

Unglish translation, bj C. B. Brown, A View of the Soil and Climate of

the United States of America, ^ith supplementary remarks on

the Aboriginal Tribes of America, by C. F. Volney. Fhiladelphia, 1804, 8vo,

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 363, 364 (from Volney and Babton).

BaIiBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 808 (Miami, Illinois).

No. IV, 21, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, &Ci, in
Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305, 367 (from MS. authorities of J.
Thoenton, and in the War Department).

And (partly) Or. N., 1, p. 112, of the Vocabularies in Vol. 11 of the : Tritosac-
tions of the American Ethnological Society.

Chaeles Handy, Indian agent, Miami Vocabulary, pp. 470, 481 of Vol. H
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

N.B.— In the library of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia
are: —

MS. Vocabulary of the Miami, by Volney.

MS. of a Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape and Miami, or
Twightwee.

• MS. of the Miami, from the mouth of the Little Turtle, and of the inter-
preter William. Wells, by W. Thoenton.

MIJE — MIKMAK. 117

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATIHAL NOTICES.

>LinEY (see Vocabularies).

■tea, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 353—356 (from Volnet).

MIJE (MIXE?).

language. According to De Souza, the Fray Fernando
o, native of Anteguera, in Oaxaca. and prior of the
an convent of that town, passed a considerable part
ife amongst the Mije Indians, and perfected himself
language, which, this author adds, " was very difficult
Dunce, as well as to write in Roman characters.^'
o died in 1703, leaving in the hands of Fr. Antonio
s, vicar of Quezaltepec, in Oaxaca, the following
-" Vocabulario de la Lengua Mije /' " Sermones en
Mije y en Castellano.'' A copy of the first was also
i in the convent of Tuquila.

^RAY Marcos Benito, according to the same authority,
y of the Dominican convent of Valencia del Cid, went
ica as missionary amongst the Mije Indians, and com-
* Arte de la Lengua Mije, y Devocionario Manual de los
s del Rosario, en la Misma Lengua.^'

MIKMAK.

lame for the inhabitants of Acadia, Nova Scotia, New
ck, and Maine. The following are considered dialects
^likmak: — 1. Nova Scotia-, 2. Terre neuve Island',
liramichi of New Brunswick. They are closely related
tchemins and Souriquois.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

3 of the Mountaineer, or Shesha-tapoosh-shois, Skoffie, and Micmac
(by the Indian hoy Gabriel), pp. 16—33 of Vol. VI of the First Series
)llections of the Massachusetls Historical Society for the year 1799.
Inted by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8vo.

ites, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 401 — 404 (from the boy Gabriel).

118

MIKOKAYAK.

Balbi, Atlaa Etlinographii|Uo, Tub. XLI, No. 817 (QaBpesien et Mikmak).

No. IV, 12, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc,
(Viil. II of : Ari'haMilogia Aiuerioana, pp. 305 — 367), and under Q, IV, 3, p. 109, of
the Vocabularies, Vol. II of : Aiiieriean Ethnological Society's Transactions.

The Indian of New England and the North-eastern ProYlnces : A Sketch of
the Life of an luilian Hunter — Ancient Traditions relating to the Etchemin Tribe,
their Mode» of Life, Fishing, Iluuting, etc. ; with Vocabularies in the Indian and
English, giving the Names of the Animals, Birds, and Fish, the most complete Unt
has bt-vn given for New England in the Languages of the Etchemins and ^inpf*-
These ore now the onlv Indian tribes to the north-east, the former inhabitanto
of New England, that have preserved their language entire, being the oldest and
purest Indian spoken in the Kastern States. This book is the only work of iti
kind to be had. It contains the elements of the Indian tongue, and much tbatii
new to tl)e rt^ailing publii-, especially the names by which the red men of the fomfc
designated the natural objects before them. Jliddletown, CoHHeciieui, ChariM
II. IVlton, printer, 1851, 12mo, pp. 21.

The first edition had on the title-page the words — "Derived from Kicou
Tenesles, by a Citizen of Middletown." Afterwards, this was croYered by a
slip of paper, bearing the words— "By Joseph Bakbatt, M.D., Member of
several Learned Societies." Tlie preface is signed J. B. Hie book is written
by the said Nicola Tenesles.

Vocabularies of the Apache and Miemac Languages (the Micmac by S. T. Ravd,
Protestant Mission at Halifax, December 10, 1853), pp. 578—589 of Vol. V
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the Unite J States.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Miemac, from P. MAYXAitD's MS. Notes in: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archttologia Americana, Vol. II), pp. 227—232.

Nicola TEXESLEi^, by Joseph Barratt, M.D. (see Vocabubirios).

MIKOKAYAK, :MILC0CAYAC,

Language spoken by tlie Indians of the Chilian province of
Cuio.

WUUDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Guarpos y otros. Luna, 1607, 8vo.

GRAMMARS AND GUAMMAIICAL NOTICES.
LUTS dk.Valdivu (see Vocabularies).

MILICITE — MINETARES. 119

MILICITE.

Indians of New Brunswick, belonging to the Huron stock.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

S. T. Band, Milicite Numerals (1—1,000,000,000), pp. 690, 691 of Vol. V of
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

MINETARES.

Indians on both sides of Knife River. Their language has
tliree dialects, viz. : 1. The Minctare proper, called also " Gros-
ventre" Bigbellies, Ehatsar, 2. The Alasar or Fall Indians,
3. The Kattanahaws.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.

E. UirFBETiLLB, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which are

added .... a Specimen of Five Indian Languages. London^ Walker, 1790, 8?o.
German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmsiadi, 1791, 8vo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254 (of Fall Indians, from Umfeeville).

Pbofessob T. Say, Vocabularies of Indian Languages, in : Astronomical and
meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the

Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi under the command of Major

S. H. Long. Fhiladelphia, 1822, 4to ; pp. Ixxii — Ixxviii, Ixxxiv— Ixxxv.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 780.

Beise des Pbinzbn Maximilian zu Wied, etc. Cohlenz, 1839—1841, 2 vols.
4to 5 Vol. II, pp. 499, 500, 562, 590,

No. VT, 40, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
(Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305, 367) ; also to No. VI, t&2<2., p. 379,
Names of Chiefs (from Say).

The Vocabulary partly reprinted, under S, VI, 6, p. 117 of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of tlie Sedentary Mis-
souri, Minetares, and those of the Sioux, pp. cxv, cxvi, of Vol. II of: American
Ethnological Society's Transactions.

Minetare and Mandan Words compared, p. 256 of Vol. Ill of ; Schoolceaft's
Indian Tribes of the United States.

120 MIXSl — MIXTEKA.

MIXSL

Tribe of the Delaware or Lenape.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Smith Barton, Xew Views, etc. — Comparatire Vocabularies.

PitOF. T. Say, Corapanitive Vocabularr of various J>ialects of the I«Dip6
Stock of Xortli Aratricaii Indians ; m Xote 15 to John Pickering's edition of Df,
Edwards'.s Observations on tlie Mohegan Language (Vol. X. of the Second Sma
of the Collections of the ^lassachii setts Historical Society). Boston, printed bf
Phelps and I'arnham, 1823, 8voj reprinted by Little and Brown, 1843; 8to,
pp. 135 — lt5.

>'o. IV, h, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Ghillatin's Synopsis, &e.
(Vol. II of: Arehffologia Americana, p. 370), and (enlarged) under P. IV, 5,
p. Ill, of the Vocabularies, Vol. II of the American Ethnological Sodetj*!

Transactions (from Hkckeweldek's MS.).

Ret, M. IlECKf:wELDER, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape
proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano,
and Nanticoke.

Rev. M. IIeckewelder, Names of various Trees, Shrubs, and Plants in the
Lanijuaf^e of the Lenape, or Delaware, distinguishing the Dialects of the Unamia
and Minsi.

The above two MSS. are in the library of the American Philosophical
Society at Philadelphia.

:mixteka, misteco.

Indians of the Mexican State Oajaea. There are six dialects
of this language — Tejyozkohda (the best), Yankitlan, TIahiako,
MitlayitongOy Under Mixtekciy and Mixteka of the Coast.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulario del Idionia Misteco, por Fray FEAycisco Axtaraik), printed in
4to, in Mexico, by Pedro Balli, 1593.

Diccionario Copioso y Eriidito de la Lengua Misteca, por Fb. Diego Rio, MS.
(Rio died in Tlachiaco, in the jeai- 16U.)

Heevas, Saggio, pp. 118, 119.

Heevas, Origine, Tab. L.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 60.

/. ' ^'*-'^^K> Proben dcr Deutsehen Volksmundarten : Dr. Scetzen'a Liu-
•guistischer NadOasB. i«>r/y, E. Fleischer, 1816, 8vo j pp. 352—374.

^^«Uo« Aimales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo j Vol. IV, pp. 260—286.

MOBIMI &10CUBY. 121

ORAMHARS AMD GRAMMATTCAL N0TICK8.

Fray Atttonio die los Betes, Yicario del Convento de Tamazulapa, Arte de la
Lengua Mixteca conforme a lo que se habla en Tepozcolula. Mexico, 1593, 12mo ;
pp. 16, 163 coDtains Notices of the Ancient History of the Indiana, and of
tibeir mode of computing years.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 34—44 (extract from the aboye).

Arte 7 Grammatica de la Lengoa Misteca, j Cateoismo Cristiano en la Misma.
(This MS., by Fb. Francisco OiStiz, an Augustan of Mexico, was seen by the
Bishop Eguiara in the library of the College of San Pablo, in Mexico.)

MOBIMI (MOVIMI, MOVIMA).

MoxoB Indians of the Bolivian Missions San Francisco di Boija
and Santa Anna. Their language is very harsh.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HxsYAS, Yooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HxBYAS, Saggio, pp. 91, 92.
Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. XLYIII, L et seq.
Mithridatea, VoL IH, pp. 571, 572, 576.
Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 464.
A. D'Obbigitt, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. I, p. 164; VoL IT, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OsBiamr, L'Homme Am^cain, Vol. 11, pp. 251, 252.

MOCOBY, TOBA.

Sonth American Indians, on the banks of the rivers Vermejo
and Ypita, related to the Abipones. D^Orbigny writes their
name "Mbocoby.^^

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

HxBTAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161—223 (from the MS. of the Missionary
Baikttnd Tebmsyeb).

Hebtas, Aritmetica, p. 99.

HsBTAS, Saggio, p. 105.

Hebtas, Origine, p. 37, Tabb. XLVIII, L et seq.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 497, 505, 506.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographiqne, Tab. XLI, "No, 449.

R

122 MOCOROSI — MOHAWK.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, YoL III, pp. 601, 502, 503, 505 (firom Tsbmkyxb's Kotion, gLven
by llcrrafl).

A. D'Obbioxt, L'llomme Am^ricain, Vol. II, p. 98.

MOCOROSI.

In JClg^ the Mokorosi (Mocorosi) is' stated to be the lanfpiage
of the Indians of !Mcxico^ now perhaps extinct ; reference being
made to a " Vocabulario de la Lengua Mocorosi.'' Mexico, 1599,
8vo.

Upon this. Dr. Latham furnishes the following notice:—
J u lg's notice of the ISIokorosi is inaccurate. The work be means
is an ''Arte/' etc., published in Madrid, 1699. Tbe language,
however, is jMoxa ; and what is called the Mokorosi Vocabulary,
is only an edition of Makdan^s Arte de la Lengua Moxa. lAma,
1701.

MOHAVI, MOYAVE.

Indian tribe occupying the country on both sides of the Biyer
Mohave, in south-eastern California.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Vocabulary of their Language has been taken by JouN B. Babtiott, United
States Boundary Commissioner.

Mojavo Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 95 — 101 of
tlio Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Bo.ute near
the a5th Parallel, Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington^ 1855, 4to.

MOHAWK.

Principal tribe of the Iroquois, now in Canada west. The
Cochnewagoes (or Cocknawaga) are a smaller tribe belonging
to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary, Tome LXIII, part 1, p. 142 of the Philosophical Tt^ansaotionB of
the Royal Society of London. London, 1665, etc.

Hbbtas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).

MOHEOAN8. 123

Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 125, 126.

A Primer, for the use of the Mohawk Children, in the English and Mohawk
XdingiLages. Montreal, 1781, 12mo. Beprinted, London, 1786, 12ino.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc.~ Comparative Vocabularies ; and p. 20 of the
Appendix to the edition of 1798.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 818, 330^333 (Cochnowago and Mohawk,
from SiOTH Babtoit).

Bauii, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 795.

No. V, 27, of the Comparative Vocabularies, etc., A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in YoL II of the: Archnologia Amerioana, pp. 303—367.

(From MS. authorities of P. Pabisu and D. Dwionx.)

Beprinted A, V (1), pp. 79, 81, 83 of Vol. II of: American Ethnological
SooietT's Transactions.

Skt. Adak Elliot, of Tuscarora, Mohawk Vocabulary, Appendix L, to:
Henry B. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Welford,
1846, 8vo; pp. 264— 270— -and

Pp. 893—400 (Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois) of the same work,
published at Albany , Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.

Indian Names and Places (of the St. Kegis Indians, a tribe of the Caughnawnga),
pp. 178—181 of: Francis B. Hough, M.D., History of St. Lawrence and
Franklin Counties. Albany, Little and Co., 1853, 8vo.

J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Mohawk,
Iroquois, Hurons of Amherstburg, Stone Indians, pp. 113 — 121 of : Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. (Language of the Mohawks,
liTing on the Grand Biyer.)

MOHEGANS, MAHIKANS, MUHHEEKANEW.

Principal tribe of the Algonquins, ou the Hudson River, from
Esopus to Albany. They were divided into Muchquanh (Bear
tribe), Mechchaooh (Wolf tribe), and Toon-paooh (Turtle tribe).
The Pequods are related to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Mohegan Vocabulary (of 45 words), by Prof. T. Sat (Note 15, pp. 135 — 145)
and Index of Mohegan and other Indian Words explained in Edwards's Obserra-
tiona, pp. 155 — 157 of: Db. Edwards, Observations on the Mohegan Language.
Edition by John Pickering. (See Grammars.)

Mohegan, English, and Shawanee Vocabulary, pp. 209 — 210 of: J. Loxa, Voyages
and Trayels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader. London, 1791, 4to.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 400, 402—404 (from Barton and Long).

Smith Bastok, New Views, etc. — Comparatiye Vocabularies.

121 MOHEOAN8.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 815 (Mdhegan prqpre— AbcDakQ.

No. IV, 17, of the Comparatiye Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Sjnopus, ctc^ Vol
II of : Arcbfleologia Americana, pp. 305—367, and (partly) under P, IV, 3, p. HO
of the Vocabulary in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnologial
SocM'ty. Also, Article 1 of the Appendix (p. 491) to Johk W. ds Foreist's His-
tory of the Indians of Connecticut. Rartford^ Hamersley, 1852, Sto (from
Jefferson (MS.), Ueckeweldeb, Edwabdb, and Jbnks).

A Collection of Words (English, Maqua, Delaware, Mahican), pp.41 — 44 of:
Kev. Joun Ettwein's Remarks and Annotations concerning the Traditionf,
Customs, Languages, etc., of the Indians, from the Memoirs of ZeiBbei|er
(Bulletin of the Uistorical Society of Pennsylvania, VoL L Philadelphia, 1848;
8fo).

Comparative Chippewa and Mohegan Vocabulary (of 22 words), p. 620 of VoL
V of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Key. Mb. Heckeweldeb, A Vocabulary of the Mohicanni, taken down from the
mouth of one of that nation born in Connecticut. (MS. in the library of tlie
American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.)

Bey. Mb. Heckeweldbb, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape proper,
the Minsi dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, and Nanticoke.
(MS. in the same library.)

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Observations on the Language of the Muhhekaneew Indians, in whi<^ tlie
extent of that Language in North America is shown, its genius is grammatically
traced, some of its peculiarities, and some instances of analogy between that aiui
the Hebrew are pointed out. Communicated to the Connecticut Society of Arti
and Sciences, and published at the request of the Society. By Jonathav Eb-
WABDS, D.D., Pustor of a Church in Newhaven, and member of the Connecticut
Society of Arts and Sciences. Newhacen, printed by Josiah Meigs, 1788, 8r0.
Reprinted at Philadelphia in 1789, 8vo j at London in 1789, %vo j at New York
in 1801, 8vo.

A new edition of the same, pp. 81 — 160 of: Collections of the Massachusetto
Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston^ printed by Phelps ind
Famham, 1823, 8vo, and reprinted at Boston by Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo.

(Copies of this new edition, with separate title, Boston, 1823, 8vo, hire
been issued.)

The contents of this now edition are: Pp. 81—89, Advertisement to the
present edition, by John Pickering, dated Salem, May 15, 1822. Pp. 8*-
98, Reprint of Dr. Edwards's Observations. Pp. 98—151, Notes by the Editor.
Note 15, pp. 135—145, contains T. Say's Comparative Vocabulary of yarioti*
Dialects of the Lenape (or Delaware) stock of North American Indians,
together with a specimen of the Winnebago (or Nipegon) Language (forty
five words in Mohegan, Lenape, Shawanese, Nanticoke, Narraganset, Munsc©?
Massachusetts, Penobscott, Abnaki, St. Francis Indians, Messisaugas, Algo*!^*
kin, Ghippeway, Knistenaux, and Winnebago). Pp. 152—154, Psalm xix, i''^

MOSQUITO. 125

Muh-he-con-nuk, translated by Ber. John Sergeant (from Morse'^s Beport.
Hewhaven^ 1822, Sro ; pp. 359, 360). Pp. 155—157, Index of ^loliegan and
other Indian words, expbtined in Edwards's Obser?ations. Pp. 158—160,
Index of the principal matters in Edwards's Observations, and the Editor's
Kotes.

An extract from Edwards is given in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp,
394 — 399| where reference is made to : American Museum, Tome V, pp. 22,
141—144. Columbus, May, 1787, pp. 672.

Specimen of the Moheagan Language, taken at Cambridge, February 28, 180i
rem John Eonkapot, jun.), pp. 98, 99, in : Additional Memoir of the Mohea-
ins, and of Uncas, their ancient Sachem. Collections of the Massachusetts His-
>rioal Society, Vol. IX, First Series. JSoston, Hall and Ililler, 1804, 8vo ; pp.
7—99.

The pages 75, 76 of the same volume contain a List of the Families of the
Tribe of Moheagan, and number of each family. By A. Holmes; dated
February 1, 1804.

Some data respecting the Principles of the .... and Mahican Languages,
X 618, 619 of Vol. V of: Schoolcbaft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

MOSQUITO.

"he Mosquitos, or Miskitos, who inhabit the Moskito territory
I Central America, are a mixed tribe, the issue of aboriginal
adians with negroes shipwrecked on the coast, or escaped from
16 Spanish settlements of the interior.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Captaiit Hsndebson, R.A., An Account of the British Settlement of Hon-
uras ; being a Brief View of its Commercial and Agricultural Resources, Soil,
limate. Natural His*^ory, etc., with Sketches of the Manners and Customs of the
[osquito Indians, and a Journal of a Voyage to the Mosquito Shore. London,
•aldwin, 1809, 8vo, map, pp. 203. Second edition, ibid., 1811, 8vo.

Mosquitian and English Vocabulary, pp. 170 — 172 of: Thomas Yoitno, A
farrative of a Residence on the Mosquito Shore during the years 1839, 1840, and
841; with an Account of Truxillo and the adjacent islands of Bonacca and
loatan. London, Smith, Elder, and Co., 1842, 8vo, plates, pp. iv, 172.

Vocabularium, pp. 269 — 274 of: Bericht iiber die im hoechsten Auftrage ....
ewirkte Untersuchung einiger Theile des Mosquito Landes, erstattet von der
azu emannten Comission. Berlin^ Duncker, 18 to, 8vo, maps, pp. iv, 274, 1.

Mosquito Vocables and Dialogues, pp. 28 — 41 of: Alex. Hendeeson*s Gram-
lar (see Grammars^.

Alex. J, Cotseal, Mosquito Vocabulary, pp. 257 — 264 of-: Transactions of
he American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

E. G. S<jxjier's Nicaragua (Hfew York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo), Vol. II,

12G MOSSA.

pp. 314, 320—323, and American Ethnological Society'a Tnmsaetions, YoL m,
pp. 101, 106—110 (from Cothkal).

Brief Vocabulary of the Mosquito Language, Appendix, pp. 363 — 866 to:
8am. a. Bakd, Waikiia ; or, Adventures on the Moequito Shore. New Tark^
Harpers, 1855, 12mo, illustrations, pp. x, 366.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL KOTICBS.

Ueber die Sprache der Mosquito Indianer, pp. 241 — ^268 of: Bericht 9ber eimge
Theilo des Mosquitohindes. Berlin^ 1845, 8vo (see Yocabalaries).

Alexai^deb J. CoTHEAL, A Grammatical Sketch of the Language spoken I7
the Indians of the Mosquito Shore, pp. 235 — 264 of: Transactions of the Ameri-
-can Ethnological Society, Vol. 11.

A Grammar of the Mosquito Language, by Alexander Hsndebsof, Belixei
Honduras. New York, printed by John Gray, 1846, 8yo, pp. 47.

MOSSA, MOXA.

Nation of the province "los Moxos/* in Bolivia, Soutii
America. Their language is related to the Maipure. Dialects
are — the Baure, Tikomeri, Chuchu, Kupeno, Moaotte, and
Mochono or Muchojeone^ all in the Mission S. Xaverio.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Pedbo Mabban, Arte de la Lengua Moxa, con un Yocabulario y Cathedsmo.
Lima J Jose de Contrevas, I70l, 12mo. Yocabulario Espaiiol-Moxa^ pp. 118 — 361,
Moxa-Espaiiol, pp. 362—650.

GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 367 et seq.

Hebyas, Vocabolario, px). 161 et seq. (Moxa, dialetto Moxo).

Hebvas, Aritmetica, p. 103.

Hebvas, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 44, 45, 48, 49, 118, 120, 121, 136, Tabb. XI,
XLVIII, L, LI et seq.

Hebvas, Saggio, pp. 90, 91.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 4^6, 554, 570, 617, 618 (from Hebvas and Giui).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 612 (Moxos).

Eight Moxos Words compared with Arrowak, Atoray, Maipure, and Quichua,
Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. van IIeuvel's El Dorado. New York, Winchester,
1844, 8vo.

Alcide D*Obb1ont, L'Homme Americain. Vol. I, pp. 162—164, Vocabulary of
twenty-three words ; Vol. II, p. 208, Baurc and Moxos words of 1703 and 1831 •
p. 229, Moxos and Mucbojecncs words.

MUNDBUCUS — MUSKOGHEE. 127

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. Pedbo Mabban (see Vocabularies), the Grammar, pp. 1 — 117.

G-nii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 238.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 5G3— 569.

A. D'OBBiGmr, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, pp. 203—209, 228—230.

Arte de la Lengua Baure, escrito por el P. Aktonio Megio, do la Compania de
Jesus, despues de mucbos auos de Misonero, y muchisima aplicacion y estudio k
dicba Lengua en las reducciones de la Conccpeion, S. Martin y S. Nicolas, donde
ultimamente escribio dicbo arte, 1749, folio. (MS. in possession of Alcide
lyOrbigny.)

MUNDRUCUS, MUTURICUS.

Indians of the Brazilian province of Para, between the rivers
Tapajoz and Mauhe (Martius, V, No. 122).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
Balbi, Atlas Etbnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 514.

MURAS.

Brazilian Indians of the province of Para^ on the Rio Madeira
(Maetius, VI, A, No. 129).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Balbi, Atlas BItlinograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 521.

MUSKOGHEE, CREEK.

The most numerous tribe of the Creek confederation, in the
northern parts of Florida.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Smith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. IH, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.
Balbi, Atlas Etlmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 788.

128 MUV8KA.

Keisc des Pkinzen Maximilian zu Wibd. CohUnz, 1839—1841, 2 toIb. 4to;
Vol. II, pp. 590—592.

No. X of Gallatin's Synopsis in: Aroliieologia Americans, Vol. 11 (Hitehitti
and Miiskoglii Dinloct). Authorilies — ^Vocabulary of 452 Words, by Ret. L
CoMPEKK. Comnumication from Ridor, an educated Cherokee. Hawkhi
(rid, hfr.), 112 Select Sentences, pp. 408—412; the Lord's Prayer, p. 421.
Further Notices by Gallatin, in: Transactions of the American Ethnologi-
cal So<'iety, Vol. II, p. cxii, Coinparison of 600 Choctaw and Muskogbn
"Words, niucty-seren agreeing; p. 83 — 88, List of Choctah and Mnsko^
Words.

E. A. Vait^ Notice sur Ics Indiens de TAm^rique du Nord. Paris, 1840, 8ro^
p. 55.

Benjamin Hawkins, Vocabulary of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and
Choctaw. (MS. in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Fhilt-
delphia.)

Many geographical names of the Creek are explained in : Colonel Bevjaxh
Hawxins, Sketch of the Creek Confederacy ; being Collections of the Georgia
Historical Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1. Savannah, 1848, 8vo, pp. 88.

Lieutenant-Colonel J. C. Casey, United States Agent, Muskogee or Creel
Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV, pp. 416
—429, 432.

GBAMMABS AND GEAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A. Gallatin, Synopsis : Arcliajologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 256 — 258 ;
Transitions, pp. 270, 271, 272, 273, 275, 290, 291.

Muskokee, or Creek First Reader, by W. S, Bobebtson, A.M., and Dayid

WiNSLETT. New York, 1856, 12mo, pp. 48.

MUYSKA, MOZKA, CHIBCHA.

Indian nation (nearly extinct) in the neighbourhood of Santa
Fe de Bogota, Nueva Grenada. Their language was called,
also, Chibcha.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. IH, p. 705.

Journal Asiatique, Vol. Ill (Pam, 1829, 8vo), pp. 401, 409.

The numerals are given by A. Gallatin, Tab. A to : Notes on the Semi-civilized
Nations of Mexico, etc. (Vol. I of : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society), p. 114.

MYNCQUESAR. 129

J, S. Vateb, Proben, etc Seetzen'a Nachlaes. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo ;

pp. 352-r374.

. CoiiONSL JoAQriN AcoSTA, the author of " Compendio Uistorico del decubri-
miento y colonization de la Nueva Granada," possesses a '*Diecionario y Grammatica
de la Lengoa Mosca Chibcba." MS., in 12nio, of 200 and 96 pp. The Dictionary
ifl the only one existing ; the Grammar is different from that of Fray B. de Lugo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. Fbat Bbbnabdo de Lugo, Grammatica en la Lengua general del nuovo reyno
Uamada Mosca. Mcidrid^ Bernardino de Guzman, 1619, small Svo, pp. 158.
(The year 1613, in Baetzers Catalogue, p. 117, seems to be an error.)

Mithridates (extract firom the above Grammar), Yol. Ill, pp. 702 — 704.

Adelung, in Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 701, note ft, states that a P. Daddei
(Dadet ?) has printed a Grammar of the Muysca language.

JOBEPH Dadey (Daddei ?), a native of Milan, one of the Jesuit founders of the
"University of Bogota, 1604, wrote a Vocabulary and a Grammar of the Muysca
Language, but no copies can now be traced. The National Library of Bogota
possesses a MS. Grammar (pp. 96, 12mo) and a MS. Dictionary (pp. 200, 12mo)
of the Muysca Language. These are, perhaps, Dadey's.

Ezequiel Uricoechea, a native of Bogota, intends to publish these MSS. in
his forthcoming work, " Monumenta Chibcharum."

Stir la Langue des Muyscas, ou la Langue Chibcha, Bulletin de la Society de
C^&)g^aphie. Third Series, Vol. VIII, pp. 85—88. Parw, A. Bertrand, 1847, 8vo.

A Comparison of the Chibcha Language with the Japanese, Bask, and Arabic,
by Sekob Pabayet, in : Annales de Philosophic Chr^tienne, No. 56 ; also sepa-
rately : Memoria sobre el origin Japones Arabe y Vizcaino de los pueblos de
BogotSu Paris, 1835, 8vo, pp. 32.

Semarks on the Chibcha Language, likewise Chibcha numerals (quoted from the
above), in : Memoria sobre las Antiquedades Neo-Granadinas, por Ezequiel
Ubiooechea. Berlin, 1854, 4to, pp. 6 — 10.

MYNCQUESAR, MYNCKUSSAR,

Liangaage of the Mohawk stock, spoken in New Sweden (on the
Delaware).

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Thohas Cakfakius Holm, Kort Seskri&ing om provincien Nya Swerige.
Stockholm, 1702, 4to, p. 181.

JEnglish translation by P. S. Duponceau, for the Historical Society of
Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, 1834, 8vo, p. 158 (also as part 1 of Vol III of
the Collections of the Pennsylvanian Historical Society. Philadelphia^
M'Carty and Davis, 1834, 8vo ; pp. 1—168.)

Mithridates (from Campanius), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 334, 335.

J. S. Vateb, Proben, etc. Leipzig, 1826, 8vo ; pp. 381 et seq.

s

130 NAA8S — NANTICORE.

NAASS.

Indians of English North-western America, on and above Mill-
bank Sound. Of four of the Naass tribes, viz., the HatUsa,
Haeeltzukf Btllechoola, and Chimmesyan, vocabularies are ^ven
(see Haeeltzuk and Chimmesyans).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabularies of the Four Tribes, Transactions of the Americtn Ethnolpgicd
Society, Vol. II {Neio York, Bartlett and Welford, 1848, 8vo), H, XX, p. lOS;
from the Vocabularies of John Scouleb, M.T)., Journal of the Koyal Geogrip
phical Society of Loudon, Vol. XI {London^ Murray, 1841, 8vo), pp. 230 — ^285.

Billechoola and Fnen<lly Village Words, p. 155 of B. G-. Lathak. The LaDr
guages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of LondoD,
Vol I, pp. 154—160. JEdinburffh, 1848, 8vo).

NAGRANDANS.

Chorotega tribe of the plains of Leon, Nicaragua.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

E. 6. SQriEB, Nicaragua, etc. Neto York, Appleton, 1852, 2 Tols. 8?o; ToL
II, pp. 314, 320—325 ; numerals, pp. 326, 327.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL 370TICES.

E. Geo. Squier, Nicaragua New Tork^ Appleton, 1852 5 2 Tols. 8tO|

Vol. II, pp. 315—319 (from Colonel Fbancisoo Dl^z Zapata).

NANTICOKE.

Tribe of the Algonkin stock, formerly on the Susquehannah—
now west.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary, etc., in Note 15, pp. 135—145, to John
Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language.
(Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boi-
ton, printed by Phelps and Faruham, 1823, 8vo. Beprinted, Bo9ton, Little and
Brown, 1843, 8vo).

No. IV, 20, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gtillatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in : Archffiologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367 ; and (partly) under P, IV, 6^
p. Ill, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II.

(From MS. Notices of Heczeweldee and Mueeay Vans.)

A Nanticoke Vocabulary (presented by Thomas Jefferson), and a Vocabulary of

NARRAOANSET. 131

the Nantieoke, taken from the mouth of a Nanticoke chief, bj Biey. Mb.
Hbckswsldisb, in 1785» are among the MSS. in the library of the American
Philosophical Society, at Philadelphia.

Hbt. Mb. Heceewelbeb, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape
Proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natick or Kadik^ Chippeway, Shawano,
and Nantiooke. (MS. in the same library.)

NARRAGANSET.

New England Indians. The Pequads, Kavasumsenk, and
Quintikuk belong to this stock.

WOKDS AND VOCABULABTES.

A small Vocabulary in : William Wood, New England's Prospect ; being a
true, lively, and experimental Description of that part of America commonly called
New England. London, 1634, 4to. Beprintcd, ibid., 1635, 4to, and 1639, 4to.
Third edition, with an Introductory Essay. Boston, Fleet, Green, and Bussell,
1764, 8vo, pp. xviii, 128.

BooEB A. Williams (see Grammars). The Vocabulary contained in this
Grammar, at the request of Smith Barton, has been extracted and reprinted
as: Vocabulary of the Narrogansett Language, pp. 80 — 105 of: Collections of
the Massachusetts Historical Society for the year 1798 (Vol. V of the First
Series). Boston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1798, 870. Beprinted, Boston, John
Eliot, 1816, 8yo ; and ibid,, John Eastbum, 1835, 8vo.

T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary, etc.. Note 15, pp. 135 — 145, to John Pickering's
edition of Dr. Edwards's Obserrations on the Mohegan Language (Collections of
the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boston, printed by
Phelps and Famham, 1823, 8to). Beprinted by Little and Brown, ibid., 1843, 8vo.

Smith Bakton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabulary.

Mithndates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389 (from Bogeb Williams), and as
" New England" (from Wood).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 812.

No. rV, 16, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in : Archssologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 364, and (partly) under P, IV, 2,
p. 110, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, and an Extract, Article 1 of the Appendix, p. 491 » to John W.
DB FoBBSST, History of the Indians of Connecticut. Hartford, Hamersley,
1852, 8vo.

From Williams, and MS. Notices of Mb. Tbeat.

Silas Wood, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns of Long
Island. Brooklifn, 1824, 8vo. Beprinted, ibid,, Spooner, 1828, 8vo, p. , and :
Jajcjis Macaulby, History of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, 1829,
3 vols. 8vo; Vol. II, pp. 267, 268.

132 NATCHES NAVAJOS.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A Key into the Language of America ; or, an Help to the Language of the
NatiFes in that part of America called New England ; together with brief Ob-
Bervations of the Customs, Manners, and Worships, etc., of the aforesaid Natirea,
in Peace and Warre, in Life and Death. On all which are added. Spiritual Ob-
serTations, Generall and Particular, bj the Author, of chiefe and speciell use (upon
all occasions) to all the English inhabiting these parts ; yet pleaaant and pro-
fitable to the view of all men. By Roger Williams, of Providence, of Keir
England. London^ printed by Gregory Dexter, 1643, 8to, pp. 197.

Thirty -two chapters, each with VocabuLiry and Spiritual Obserrations.

Reprinted, pp. 17 — 163 of Collections of the Rhode Island Historical Sodetf,
Vol. 1. Providence^ printed by John Miller, 1827, Svo.

The grammatical and ethnological parts of the 32 chapters alone wen
reprinted under the title —

A Key, etc., in Life and Death, in : Collections of the Massachusetts Histozicil
Society, for the year 1794 (Yol. Ill of the First Series). Boston, printed by
Joseph Belknap, 1794, Svo, and reprinted, Boston, Munroe and Frands, ISIO^
Svo ; pp. 203—239.

Smith Barton, of Philadelphia, afterwards caused the Yocabulary to be
reprinted in the same Collection, Series I, Vol. V (1798). (See YocabulaiiflB.)

NATCHES.

Trilje of the Creek confederacy, on the Lower Mississippi^ now
nearly extinct.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

No. VI, 47, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. G-allatik's SynopsiB, etc.,
in : Vol. II of the Archajologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367 ; and No. D, XII, Ameri-
can Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II, pp. 94, 96.

Some Words are given in ; Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 287. (From Lb
Page du Fbatz, Histoire de la Louisiane. Paris, De Bure, 1758, 3 vola. 12mo ;
Vol. II.)

NAVAJOS, NAVAHOES.

A powerful tribe of tte Apache family, related to the great
Athapascan stock, residing on the tributaries of the River San
Juan, west of the llio Grande, and east of the Colorado, in New
Mexico, between the 35th and 37th parallel of northern lati-
tude. The Spaniards call them Apaches de Ndbtyoa.

\

' {

NEW BRUNSWICK — NEWFOUNDLAND. 133

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

James H. Simfsoit, Comparative Yocabularj of Words in the Language of
the Pueblo or civilized Indians of New Mexico, and of the wild tribes inliabiting
its borders. Appendix B, pp. 140—143, to his: Journal of a Military Becon-
noissance from Santa F6, New Mexico, to the Navajo Country, made .... in
1849; pp. 56 — 168 of: Reports of the Secretary of War, with Reconiioissances of

Boutes from San Antonio to £1 Paso Also .... the Report of Lieut.

J. H. Simpson of an Expedition into the Navajo Country. (Exec. Docum. Senate,
No. 64, 31st Congress, Session 1). Washington^ printed at the Union Office,
1850, 8vo, plates, maps, pp. 250.

A Vocabulary of the Navajo Language has been taken by the United States
Boundary Commissioner, John B. Bibtlett.

Captain J. H. Eaton, United States Agent, Navajo Vocabulary, pp. 416 —
432 (pp. 429—431, numerals) of Vol. IV of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the
United States.

Navajo Vocabulary, taken in 1852 by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 81 —
83 of Chap. V of his, Thomas Ewbank's, and Professor W. W. Turner's Report
upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route
near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II cf the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington^
1855, 4to).

Pbofbssob W. W. Tubnbb, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Navajo, Apache, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, Chepcwyan, Tacully, Umkwa, and Hoo-
pah, pp. 84, 85, ibid.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai Languages (also, Navajo
and Ticorilla), pp. 269 — 318 of: Busohmamn, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm.
Berliny 1856, 4to.

NEW BRUNSWICK.

A dialect of the Mikmak.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

J. HowSB, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, Nipis-
sing, Shawnees, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102 — 113 of: Proceedings of
Philological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850.

All these are in one dialect — the Mikmak. It seems that the sound of the
letter r is wanting in this language. The Vocabulary was originally made by
Antony Kooebs, an intelligent old hunter (but not an Indian), who had lived
some time amongst the Indians, and is believed to have 'been well acquainted
with their language. He was assisted by Abitase, said to be half ludian and
half English.

NEWFOUNDLAND.

Island on the coast of Labrador. Its inhabitants belong to the
Eastern Algonkins. The Milicite and Mikmaks are part of
them. The Bethuck are extinct.

134? NIPI88ING NORTON SOUND.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of the Language of the Natires of Newfoundland, procured by the
Key. J. Leioh from Mary March, a natiye woman, taken up the Bay of Expbits
by Mr. Peyton, in March, 1818 (Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society
of London, Vol. lY, pp. 218—220. London, 1834, 8vo).

An extract from Maby March's Yooabulary is contained in : S. Mont-
gomery Martin's Sritish Colonial Library, Vol. VI, pp. 300, 301. Loadom,
1851.

NIPISSING.

Of the Algonquin stock of Indians, living on the Lake of the
Two Mountains, in the district of Montreal, Lower Canada.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. HowsE, Comparative Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Lan-
guages, Nipissing, Shawnees, Brunswick, and DupUcate Slackfoot (Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV, pp. 102—113. London^ 1850).

NIQUIRANS.

Mexicans settled in the district of Nicaragua, between the Lake
of Nicaragua and the Pacific Ocean. They speak a dialect of
the Mexican language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

E. Geo. Squieb, Nicaragua .... New Torkj Appletons, 1852, 2 vols. 8to ; Vol
II, p. 314 — and Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, VoL 111}
part 1, p. 101.

On the Aztek Language in Nicaragua, pp. 746—778 of : John Carl Edwabd
BuscHMANN, Uber die Aztekischen Ortsnamen, V Abtheilung. Berlin^ Diimmler,
1853, 4to.

NORTON SOUND.

On the north-west coast, inhabited by Eskimaux.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direct^i^of CaptaiM
Cook, Clark, and Gobe .... 1776—1780. London, 1784, 3 voBjijoj ^^
II, p. 334. Edition, Dublin, 1784, 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555. Append ^*
table to show the affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalashka s!r^^
ton Sound, and those of the Greeulanders and Esquimaux.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 461 — 466 (from the above).

NOTTOWAYS NUTKA. 135

NOTTOWAYS.

Iroquois tribe of Virginia, nearly extinct. They called them-
selves Cherohakah.

WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. Y, 32, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(ArchsBologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305—367).

From MS. authorities of J. Wood and Tbevezant.

And under R, V, 6, p. 115, of the Vocabularies in VoL II of : TranEactions of
the American Ethnological Society.

NUSDALUM.

Indian tribe of the north-west coast on Hood^s Channel, related
to the Haeeltzuk and Nutka Indians.

WOBDS AND VOCABULAEIES.

Koosdalum Vocabulary, by Dr. John Scoflee (Journal of the Royal Geogra-
phical Society of London, VoL XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244—246).

Koosdalum and Atnah Words compared, p. 157 of: R. G.Latham, The Languages
of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of Jouraal of the Ethnological Society of
London, VoL I, pp. 154—166). Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.

NUTKA, WAKASH.

Indians of Vancouver's Island (their proper name is Yucuatl).

WOKDS AITD VOCABXTLAEIES.

A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed \mder the direction of Captains
Cook, Clabe, and Goeb .... 1776 — 1780. London, 1784, 3 yoIs. 4to ; VoL
H, Appendix No. 4.

Appendix IV, Vocabulary of the Language of Nootka or King George's Sound,
April, 1778, pp. 542 — 548 of the Dublin edition : Chmeenlaque, W. Watson, and
AL 1784, 3 Tols. 8to.

Tlaoquatch and Nootka (fi*om Cooz) Words compared, p. 156 of : R. G.
Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154—166 of Vol I of
tiie Journal of the Ethnological Society of London). Edinburgh, 1848, 8to.

T« Va. BouBOonra, Relation d*un Voyage recent des Espagnoles sur les Cdtes

I ;)0 OMAOUA.

Xonl-ouest de TAinerique septentrionale (Archires Litt&rairea de TEurope. Pant
and Tuhingue, ISai— 1818, XVII, Bvo, Xo. IV. 1804, pp. 78, 79).

TIic numerals 1—10, from a MS. of Mr. Mozixo in : A. de Humboldt, £ini
politiqiu' siir le Royaume de la ^ouvelle Espagne. ParU^ Schoell, 1811, 2 Tok.
4to ; Vol. I, p. 322.

Vocabulario del Idioraa de los Hnbitantes de Natlu (Belacion del Tiage heeho
])or las gok'tas Sutil y Mexicana eu cl anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrechodB
Fiica. Con una introducion on que se da noticia de los ezpedicionea execottdu
antcriormcnte por los Espanoles en busca del paso del nord-este de la Ameriou
Madrid^ en la iinprenta real, 1802, 8vo, atlas, pp. dxTiii, 185 ; pp. 178 — 184).

A list of Words in the Xootkian Language the most in use, p. 5, and War
Song of the Nootka Tribe, p. 166 of: Narrative of the Adventiires and SaJferingi
of Jon>' R. Jewitt, only survivor of the crew of the ship ** Boston," during i
Captivity of nearly Three Years among the Savages of Nootka Sound, with u
Account of the Manners, Mode of Living, and Religious Opinions of the NatiTei.
New Yorkf printed for the publisher, s. a., 16mo.

A popular book, comx>ilcd from Jcwitt^s Oral Relations, bj Siohasd Alsop,
in 1815. It has very often been reprinted.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 115 (from Cook, numerals from DixoK and
Humboldt).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 846.

The numerals 1 — 10, as given by Cooz and bj Decon", compared, p. 85, note *,
of: J. H. M'CuLLOcn, jun., Researches, etc. Baltimore, F. Lucas, jun,, 1829, 8vo.

No. XXV, 60, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in : Vol. II of the Archseologia Americana, p. 371 (from Jewitt). Keprinted in
the Vocabularies, Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
under U, XXI, p. 121.

No. 14 of Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, pp. 569—629
of : Horatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring
Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. The language is by
him called : Kwoneatshaika (Newittee). Reprinted, CXXI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95 of the
Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, VoL II.

Fuca Strait and Wakash Words, p. 156 of: R. O. Latham, The Languages of
the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, pp. 154 —
166). Edinburgh^ 1848, 8vo.

OMAGUA.

Formerly a powerful nation of the regions between the Marahon
and Orinoco. The principal tribes of the Omaguas were —

1. The Omagtia propre, between the Maranon and Yapura.

2. The Enaguay on the Guaviari, in Venezuela. 3. The Yuri-
maguay on the Yuruba, and in the province of Solimoes.

ONEIDA. 1137

4. The Agua, in New Granada and Venezuela. 5. The
\Kokama, on the Lower Ucayale. 6. The Yete, on the Napo, in
New Granada. 7. The Tokantin, on tlie Tokantin, in the
Brazilian provinces Goyaz and Para.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GnJi, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371 — 375.

HsBYAS, Yocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.

HxBYAS, Saggio, pp. 98, 99.

HebvaS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 48, 78, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.

Hbbyas, Catalogo, p. 24, nota 1.

Hebtas, Aritmetica, pp. 96, 97.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 603, 611 (from Gilii).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbiquo, Tab. XLI, No. 493.

A. D'Obbigny, L'Homme Am^ricaiD, Vol. II, p. 274.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

QiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371—375.
Mithridates, Vol. HI, pp. 604—610.

ONEIDA.

Indians of the Iroquois stock, in the west of the State of New
York.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hbbyas, Vocabolario Foliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies ; and p. 20 of the
Appendix. Edition of 1798.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333 (from Smith Sabton).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 796.

P. E. DuPOirOBir, M^moire sur le Sjst^me Grammatical, etc. Paris, 1838,
pp. 259—269.

"No. V, 30, of the Gomparative Vocabulary to A. Q-allatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305—367), and (partly) under R, V,
Sy Vol; II, p. 114, of : Transactions of tbe American Ethnological Society. (From
J3ABT017 and MS. Notes of Jeffebso^.)

T

138 ONUNDAGA.

BiCHARD Updike SnERMAX, Oneida Tocabnlary, Appendix M, pp. 279—281,
to : lleiirv R. ScliooU'raft, Noles od tlie Iroquois. Sew York, Bartlett andWd-
ford, 18 U>, 8vo (New Yi>rk State Documents, Xo. 24, Senate, 1846), and pp.
393 — 44M.), Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, of the same work, pubUahed
as a book. Albania, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.

Oneida Vocabularr, by Yor NO Skenaxdo, Oneida Castle : SchooIcraft'B India
Tribes of the United States, Tol. 11.. pp. 482—493.

ONONDAGA.

Iroquois tribe, formerly of the west of the State of New York.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
IIebtas, Tocabolario Foliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).

Smith Babtox, New Tiews, etc. — Comparative Tocabnlary; and Appendix,
p. 20 (edition of 1798) ; and, from him,

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 797.

Onondaga Vocabulary, by Abraham le Fobst: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of
the United States, Vol. II, pp. 482—493.

No. V, 28, of the Comparatiye Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Vol. II of the: Archa;ologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367). Keprinted, with addi-
tions, in the Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, No. 3 : Henry B. School*
craft, Notes on the Iroquois, pp. 393—400. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, Sto.
Reprinted (partlv) under R, V, 1, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the
American Kthnological Society, Vol. II, p. 114.

Deutsuh Onondagisclics Worterbuch von Dayid Zeisberoeb, 7 vols. 4to; and,
A Collection of Words and Phrases in the Iroquois and Onondago Ijangaage^
explained in German, by the Rev. Chb. PtbIlEUS, 4to, pp. 140. The above two
MSS. are deposited in the library of the American Philosophical Sodetj, at Phila-
delphia.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

The following MSS. are deposited in the library of the Amerioan Philosophical
Society at Philadelphia : —

Essay of an Onondago Grammar, or a Short Introduction to learn the Onendago
alias Maqua Tongue, by Dayid Zeisbebgeb, 4to, pp. 67.

Onondagoische Grammatica, by the same, 4to, pp. 87.

Another Onondago Grammar, in the German language, by the same, 4to,
pp. 176.

OPATA — OSAGE. 139

OPATA.

Christian Indians of Sonora, in the central part of that State.
The JBudeve is closely related to the Opate language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebyas, Saggio, p. 124.

HssYAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.

Mithridates, VoL III, part 3, pp. 161, 165—169 (from IIervas).

■ The United States Boundary Commissioner, John K. Babtlett, has taken a
Yocabulary of their language.

OREGONES.

Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. (Martius, No. 190, says that
the Portuguese call a wild nation on the 19a Orelhudos, but
that the Spaniards call them Orejones. The name of Orelhudos
is given by the Portuguese also to the Aroaquis, on the rivers
Nhamundd and Negro, No. 143.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Oregones : Vocabukry, No. XX, pp. 294, 295 of : Castelnau,
VoL V, Appendice.

OSAGE.

Dacotah Indians, called also JVawah, HuzzaiOy Osawses, Washas,
or Ous; about Arkansas and Osage rivers. They are divided
into the Chamers (Arkansas, Clermont), Great and Little
Osages,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. S. Yateb, Analekten, Zweites Hefit, Abtheilung 2, pp. 53—62.

Vocabuhiry of some Words in the Osage Language, Appendix I, pp. 213 — 219
of: John Bbadbusy, F.L.S., Travels in the Interior of America, in the years
1809» 1810, 1811.- Liverpool^ printed for the author, by Smith and Galway.
London^ published by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, 1817, 8vo.

. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 784. No. VT, 37, of the Com-
parative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Vol. II of: Archa)ologia
Americana, pp. 305^— 367).

(From BBADBnRY,and MS. Notices of L. Cass and Db. Mitbbay.)

1 U) OTO.

Reprinted under B, VI, 2, pp. 82, 83, 87, 89 of the Vooabnlary, in YoL 11 of:
Transartians of the American Ethnological Societj.

Keise des Prinzen Maximiltax zu Wixd in Amerika. CMeax, 1839 — IB^
2 voU. Ito ; Vol. 11, pp. G37— 6i5.

Glitssaire 0<age, p]>. 2GI, 262 of: Victor Texhb, YoyageanxPrmiries OngH
en Loiii?iuue et Missouri, 1S39, 1810. ClermoiU l<8rra»df FiroL I^itm, RoTet|
ISAi, Svo.

A MS. Vocabulnry of the Language of the Osage Indians, by Dk. MintaiT,of
Louisville, Kentucky, is in the library of the American Philosophical Society at
Philadelphia.

Vocabulary of (GO) Words in the Osage Language, p. 275 of the: Diary nf
Matthew Clarksox, west of the AUeghennies, in 1766. (Schooloraft's Indin
Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV, pp. 265—278).

GU^MMABS AXD OBAMMIATICAL NOTICES.

Washashe AVageressa Pahugreh Tse. The Osage First Book. JBoHou, Crocker
and lirewster, for the American Board of Foreign Missions, 1834, ISmo, pp. 126.

OTO.

Called also Otoes, Of/iouez, Oktolaktos^ IVahtohtana, WaAioktak,
on the left banks of the Platte River. They are divided into

Oloes and Pa/trt/a,

WOllDS AND VOCABULARIES.

T. Sat, pp. Ixxii — Ixxx of: Astronomical and Meteorological Becords and
Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi .... under the command of Major Long. Philadelphia^ 1822, 4to.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Xo. 776 (Otoes, Ouahtokta).

No. Vr, 38, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archojologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367), and S, VI, 4, p. 117, of the
Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Societj, Vol. II
(from Sat).

lleise des Prinzen Maximilian zu W'ikd, etc. Cohlenz^ 1839 — 1841, 2 toIs.
41 o ; Vol. 11, pp. 612—630.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Note 16 (on the Winnepago and Otoe Dialects), pp. 149 — 151, of John Picker-
ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collections
of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X, Second Series. Bottotty printed
by Phelps and Faruham, 1823, Sfo ; pp. 81 — 160. Keprinted, Botiom, Iiittle and
Brown, 1843, Svo).

OTOMI. 141

OTOMI.

Mexican Indians, the north-west of the Valley of Anahuae.
Some also in the neighbourhood of the city of Mexico.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por Fray Pedro Castillo. MS.

Castillo was one of the earliest missiooaries amongst the Otomies, whose
language he perfectly understood and taught. He died in 1577, and was
buried at Tula. (De Souza.)

IIoBATio Caboohi, G-rammatica j Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi. Mexico^
1645, 4to.

De Souza states that the MSS. of the G-rammar and of the Vocabulary are
in the library of Tepozotlan.

Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por P. Juan de Dios Castbo, 4to.

Castro wrote about the year 1690, and his MSS. of both the Yocabulary
and Grammar are preserved in the library of the College of Tepozotlan. (De
Souza.)

Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por Ulmd. D. Fs. Sebastiak Bibebo^
Obispo de la Paz. Printed in Mexico, according to Pinelo.

Yocabulario Megicano y Otomi, por Fr. Pedbo Palacios. MS., according to
De Souza, in the library of the College of Tlateluco, in Mexico.

£1 Lioenciado D. Luis de Neye y Molina, Beglas de Orthographia, Diccio-
nario y Arte del Idioma Othomi, breve instruccion para los principiantes. Mexico,
1767, Svo, pp. 160 (the Dictionary, pp. 13—96).

HSBTAS, Origine, pp. 37, 118, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.

HsBTAS, Saggio, pp. 119, 120.

. HsBTAS, Yocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.

Hebtas, Aritmetica, pp. 109, 110.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 123, 124 (from Hebyas and Neye).

On p. 115, Bangel, P. Palacios, Sebast. Bibebo, and Juan de Dios
Castbo are named as having written Grammars and Vocabularies of the
Otomi — a statement confirmed by De Souza, upon whose authority we give
the full titles.

J. S. Yatbb, Proben der Deutschen Yolksmundarten und Dr. Sektzen's Lin-
guifitischer Kachlass, etc. Leipzig, Fleischer, 1816, 8?o ; pp. 353—375.

P. Joaquin Lopez Yepes, Catecismo y Declaracion de la Doctrina Cristiana
en XiCngua Otomi ; con un Yocabulario del Mismo Idioma. Megico, 1826, 4to.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 706.

Kmanuel Naxeba, De Lingua Othomitorum Dissertatio. Fhiladelphia, 1835,

112 OTOMI.

4to, in : Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, New Series, YolT.
Philadelphia^ published by the Society ; printed by James Kay, 1834— 1837, 4to ;
pp. 249—296.

Nouvclles Annales des Voyages. Paris, Vol. IV (1840), 8vo ; pp. 9 — 37.

Vocabolario Spagnuolo-Italiano-Otomi, pp. 27—78 of: PiccoLOMEsrfa Gram-
mar (see Grammars).

Otomi Vocabulary in : A. Gallatin's Notes on the Semi-ciTilized Nations of
Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol 1,
pp. 298—304. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte y Catecismo de la Lengua Otomi, por Fb. Alokzo Rangel, Provincial de
Sula (1529, 1546, MS.)

Gramktica de la Lengua Otomi, mas correcta y aumentada que la de Fr. Psdbo
Palacios. MS. by Oboz (Fr. Pedbo), Franciscan, Instructor in the Imperial
College of Sta. Cruz de Tlateluco ; died 1597. Wrote, besides, Tarious works in
Nahuatl.

HoEATio Caeochi, Grammatica, etc. (see Vocabularies), pp. 1 — 12, 97—
160.

Arte de la Lengua de los Otomites, con todos sus diferentes Dialectos, por
D. Feancisco Pukon, Maestro de el Idioma Otomi en la Universidad de Megico,
ano 1690. MS. in the library of the University of Mexico.

Gramitica dc la Lengua Otomi, y m^todo para confesar k los Indies en ells,
por Don Feaxcisco IIaedo, 8vo. Printed a second time in Mexico, 1731.

Luis DE Neve t Molina (see Vocabularies).

An Italian Extract of this Grammar was published under the title : Conte
Enea Silvio Vincenzo Piccolomini, Grammatica della Lingua Otomi esposta in
Italiano, secondo la traccia del Licenjiate Luis de Neve y Molina. Col Vocabulario
Spagnuolo-Otomi, spiegato in Italiano. Roma^ Tipogr. Propag. Fide. 1841, 12dio,
pp. 82 (the Grammar, pp. 5—26).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 113 — 123 (from Neve t Molina).

Emanuel Naxeea (see Vocabularies).

V. Piccolomini (see Vocabularies).

A. Gallatin, Notes, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society*
Vol. I, pp. 286-298: extracts from Neve y Molina, pp. 286—294, and froX»
Naxeea, pp. 294—298).

Arte 6 Graraitica de la Lengua Otomi, por P. Juan de Digs Casteo, 'bS-^'
(see under Vocabularies).

Arte6Gram^tica de la Lengua Otomite, por Don Juan Feancisco Escamil^^"^
EscamiUa was Professor of Otomi in the University of Mexico (De Sou^^
authority).

()TTAWA8 — OTTO.M AK U . 1 13

Arte de la LeDgua Otomi, y Catecismo y Confesonario, por Fr. Psdko Palacios,
8vo. MS., according to De Souza, in the library of the College of Tlateluco, in
Mexico.

Arte breve de la Lengua Otomi, compuesto por el Fe. Fr. Alonzo Urbano,
de la Orden N. F. S. Augustin, 15 leaves, ito, MS.

Original in the Imperial Library' of Paris ; copy in possession of K. Q-. Squicri
ISevr York. The original is accompanied y\Uh a large and very complete
Dictionary — Otomi, Nahuatl (Mexican), and Spanish (421 leaves, 4to), quite
equal in extent to Molina's celebrated Yocabulario Mexicano.

OTTAWAS.

Indians of the Algonquin stock in Michigan and Ohio.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.

Comparii^on of Words and Sentences in the Dialects of the Ottowwaws and
Menomonies, pp. 392 — 398 ; Comparison of the language of some Versions of the
Bible, with the Ottawwaw of the present time, pp. 421 — 422 ; and Comparison of
a Greek Sentence with the Dialect of the Ottawwnws, p. 423 of: John Tamneb's

Narrrative of his Captivity and Adventures prepared for the press by

Sdwin James, M.D. Kew York, Gt. and C. and K. Carvill, 1830, 8vo.

No. rV, 9, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallathi's Synopsis, etc.
(Archsologia Americana, Vol. 11, pp. 305 — 367). Beprintcd (partly) under
N, IV, 4i, p. 107, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Trans-
actions, Vol. IT.

(From Tankeb, and MS. Notices of Mb. IIamelin.)

Anichinabek Amisioahikaniwa, The Indian Book. Detroit, printed by Geo.
L. Whitney, 1830, 18mo, pp. 106 ; contains, on pp. 104, 105, a Vocabuhiry of 40
words in French and Ottawa, by the Missionary Dejean.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

JoxATHAK Meeker, Ottawa First Book. Shawnee Mission, printed by
J. Qt. Pratt, 1838, 18mo, pp. 229.

Abinodjnag Omasindiganiwan. Buffalo, printed by Oliver Steele, 1837, 8vo.
pp.8.

Child's Book. Detroit, Bagg and Harmon, 1845, 18mo, pp. 8.

OTTOMAKU, OTTOMACQUE.

Indians of Bolivia, on the banks of the Yarura. The Taparita
^^^ said to speak a dialect of their language.

114' OTUQUIS — PACAGUARAS.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GiLii, Saggio, Vol. Ill, p. 213 ; and, from him, in the: Mithridates, Vol. Ill,
p. 650.

Heryas, Origine, Tabb. L et geq.

OTUQUIS.

Indians of Bolivia, of the province of Chiquitos. Having been
compelled by the Jesuits to adopt the Chiquito, their language
is nearly lost.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Das Land Otuquis in Bolivia. Kach einem Originalbericht Ton Mobssach,
beschrieben TOn Dr. G. L. Kriegk. Frankfurt, 1838, Svo ; pp. 23, 24.

Otuke Vocabulary (23 words) given bj: D'Orbignt, L' Homme AmfepicaiD,
Vol. I, pp. 163 — 164. ; Vol. II, p. 136 ; who also gives some general remarki on
the Language of the Otuke, Vol. II, pp. 176, 177.

OYAMPIS.

Carib tribe of French Guyana.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Adah de Baube et P. Febbb, De la Langue Oyampis, aveo Vocubulaiie, pp<
107—109; and Leprieub, Vocabulaire Ojampis, pp. 225— 229 of : Bulletin de
la Soci^t^ de Geographic, Second Series, Vol. I. Paris, 1834, 8vo.

A. D'Oebignt, L*Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, p. 276.

PACAGUARAS.

Moxos Indians, on the confluence of the rivers Beni and
Mam ore, in Bolivia.

WORDS and vocabularies.
A. D'OBBicunr, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES,

A. D'OBBiaNT, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. II, p. 263.

PAICONKCA — FAMPTICOUGH. 1-15

PAICONECA.

Indians of the province of Chiquitos, near Concepcion, between
the rivers Blaaco and Verde. They belong to the Chiquito
stock ; one of their tribes is the Paunaca.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Worths, pp. 162, 161 of Vol. I o**: A. D'Orbigny,
L'Homme Americain, and p. 162 of Vol. I, and p. 136 of Vol II, Vocabulary of
five Words of the Paunaca tribe.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 190, 191.

PALAIHNI, PALAIKS,

Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of
Upper California.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. 11, W, of the Vocabularies of North-western America (pp. 569—629) of:
Hob. Halb, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion. Philadelphia, Lea and Blancbard, 1846, folio ; and

F, XXXI (pp. 98, 100), of the Vocububries in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, VoL II.

FAMPTICOUGH.

Indian tribe of North Carolina^ now extinct.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A small Dictionary of Tuskerura, Pampticough, Woccon, in : JoHW Lawson,
Qent.f Surreyor-General of North Carolina, a New Voyage to Carolina .... and
a Journal of a 'thousand Miles truvelled through several Nations of Indians,
giving H paiticular Account of their Customs, Manners, etc. London, 1709, small
4to i pp. 225 -227.

Firat printed in : Capt. John Stevens, A New Collection of Voyages and
Travels .... none of them ever before printed. London^ December, 1708.
To be continued monthly, 4to. (In Vol. I, afterwards with separate title,
ibid.y 1709, 1714, and 1718, 4to.)

German translation, Hamburg^ 1772, 8vo.

JoHir Bbickell, M.D., The Natural History of North Carolina, with an Account

r

1 4(i PANOS — PATACHOS.

of the Trades, ^EAnncn, and Customs of tlie Christian and Indian Inhalntanti
Duhiin, 1737, 8fo ; new title, ibid.^ 1743, 8^0 (the Dictionary from Lawbon).

IIekvas, Aritmetica, p. 114.

Smith Babtox, Xew Views, etc. — Comparative Yocabnlaries.

Mithridates (from the above), Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360—362.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 809.

No. TV, K, p. 375, of the Comparative Vocabulary to : A. Gullatin's Synopn
(A rchflcologiti Americana, Vol. 11). From Lawbon, Hebiot, Lans.

Comparison of the Language of the ancient Pampticos of North Carolina wit
tlic Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waccoa of that State and tb
Catawba of South Carolina (Schoglcbaft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Yo
V, pp. 552 —558 ; Tuskarora, Fampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 555, 656 ; Pamptic*
Natic, and Chippewa, pp. 556, 557).

PANOS.

Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Ucayale.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Panos (Languc generale de T Ucayale), Vocabulary, No. JLVill <
Castelnau, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 292, 293.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Note sur la Grammairo Pani. Becueillie par les Missionaires de PTJcaya
Castelnaf, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 301, 302.

PARENT.

Indians of the Maypure Mission^ on the River Mataveni.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Al. de IIumboldt et A. Bonpland, Voyage aux Unions 6quinoxiale8
Nouveau Continent. Faris, 1819, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 366 et seq.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 610.

A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Am6ricain, Vol. II, p. 274.

PATACHOS.

Brazilian Indians in the province Porto Seguro, on the riv
Porto Seguro and Mucmy.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Reise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. Frankfurt^ 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4
Vol. II, pp. 320 et seq.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tah. XLI, No. 604.

PAWNEE PENOBSCOT. 1 1-'

PAWNEE, PANI.

Warlike tribe on the banks of the rivers Platte and Kansas, also
on Bed Biver.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

T. Sat, Yocabulary, pp. Ixii — Ixxxv of: Astronomical .... Records and
Vocabulftries of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi .... under .... Major 8t. H. Long. Philadelphid, 1822, Sfo.

SLalbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 738.

Beise des Prinzen Maxikilian zu Wied, etc. CoJZe»«, 1839— 1841, 2 toIs.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 630—632.

No. XVII, 52, of tbe Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archssologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367) ; and

No. E, Xvil, pp. 96—98, of Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Fifteen Pawnee Words compared with Riccaree, Kichai, Hueco, and Witchita,
pp. 68, 69 of the Report upon the Indian Pribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's
Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to).

Six Caddo Words and Pawnee Affinities. Ihid., p. 70.

PEBAS.

Brazilian Indians on the Amazon.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Pebas, Vocabulary No. XXII, pp. 296, 297 of : Castelnau, Vol.
V, Appendice.

PENOBSCOT.

Abenaki tribe, greatly reduced, above Banger, Maine.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SiOTH Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates (from aboye;. Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402 — 404.
T. Sat, Comparatiye Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape Stock, etc.

I IS l»KNNbYLVANIANS.

Note i:>, pp. 135— U5, to John Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Obsem-
tlDiis on tlio Muliogan Language. (Collections of the MaMachusfltts llistorieil
S K'ift V, SocDud S.Ti«>s, Vul. X. BomIoh^ printed by Phelps and Fombam, 1823^
8v'o. Ke[irinted, iV>ir/., Little anJ Brown, 1843, S^o.)

No. IV, It, n, p. 370, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Oallatia'i
Synoptid (Archa;ologiu Americana, Vol. II). From MSS. of Trkat and Mn.

G.iKblNEK.

11. Hale, Komnrks on the Language of the St. John or Colasiukweek Indisiii,
with a rvnobscot Vucabulary. Boitton^ 183 1-, 8fo, pp. 8.

PENXSYLVAKIANS.

Tlie Indians inhabiting Pennsylvania, or New Sweden^ were of
the AI<^onkin and of the Iroquois stock (Mohawks).

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabularium Barbnro-Virgineorum ; additis passim locntionibns et obsem*
tionibus hi^toricis brevioribus ad linguae pleniorem notitiam, pp. 183 — 154 of:
Lutheri Cnthechi^imis. dfvver»att pa American -Vergiuiske sprukefc. JSioekkolm,
16y6, 12mo (from Tuomas CA-MPAyirs).

"Words, on pp. 40, etc. : Journal des S9aTan8, 1716, 4to.

Book IV, Chap. I— X, Vocabulary, and Chap. XI and XII, Dialogues of:
Thomas Campanhs Holm, Kort beskrifuing om FroTiucien Nya Swerige.
Stockholm, 170V, ^to ; pp 153—599.

Eii'jllsh tran.xhition, by P. St. Duponcean, A Short Description of the

Province of ^'e\v Sweden Translated for the Hi&torical Society of

Pennsylvania, with notes, pp. 11.1-156, in: Memoirs of the Historical
Soeiety of Pennsylvania, Vol. III. Philadelphia, M'Carty and Davis, 1834,
8vo ; pp. 1— 168.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. —Comparative Vocabularies (Indians of Pena-
Bjlvaniu, according to William Penn), from Campanius.

No. IV, 198 (p. 371), of Comparative Vocabulary to A. Qallatht's Synopsis,
etc. (ArcLffiolcgia Americana, Vol. II).

Ant. Court dr Gebeltn, Langue de Pennsylvanie (Monde Primiti^ VoL
Vlir, p. 523). Reprinted in: J. B. Scherer, Recherches Historiques et G&)-
gPaphiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo, p. 281.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389 (from the Virginian Catechism).

J. S. Vater, Proben Deutschcr Mundartcn : Dr. Seetzen's Linguist. Nachlass.
^^P^ig, 1816. 8vo ; pp. 376-380.

P EQUOT P I MA . 1 49

PEQUOT.

Indians of Connecticut, related to the Mohegans. The Nanga-^
tuck Indians speak a kindred language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of Pequot and some Nangatuck Indian Words, Article I of the
Apx)eDdix (p. 491) to : John W. ds Forrest, History of the Indians of Con-
necticut. Mariford, Hamerslej, 1852, 8vo.

PESCHERAI, YAKANAKU, PUEGIANS.

Indians of Fireland (Tierra del Fuego) and of the peninsulas
Brunswick and King William IV ; divided into three tribes —
Kamenetes, Kennekas, and Karaikas,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

James Weddell, Master, R.N., A Voyage towards the South Pole, performed in
tlie years 1822 — 1824. Containing a Visit to 'Lierra del Fuego ; with a particular

account of the Iiihubitants London, Longman, 1825, 8vo, pp. 280,

13 maps and plates. Second edition, ibid., 1827, Svo, pp. 824, maps and plates ;
p. 174.

Heetas, Catalogo, p. 15.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocahularies.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D*ORBiaNT, L* Homme Am6ricain, Vol. I, p. 412.

PIANKASHAWS.

Southern tribe of the Ojibway stock.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Smith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocahularies j
And, from him, Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360 — 362.

PIMA.

Indian nation of New Mexico and Sonora, where the country
^habited by them is called Fimeiiay and divided into Alta and

150 PIXALEXOS.

AVORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

IlEBTAfl, Origiuo, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. 1 1

IIebvas, Sag^'io, pp. 124, 125. ■

loNATZ Ffefferkobn, Besobreibuiig der Landscbaft Sonora. Koll», 1791,
2 Tols, 8vo.

Mitbridates (from tbe above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162—169.

A Yocabubirio de las Lenguas Pima, Eudeye y Seria, is said, by De Souza, to have
been written by Fr. Adamo G-ilo, a Jesuit missionary in Galifomia.

Pima Vocabulary, by Dr. John Scouleb, in : Journal of tbe Boyal G«ogn-
pbical Society of Loudon, Vol. XI. London, 1841, Svo ; pp. 246, 248, 250.

Pima Vocabulary, under W, 1, p. 129, in : Transactions of the American EtliBO-
logical Society, Vol. II.

Dr. C. C. Pabwy (Botanist to tbe Boundary Commission), Vocabulary of the
Language of the Pimo Indians on the Bio Gila, New Mexico, pp. 161, 162 d:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. III.

Pima Vocabulary, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, p. 94 of : Keport
the Indian Tribes (see Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific
Railroad Reports, Vol. II). Washington, 1856, 4to.

John R. Babtlett, the United States Boundary Commissioner, has also taken
a Vocabulary of the Pimo Language.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES,
Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162 — 169 (from Ignatz Ppetfebeobk).

PINALENOS.

Also called Pinon Lanos, Piiiols^ Pinal Leiio. Apache tril^^
ranging over an extensive circuit, between the Sierra Piiial a^
the Sierra Blanca, near the Upper San Francisco River, not^^
of the Gila, in New Mexico.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Pinal Leno Vocabulary, taken in 1852, by Lieutenant A. W. Whip^^
(see Report upon the Indian Tribes, in the Report on the Route near the S^^
Parallel, Chap. V, pp. 81—83 of : PaciHc Raih'oad Reports, Vol. II. Washington*
1856, 4to).

PIRINDA — POKONCUI. 151

PIRINDA.

ge of the Indians of Mechoacan, Mexico. Identical with
,? De Souza says of Fr. Juan Bravo, the author of a
ar of the Lengua Tarasca (see under Tarasca), "fue
» peritissimo de la lengua Pirinda, Uamada Tarasca/^

WOKDS and vocabularies.
S, Saggio, p. 120.
lates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 126—128.

grammars and grammatical notices.

» la Lengua Firinda, and also various Sermons in the same Language, by
Fbavcisco Acosta, of the order of San Augustin, in the province of
Q. These MSS. were left in the library of the Convent of Charo.

'ocabulario y Manuel de la Lengua Firinda, por Fr. Miguel Guevara..
f to De Souza, in the Convent of Charo, province of Michoacan.

PIRO.

of New Mexico, near El Paso.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

bulary of the Firo Language has been taken by John B. Babtlett, the
ates Boundary Commissioner.

POKONCHI.

Oman. Indian Nation of the district of Vera Paz, in
lala. Their language bears close afl&nity to the Maya.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GE (see Grammars below).

8, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.

3, Saggio, pp. 113—115.

Baetow, New Yiews, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

lates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 23.

10 of: A. Q-allatin's Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico
ions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. I. New York, Bartlett
Drd, 1845, 8vo.)

152 ropOLicA.

Dr. Kakl ScHKRZb'K, Spnii'Iie der Indianer tod Palin (Poconchi) 24 engL
Meiien von Nt>u OiiuteinulA, pp. 28 — 35 of Vol. XT of the: Sitsungsberichte der
PliilofophiM-h-IIi.ttorisflu'ii Klas^e der Kaiserliehen Akademie der WiswMchiftaL
J'tenHfij lHo5. 8vo. AUo under the separate title: Spracben der Indiaoer Ccnlill
Anierika'd. Vienna, 1855, Svo, pp. 11.

GR.4MMAK.S AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Thomas Qaoe, The Kn^liph- American, his Trarail by Sea and bj Land, or i
New Survey (»f the West Indies .... with a Gnunmar or aome few Budimab
of the Indian tongue, culled Poconchi or Pocoroan. JLomdon, printed bj B. Cote^
10-18, Mmull folio. S.'cond Edition, A New Survey of the West Indiei*, etc Londet,
1055, PMiall folio ; the Grammar on pp 213, et scq. Third Edition. XoMcf&ii, 1677,
Hvo. The Fourth Kdilion, enlarge<l by the Author. London^ printed for T.
NicholHon, 1090, 8vo.

French trausilution — NouTelle Relation, oontenant lea Voyages de ThamM
Gage dans la Nouvello E.sp:igne. Traduite par le Sieur De Beaulieu Hm
O'Neil. PariH, Clouaicr, 1070, 2 vols. 12mo ; and added to it : Bri^re Iiutnu-
tion ))our apprcndre la Langue Indienne appelee Poconchi ou Pooomn.
Pa>is, 1070, 12mo.

Thin French translation has often been reprinted, viz., Anuterdam, Moret,
108O, 2 vols. 12mo ; iLid., 1085 ; ibid., 1687 ; ibid., 1695 ; ibid.. Third M-
tion, revuu et eorrigee, 1099, 2 vols. 12mo ; ibid.. Fourth Edition, 172(^
2vola. 12nio, ibid., 1721; ibid., 1:22.

DuuNET, Vol. II , p. 315, however, remarks that the edition of 1676iBtha
one to which the truni^hition of the Poconchi Grammar was added. This
trnn»lntiun having appeared under a separate title, is generally found sepa-
rately.

Oerman translation —Ganz neue, merkwiirdige Keisebeschreibnng nact*-
NeuHpanien .... aus dem FranzOsischen iibersetzt. Leipzig, 16y3, 4t(^ —
The Grammar on pp. 457—471.

Dutch translation— Nieu we ende seer naeuwkeerige Reyzedoor de Spaansch*^

West Indien, van Thomas Gage overgeset door H. v. Q. (H. t*"*^

Quellcnburgh). Utrecht, 1082, small 4to.

Spaninh translation — Nueva Kelacion qiie contiene los Yiagea de Tom^-"
Gage en la Nueva Kspaua. Paris, Rosa, 1838, 2 vols. 12mo.

Mithridatfs (from Gagk), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 0—13.

A. GaUatin (from Gaoe), Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, ctff
pp. 45—47, 209—275, of: Transactions of the American Ethnological So<aet^
Vol. I. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo.

POPOLUCA,

Or Populuka, Papoloka, Indians of Central America, in Oajac^^ J
and in the State of San Salvador. The same as Poconchi aD^
Pocoman, i.e., Kachiquel (?). Muhlenpfordt does not mentio"^
them in Oajaca.

POTTAWATAME POWHATTANS. 1 53

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Fbanc. db Toual, Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua Popolaea de Tecoinachalco
(printed P.).

Dr. Kabl Schebzer, Sprache der Tndianer Ton Sf. Maria, am Fftsse des Was-
ter-Vulcan's (Pupuluka-Katebikel), 5 engli. Meilen von Autigua Guatemala (Sitz-
Kungsberichte der Fhilosophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akademie
der "Wisaenschaften, Vol. XV, pp. 28—35. Vienna, 1855, 8fo. Also under the
separate title: Sprachen der Indianer Central Amerika's. Vienna^ 1855, Syo,
pp. 11.)

grammars and GllAMMATTCAL NOTICES.

Fbai^oesco de Toral (see Vocabularies above).

POTTAWATAME, POUTEOTAMIS.

Indians of the Algonkin stock, formerly near Detroit, Michigan.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.

Smith Babtov, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343—346, 360—362.

No. rV, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary (p. 375) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) . From Barton, and MS. Notices in the
"War Department of the United States.

Beprinted and enlarged under N, IV, 5, p. 107 of Vocabularies in; American
BSthnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICKS.

Pottawottomie Spelling-book. Shawnee Mission, J. Meeker, printer, 1834.
12pio, pp. 32.

letter of D. WoLCOTT to General Cass (in answer to printed queries). On the
XEistory and Language of the Pottowattamies, note, pp. 380 — 386 of: Henry R.
Schoolcraft, Travels in the Central Portions of the Mississippi Valley (performed
. . . . 1821). New York, Collins andHannay, 1825, 8vo.

Pewani ipi Potewatomi Missinoikan eyowat nemadjik Catholiques endjik (Catho-
He primer). Baltimore, John Murphy, 1846, 24mo, pp. 31.

POWHATTANS.

Tribe of the Algonkin stock, in Maryland and Virginia, now
extinct. Jefferson, in the Notes on Virginia, gives a view of
their extent and tribes.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Captain John Smith, General History of Virginia, New England, and the

X

lr>l l'KIN(E WILLIAM SOUND —FTTEBLO INDIANA.

Suminor IsK's London, 1626. folio. Reprinted, ibid., 1627 and 161^

folio ; at tin* end of Book II.

Ei'priiitcd : The Travels, Advent urcs, and Obaervationa of Captain Jolm Smitl^

etc. Bichmond, republished at the Franklin Press, William TV. Gnf,

printer, 1819, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, pp. 147, 148.

No. IV, i (376), of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. G-allatis*b Spopo^
ete. ( A reliieologia Americana, Vol. II).

Voeabuliiry of the Powbattan Language (from Captain Smith) in:JiiM
Maeaulcv's llidtorv of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 rob.
Kro ; Vol. II, pp. 265 - 270.

PllINCE WILLIAM SOUND.

Oil the north-west coast of North America (Russian posseasionft)
inhaliited by Eskimaux.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Jaxies Cook, Vojage to the Pacific Ocean (third voyage, under C(»

Clark, and Gore). London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 874—376.

Captain George Dixon, A Voyage round the "World, but more particnlir*^
to the Nortli-west Coast of America. London, Goulding, 1789, 4to, p. 241.
French translation, bj M. Lebas. Paris, 1789, 2 vols. 8vo.
German translation, by J. R. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1790, 4to, p. .

Captain Nathaniel Pobtlock, A Vojage round the World, etc. Xow^***
Stockdale, 1789, 4to.

German translation, by G. Forster, Geschichte derB^isen an der yoK^'
west und Nordostkiiste von Amerika .... von Dixon, Portlock, Cook
Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to.

And PoiiTLOCK, G. Mortimer's and Long*s Travels, translated wi*
separate title. Berlin, Voss, 1796, 4to.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 238.

PUEBLO INDIANS (ZUNI, KERES).

Indians of New Mexico. The tribes living at Santo Doming
and the neighbouring Pueblos are called KereSy or, by th
Spaniards, Queres.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

James H. Simpson, A Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Lsngnages c^^
the Pueblo or Civil Indians of New Mexico, and of the wild tribes inhabiting i^^
borders, pp. 140 — 1-13 of: Journal of a Military Reconnaissance from Santa F^*
New Mexico, to the Navajo country, pp. 56 — 168 of: Keports of the Secretary c^*
War, with Reconnaissances of Routes from S. Antonio to El Paso; also, tl*^

• • •

PUELCHES. 155

•ort of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson. Washington^ printed at the Union Office,
0, 8vo (Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, 3l8t Congress. Session).
Simpson distinguishes Pueblo Indians of: —

1. St. Domingo S. Anna.

S.Felipe SiUa.

Laguna Pojuate.

Acoma Cochiti.

2. S.Juan S.Clara

S. Aidefonso Pojuaque.

Marabe Tesuque.

3. Taos — Picori — Sandia — Isleta.
•i. Yemes (old Pecos).

)ATrD V. Whiting, Pueblo (of Tusuque) Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian
>e8 of the United States, Yol. Ill, pp. 446—459.

'sptain J. H. Eaton, United States Agent, Pueblo (of Zuni) Vocabulary,
L, Vol. IV, pp. 416—432 (pp. 429—431, numerals).

iini Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 91 — 93 of the
»ort upon the Indian Tribes (Report on the Boute near the 35th Parallel in :
ific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington^ 1856, 4to).

PUELCHES.

Jians of the Argentine Republic, between the Rio Negro and
' Hio Colorado. They are divided into Chechehet, Divihet,
• Taluhet; the two latter are called by the Spaniards
'^mpas.^^ The wild Charruas are related to them. Hale
i^iguishes only Pampas (north of the Rio Colorado) and
^ etches (south of that river).

W^OBDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Falkneb, Description of Patagonia (see Araucans) .... Hereford^ 1774,
- 138.

German translation, by Schack Hm. Ewald. Gotha^ Ettinger, 1775,
^^^0, p. 13.

^^VAS, Catalogo, p. 20.

'Inridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423. Puelches and Tuelhet (from Falknee and
--as).

c^^bulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162—164. of Vol. I of: Alcide D'Oe-
^3 L'Homme Americain.

^"Iche Vocabulary and Sentences (Pampas and Tehuiliche), pp. 653—656
tt ited States Exploring Expedition. Ethnography and Philology, by HoE.
^"^ Philadelphia^ Lea and Blanchard, 1846.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

X)*Obbigny, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 79, 80 j and p. 87, Notices on
*^harrua Language.

156 PUQUINt QUAPPAS.

PUQUINI.

Peruvian Indians, on the islands of the Chuquito Lake, and at
the Mission of the Patres !Mercenarii, near the Pucarani. They
spoke their language exclusively among themselves, and did not
permit strangers to learn the same. For worshipping, they
used the Quichua. No afiinity to any other American lan-
guage.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hbbyab, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.

Hesyab, Saggio, p. 93.

Mitliridates (from Heeyas), Vol. Ill, pp. 548 — 550.

PURYS.

Brazilian Indians, of the provinces Rio de Janeiro and Espiritu
Santo.

WURDS AND vocabularies.

WiLH. L. YON EsCHWEGE, Journal fiir Brasilien, Heft 1. fFeimar^ 1818,
8vo.

Balbi, Atlas Etlmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 497.

QUADUS.

Brazilian Indians, in the neighbourhood of Miranda.

WORDS AND VCCABULARIE8.

Langue des Quadus. Vocabulary No. IX, pp. 278— 2S0, of; Castelkatj, Vol.
V, Appendice.

QUAPPAS.

Indians on the banks of the Arkansas River. (See Nuttai^'s
Journal, pp. 81 — 89.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. VI, 36, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305— S67) to A. GaiJATI»'*
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II}.

\

QUEEN charlotte's ISLAND ^ICHE. 157

S, IV, 3, p. 117, of the Vocabulanes (Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II).

QUEEN CHARLOTTE'S ISLAND.

On the north-west coast of America. The language spoken by
the Indians of this island is but little known. The Cumshewar,
Massit, Skittageets, Keesarn, and Kigarnee are mentioned as
living on the island.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Pp. 302, 380 of: Miscellaneous Vocabularies, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), contains, under XXIX, 64, p. 380, words of the
Kigarnee, Casarnee, Skittageets, Cumshawa, and other tribes of the north-west
coast, and the numerals 1 — 10 in the Queen Cliarlotte Island Language. (From
MS. authorities of Messrs. Sttjeois and Betant.)

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 850.

Words, p. 1 54 of : R. G. LiTHAif , The Languages of the Oregon Territory
(Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. X, pp. 154—166). Edin-
hurgh, 1848, 8vo.

Skittagets (Queen Charlotte's Island) Vocabulary, No. 6, XIX, p. 102, of
Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

^ICHE, QUICHE, KICHE.

Indians of Guatemala, belonging to the Great Tzendal or Maya
stock, which occupies that State. Their language is closely
related to that of the Kachiquels and Zutugils, and bears much
resemblance to the Maya.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Kiche (4iche) Dictionary (from the Convent of Papuna ?, sold by Pierre Bavila,
on the 24th November, 1833). MS. vol. in 4to, on paper of the 18th century ; in the
Imperial Library of Paris. Apparently a copy of the Cakchiquelchi Dictionary,

A MS. Vocabulary of the Quiche Language is in the possession of Abb^
Dominic Jehl, of Palin, near Amatitan, Guatemala.

Quiche Numerals, p. 191 of : John L. Stephens, Incidents of Travel in Cen-
tral America. New York, Harpers, 1844, 2 vols. 8vo.

Dr. Kael Scherzee, Sprache der Indianer von Ixtia.vacan (Quich^, 10 engl,
Meilen von Quesaltenango, Guatemala, pp. 28 — 35 of Vol. XV of: Sitzungsberichte
der Philosophisch-Historischen Klasse dcr Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissen-
schaften. Vienna, 1855, 8vo. Also under the separate title : Sprachen der Indianer
Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.

158 QUICHUA.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. F. Alonzo Flobes, Arte de la Lengua Kakcbiquel y pandelo de las qnatro
Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy inte'gran en el reyno de Goathemala. AMiigWi
Ouatemala^ 1753. |

Althougli Juarros (I, p. 3i3) states that this ** Arte" was printed, and had
proved very useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, wten
the Khhd Brusseur de Bourbourg wrote from Guatemala that he had obtained
four copies (see E. G-. Squier*s letter in the London Athenaum, Decembers,
1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Eachiquel, with the
Quiche and Zutugil, all three being dialects of one parent stock. Flores was
Professor of the Kakcbiquel language at the San Caiios Uniyersity of Guate-
mala.

Arte de las tres I^enguas — Cacchiquel, Quiche y Yutuhil ; por el B. P. Fray
Fkancisco Ximenez, del Orden de Predicadores.

Second division of the Padre's great work on the history, languages, and
antiquities of Guatemala, existing, in MS. only, in the Uniyersity Library of
Guatemala. (For an account of this MS. see N. Triibner's paper on Central
American Archseology, in the London Athenceum, May 29, 1856, No. 1492.)

Arte de Lengua Kakchikel del uso de Fr. Estetan Tobbesano, Pre'- Ano de
1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris. (Copy in
possession of E. G. Squier.)

Contains : Parallelo de las Lenguas 4iche (Kiche, Quiche), Cakchiqud
(Kachiquel) y Zutuhil (Zutugil).

A comparison is also made between this dialect and the Zutugil and
Kachiquel Grammar of Flores,

Arte de Lengua ^iche (Quiche), compuesto por N. M. B. P. Fray Babtho-
LOME AuLEO, Religioso Menor de N. S. P*' San Francisco.

In the Imperial Library of Paris. MS. of 67 leaves in 4to. (A copy alfio
in possession of E. G. Squier, New York.)

The Imperial Library also possesses the following MS. : — Marial sacro y
Santoral. Sermones en la Lengua ^ iche, escritos por varies autores, princi*
palmcnte por un Indio por lo qual hay mucho que correjir, o emendar Cf^
todos los Textos Latinos. Pertenece al uso del P^- P""- Fr. P A. S., hijo ^®
la S^- Prov«- del dulcisimo fibre de J.H.S. Guatem*- ano de 1796. Co*^'
tains 23 Sermons.

QUICHUA, KECHHUA.

The language of the Peruvians. It was spoken by all the trib^
subject to the lacas^ from Pasto to the River Manle, in ChiU-
and is still in use. Many of the Spanish inhabitants speak i::^
well and correctly. The Aymara bears a close affinity to th^
Quicliua.

Dialects of the Quichua : — 1. Dialect of Ciizco, or the Quichu ^

QUICHUA. 159

proper ; the most cultivated dialect. 2. Lamano or Lamissa,
round Truxillo. 3. Chinchaisuyu, round Lima. 4. Kalchaqui,
in Tucaman, the best after the Cuzco dialect. 5. Dialect of
Quito ; the least cultivated — corrupted by many foreign words.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Fp. Domingo dk S. Thomas, de la orden do S. Domingo, Lexicon 6 Vocabu-
lario de la Lengua general del Pe^ llamada Quichua. ValladoHd, impresso por
Francesco Fernandez de Cordova, 1560, 8vo, of 8 and 179 leaves.
(See Grammars, where also the edition of 1586 is noticed.)

P. Diego Gonzalez Holqtjin, Vocabulario de la Lengua general de todo el
Peru llamada Quichua, o del Jnca. Sn la Ciudad de los Reyes^ 1586, 8vo.
Keprinted : Corregido e renovado conforme ^ la propiedad cortesana del Cuzco.
En la Ciudad de los Reyea^ impresso por Francisco del Canto, 1607, 1608, 2 vols.
4to ; pp. 375, 332.

(Two parts — Quichua- Spanish and Spanish-Quichua.)

DiEOO DE ToBBES RiTBio, E S. J., Grammatica y Vocabulario en la Lengua
general del Peru, llamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espauola. Sevilla, 1603, 8vo.
The Grammar on 40 leaves. The Vocabulary, Quichua-Spanish, on 11
sheets (A — L), Spanish-Quichua on 12 sheets (A — M).

Beprinted : Arte de la Lengua Quichua, compuesto por el Padre Diego de
ToBBES BuBio, de la Compania de Jesus. Lima, por Francisco Lasso, 1619, 8vo,
103 leaves (4 and 44 numbered, 55 not numbered).

Brunet, IV, p. 495, says that, independently of the Grammar, it contains
two small Vocabularies, Spanish-Quichua and Quichua-Spanish.

Beprinted : Tercera edicion, nuevamente corregida con afiadidos los romances,
^1 catecismo corregido pequeiio, el Vocabulario afiadido y otro Vocabulario de la
Xengua Chinchaysuyu, por el M. B. Juan de Figtteeedo. Hn Lima^ por Joseph
cle Contreras, 1700, small 8vo, 12 and 115 leaves.

Beprinted : Anadio el P. Juan de Figuebedo, de la misma compania, ahora
3iuevamente corregida y aumentada en muchas Vocables .... por un religioso
de la misma compania. Lima, 1754, 8vo.

El P. Maestro Fray Juan Mabtinez, Vocabulario en la Lengua general del
Peru, llamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espanola. JSn los Reyes, 1604, small 8vo.

Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quichua. J?» los
Reyes {Lima), Francisco del Canto, 1614, 8vo.

(BibUotheca Heberiana, VI, 35, No. 512, X, 18, No. 522.)

A short Vocabulary, pp. 477, 478 of: Joan, de Laet, Novus Orbis. Lugdunx
"Ratavorumy Elzevir, 1633, folio.

GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 355 et seq.

Hebvas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 49, 79, 118, 135, 136, 139, 140,
177, 178, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI.

160 QUICHUA.

IIfbvas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Kichoa o Pemano-Kichna dell'
anno 1560, Eitena), p. 221 (Eichua e Eitcna).

Hebyas, Aritmctica, pp. 100, 101 (ELchua, Eitena, Lamano, Chinchaysuyu).

Hervas, Saggio, pp. 88, 89.

John REiynoLD Fobsteb, Observations made daring a Voyage round tbe
World, on Physical Geography, Natural History, and Ethic Philosophy. London^
Bobinson, 1778, -ito.

Oerman translation — Uebersetzt und mit A.nmerkungen yersehen Ton G.
Forster. Berlin, llaude and Spener, 1783, 8vo, pp. 254.

SifiTH Babtojt, New Views, etc.— Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 522, 537, 538, 547, 571 (from Hebyas, Tobbbs, and
Holguin).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 459 (dialect Quitana).

Will. Mabsden, Miscellaneous Works. London, Cox and Son, 1834, 4to,
p. 104.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 362, 164 of Vol. I of: A. D*Obbioht,
L'Homme Am^ricain.

Four Quichua Words compared with Arrowack, Atoray, Maipure, and Moxos,
Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. tan Heuvel's El Dorado, ^ew York, Winchester,
1844, 8vo.

A MS. Vocabulary of the Chichua Language is in the library of the Royal
Geographical Society of London (Journal, etc., VoL X. JLondon, Murray, 1811,
8vo), p. xxiv.

J. J. TON TscHiTDi (see Grammars).

Vocabulary of Eighty-eight Words, Inca, Quichoa, and Italian, and numerals
1 to 20, 30, 40, etc., to 100, 200, etc., to 1000, pp. 49—50 ; and : Alcuni Vocabuli
piu comrauni in Lingua Quichoa, pp. 289 — 300 of: Gaetano Osottlati, Ex-
ploracioni dello regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo ed il fiume delle Amazoni, etc.
Milano, Typographia Bernardoni, 1850, 8vo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Gramatica 6 Arte do la Lcngua general de los Indios de los Reynos del
Peru. Nuevamente compuesto por el Maestro Fray Domingk) de S. Thomas, de
la Orden de S. Domingo, Morador en los dichos Reynos. Impresso en Vo^
ladolid, por Francisco Fernandez de Cordova, 1560, small 8vo, of 8 and ^
leaves.

The Vocabulary by the same author (sec Vocabularies) is generally found
annexed to this Grammar. Both are reprinted in : Arte y Vocabulario en !>
Lengua general del Peru, Uamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espanola. En
la Ciudad de los Reyes, por Ant. Ricardo, 1586, small 8vo.

The Vocabulary has a separate title, given by Brunet, IV, p. 676 : Voca-

QUICHUA. 161

bulario en la Lengua general del Peru llamada QuicHua y en la Lengua
!Espanola. Sn lot Reyes, por Ant. Bieardo, 1586, small 8to.

The preface of this Vocabulary is signed "Eicardo." RiTcro and
Tschudi name ANTOyio Ricabdo as the author of the Vocabulary and
Grammar.

DiEGK) DE ToEBES EtTBio (see Vocabularies aboye).

P. Diego Gonzaxes Holgtjin, de la Compauia de J^sus, Natural de Caceres,
Ghramatica y Arte uueva de la Lengua general de todo el Peru llamada Quichua,
6 Lengua del luca, anadida y cumplida, en todo lo que le faltava de tiempos y
de la Gramatica, y recogida en forma de Arte lo mas necesario en los dos primeros
Libros. Con mas otros dos Libros postreros de Adieiones de Arte, para mas
perficionarla, el uno para alcanzar la Copia de Vocablos, y el otro para Elegancia
y Omato. Impresso en la Ciudad de los Reyes del Peru, por Francisco del Canto,
1607, 4to, of 4 and 144 leaves.

Reprinted : Nueva Edicion, revista y corregida s. 1. Uenova, Pagano, 1842,
8vo, pp. 320.

D. Alonso de Htjerta, Arte de la Lengua Quechua general de los Yndios de
este Reyno del Peru. Impresso por Francisco del Canto, En los Reyes, 161G, 4to,
of 8 and 40 leaves.

A MS. copy of this Grammar was in the library of M. Chaumette des
FoBsees (see MSS., p. 162).

DiDAO. DE Olmos, Ghramatica de la Lengua Indica. Lima, 1633, 4to. (Tschudi
has « 1634.")

D. ZVAS Roxo Mezia t Ocon, Natural de la Ciudad del Cuzco, Arte de la
Lengua general de los ludios de Peru. Impresso en Lima, por Jorge Lopez de
Herrera, 1648, small 8vo, of 18 and 88 pp.

El Bachiller Don Esteban Sancho de Meloab, Arte de la Lengua general
del Ifnga llamada Qqechhua. Lima, Diego de Lyra, 1691, 8vo.

Langue du P6rou, pp. 525 — 533 of Vol. VIII of : Coitbt de Gebelin, Monde
Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Reprinted, pp. 334—336 of ; J. B. Scherer, Recher-
ches Historiques et G^ographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777,
12mo.

Gun, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 233—243.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 526—534.

A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 272—274.

La Lengua Quichua, Cap. V, pp. 86 — 115, of: Maeiano Edtjaedo de Riveea
y Juan Diego de Tschudi, Antiguedades Peruanas. Fienna, imprenta imperial,

1851, 4to.

•

J. J. VON Tschudi, Die Kechua Sprache. Erste Abtheilung : Sprachlehre.
Zweite Abtheilung: Sprachproben. Dritte Abtheilung: WSrterbuch. Wien,
K.K. Hof undStaatsdruckerci, 1853, 3 vol8.8vo ; pp. iv, 268j vi, 110, 1 ; viii, 508, 2.

Y

162 QL'ICUUA.

On the Language and Literature of the Incas, pp. 161 — 201 of : Crzoo, A
Journey to the Ancient Capital of Peru, with an Account of the History, Language,
Literature, and Antiquities of the Incas. And : Lima ; a Visit to the Capital wd
Provinces of Modem Peru ; with a Sketch of the Viceregal Government, History
of the Republic, and a lieview of the Literature and Society of Peru. With
illustrations and a map. By Clements B. Mabeham, F.K.G.S. Crown 8to,
pp. 420. London^ 1856.

A Sketch of the Grammar, etc., of the Tncas, with Vocabularies and Specimens
of Composition in Quichua j Appendix A of the above work, pp, 389 — 408.

DIALECTS.

1. Quito. — Breve instruction 6 Arte de la Lengua Commune de los Indios,
Begun que se habla en la Provincia de Quito. Lima^ en la imprenta de la Plazuels
de San Christoval, 1753, small 8vo.

2. Chinchaisuya. — Vocabulario de la Lengua Chinchaisuyo, por Juan M
FioiTEBEDO (see Vocabularies above, sub voce: De Tobbes Rxtbio).

J. J. VON TscuuDi, Peru. Reiseskizzen aus den Jahren 1838 — 1842. Sand
Oallen, 1846, 2 vols. 8vo } Vol. II, p. 379 ; also in the first part of: Die Kechiia-
sprache, pp. 257—262.

3. Tunga (see under Yunga, regular Alphabet).

PEKUVIAN MS. VOCABULARIES AND GKAMMABS.

A MS. Grammar, late of the library of Wilhelm von Humboldt, is now in the
Boyal Library at Berlin.

In the library of the late French Consul at Peru, M. Amed^e Chaumette des
Fosses (Catalogue, Paris, Labitte, 1842, 8vo), many linguistic MSS. ooncemiDg
Peru were contained, viz. —

Alonzo DE Htjebta, Arte de la Lengua Quechua (Catal., p. 50, No. 574).

Arte de la Lengua general del Inca Uamada Quichua. MS. on paper, 12mo
(Catal., p. 50, No. 575).

Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Campos en la Pampa del Sacramento nel Fenu
MS. on paper, 4to.

Copied from a MS. in possession of D. Manuel Arnes, Governor of Anda-
namarca (Catal., p. 51, No. 581).

Vocabulario de la Lengua Passa 6 Setaba. MS. on paper, 1795, 8vo, oblong
(Catal., p. 51, No. 582).

Arte de la Lengua Cholona, advertencias para el idioma Chiriguano. 2 volfl.
12mo, MS. on paper (Catal,, p. 51, No. 583).

Vocabulario de k Lengua Caniba, por el P. Btjenavbntfba Mabqites, predi-
w^or^ UcayaU (Escrito en favor del Colegio de Ocopa), MS. 4to (Catal., p. 51,

■ Ooadwo que contiene el Vocabidario en Lengua del Inca segun se habla en el

RICCAREES RUMSEN. 163

Obispado de Maynas y Ucayali, escrito por el Hermano Fray Gebonimo de los
BoLOBES Y Leceta, CoDversop de los Pueblos de Pisqui y Cuntamana de Manca,
Mayo 21, 1814. In the Missionary Convent of Santa Kosa de Ocopa, proyince of
Jauja. (See Tschudrs Vocabulary, preface, p. vii.)

RICCAREES,

Ricaras, Aricaras ; also, Satrahe. Indians of the Pawnee
stock, on the right banks of the Missouri.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Biccaree Vocabulary in : Geo. Catlin, Letters and Notes on the Manners,
Customs, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. London
and New Yorky Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 vols. 8vo j Vol. II, pp. 262-265.

Reise des Prinzen Maximilian ztj Wied. Cohlenz^ 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, pp. 465—474.

Fifteen Riccaree Words (from Prince Maximilian) compared with Pawnee,
Sichai, Witohita, and Nueco, pp. 68, 69 of : Report upon the Indian Tribes (added
to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report in : Pacific Railroad Report, Vol. II.
Washinffton, 1856, 4to).

RUMSEN, RUNSIENES.

Indians in the neighbourhood of Monterey, California. The
Achastliers speak a dialect of the same language.

WOEDS AND VOCABXJLAEIES.

J. F. BouBOOiNG, Relation d'un Voyage recent des Espagnols sur les C6tes Nord-
ouest de TAm^rique septentrionale. Paris^ 1789, 8vo, p. 78. Third edition.
JPari8, 1803, 8vo.

German translation — Jena, 1789, 8vo.

Relacion del Viage hecho por las Goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792,
para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca, etc. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802, 8vo ;
pp. 172, 173.

P. 127 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Db la P^boitsb, Voyage autour du Monde, etc. Paris, 1797, 4 vols. 4to j
Vol. I, Chap. 12.

Translation — London^ Robinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to.

Qerman translation, by J. R. Forster and Math. Chr. Sprengel. Berlin,
Voss, 1799, 1800, 2 vols. 8vo j Vol. I, p. 388. (From : Magazin der merk-
wilrdigsten Reisebeschi-eibungen. Berlin, Voss, 1790 — 1810, XX XT, 8vo.)

101^ SABUJA — SACRAMENTO INDIANS.

ArchiTes Litt^rmires de TEarope, 1804. (Pabli&s par une Soci^ de Oens de
liettres. Messrs. Suard, Mobellkt. Degeraxdo, etc.) Part* and TubiMffMe,lBO^
1803, XVII, 8vo ; No. IV, p. 87 f^from BorsGOixe).

A. D£ Humboldt, Essai Politique sor le BoTaume de la XonYeDe Espagne.
Paris, F. Schoell, ISll, 2 toIs. 4to ; VoL I, p. 321.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 (from BouBGOnro, and AekastUert from
De Lamanox).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographiqne, Tab. XLI, No. 830.

SABUJA, KIRIRI.

Or Cariri, Two tribes of christianized Indians^ in the Brazilian
province Bahia^ near Cochoeira^ now inhabiting the villages
Caranquejo and Villa da Pedra Branca. Their languages arc
nearlv the same.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebtas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 at seq., 237 (numerals 1 — 10). Hems
derires the Kiriri from the Charib).

Hebtas, Saggio, p. 108, and " Dialetto Rozzo," p. 109.

J. B.TOX Spix and F. Ph. ton Mjlbtius, Beise in Brasilien. If SjicA«i, 1823-
1831, 3 Tols. 4to; VoL II, p. 615 (Sabuja).

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 466, 469.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 509 (Kiriri, dialect Sabnja).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

P. Luis Vincencio Mamiaxi, e S. J., Arte de Grammatica da Lingua B***
siUca da Na^am Kiriri. Lisboa^ Miguel les Condes, 1699, 18mo, pp. 124.

The same author has published: Catecismo da Doutrina Christiaiia, ^
Lingua Brasil da Na^ao Kiriri. Lisboa, 1698, 8vo.

Qerman translation — Grammatik der Kiriri Sprache. Aus dem Portugi^^*
ischcn des P. Mamiani, ubersetzt von H. C. von der Gabelentz (Beitrage *^^
^Sprachenkunde, 3' Heft). Leipzig^ Brockhaus, 1852, 8vo, pp. 62.

Mitliridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 468, 469.

SACRAMENTO INDIANS.

The Indians living on the Upper Sacramento River, in California
were visited by James D. Dana, attached to the United Stat^'
Exploring Expedition; Dana could not, however, learn the nai^^

SAKI — SAINT JOHN^S INDIANS. 165

:ribe. The Pti/uni, Sekumne, and Tsamak live on the
banks. Dana has likewise collected vocabularies of
iguages.

WORDS and vocabularies.

ALE, Ethnography and Philology of United States Exploring Expedi-
iladelphia. Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio ; pp. 630, 631, 632, 633.

ed in: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. IT,
24, 125.

of the Language of the Indians near to Mag Headings, on the upper
he Sacramento Eirer, by Adam Johnson, pp. 414, 415 of Vol. IV of :
ft's Indian Tribes, United States.

SAKI, OTTOGAMI.

mkeesy Sacs, Sakewi, Sawkis or Saques, and the latteif
amies, Utagami, Foxes, Two Indian tribes, closely
west of the Mississippi. The Kikkapoes speak the game

;e.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

IM H. Keatinq, Vocabulary of the Sakewi or Sauk, in : Narrative of
Ition to the Sources of the St. Peter's Riyer, performed in the year 1823,
) command of Major Stephen H. Long. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea,
ols. 8vo ; Vol. I, Appendix IV, pp. 450 — 459.

Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 806.

les Prinzen Maximilian zir Wied. Coblenz, 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to ;
)p. 522 et seq., G33 et scq.

'', 24, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 — 367). to A. Gallatin's Sy-
:c. (Archajologia Americana, Vol. II), and (partly) under Q, IV, 4,
the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
from Keating).

lINT JOHN'S INDIANS, ETCHEMINS.

of the EtcheminSy speaking the same language as the
yiaquoddies. They belong to the Lenape stock.

WORDS AND YOCABULARIES.

DE Laet, Notus Orbis, seu Descriptionis India3 occidentalis, libri XVIII.
Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio, p. 54.

i

1 G(> SALIVA SANKIKANI.

French translntion— Ilistoire du Koaveau Monde. Leyde^ Elzerir, 1640,
folio.

Dutch tran!>lation — Leyden^ ElzeTir, 1644^ folio.

IIervah, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).

Smith Bartox, New Views, etc. — Comparatiye Vocabularies.

Bev. Eliah Kellogg, Vocabulary of "Words in the Language of the Quoddy
Indians (Paitbaniaquoddi, i. e., PoUock-fish), located in Perry, Pleasant Point, State
of MaiiK', on the waters of the Schoodak, adjoining the British Provinces (Collec-
tion of tlie Historical Society of Massachusetts, Third Series, Vol. Ill, pp. 181, 182.
Cambridge, Metcalf and Co., 1833, Svo).

No. IV, 13 (Etchcmins Passamaquoddi) of the Comparatiye Vocabulary (pp.
305—367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archojologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and
(partly) under O, IV, 4, p. 109, of Vocabularies, in: American Ethnologicsl
Society* s Transactions, Vol. II (from Kellogo's and Treat's MS. notices).

Datid Texesles, by Joseph Barratt, M.D., The Indian of New England (aee
Mikmak).

GSAMMABS AND GBAMMATICAL NOTICES.

H. Hale, Remarks on the Language of the St. John's or Colastukweck Indiana,
with a Penobscot Vocabulary. Boston, 1834, 8?o ; printed for the author.

SALIVA.

Indians on the left banks of the Orinoco, between the rivers
Guaviare and !Meta, in the New Granadian province Boyaca.
Dialects of their language are spoken by the Atures, Quaquas
(whom the Tamanaques call ^^ Mapoje'^), and the Macos, or
Piaroas,

WOEDS AND VOCAUrXABTES.
GiLii, Snggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 212.
Hervas, Saggio, pp. Ill, 230, 231.
Hervas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq,
Miihridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 628-629 (from GiLii and Hebvas).
Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 604.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridatcs, Vol. Ill, pp. 624-627.

SANKIKANI.

Ojibway tribe, late of the eastern banks of the Hudson. A
mclrcd dialect of this language was spoken by some of tie
Indians of New Sweden.

SANTA BARBARA. 167

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A short Vocabiilaiy, pp. 75, 76 of: Joan, de Laet, Novub Orbis, seu Descrip-
tionis Indise occidental is, libri XVIII. Lugduni Baiavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio.
JVtfncA translation — Ibid., 1640, folio.
Dutch translation — Ibid., 1644, folio.

German translation in : (J. Jo. Schwabe) AUgemeine Historie der Keisen
zu Wasser und Laude {Amsterdam^ Arkstee, 1747 — 1774, 21 Tola. 4to), Vol.
XVI, pp. 605 et seq.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374—376 (from De Laet).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 811.

No. IV, 19, B, p. 371, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(ArchflBologia Americana, Vol. II ; from De Laet).

SANTA BARBARA.

Indians of California; Mission S. Barbara.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Mthridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 201, 202, 205.

The words taken from : An Historical Journal of the Expeditions by Sea
and Land to the North of California, in 1768, 1769, and 1770, when Spanish
Establishments were first made at San Diego and Monterey. From a
Spanish MS., translated by William Revely, Esq. Published by A. Dal-
rymple. London^ Elmsley, 1790, 4to, pp. 76. This book is, without doubt,
a translation of: Diario Historico de los Viages de mar y tierra hechos al norte
de California, de orden del Virrey de Nueva Espanna Marques De Croix y por
direccion de D.Jose de Gulvaz. Executados por la tropa destinada ^ dicho
objeto al mando de D. Gaspar de Portola, y por los Paquebotes S. Carlos y
S. Antonio de orden del Exc. Sr. Virrey. En la iiuprenta del Gobiemo.
Mexico, 1770, folio, pp. 56. Signed : D. Miguel Costanso. Printed merely
for private distribution.

Extracts translated in : P. F. Bruns and E. A. W. Zimmermann's Eeposi-
torium fiir die Neueste Geographic, etc. Tubingen^ Cotta, 1792, 1793, 3 yoIs.
8vo ; Vol. I, p. 25.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 829.

Vocabulary, by De. John Scoulee, pp. 247, 249, 251 of : Journal of the
•^oyal Geographical Society of London, VoL XI, London, Murray, 1841, 8vo.

Beprinted, W, 3, p. 129, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
■Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

1(>8 SAPIBOKONI SAVANERIC.

SAPIBOKONI.

Indians of the province of Moxos. Their language is related
to the Quichua.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Heevas, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
Heevas, Aritmetica, p. 102.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 571, 576 (from Heevas).
Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 467.

SARABECA.

Christianized Indians of the Mission of Santa Anna^ in the pro-
vince of Chiquitos, now Bolivia. Their language is nearly lost,
like that of other Chiquito tribes.

WORDS AND vocabularies.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words : D*Oebigny, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I,
pp. 163, 164 ; Vol. II, 136, and pp. 172, 173, where a general view of the character
of the Sarabeca language is given.

SASTE, SHASTIES.

Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of
Upper California.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. 10, V, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 — 629 of:
HoR. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expe-
dition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, foUo ; and, F, XXX, pp. 98-
100, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II.

SAVANERIC.

Indians of the New Granadian province Veraguas, near the
village Las Palm as.

SEMINOLES SENEKAS. 169

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Bebthold Seemanh', The Aborigines of the Isthmue of Panama (Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1, pp. 179 — 181).

SEMINOLES.

Or, Isty-semole (wild men). Tribe of the Creek Confederacy in
Florida. They are said to speak the Muskoghee.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Names of Seminole Chiefs, pp. 9, 10, 30 of: The War in Florida .... by a
late Staff Officer. Baltimore, Lewis and Coleman, 1836, 12mo.

A Vocabulary of the Seminole Language, pp. 97 — 105 of: Notice of East
Florida, with an Account of the Seminole Nation of Indians. By a recent Trayeller
in the FroTince. Charleston, South Carolina, 1822, 8yo.

A Vocabulary of the Seminole Language, pp. 90 — 108 of : Sketch of the Semi-
nole War, and Sketches during a Campaign, by a Lieutenant of the Left Wing
, i . . Cliarleston, South Carolina, Dan. F. Dowling, 1836, 12mo.

SENEKAS.

Tribe of the Iroquois, near Buffalo and Niagara, in western
New York.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hebvas, Vocabolario Foliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).

Shith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix,
p. 20.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335 (from Smith Barton).

A short Vocabulary in the Language of the Seneca Nation, and in English.
Ung-eish-neut ten-au-geh noh-nuh, yoh-weh-neut-sah eng-lish. Iiondon, printed
by W. and S. QraTes, 1818, 8to, pp. 35.

Annual Beport, Ciyilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven, 1824, 8yo, pp.
63—65.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 798 (Seneca or Macehachtini).

No. V, 29, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) of A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). Beprinted (partly) under B, V, 2,
p. 114, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions,
Vol. IL

Z

1 70 SE\'ERNOVSKIA — SHAHAPTAN.

Seneca Vocabulary (of 452 Words and Phrases), firom a MS. in tlie War Depart-
ment of the UnitiHl States, pp. 381 — 597 of A. Gallatin's SynopsiB, etc., in:
Arcbsyologia Americana, Vol. II.

Seneca AppcUatiye Words, Note B, pp. 158 — 164, of : Ber. TncoTHT Aldis,
An Account of sundry Missions performed among the Senecas and Monaees.
New York, printed by J. Seymour, 1827, 18mo, pp. 180.

Vocabulary of Concrete Terms and Conversational Forms, 16 pp. at the end of:
Dialisawabgwah Gayadoshab. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42.

Seneca Vocabulary (from Ely S. Fabkeb, Schoolcsaft, etc.), in Compantire
Vocabulary of the Iroquois, pp. 393 — 400 of: H. B. Schoolcraft, Kotes on the
Iroquois. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8yo.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATTCAL NOTICES.

Diahsawahgwah Gayadoshah. Beading Lessons, by Bev. A. Wright, His*
sionary. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42.

Ber. A. Weight's System of Writing the Seneca — is giren in the pre&oe to :
Gh»-na-8hoh-ne Deowaahsaonyohgwab Na wen ni yuh ^Hymns) Dosyowa (BnffiJo
Creek). Mission Press, 1843, 18mo, pp. 136.

Table, exhibiting in the Seneca Dialect the conjugation of the Verb ** Qe-yase,"
** I shoot," Appendix II, pp. 475 — 477 of; Lewis H. Morgaf, League of the
Ho-de-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, Sage and Brother, 1851, 8to.

G6-wana Gw6-ih sat* hah you d^ yas dah* gwah — a Spelling-book in the Seneca
Language, with English definitions. Buffalo Creek ReservaUon, Mission Press,
1842, 12mo, pp. 112.

SEVERNOVSKIA, SEVERNOVZER.

Or, "Northerners.^' Indians north of Bodega Bay, They call
themselves Chwachamaja.

WOEDS AND VOCABTJLABIES.

Woerter aus zwei Sprachen Neu Kaliforniens yon Kostbomitot. SevemoTri
(Chvachamaja), pp. 234— 254 of: K. E, von Baeb und Ge. von Helhebsik,
Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Bussischen Reichs, Band I. St, Petersburg, 1839^
8to. (Russian, German, and Sevemovze, printed in Bussian type.)

SHAHAPTAN, CHOPXJNISH, SAHAPTIN.

The Nez-perc{*s of the Canadians. The Kliketat, near Mounl^
Rainier, the Walla- Wallas, and the OhanagaUy on the uppei^
part of Frazer^s River, speak kindred dialects.

SHAHAPTAN. 171

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

4

!^ketat, Shaliaptan, and Okanagan Yocabularies, by Dr. John Scouleb, in :
Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI (London, 1841,
8to), pp. 236, 238, 240 ; and

Shahaptan, Wallawalla, and Kliketat Words, by same, pp. 250 — 252 of: Journal
of the Ethnological Society of London, Yol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8yo.

Words used in the Nez-perc6 Language, pp. 152 — 157 of: Joel Palmeb,
Journal of Travel over the Eocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia
River. Cincinnati^ J. A. and U. P. Ja^es, 1847, 12ino.

Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of : E. G. Latham, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory, pp. 154 — 166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of
London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.

. Sahaptin Vocabulary, divided into — 1, M, Sahaptin (Nez-perc^). 2, N. Wal-
lawalla, which is again divided into — a. t. Felus (Peloses) ; b. j, Joakema
(Yakemas) ; c. k. Tlakatat (Klikatats) ; pp. 569 — 629 of : Ho ratio Hale,
Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Fhila-
delphia. Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.

The Vocabulary M reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, pp, 88, 90, 92, 94.

Vocabulary of the Nez-perc6 Language, pp. 327 — 330, and Vocabulary of the
Clicatat Nation who inhabit the country north of the Cascades, pp. 330 — 333 of:
Ecr . Samuel Pabkeb, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Eocky Moun-
tains, under the direction of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions, performed in the years 1835, 1836, and 1837. Ithaka, New York,
printed by Mark Andrus and Woodruff, 1838, 12mo.

Vocabulary of the Languages spoken by the Nez-perc^s and other tribes
inhabiting the country about the Great Forks of Columbia Eiver, pp. 313—322
of Vol. I of: The Fur Hunters of the Far West, by AlLEXAIYDeb Eoss, 2 vols.
8vo. London^ 1855.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Nez-perces' First Book. Designed for Children and New Beginners. Clear
Water Mission Press, 1839, 18mo, pp. 20.

Sahaptin Family (Grammatical Notes), pp. 542—561 of: Eobatio Hale,
^Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia,
Xea and Blanchard, 1846, folio \ and : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, pp. 34-— 55.

1 72 SMAWANOE.

SHAWANOE, 8HAWANEES.

Formerly of Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Kentucky ; afterwards in
Indiana and Illinois, now west of Missouri. They were divided
into the tribes — Piqua, Mequachake, Kiskapocohe, and ChUi-
cothe,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Shawaneo Vocabulary, p. 209 of : J. Long, Voyages and Tr&Tels of an Indian
Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to which is added a List of Words in the Shawanee
Tongues. London^ liobson, et al., 1791, 8vo.

German transhitions — Hamburgh^ 1791, 8to, by G-. Forster. Berlm,
Voss, 1792, Sto (part of : Geschichte der Beisen die selt Cook an die Nord-
westkiisto Ton America untemommen worden sind. Aub dem Englischen
Ton G. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to, and 8 yoLs. Svo), and
together with Forster'a translation of Fortlock's and Mortimer'B Voyages.
Berlin, Voss, 1796, 4to.

Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).

Hebvas, Saggio, p. 126.

Smith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparatiye Vocabularies.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343—346, 360—862 (from Generals BUTIAB
and Qibson).

Vocabulary of tlie Language of the Shawanoese, pp. 287 — 292, and : Names of
Bivers, by the Shawaiioese, pp. 297, 298 of: John Johnston, United States
Indian Agent at Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Indian Tribes
inhabiting Ohio (Archsologia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 269 — 299).

Porty-five Words in Shawanese are giyen in the : Comparatire Vocabulary of
Professor T. Sat, in Note 15, pp. 135 — 145, to John Pickering's edition of
Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohcgan Language (Collections of the Massa-
chusetts Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by
Phelps and FamUam, 1823, Syo. Beprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, Sto ;
pp. 81— ino.)

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 805.

Shawnee Vocabulary, by Me. Cummings, Indian Agent, pp. 470 — 481 of Vol
II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

IV, 23, of the Co}nparativo Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Ar.^'liajologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and (partly) under Q, IV, 3,
p. 113, of the Vocabularies in: Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.

(From MS. Notices of Jeffebson, in the War Department, and from
Barton, Gibson, Butlab, and Parsons.)

SHEBAYI — SHINICOOKS. 1 73

Shawnee Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 56 — 60 of:
Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W. Turner's Report upon the
Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Boute near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific
Hailroad Reports. Washington, 1856, dto.

Rev. M. Heckeweldeb, A Vocabulary of the Shawano, taken from the mouth
of a white woman who had been twenty years a prisoner with that nation. (MS.
in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia).

A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape Proper, the Minsi dialect,
the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Cldppeway, Shawano, and Nanticoke. (MS. in the
same library.)

J. HowSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, Shawnee
(Miami River), Nipissing, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102—113 : Pro-
ceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 354—356 (from General Butlae's MS.)

Siwinowe Eawekitake. Shawnee Speller and Reader, by Johnston Ltkins.
Shawanoe Mission, J. Meeker, printer, 1834, 18mo, pp. 54.

Summary of the same (by Pratt). Ihid,^ 1838, 18mo, pp. 24.

SHEBAYI.

Indians of French Guyana, near Cayenne.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES,

A short Vocabulary (compared with Arrowac and Yaoi), pp. 642 — 643 of: Joan.
DE Labt, Notus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Batavorum, 1633, folio.

SHINICOOKS, MONTAUK.

Indians of Long Island, neighbours of the Unschagogs and
MontaukSf who spoke kindred dialects.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Silas Wood, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns on Long
Island. Brooklyn, 1824, 8vo. Eeprinted, ihid,, Spooner, 1828, 8vo, pp. 182.

Gives a Montauk Vocabulary (from a MS. of John Gaedineb), which is

Eeprinted in : James Macauley, The Natural, Statistical, and Civil History of
the State of New York. Neio York, Gould and Banks, and Albany, Will. Gould
and Co., 1839, 3 vols. 8vo ; in Vol. II, pp. 263, 261., 265 ; anl (from Wood) the
Montauk Words are given in :

No.rV, 18 (Montaucs, Long Island), of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 —

174 SHOSHONEES.

867) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (ArchiBologia Americana, Vol. II) j
(partly) P, IV, 4 (Long Island), p. Ill, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

The MS. of Thomas Jefferson's Vocabulary of the Language of the Unquacl
Indians is in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.

SHOSHONEES.

Also Snake Indians, Serpens, Indians of the Rocky Mountams,
on the sources of the Missouri and Columbia rivers. They are
divided into the Shoshones Proper and the Gens de Pitiij^t
Radigeurs (Root-diggers, by the Spaniards called Maradigos).

WOKDS AND VOCABTTLAJtlES.

P. Ixxrx of : T. Say's Vocabularies in : Astronomical and Meteorological Eecords
and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the Expedition for Exploring tlie
Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the command of Major J. Hi Long-
Philadelphia, 1822, 4to.

C. S. Bapinesque, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge* FiiladelplMt
1832, 12mo, p. 133.

No. xxii, 57, p. 378, of the Vocabularies to A. Gkdlatin's Synopsis, etc
(ArchfiBologia Americana, Vol. II j from Say).

Reise des Prinzen Maximilian ztt Wied, etc. Cohlenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 toIs.
4to ; Vol. II, p. 635.

Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America. N. 12, Shoshoni; x,
Shoshonees, Snakes; y, Wihinasht (Western Shoshonees). Pp.569 — 629 of : HoE.
Hale, Ethnography and Pl^ilology, United States Exploring Expedition. Plalar
delphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. And in the Vocabularies in : Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, C, No, xxxii (East Shohonees),
pp. 88, 90, 92, 94 j U, No. xxxii (Wihinasht), p. 121.

Shoshone Words, p. 159, and Shoshone and Sussee Words compared, p. 161 of:
B. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnolo-
gical Society of London, Vol. I, pp. 154 — 166. Edinburgh, 1848, 8yo).

Vergleicl)endes W6rter Verzeichniss der Schoshonen und der Komantschen
Sprache (Willinascht), p. 54 of: Dr. BEEGnAUs' Geographisches Jahrbuch,
No. III. Qotha, Perthes, 1851, 4to.

Snake Language. Vocabulary of Forty-nine Words, on pp. 153 — 154, VoL I, of :
Alexander Boss, Fur Hunters of the Far West ; a Narrative of Adventures in
the Oregon and Rocky Mountains, 2 vols., crown 8vo. London, 1855.

Seventeen Words of Shoshonee Dialects compared with Kioway, by Professor

SHYENNES SITKA. 175

W, W. TiTBNBB, p. 80 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes (added to Lieute-
lant A. W. Whipple's Report, Pacific Railroad Reports, Yol. II. Washington^
L856, 4to).

SHYENNES, CHEYENNES.

Also, SharUy Shawhays, on the River Cheyenne, one of the
bribntaries of the Missouri.

WORDS Ain) VOCABT7LAE1E8.

Names of Shyenne Chiefs who signed the treaty of July, 1825 (with correspond-
ing Sioux words). No. VI, 9, p. 379, of the Yocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).

Reise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. Coblenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. n, pp. 487—489.

Affinities of the Shyenne with Languages of the Algonkin Family, pp. cxiy,
cxT; and

Vocabulary of the Shyenne Language, with some Notes by Lieutenant J. W.
Abeet, Top. Eng., pp. cxyi — cxyiii of ; Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II ; originally in Abert's Report of his Examination of New Mexico,
in the years 1846, 1847, pp. 417 — 548 of : Notes of a Military Reconnaissance, etc.,
by Lieutenant-Colonel W. H. Emory. Washing/tony 1848, 8vo.

Langue deslndiens C!heyennes (numerals). Bulletin de la Soci^t^ de (jl^graphie
(PariSy 1846, 8vo, Third Series), Tome VI, pp. 384—386.

John S. Smith, Cheyennes Vocabulary, pp. 346 — 459 of Vol. Ill of: School-
5i?aft*s Indian Tribes of the United States.

GKAMMABS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Lieutenant J. W. Abebt (see Vocabularies).

SICANNIS, SIKANNI.

Dialect of New Caledonia, related to the TacuUies.

WORDS AJN'D VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of the Sikanni Dialect of New Caledonia, J. Howse's Vocabularies
f)f certain North American Indian Languages — Sikanni, Chepewyan. I and II,
3eaver, I and II, Dialect of New Caledonia. Pp. 192 — 198 of : Proceedings of
the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850.

SITKA.

Sitka proper is but a name for King George III^s Archipel,
inhabited by Kolusehes. In general, the name Sitka is applied to

176 SK

the languages of some ten tribes, -who live between the 50tli and
55th degrees of northern latitude. The tribes who speak this Ian-
guage, and who may nunibtr some G500 souls, are the Chilcart,
the most numerous and influential tribe ; Sitka, on King George
Ill's Island; Hoodsunhoo, at Hood's Bay ; Ark, and the Kake,
on Prince Frederick's Sound; EcUkino, in Chatham's Strwt;
Kooyen, near ('ape Decision ; Hennega, on the Island of the
Prince of Wales; Stickecn, and the Tumijarsee. (See Note to
A. (tallatiii'b Synopsis, etc., p. 302 of i Archseologia Americana,
Vol. II.)

WORDS AKD YOCABTJLAKlEa-

Vocabulary of tho Languages of the Tatanda of Cndiur^k and Oonalasdika, Ibl
Bay of Kenay and Sitka Sound, Ajiptnda, No. Ill (pp. 339—337), w : Vast
LiaiABBKY, A Voyage round Iho World, in tho years 1803—1806, iomtoi,
John Booth, Longman, Hurst, Bcoa, Cirine, aad ISninn, 1814, 4to.

Balbi, Atlas Et.haographigue, Tab. XLT, No. 851 (Koloiiclies de Sitka Sound).

Sites (Kouliahen) VooabuUry, under G, XVIII, 2, p. 102. of Ite Vooabutiiiet
in ; TraiifloctionB of the American Etbnologicid Society, Vol. II.

Sitctt, Cadiack, and Tungliaase "Wi.rda, p. 163 of B. G. LATKiJi, The LoBgniges
of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Etlinological Society of London, VoL 1.
Edinburgh, 1848, 8to, pp. 151—166.)

SKETAPUSHOISH, SHESHATAPOOSl-J.

Also Mountaineers {Montag?iarils), or Skqffi.cs {Escopti\-
Indian tribes west of Labrador, speaking a language clo^
related to the Knistenaux. (See Massachusetts Indians.')

Specimen of tlie Mountaineer, or Slieslis
languages (from an Indian boy, Gabriel),
MassftclmBeUa Historical Society for the jet
printed by Samuel Hall, 18^, 8to

Mitliridatca, Vol. Ill, part 3, p.

No. IV, 11, ot the Comparati
Sjnopsis, etc. (ArchieologLa

And No. 0, IV, 1, p. 108, of the Vot-ubul
Society's Tranaactione, ToL II.

5eo^e Vocabulary— IV, g,p, 3e9,oftIieVocHbukri

SOURIQUOIS — STONE INDIANS. 177

O, IV, 2, p. 108 of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's
ions, Vol. 11.

SOUIUQUOIS, ACADIANS.

J of the Algonquin stock at the Bay of Fundy, Nova
They are sometimes also called Micmacs.

WOKDS AND VOCABULAKIES

l'Escabbot, Histoire de la Nouvelle France. Parts^ Jean Milot, 1609,
), pp. 888 ; p. 688. Reprinted, Paris, Milot, 1612, small 8vo ; Faris^
ier, 1618, small 8vo.

•t Vocabulary, p. 53 of: J. de Laet, Novus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Bata^
333, folio.

lS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).

Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies (from De Laet).

dates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402—404 (from L'Escabbot).

V, 12, B, p. 369, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
ogia Americana, Vol. II).

SQUALLYAMISH.

1 at Puget's Sound, related to the Haeeltzuk and the
\ of Nootka Sound.

WORDS AND VOCABULAEIES.

amish Vocabulary, by Dk. John Scouleb, in : Journal of the Boyal
ical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244—247.

►NE INDIANS, ASSINEBOINS, ASSINI-
POILS, ASSINIBULES.

)ne Indians are the most numerous of any of the tribes
ng North-western America. They are about 1,200 to
3nts. They inhabit the mid-country from between the
A and Assineboin rivers from within fifty miles of Red
westward, to the sources of Qu'Appelle River, about the
)f the Elbono, or north branch of the Assineboin River,
n thence to the Red Deer^s River, Saskatchewan. The
J Ground Stone Indians are now living close to the
Mountains, near the source of the Red Deer^s River,

A A

178 8USSEE TACULLIE8.

Saskatchewan. The Iroquois^ Mohawk^ and Hnron are mem-
bers of the same class of languages. The place of the Stone
Indian is more equivocal ; although generally separated by most
authors from the Mohawk (or Iroquois) tongues^ it has^ by some^
been connected with that group. (See also under Dahkotah,)

WOBDS AND TOCABTJLABIES.

J. HowsB, Vocabularies of certain American Indian Languages — Stone Indian,
Iroquois, Mohawk, Huron, pp. 113—121 of: Proceedings of the Philologioil
Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850.

SUSSEE, SURSEE.

On the sources of the Saskatchewaine, a tribe of the Cheppe-
wyans.

WORDS AND VOCABFULRIES.

Edwabd Umfbetille, The Present State of Hudson's Bay; oontaining s
Specimen of Five Indian Languages. London, Walker, 1790, Svo, p. 202.

German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmstedt, fleokeiMD,
1791, Svo, p. 148. Reprinted in :

No. Ill, c, p. 374, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsif, etc
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and a few words in :

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 769.

Sussee Words and Sussee compared with Shoshone, pp. 160, 161 of: B.G«
Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of Vol I of:
Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh, 1848, Svo).

Sussee Vocabulary (from Umpeeville) compared with the other Languagee ot
the Athapascan Stock, pp. 177 — 222 ; and, with the same, the Kinai and KoleschiB^
X<anguages, pp. 269 — 318 of : Buschmann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. £er2»*i
1856, 4to.

TACULLTES, CARRIERS, NAGAILER.

Indians of North-western America, on the sources of Eraser^'
River. The Sicaunies are related to them. Mackenzie calJ
them Nagailer and Carrier Indians.

WOEDS AWD V0CABUL1EIE8.

Nagailer or Chin Indian Words, pp. 257, 258 of: Alexandeb MackekzC^
Voyages. London, 1801, 4to.

TAH-LE-WAH. 179

And (from him) Mitliridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 424.

A Specimen of the Takully or Carrier Tongue, pp. 403^413 (p. 413, numerical
terms) of : Daniel Williams Haemon, A Journal of V^oyages and Travels in the
Interior of North America; to which are added a Description of the Inhabitants
and considerable Specimens of the Languages most extcnsiTcly spoken. Andover,
I'lagg and Gould, 1820, 8to.

Professor W. W. Turner (from Harmon) Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-
five Words of Tacully, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Umkwa, Hoopah, Navajo, and
Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Keport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant
A-W. Whipple's Report, in Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. WcuMngton^
1855, 4to.

BAiiBi, Atks Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 822.

'^o. Ill, 5, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307 — 367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, from Habmon).

Tahkali (Carriers) Vocabulary, No. 1, A, of the Vocabularies of Languages of
^orth- western America, pp. 569— 629 of : Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philo-
logry. United States Exploring Expedition, Fhiladelphia, Lea and Blanchard,
1846, folio.

Hale divides the (1) Tahlcali Umpqua language into —
A. TahAali (Carriers).
S. Tlatskanaiy with the dialects
a. Tlatskanai.
h. Kwalhioqua,
C. Umkwa (Umpqua).
The Tahkali Vocabulary was furnished to Hale by Mr. Anderson of the
Hudson's Bay Company. It is reprinted, pp. 78, 80, 82, under A, III, in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.

Tacullies Vocabulary (from Mackenzie, Habmon, and Hale) compared with
the other Languages of the Athapaskan Stock, pp. 177—222, 269 — 318 of: Busch-
ixiann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.

GBAHMABS AND OEAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A short notice of the Character of the Language is given, pp. 534, 535 of: Hoe.
Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Phila'
delphia, 1846, folio.

TAH-LE-WAH.

Califomian tribe, on the Klamath River.

WOEDS AND VOCABULAEIES.

Geobge Gibbs, Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp.
440—445.

1 80 TALATUI TAMANAQUE.

TALATUI.

Indian tribe on the Kassiraa River, a tributary of the Sacra-
mento, in California.

WOBDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, p. 631. (From James D. Daha.)

Reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, VoL II,
p. 123.

TAMANAQXJE.

Indians of South America, on the banks of the Orinoco, near
the Mission Encaramada. Their language, related to those of
the Charibs and Chaymas, is spoken by the Parechi, Uara-
MukurUy Uaraca'Paccili, Paiure, Acherekotti, and Oje; kindred
languages are those of the Palencas, Pariagotos^ or PariaSj
and still more so the Cmnanagota. (See also under Cumana.)

WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GiTJi, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 875—882 386—889.

Hebvas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 49, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.

Hebvas, Saggio, pp. 112, 113.

Hebvas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

Hebvas, Aritmetica, pp. 104, 105.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 618, 696, 697 ; p. 655 (with some Pajure and
Avarigote Words, from GiLn) .

A. DE Humboldt and A. Bonpland, Voyage aux K^ions Equinoxiales du
Nouveau Continent (Paris, Schoell, Dufour, Gide, and Maze, 1816 — 1831, 18
vols. 8vo), Vol. I, pp. 482 et seq.

German translation — Stuttgart and IVt5m^gn, 1818, Vol. I, pp. 217 et seq.

A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 162.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 581, 582 (Cumanagita), p. 274
(Tamanaque, Pariagotos de la Riviere Omabiche et du Golfe de Paria-Tamanaque).

Sib Robebt H. Schombubgk, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of
Twelve Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanakan Stock, pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of
Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana (British
Association Report, Swansea Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8vo).

TARAHUMARA. 181

OBAMMARS AND GEAMHATICAL NOTICES.

GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 176 — 185.

Gilii wrote a Qraminar of the Tamanaka, which, however, was nerer
published.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 656, 662, 666 (from GiLii).

DIALECTS.

p. Fr. Feancisco de Taustb, Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua de los Indios
Chajmas, Cumanagotos, Cores, Parias, y otros Diversos de la Provincia de Cu-
mana 6 Nueva Andalusia ; con un Tratado a lo ultimo de la Doctrina Christiana
J Catecismo de los Misterios de Kuestra Santa F^. Traducido de Castellano en la
dicha Lengua Indiana. Madrid, Bernardo de Yilladiego, 1680, 4to ; pp. 16, 187
(without the Doctrina, etc.)

In : Bibliotheca Soriptorum Capuccinorum a P. Diontsio Gencensi ; con-
testa, retesta et extensa a F. Bernardo a Bononia (Venetihy Sebast. Coleti,
174)7, folio), p. 94, it is stated that this author's name was Fbanoiscus de
Hauste, and that, in 1681, he was poisoned by the savages. It is further
stated that he published : Dictionarium Indicum, adjuncto Catechismo in
Lingua Indica. Matriti, 1680, 4to.

Brunet, however (IV, 404), calls him De Tauste, and he appears under
the same name in : Bibliotheca Heberiana, VI, p. 255, No. 3482.

A MS. copy of the book is in the Royal Library at Berlin ; the author is
named "De Tauste."

Manuel de Yangfss, Principios y Beglas de la Lengua Cummanagota general

en varias Naciones que habitan en la Provincia de Cumana en los Yndios Occi-

dentales, con un Diccionario. Burgos, 1683, 4to. The Dictionary bears the

following title : M. Buiz Blanco, Diccionario de la Lengua de los Indios Cu-

managotas y Palenques.

According to Gilii, 1. 1., Vol. Ill, p. 410, P. Ruiz has printed a Grammar of the
Cumanacotti language.

TARAHUMARA.

Language of Nueva Biscaya, or Northern Mexico; related to
the Mexican.

WOEDS AXD vocabularies.

Hebtas, Yocabolario Poliglotto, p. 238 (numerals).

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 122, 123.

Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.

P. Math. Steffel, Tarahumarisches WSrterbuch, neb t einigen Nachrichten
■^onden Sitton und Gebrauchen der Tarahuniaren iu Neu-Biscaya in der Audiencia

182 TARASCA.

Guadalaxara im VicekOnigreiche Alt- Mexico odcr Neu Spanien. BruMm, 1791,
8vo. Reprinted in : Cliristoph Gottlieb Ton Murr, Nachrichten von rersdue-
dencn Liindem des Spanischen Amerika, aus eigenh&ndigen Aufsstzen einiger
Missionaro der Gesellschaft Jesu herausgegeben. Hailed Heudel, Band I, No. 1
and 2, 1809, 8vo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 87, 88, 146, 153, 154.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 719.

Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV {Paris, 1841, 8to), pp. 261—287.

A Vocabulary has been taken by John B. Bartlbtt, the United States
Boundary Commissioner.

Arte y Vocabulario completo de la Lengua Tarahumara general en toda Is
Custodia del Parral, por Fr. JosB Victoeino, Lector de Teologia en el Gonvento
de Zacatecas. MS. (De Souza).

Arte y copioso Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Catedsmo,
y Confessionario en dicha Lengua, por Er. Gebonimo Eioueboa.

Eigueroa was bom in Mexico, 1640 ; went as Jesuit Missionary to Facacs,
among the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, in 1683. He left
four copies of the aboTe **Arte" in his own handwriting.

OHAMHABS AND GBAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 146 — 153 (from P. Steeeel).

P. Er. Miguel Tellechea, Compcndio Grammatical para la Inteligen(»a dd
Idioma Tarahumar. Mexico, imprenta de la Eederacion, 1826, small 4to, pp. 16|
162, 10.

Clavigero mentions MS. Grammars of: AGK)STii!ro de Koa and GisOLAKO
Eiguebas (with Dictionary). P. Steffel mentions a Grammar begun by P.
Thomas Gijadalaxaba. De Souza mentions likewise : Arte para aprender A
Idioma de los Tarahumares, por P. Augustin Boa, Misionero. MS. Boa
died in 1723.

TARASCA.

Language spoken in Miehoaean. (See also under Pirinda,)

WOEDS AXD VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulario de la Lengua Tarasca de Miehoaean, dirigido al Illmo. D. Vaseo
de Quirogo, primero Obispo de aquella Provincia, por Er. Matubino GilbebH.
Jdexico, 1559, 4to.

Also, by the same author : Dialog© de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua
Tarasca ; Dedicada al Virey D. Luis de Velasco. Mexico, 1555.

Vocabulario y Sermones en Lengua Tarasca, por Er. Jfan Eamieez, Maestro
en Teologia de la Provincia de S. Nicolas Tolentino de Miehoaean. (MS., accord-
xng to De Souza.)

TARIANA. 183

C S. Bapinesqxje, Atlantic Journal, pp. 9 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. HI, part 3, p. 129.
Hebyas, Saggio, p. 120.
Heeyas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
Hebyas, Aritmetiea, p. 107.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte de la Lengua de Michoacan (Tarasca), por Pr. Jfan Bbayo, Mexico^ 1574.

This Grammar formed part of three Tolumes in 8vo, printed by Pedro

Balli, in the same year. It was accompanied by a Confessionario, etc., in

the same language. Souza says of the Fr. BraYO, " fue maestro peritisimo

de la lengua Pirinda, Uamada Tarasca."

Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, y Sermones en la Misma, por P. Tomas Chacok,
1630.

MS. in the libraiy of the College of San Gregorio, in Mexico. (Souza.)

Manuel trilinque, Latino, Castellano, y Tarasco, para administrar los Sacra-
mentos k los Espanoles y k los Indios, por Fr. Angel Sebba. Mexico^ 1697, 4to.

Sebba also wrote : Arte, Diccionario, y Confesonario de la Lengua Tarasco,
which was prepared for the press, but ncYcr published ; probaby in the city of
Qu^r6taro.

Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Tarasca, por Hlmo. D. Fr. Juan Algoba.
Mentioned by Nicholas Antonio, and quoted by De Souza.

P. Nicolas de Quixas, Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, del P. Diego Basalenqite.
MericOt 1714, 8vo.

An extract of this Grammar is given by A. Gallatin, Appendix I, No. 2,
pp. 245 — 252, to : Notes on the Semi-civiUzed Nations of Mexico, etc.
(Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. New York,
1845, 8vo). See also pp. 34, 45—48, ibid,

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 126—128.

Clavigero mentions Grammars and Dictionaries by Matttbin Gilbebt and
Angelo Siebba (see titles above, from De Souza), and a Grammar of Juan
Battista de Lagunas.

TARIANA.

Brazilian Indians of the province Rio Negro. (Martius, VII,
p. 208.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alpeed R. WaIiLACB,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. London, Keeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.

181- TCHO-KO-YEM — TEHUELHET.

TCUO-KO-YEM.

Indian band of Sonoma Valley, in north-western California.

WOllDS AND VOCABLLAKIES.

Geobqb Gibbs, Vocabulary (Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 428—
434).

TEHUELHET, PATAGONIANS.

Is the general name of the Indians inhabiting Eastern Pata-
gonia. They are divided into — Tehuel Cunnyy to whom belong
the Yacana Cunnyy Sehuak Cunnyy and Culilan Cunny, and
Tehuelhet proper , or Callilehet (mountain people), by the
Spaniards called Serranos. Their language is said to be related
to the Araucanian.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Thomas Faleneb, Description of Patagonia (see Arauoan). Merefordj 1774^
4to, p. 132.

German translation, bj Scliack H. Ewald. Ootha^ Ettinger, 1775, 8to.

Frimo yiaggio intorno al globo terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della nayigazioM
alle Indie Orientali per la via d'occidente, fatta sulla squadra del Gapitano Ma(^
galianes negli anni 1519—1522, dell Cav° Antonio Piqapetta. MUoho, 1800,
4to, pp. 191 et seq.

Edited bj Dr. Charles Amoretti, from a MS. in the Ambrosian Library (^
Milan.

French translation, by the author himself .... suivi de Textrait du traits
de navigation du mSme auteur ; et d'une notice sur le Chevalier MartiO-
Behaim, avec la description de son globe terrestre (par H. J. Jansen). PariSt
Jansen, 1801, 8vo ; pp. 241 et seq.

Captain James Bxtenet, A Chronological History of the Discoveries in tl»^
South Sea or Pacific Ocean ; Part I commencing with an account of the eailie^*
discoveries of that sea by Europeans, and terminating with the voyage of 3*^
Francis Drake, in 1579. London, Hansard, 1803 — 1817, 5 vols. 4toj Vol ^»
pp. 37 et seq.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423 (from Faleneb).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 443 (Patagonien du Port ^*-
Julien).

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I of: A. D*OebioH'^»
L'Homme Am^ricain ; and Eight Words from Pigaeetta, 1520, and D'Obbigj^"^'
1829, compared, p. 59, Vol. II, ibid.

TEPEGUANA — TEQUIMA. 185

TEPEGUANA, TEPEHUANA.

adians of north-western Mexico, in the province of Sinaloa.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

FONTE.
FiGFEEOA.

Febnandez.

EiNALDINI.

See Grammars.

GBAMMABS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, by the Padre Juan Fonte, a
isuit, and missiomtry amongst the Tepehuanas, by whom he was killed in 1616.

Arte y Copioso Yocabulario de las Lenguas Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Gate-
Bino y confesonario en dichas Lenguas, por el Fr. Jsbonimo Figueboa.

Figueroa, bom in Mexico, 1604, Jesuit, went to Oaxaca, as missionary

amongst the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, 1683. He left four

copies of the above " Arte " in his own handwriting.

Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, gen^rica en la Sierra Madre, por

rr. Jose Fernandez, Franciscano.

Fernandez went to Zacatecas in I7l7, where he was Provincial (Arlegui's
authority).

P. Benito Rinaldini, Arte de la Lengua Tepeguana, con Vocabulario, confes-
rionario y Catechismo. Mexico, vidua de Tgnazio Bernardo de Hogal, 1743, 4to ;
pp. 72, 43, and 148.

N.B. — Clavigero mentions MS. Grammars and Vocabularies of Tohmaso
de Guadalajara and of Gibolamo Figfeboa.

TEQUIMA, OR OPATA.

txe of the languages spoken in the seventeen Jesuit Missions of
^xiora.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulario de la Leflgua Tequima y Platicas doctrinales en ella, pop Natal
^^ICBABDO. Mexico^ 1702.

byas, Saggio, p. 47.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

e de la Lengua Tequima, vulgarmente llamada Opata, por Natal Lombaedo.
'<a»co, 1702, 4to.

B B

186 TETONS — TICORILLA8.

TETONS.

Sioux tribe between the Mississippi and Missouri.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Beise des Prinzen Maxihiuak zf Wied. Cohleng, 1889—1841, 2 yoIb. 4toj
Vol. II, p. 498.

TEXAS INDIANS.

In : Museo Mexicano, Tomo III, p. 537, mention is made of
" Manuel para administrar los SS. Saeramentos a los Indies delas
Naeiones — Pajalates, Orejones, Faeaos, Paeoas, Filijayas, Ala-
sapas, Pamanes y otras muchas, come son: los Pacaliuches,
Mescalos, Pampopas, Tacames, Chapopines, Venados, Pamaques
y toda la juventud de Pihniques, Borrados, Samipaos y Manos
de Perro. Compuesto por el P. Fray Bartolomeo Garcia,
Predieador Apostolieo .... Franciscano de la Mission de San
Antonio de Texas, 1769, 4to.^^

TICORILLAS.

Apacbe Indians of western New Mexico. Their language stows
affinity with the great Athapaskan stock of languages.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

James H. Simpson, Comparatiye Vocabulary of Words in the Langnage w
the Pueblo, or Civilized Indians of New Mexico, and of the Wild Tribes inhabit-
ing its borders, Appendix B, pp. 140 — 143, to: Journal of a Military Becon-
naissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to the Navajo Country, etc. (Rq)ort8 <^
the Secretary of War, with Reconnaissances of Koutes from San Antonio to "»
Paso .... also .... the Beport of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson, of an Exped^'
tion into the Navajo Country. Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, Congress 8^»
Sess. 1. Washington, Union Office, 1850, 8vo ; pp. 86—168).

Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai Languages (also Nar^J
and Ticorilla), pp. 269—318 of: BFSCnMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachfltaia»^
Berlin, 1856, 4to.

TICUNAS TIMUACA. 187

TICUNAS.

Brazilian Indians on theAmazon. (Martius,No. 179). Tacunas,
Tecunas, Ticonas, Tucunas, on the River Intahjr. (See Voyage,
Vol. Ill, p. 1196.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Langue des Ticunas (Cavallo coche), Vocabulary, Ifo. XXIV, pp. 298, 299 of:
Castelnait, Vol. V, Appendice,

TILUEX, TEGUAS, KIWOMI.

Pueblo Indians, belonging to the Keres family, residing at the
pueblo of Santo Domingo, in New Mexico.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A Vocabulary has been taken by the United States Boundary Commissioner,
John B. Babtlett.

Kiwomi Vocabularies (one from the chief, the other from another member of the
tribe) taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 86 — 89 of the Report upon the
Indian Tribes, added to his Report on the Rbute near the 35th Parallel (Pacific
Sailroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington^ 1856, 4to).

TIMBIRAS, CRANS.

Brazilian Indians of the province of Goyaz. They are related to
the Ges, and their language shows a close aflSnity to that of the
Ges. Their three principal tribes are called Timbiras de Mata,

Timbiras de Canella Jlna, and Timbiras de Bocca furada,

(Martius, IV, No. 81.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

■

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 511 (Timbiras de Canella fina).

TIMUACA, TIMUIQUANA, TIMUICANA.

Language of Florida Indians, in the neighbourhood of S.
^ugustin.

1 88 TI NQUA — TLAOQUATCH.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

IIeuvas, Aritmetioa, p. 113.

IIebvas, Origine, formazione o meccanica degli Idiomi (p. 180, No. LXV)
Lingua Tiniuai'ana della Flurida ; on two tables.

^[ithri(ltito:>, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 285, and (from Mitbridates) in: Norton*!
Liti'rary Oazi-tte (Xeiv York, 4to), 1855, No. 5 (Marcb), p. 95 (Timuacana or

Tiiuuacu Language).

Balbi, Atlas Ktlinograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 785.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Gramatica dc la Lcngua Tiinuiquana de Florida, por Fr. FsAif Cisco Fabeja.
Mexico^ 1614.

Also, by tlie same author : Confesonario eu Lengpia Timniquana. IHexieo,

1012. Catecismo do la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengna Timuiquana. Meiieo,

1617.

Pareja was a native of Toledo, in Spain, and was one of the founders of the
Franciscan Order in Sa. Elena, in Florida, and Guardian of tbe first eoDrent
established there.

TINQUA.

A language of Florida, iii» which were written a " Doctrini
Cristiana/^ and a book on the administration of the sacraments,
by Fray Gregorio Morilla, which were printed, the first at
Madrid in 1G31, and afterwards reprinted at Mexico in 1635)
and the second at Mexico in 1G35 (Souza).

TLAOQUATCH, TLOQUATCH.

Indians of the south-western coast of Vancouver's IslaD*-
Their language appears to be the same as that of the Nootk*
Sound Indians, and is related to that of the Haeeltzuk.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Tloaquatch Vocabulary, bj Dr. John Soouleb, in : Journal of the Bay*"
Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI {London, 1841, 8vo), pp. 242, 2-^
246.

Dr, John Scofleu, Chikeelis and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of: On *-*^
Indian Tribes inhabiting the North-west Coast of America (pp. 228 — 252 of tf:*-
Jourual of the Ethnological Society of Iiondon, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8tc^-^

TLAPANEKA TLATSKANAI. 189

oquatch and Nootka Words, p. 156 of: B. Gt. Latham, The Languages of
regon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of Vol. I of the same Journal).

TLAPANEKA.

ans of Tlapa, in the Mexican State of Puebla.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

BfBOLDT (Essai politique sur le Bojaume de la Nouvelle Espagne, Vol. I,
) mentions that at Tlapa a particular language is spoken.

TLASCALTEKAS.

ins of San Salvador, who speak a dialect of the Mexican
lage.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Kabl Schebzeb, Sprache dor Tlascaltekas Indianer im Dorfe Isalco im
San Salvador, pp. 28 — 35 of Vol. XV of: Sitzungsberichte der Philo-

eh-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichcn Akademie der Wissenschaften.

Of, 1855, 8vo. A Iso under the separate title of : Sprachen der Indianer Central-

ka's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.

TLATSKANAI, KWALHIOQUA.

ins of the Athapaskan stock and the TacouUie-Umpqna
[y of north-western America, speaking different dialects of
anguage.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J, a, b, pp. 569 — 629, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, in x
Tio Hale's Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expe-
3n. Philadelphia^ Lea and Blanchard, 1816, folio.

le's Vocabulary compared with the other Athapaskan, pp. 177 — 222, and
be Kiuai Languages and Koloschian, pp. 269 — 318, of: Bu8chmann*8 Atha-
cher Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.

Ill, p. 105, of the same Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
)logical Society, Vol. VI.

190 TOTONAKA.

TOTONAKA.

Language of Indians in the districts of Zacatlan, State of
Pucbla, and in the State of Vera Cruz. The four dialects of this
language are the Tatiquilhati, Chacahuaxti, Ypapana, and
Tatijnolo,

WORDS AND YOCABULABIES.

IIebyas, Saggio, pp. 118, 119.

Hebvas, Originc, Tabb. L ct seq.

Mithridatcs, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 60 (three dialects of the Sierra Gaja, Siem
Alta, and others).

J. S. ABATES, Froben, etc. ; Seetzen's Linguistischer Nachlass. Le^zig^ Yogel,
1816, 8vo ; pp. 352—375.

Balbi, -Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 699 (Totonaca, Sierra-alta).

Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo ; Vol. IV, pp. 261—267.

N.B. — Clavigero says that Akdbeas de Olmos and Gbisi oval Diaz db Aiuya
have written G-rammars and Vocabularies of the Totonaka language.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte de Lengua Totonaca, conforme el Arte de Antonio Nebrija. Compuesto
per D. Joseph Zambbano Bonilla, Cura beneficiado, etc. Dedicado al Exmo. Sr.
D. Domingo Pantaleon Alvarez de Abreu, Arzobbpo, Obispo de esta Diooea.
Lleva anadido una doctrina de la Lenguu Naolingo, con algunas voces de la Lengu
de aquella Sierra y de esta de Aca, que por orden de su Illustrmo. se imprimo. 8a
autor el Lie. D. Francisco Dominguez, Cura de Xalpam de los Angelos. iWW»»
1752, 8vo, pp. 134, 79.

(Naolingo is the dialect generally called Tatimolo.)

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 46 — 59.

Adclung (Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 92) mentions, upon Marsdet* "
authority : Efgenio Komebo, Arte para aprender las Lenguas Mexicana ?
Totonaca.

According to De Souza, the title is as follows : — Arte 6 Gf^ramatica de **
Lengua Totonaca, por D. Eir&ENio Bomebo, de Antequera. MS.

Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengna Totonaca, y varies Opusculos Catequistia^^
en la misma, por lUmo. D. Fr. Fkancisco Toeal, Obispo de Yucatan. iC ^*
Toral died in Mexico, 1571 (De Souza),

Arte para aprender cl Idioma Totonaco, and also : Vocabulario Totonaco-C^-^
tellano, by Cbistobal Diaz Axata, Cura of Oliutla, in the province of Pueb^^*
Mexico. MSS. (Do Souza).

TSCHUGATSCHI TSCHUKTCHI. 191

TSCHUGATSCHI.

10 tribe, driven from the Kadjah Islands to Prince Wil-
Sound and Cook^s Inlet.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES,
idates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 458, 459, 466; Vol. IV, pp. 251—

[, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 857 (Tchougatchi — Konaga).

Y. Baeb und G. v. Helmebsen, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Bussischen
md der angranzendcn Lander Asiens, Band I. St. Petersburg ^ 1839, 8yo,

TSCHUKTCHI.

occupy the north-western part of Russian Asia^ and the
te shores of north-western America. A part of them are
. in Asia, and call themselves Namollo, They are un-
;dly Eskimos. The Wild, or Reindeer, Tchuktchi call
3lves Tchouktschee, Tchekto, and have been invaders,
ly, of the Korjake nation. Only the settled Tchuktchi
; to the American continent.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
I Baetok, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies.

[iLiNO, Puteschestvie, &c. (Russian edition of his Vojage, by Sarytschev,
reive Vocabularies). St. Petersburg y 1811, 4to, pp. 190 ; pp. 102—111.
'cabularies collected by the Head Physician, Dr. Bobece).

idates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 407,408; Vol. IV, pp. 242, 251—
m BoBECE, Merck, and Koschaleff).

KBrsENSTEEN, WSrter-Sammlungen aus den Sprachen einiger V5lker des
;n Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. St, Petersburg^ 1813,
.. 33—44.

Vatee, Proben deutscher Volksmundarten and Seetzen's Lan-
ier Nachlass. Leipzic^ Vogel, 8vo, 1816 ; pp. 149—167.

r. Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 860, Tchouktohi Asiatiques;
louktchi Am^ricains.

—No. I, 3, of A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 307—367 of :
logia Americana, Vol. II (the Asiatic Tshutchi).

192 TUBAR — TUSCARORA.

TUBAB.

Indians of Sinaloa, speaking a language related to the Tepe-
guana and Tarahumara.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hbbyas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX et seq.

Hebyas, Saggio, p. 122.

And (from him) in the Mithridates, III, 3, pp. 139 — 141.

TUCANO.

Brazilian Indians of the province Rio Negro. Martius (VII,
196) enumerates them among the tribes of Juris.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alfred R. Wallacj,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. Londotiy Beeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.

TUNGHASE.

Indians of the south-eastern part of Prince of Wales's Archi-
pelago. Their language is closely related to that of Sitka.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary by Dr. John Scotjleb, in : Journal of the Boyal Gteographical
Society of London, Vol. XI {London, 1841, 8vo), pp. 231, 233—235.

Tunghase and Sitka Words, p. 163 of: E. Q. Latham, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of
London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).

TUSCARORA.

Indians formerly of North Carolina. They joined afterwards
(a.d. 1 714) the Five Nations, or Iroquois, and are now in the west
of the State of New York.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A small Dictionary of Tuskerura, Fampticough, Woccon, pp. 226 — 230 of:
John Lawson, Surveyor-General of North Carolina, A New Voyage to Caroliiwj

TZENDALES. 193

containing the Exact Description and Natural History of that Country, together
with the Present State thereof; and a Journal of a Thousand Miles travelled through
several Nations of Indians, giving a particular account of their Customs, Manners,
etc. London^ 1709, 4to. Reprinted, ihid.^ 1714, 4to, and 1718, 4to (only new-
title-pages).

First printed as part of : A New Collection of Voyages and Travels ....
by Captain John Stevens .... London, December, 1703, 4to ; to be con-
tinued monthly (in Vol. I). G'er/natt translation, JB^amh ur ff,\7 7 2, Syo, And
in the plagiarism upon Lawson's Voyage : John Brickell, M.D., The Natural
History of North Carolina, with an Account of the Trades, Manners, and
Customs of the Christian and Indian Inhabitants. Dublin^ 1737, 8vo ; and,
with new title-page, 1743, Svo.

Hebyas, Aritmetica, pp. 113, 114.

Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix,
p. 20.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 800.

No. V, 31, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307 — 3G7) to A. Q-allatin'a
Synopsis, etc. (Arch«ologia Aanericana, Vol. II) j and under R, V, 5, p. 115, of
the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II
(from MS. Notes of Parish).

Tuscarora Vocabulary, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262—265, of: Geo. Catlin's
lietters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North
American Indians. London and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1841, 2 vols.
Svo.

Vocabulary of the Tuscarora, from William Chew, written out by the Rev. Gil-
bert Rockwood, Appendix H, pp. 251 — 258, to : Henry R. Schoolcraft's Notes on
the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 18l!(>, Svo. (New York State
Document, 1846, Senate No. 24.) And in the Comparative Vocabulary of the
Iroquois, pp. 393 — 400 of the same Report, published as a separate book. Albany,
Pease and Co., 1847, Svo.

Comparison of Tuscarora (from Lawson), Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 552 —
556 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V.

TZENDALES, CELDALES.

Indians of Chiapas, speaking a dialect of the Maya. Abb6
Brasseur considers the Celdal the parent language, and the
Maya a dialect.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

C. S. Rafinesqtje, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, Svo ; pp. 196—198.

C C

194 UAINAMBEU — UGALENZI.

A ihort MS. Vocabulary of the Tzendal Language, brought fh>m Chiapas by
John L. Stephens, is mentioned by A. Gallatin, in his Notes on the Semi-ciyilized
Nations of Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. I, p. 6).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Fr. De Cspeda, Arte de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinancateca.
Mexico^ 1560, 4to.

UAINAMBEU.

Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alpred R. Wallace,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro. London^ Reeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.

UCHEE.

Creek Indians^ east of the rivers Coosa and Chatahoochee.
Their language is very harsh and guttural. They are now
partly in Florida, partly in the west.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

No. XI, 46, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 35 — 367) to A. Gkillatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Arch»ologia Americana, Vol. II ; from Wabb^ and MS. Notes of
Ridge).

And No. D. XI, pp. 94, 96, of: American Ethnological Society's Transactiona,
Vol. n.

UGALENZI.

Indians of Russian America, west of Cape St. Elias, and near
the Island of Kadjak. Their language seems to be a dialect of
the Koloschian.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

V. Wbakgsl, Some (Eleyen) Words compared with Atna and Kolusch, p. 99
of; K. F. VON Basb und Gr. v. Helhersek, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Rm*
sischen Reicha und der angr&nzenden L&nder Asiena, Band I. 8t, Fetersburg^
1839, 8vo.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai (among them the
Ugalenze) Languages, pp. 269—318 of: Buschmakk'b Athapaakisoher Spraoh-
stamm. Berlin j 1856, 4to.

UMPQUA -UNALASCHKA. 195

UMPQUA.

lia^lians of Oregon, of the Athapascan stock, family of Tahkali-
T^napkwa.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

XTxnpqua Vocabulary, by Dr. John Scoitlee, in : Journal of the Royal G^gra-
grapliical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 237—239, 241.

' XJmpkwa Vocabulary, 1, C, of the Vocabularies of North- western America,
PP» 669 — 629 of: Horatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States
Exploring Expedition. PkUctdelpkia^ Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.

And M, III, p. 105, of the Vocabularies of North- western America (Transac-
^118 of the Ajnerican Ethnological Society, Vol. II.)

Professor W. W. Turner (/rom Hale), Comparatiye Vocabulary of Twenty-
five Words of XJmpkwa, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Tacully, Hoopah, Apache,
*Ad Navajo, pp. 84, 85 of the Beport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant
A- W. Whipple's Beport (Pacific Bailroad Beports, Vol. II. Washington,
1856, 4to>.

XJmpqua compared with the other Athapascan languages, viz., Chepewyan,
-'^^kali, Kutchin, Dogrib, Sussce, and Tlatskanai, pp. 174 — 222; and compared
^ith the same, the Kinai languages — Koloschian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269 —
^XS of: BusOHHANN, Athapaskidchcr Sprachstamm. Berlin^ 1856, 4to.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

^ Grammatical Notice, see pp. 534, 535 of : Hobatio Hale, Ethnography and'
"^^ilology. United States Exploring Expedition. Pkiladelphiay Lea and Blanchard,
^^46, foUo.

UNALASCHKA.

^^e largest of the Fox Islands^ inhabited by Eskimos. The
language of Unalaschka is spoken over all the Fox Islands^ and
^Iso on the peninsula of Aljaska.

words and vocabularies.

William Coxe, Account of Bussian Discoveries between Asia and America,
etc. London, 1780, 4to (reprinted, ibid,, 1784 and 1804), p. 303.

French translation — Paris, 1781, 4to. Neufchatel, 1781, 8vo, p. 172.
German translation — Fraiikfart and Leipzig, Fieischer, 1784-, Svo.

A Table to show the Affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalashka and
I^orton Sound and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux, Appendix VI
to Vol. Ill of: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, performed under the direction

19G UTAHS VILELA.

of Captains Cook, Clark, and Gore, 1776—1780. London^ 1784, 3 Tok. 4to j
Vol. II, Appendix VI, p. 554. Edit. Dublin, 1784, 3 vols. 8vo j Vol. Ill, pp.
654, 555.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 458, 459 (from Resanopf).

Vocabulary of the Languages .... of the Islands .... Oonalaschka ....
Appendix No. Ill, pp. 329 — 337, of: Ueet Lisiansky's Voyage round the
World. London, Jolin Booth, 1814, 4to.

Baldi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 858.

Feed. Littke, Voyage autour du Monde execute sur la Corvette le Seniavine, etc.,
1826 et 1829. Traduit du Russe par F. Boye. Paria, Firmin Didot, 1835, 1836,
3 vols. 8vo, and Atlas ; Vol. I, pp. 236 — 247. The Russian original — Tedor Litke^
Puteschestvie vokrug svjeta — appeared at St, Petersburg, 1834 — 1836, 3 vols. 8vo.

Some Words (31 — and numerals 1 — 5) of the tJnalachka compared with Eskimo
and Kadjak, p. 123 of: Von Baeb und Von Helmersen, Beitrage zur Kentniss
des RussLsehen Reiches, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo.

Oonalashca Vocabulary, sub lit. X, p. 130, of the Vocabularies of North
America, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II,
(Gallatin says, concerning this language, p. 77, '* not in America.")

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 460.

UTAHS.

Wild Indians on the borders of New Mexico.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Utah Vocabulary .... No. 9 of Appendix B, pp. 140 — 143, of: James H.
Simpson's Journal of a Military Recoimaissance from Santa F^, New Mexico, to
the Navajo Country (Reports of the Secretary of War, with Keconnaissanees of
Koutes from San Antonio to £1 Paso .... also .... the Report of Lieutenant
J. H. Simpson. Washington, Union Office, 1850 ; 8vo, pp. 65—168),

VILELA.

Indians of the Argentine province^ Cordova, on the banks of the
Salado River. They are divided into OntoampaSj YeconoampaSy
IpaSy and Pasaines, There are also some wandering tribes of
the Vilela in the forests on the banks of the Rio Bermejo;
among them are the Chunupies, Ocoles, Atalalas. The Vilela

VIRGINIA VUTA. 197

language is related to the Lule, and has several dialects, among
which the Vilela proper and the Ontoampa are the most promi-
nent.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

F. S. QiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 364 — 366.

Hebvas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

Heevas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 48, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.

Hervas, Aritmetica, pp. 98, 99.

Hebvas, Saggio, pp. 103—105.

Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 508, 516, 517 (from Heevas and GhiLii).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 455.

VIRGINIA.

The words which we find mentioned under this name belong to
the Moliegan.

WORDS and vocabularies.

The " Few Words " given by Captain John Smith are to be found in —
1, Vol. IV of: D. Samuel Pfechas, Hakluytus Postumus (London, 1625, V, folio),
p. 1667. 2, p. 40 of his General History of Virginia. London, 1627 (ibid.,
1630, 1632), and Vol. I, pp. 147, 148, of the edition published in 1819 at Itich-
mondy Virjiniay Franklin Press, William "W. Gray, printer, 2 vols. 8vo.

Vocabularium Barbaro-Virgineorum, pp. 133 — 154 of: Lutheri Catechismus
ofversatt pa A.merican Virginiske Spraket. Stockholm, Burchard, 1696, small 8vo.

H. Kelandfs, Dissertationes Miscellanese. Trajecti ad Hhenum, 1706 — 1708,
3 vols. 8voi Vol. Ill, pp. 208-211.

Heevas, Saggio, p. 126.

HEfiVAfi, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies j and (from him,
as well as from the Virginia Catechism) in :

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389.

Languo des Virginiens ; Couet de Gebelin, Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII,
pp. 515-520. Paris, 1772, 4to. Reprinted, pp. 328-331 of: J. B. Scherer,
Becherches Historiques et G^ographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Parvt, Brunet,
1777, 12mo.

VUTA, HUILLICHE.

Indians^ west of the Patagoiiians, and south of the Araucanians,

i

1 98 WACOES WAIRUR.

They are divided into the — Chanos, Chunos, or ChonoSy on and
next to the island of Chiloe ; Poyus, or PoyeSj on the islands
of Wellington and Hanover, and the coast opposite ; Keyus, or
Keyes, south of the above, and down to the Straits of Magal-
haens. Their language is a mixture of Araucan and Tehuelhet.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Th. Faleneb, Description of Patagonia. Merefordy 1774, 4to, p.
Oerman translation — Oolha, 1775, 8vo, p. 124.

WACOES, NUECOS.

Indians of the Great Prairies, belonging to the Pawnee stock,
residing between the Washita and Red rivers, in about 98° 20
W. long. They are closely related to their neighbours, the
Witchitas.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Nueco Vocabulary, pp. 65 — 68, and Fifteen Nueco Words compared with
Pawnee, Biccaree, Eichai, and Witchita, pp. 68, 69, of the Report upon the Indian
Tribes, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W.
Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th
Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports, Yol. II. Washinigion^ 1856, 4to).

WAIKUR, GUAICUR, MONQUI.

Indians of Lower California. The Cora and the Aripe speak
dialects of their language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

J. Begebt, e S. J., Nachrichten von der Amerikanischen Halbinsel Californien,
mit einem zwiefachen Anhang falscher Nachrichten. Greschrieben von einem
Priester der Gesellschaft Jesu, welcl^er lang darinn diese letztere Jahr gelebt bat.
Mannheim^ 1772, Svo.

Langue de la Califomie (Waikur, from Begebt), pp. 553—555 of: Cotjet
DE Gebelin, Monde Primitif. Pam, 1772, 4to.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 198, 199. Cora Vocabulary, tWd., pp. 87,
88, 153, 154.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 188—192 (from P. Begebt).

WAIILATPU — WARROWS. 199

WAIILATPU, MOLELE.

Ixidians of western Oregon, south" of Columbia lliver. The
^^aiUatpu proper are called, also, Willetpoos, Cayitse, Their
Isuiguages bear some affinity to the Sahaptin or Nez-perc^
language.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

T. Waiilatpu ; O. Waiilatpu (Willepoos, Cayuse), from Dr. Whitman ; P.
^olele (see Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 — 629 of: Hob.Halb,
Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-
^^ijl^hia^ Lea and Blanchard, 1846, foho).

•Ajid IT, XXV, p. 120, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

-A. Short Notice, p. 561 of : Hob. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the
Edited Stated Exploring Expedition {Philadelphia^ 181:6, folio) ; and, reprinted,
P* 66, Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

WARROWS.

J-xxdians in the interior of British Guyana.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. II {London,
■^^32, 8vo), pp. 247 et seq. Reprinted in R. Montgomery Martin's British
p^lonial Library, Vol. V (West Indies, II), pp. 165, 156. London, Bohn, 1844,

•mo.

'Warrow Words, pp. 140, 141, of : John Dfnmobe Lang, J).D., View of the
^^^igin and Migrations of the Polynesian Nations. London^ Cochrane, 1834,

mo.

Yooabnlaiy of Eighteen Words compared with Arowak, Accaway, and Caribisi,
^^. 297, 298 of: W. H. Bbett, Indian Tribes of Guyana. New York, Carter
-^Toihers, 1852, 12mo.

Sir RoBEBT H. ScHOMBUBax, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Warauan
^Vordfl, in his ; Vocabularies of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian
^t^bes inhabiting Guiana, pp. 97, 98 of: British Association Report, Swansea
Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8yo.

200 WEE-YOT WIXNEBAGOS.

WEE-YOT.

Indian band on the mouth of Eel River and near Humboldt Bay,
in north-western California. (Eel River is called Wee-yot by
the Indians residing on it.)

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Geobge Gibbs, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 434 —
440.

WEITS-PEK.

Indians of north-western California, on the Klamath, at the
junction of the Trinity.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Geobge Gibbs, Vocabulary : Sclioolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 440—
445.

WINNEBAGOS, NIPPEGON.

Called, by the French, Puans, or Otchagras ; by the Oma-
haws, Horoje ; and by themselves, Hochungorah, Indians of
the Sioux stock on Fox and Rock rivers, Wisconsin.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Professor Sat, Comparative Vocabularies of Various Dialects of the Lenape (or
Delaware) Stock of Korth American Indians, together with a Specimen of the
Winnebago (or Nippegon) Language, Note 15, pp. 135 — 145, to John Picker-
ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collec-
tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston^
Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo 5 reprinted, ibid.y Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo ;
pp. 81—160).

Note 16, pp. 149 — 151, relates to the Winnebago dialect, which is considered
as being of Mexican origin.

Professor Sat, Vocabulary, pp. Ixxxvi — Ixxxviii, added to : Astronomical and
Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the
Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi, under the command of Major J. H. I^ong.
Philadelphia, 1822, 4to.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 775.

WISH-OSK WOKKONS. 201

^o. VI, 33, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 — 367) to A. Gallatin's
^J'^opsis, etc. (Arcbffiologia Americana, Vol. II).

-And under S, VI, 2, p. 116, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions, Vol. II.

(From Sat, and MS. notices of Boiloin Cass and in the War Depart-
ment.)

'^^innebago Numerals (1— billion), by Miss Elizabeth Lowet, pp. 214 — 216
^^ = Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II.

WISH-OSK.

lians of north-western California^ on Humboldt Bay and
''^^d River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

^^ ^EOEGE GiBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
^Ol. JII, pp. 434—440.

WITCHITAS.

Xndians of northern Texas^ near the Red River.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Captain R. B. Mabgy, Vocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Comanches
and Witchitas, Appendix H, pp. 273—276, of; Randolph B. Maect and
Oeobge B. M*Clellan, Exploration of the Ked River of Louisiana, in the year
1852. Wcuhington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8vo (33rd Congr. 1st Sess,
House Exec. Doc.)

Specimen of .the Caddo and Witchita Languages, pp. 709 — 712 of Vol. V of:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

Fifteen Witchita Words (from Maecy) compared with Pawnee, Kichai, Ric*
caree, and Hueco, pp. 68, 69 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieu-
tenant A. W. Whipple's Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Wash"
ington, 1856, 4to).

WOKKONS, WACCOA.

Indians^ formerly of North Carolina, long since extinct. Their
language was related to that of the Catawbas. They were
neighbours of the Tuscaroras in North Carolina.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

A small Dictionary of Tuskerora, Pampticough, Woccon, in : John Lawson,

D D

202 YAMKALLIE.

New Voyage to Carolina (see Tuscarora). London, 1709, 4to, pp. 225 — 280
et seq.

Oertnan translation— iram5«r$r, 1772, 8vo, pp. 341 et seq.

Dr. John Bbiceel, The Natural History of North Carolina. Dublin, 1737,
8fo. New title, Hid., 1743, 8vo,

Hebyas, Aritmetica, p. 114.

Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabtdaries.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from Lawson).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 793.

Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with
the Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waccoa of that State and the Catawba
of South Carolina, pp. 552—558 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. V. (Tuskarora and Waccoa, both from Lawson, pp. 552 — 555 ;
Tuskarora, Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 555, 556; Waccoa and Catawba,
pp. 557, 558.)

P. 87, and No. XIX, 54, p. 372, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis,
etc. (Archffiologia Americana, Vol. II).

TAMKALLIE, KALLAPUIAH.

Oregon Indians of the plains of the Wallamette, speaking a
language related to that of the Cathlascons and Haeeltzuk.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Kalapooah and Yamkallie Vocabularies, by Dr. John Scoulbb, in : Journal
of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, Syo ;
pp. 237, 239, 241.

Vocabulary of the Calapooa Nation, pp. 333—336 of; Rev. Samuel Pabksb,
Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Rocky Mountains. Ithaca, yew
York, printed by Mack, Andrus, and Woodruff; 1838, 12mo.

No. 7, S, 9 {Kalapuya), and r. {Tuhtoalati, Follaties), of the Vocabularies of
North-western America (pp. 569-629), in : Hoeatio Hale, Ethnography and
rwogy of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and
Blanchard, 1846, folio. => r ^ ,

vtlLu'^^^ (i^a^ap«5^a, Wtllamet), pp. 97, 99, of the North American
vocabularies (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II).

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

4kl'S!S^L°"pXlr ■ f "-^Pl-y a»d Philology. United State,
r g Jixpoaition. PhOadelphta, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, foUo.

A»d pp. 68-61, Vol. n, of: Transaction, of the American Etbnologiod Society.

YA0UA8 YAQUl. 208

YAGUAS.

Brazilian Indians on the Amazon.

WORDS AND YOCABULARIKS.

Langue dee Taguas, Yocabularj, No. XXIII, pp. 297, 298, of: Castelnaxt,
Vol. V, Appendice.

YAMEOS.

Indians on the Upper Marauon, east from the junction of the
Tigre Kiver.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HsBYAS, Origine, Tabb. XLVIil, L et seq.
Heevas, Saggio, pp. 107, 108 j and (from him)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 689, 596—597.

TANKTONS, YANKTONANS, OR
YANKTOANANS.

Sioux tribe^ between the Red River and the Missouri.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

P. Ixxxiv of Say's Vocabularies in : Astronomical and Meteorological Re-
cords, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Ex-
ploring the Mississippi .... under .... Major J. H. Long. Philadelphia^ 1822,
4to.

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 774.

No. VI, 35, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II (from Say).

Keprinted under S, VI, 1, p. 116, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.

Keise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. Cohlenz, 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to j
Vol. II, pp. 491—498.

YAQUI, HIAQUI.

Christian Indians of Sonora, Mexico. (See also under Cinaloa.)
It may be stated^ on the authority of Hervas and Andr. Perez

204 YARURA.

DE RiBAS (Historia de los Triumfos de nuestra Santa Fe,
Madrid, 1645, folio), that the Hiaqui is the principal language
of Sinaloa ; and, on the authority of De Souza, that P. Luis
BoNiFAZ has written an "Arte de la Lengua Principal de
Cinaloa," which probably exists only in MS.

WORDS AND VOCABTJL ABIES.

Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 121, 122 ; and (from him)

Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 156—158.

A Vocabulary of their Language has been taken by John R. Babtlett, the
United States Boundary Commissioner.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Arte" de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, pop P. Luis Bonipaz. (MS., according
to De Souza.)

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 156—158 (Lord's Prayer, with G^ramniatical

Notes).

YARURA.

Indians of New Granada, in the plains of the Meta and Casanare^
tributaries of the Orinoco. They call themselves Japurin.
Their language bears affinity to the languages of the Betoi,
Ele, and Otomaques.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 212.

Hebyas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.

From P. GiOY. Mabia Fobneri, a missionary among the Taruras, who
had composed a Grammar and a Vocabulary of their language, the MS. of
both of which he left at the Mission. Betumed to Europe, he gaYe to
Hervas MS. Notices concerning the Yarura language, which were after-
wards also used by Adelung and Vater for the Mithridates.

Hebyas, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq.

Hebyas, Aritmetica, pp. 105, 106.

Hebyas, Saggio, pp. 109, 110.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 650 (from Hebyas and Gilii).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 646.

C. S. Raeinesqfe, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 118.

YUKAI — YUMA8. 205

IReprinted, pp. 349 — 351 of: Josiah Pbiest, American Antiquities and Dis-
coveries in the West. Third Edition, Albany, printed by Hoffman and White,
1833, Sto.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Jklithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 635-640 (from Fobnebi).

A MS. Grammar of the Yarura Language was in the library of W. von Hum-
boldt, and is now in the Royal Library at Berlin*

YUKAI,

Indians on Russian River, in north-western California.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

George Gibbs, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. ni, pp. 428—434.

YULE.

Indians of the Isthmus of Darien.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of the Language of the Yule Indians, inhabiting the rivers and
the coast of Darien, from the mouth of the Atrato to the coast of San Bias, by
Dr. Edward Cullen, pp. 241, 242 of Vol. XXI of: Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society. London^ John Murray, 1851, 8vo,

YUMAS.

r

Indians of the south-western part of California, on the Rio
Colorado, down to its entrance in the Gulf of California. They
are divided into five tribes, of which the Cuchans are the most
important. The others are the Ma-ha-os, Hah-waUcoes, Yam-
pai-o, and Co-co-pahs, The Camoyes, or Pueinaja, are a tribe
of the Cuchans.

WORDS AND VOCABTTLARIES.

Vocabulary of about 250 Words in the Yuma (rather Cuchan) Language, pp.
23 — 28 of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Extract from a Journal of an Expedition
from San Diego, California, to the Eio Colorado, from September 11th to Decem-
ber 11th, 1849 (Congress. Docum., 31 Congr., 2nd Sess., Senate Exec. Doc, No.
19, pp. 28) . Keprinted, pp. 118 — 121 of the : Physical Data respecting that part
of Southern California lying on the line of boundary between San Diego and the
mouth of the river Gila j with incidental descriptions of the Diegunos and Vumas
Indian Tribes ; pp. 99—121 of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. II.

206 YUNGA — YURACARES.

Beprinted as : Yuma Vocabulary, -with Notices of the Comoyes dialect, taken
from Pablo Coelum, a Yuma chief, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 95 — 101
of: Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on
the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington^ 1855,
Vol. II, 4to).

The United States Boundary Commbsioner, JoHir R. Babtlett, has also
taken a Yocabulary of the Yuma Language.

YUNGA.

Peruvian Indians of the departments Truxillo^ Zaiia^ Piura, and
Catamarca. The Yncas had forced them to leave their old
abodes^ and placed them in diflferent villages; but they kept
their language, which is totally different from the Quichua. In
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 548, the language is called Yunka-
Mochika; by Hervas, Mochika di Yuncas, Rivero and
TscHUDi call it a dialect of the Quichua,

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Hebyas, Saggio, p. 93, and (from him)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 549—551.
Heevas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Fernando de la Cabeeea (cura y vicario de S. Martin de Beque en el corre-
gimiento de Chiclayo), Arte de la Lengua Yuuga de los valles del obispado de
Trujillo, eon un confessionario y todas las oraciones cristianas y otras oosas.
Lima, Juan de Contreras, 1644, 16mo.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 551.

(The above Grammar was unknown to the authors of the Mithridates.)

YURACAUES.

Indians of Bolivia, on the eastern slope of the Andes, on the
rivers Ibabo, Mamore, Aimore, and Seacri. The Tacana,
Maropa, and ApoUsta are tribes related to them.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, p. 164 of Vol. I of: A. D'Oebigny,

UHomme Americain.

Diccionario Yuracare, by P. la Cueva, 4to, in two parts : Espaiiol-Yuracare,
complete ; Yuracare- Espaiiol, incomplete. (MS. in possession of Alcide D'Orbiguy.)

ZAMUCA — ZAPOTECA. 207

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

A. D'Obbigny, L'Homme Am6ricain, Vol. I, p. 369, and p. 376 (Tacana tribe),
p. 380 (Maropa tribe), p. 382 (Apolista tribe).

ZAMUCA, SAMUCA.

Indians of the South American province Chiquitos. The three
dialects of their language are the Zamuca, Caipotorade^ and
Morotoco.

WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.

Hervas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 223 (Zamuca Chiqiiita).

Hehvas, Saggio, pp. 101, 102, 229, 230.

Hehvas, Aritmetica, p. 97.

Heevas, Origine, pp. 37, 41, 45, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554—570 (from Heevas).

Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 462.

Vocabulary of Twenty-three Samuca Words, Vol. I, pp. 163, 164 ; Vol. IT,
p. 136 (Xamuca), of: A. D'Okbignt, L'Homme Am6ricain.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 553—557.

A. D'Oebignt, L*Homme Americain, Vol. IT, p. 147.

ZAPAllI.

Indians of Upper Peru and Equador, between the rivers Mara-
rion, Pastaza^ and Napo.

WORDS AJfD VOCABULAEEES.

Brevi cenni sull' idioma Zaparo, corredati d*un saggio di diccionario, di alguni
dialog! pill necessarii pel viaggiatore, pp. 281 — 297 of: Gaetano Osoflati,
£zplorazione delle regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo, etc. Milano^ Bemardoni,
1850, 8vo.

ZAPOTECA.

Indian language of Oajaca^ Mexico.

208 ZEONA.

WORDS AiND V0CABULARIK8.

J FAN DB CoEPOVA, Vocabulario de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico, 1578, 4to-

Yocabulario de la Lengua Zapoteca, 6 Diecionario Hispano-Zapoteco. Mexico y
1571, 4to.

Vocabulario de la Lengua Zapot^ca, by Bishop Fedbo Feeia.

Feria was born 1521!, went to Mexico, joined the Dominicans, became a
missionary amongst the Zapotecas, and, after iBlling many posts of dignity in
the Church, was made Bishop of Chiapas, in 1575. Died about the year
1586. He wrote besides : Confessionario en la Lengua Zapoteca ; and : Doc-
trina Christiana en la misma Lengua.

Diecionario de la Lengua Zapoteca. Also : Los Evangelios Quadragesimales en
Lengua Zapoteca, by Fray Cheistobal Agueeo.

Fray Christobal Aguero was born in 1600, in San Luis de la Paz, in Michoacan,
became a Dominican monk in Oaxaca, in 1618, and, according to De Souza,
was so perfect in the language of the Zapotecas, that he taught it publicly to
his ecclesiastical brothers. He gave his Diecionario to the Bishop of Mon-
terroso for publication ; the translation of the Eyangelists remained in the
Convent of Antequera. He wrote also : Miscellaneo Espiritual en idioma
Zapoteca, which was published in 4to, in the city of Mexico, by Bernardo
Calderon, 1666.

C. S. Batinesque, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia^
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 52.

Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Paris , 1841, 8yo j pp. 260 — 286.

The MS. Vocabulary of Cheistobal Agueeo is also mentioned by Clavigero.

GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.

J. DE COEDOYA, Arte de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico, 1564, 12mo. (De Souza
gives the date of 1578.)

Arte de la Gram&tica de la Lengua Zapoteca, conforme al que de la Gram&tica
Latina escribio Antonio de Nebrija, por Fr. Pedeo Cueva. Megico, 1607, 8vo.

Arte de la Lengua Zapoteca, por Fr. Antonio Pozo. MS. (According to De
Souza, Pozo died in the Convent of Santa Ana Zecahe, in the year 1623. His
MS. was preserved in Tontitlan, Valley of Oaxaca.

Tratado curioso de los raices y formacion de los Verbos de la Lengua Zapoteca,
por Fr. Qeeonimo Moeeno.

Moreno was a native of Andalusia, went to America in 1597, was a mis-
sionary in Oaxaca, and died, in 1631, in the Convent of San Domingo of
Antequera.

ZEONA.

Language of the inhabitants of the north-westerly comer of

ZOQUE. 209

^^ empire of Brazil, province of Para, on the left bank of the
^^^fcnazon, between the rivers Putumajo and Caqueta. It may
^^ SI dialect of the Omagua, and, like that language, related to
^'^^ "Lingoa geraP^ of Brazil.

WOBDS AND YOCABULIBIES.

^iccionario j Doctrina en Lengua Zeona. MS. of pp. 416, in 12mo, in tbo
P^^^sesaion of Colonel Joaquin Acosta of Nueya Granada. The Appendix con-
^■^^*i8 a List of Words of the " Lengua general del Brasil."

ZOQUE.

^^dian language of Chiapas, Mexico.

GBAMMABS AND OBAMMATICAL NOTICES.

Pr. D£ Oepeda, Arte de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales, j Cinacanteca.
Mexico, 1560, 4to.

E E

ADDENDA.

(The Contributions furnished hy Professor Wm. W. Turner, of Washtngton^ are
enclosed in braeketsy thus [ 1, and bear the initials W. W. T.)

ABENAKI.

[The Comparatiye Vocabulary appended to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar was
compiled, not by " Professor F. Say," but by Dr, John Pickering, from various
sources, the Winnebago alone haying been taken from Say. Of the Abenaki two
Vocabularies are given, one from Father Basle's MS. Dictionary, and the other (St.
Francis Indians) from Bev. Messrs. Holmes and Noyes.

The nmnerals, from Father Easle's MS. Dictionary, are printed in Collections
of Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X, first series. Soston, 1809, pp. 137,
138.-W.W,T.]

ABIPONES.

Addnzo de Barcena, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua delos Indios Abipones y
Quiraaguis. Printed, according to Lo9ano, Descripcion Chorographica del gran
Chaco J and Barcia, in his edition of Leon Pinelo.

[A. F. Pott, Die quiuare und vigesimale Zahlmethode bei VSlkem aller
Welttbeile. Salle, 1847, 8vo. On the numerals, pp. 4— 7.— W. W, T.]

ALGONKIN.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
64—66 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, note.—W. W. T.]

ALLENTIAC.

Grammatica y Vocabulario en las Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, por Torralva.
Lima, 1608, 8vo.

APiM;Ht:S — ATNAS. 211

APACHES.

[For Vocabulary of the Jicarilla Apaches, see "Ticorillas," p. 186. —
AV. W. T.]

APPIACAS (Brazilian Indians).

Vocabulary of 113 words on page 315 of: Memoria sobre os usos, Costumes e
Linguagem dos Appiacas ; e descobrimento de Novas Minas na provincia de Mato
Grosso. Pelo Conego Jose da Silya Guimarez, natural de Cuiaba. Pp. 297 — 317
of: Bevista Trimensal do Instituto do Bio de Janeiro, Tomo VI. £io de Janeiro,
1844, 8vo.

ARAUCANS.

p. Gabriel de la Vega, Arte, Gramatica, Vocabulario i retas a la Lengua de
Chile. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

ARRAPAHOES.

[There is no evidence that Dr. Latham " collated" Mackenzie's Vocabulary. In
"Varieties of Man," p. 344, he only copies Prichard (Vol. V, p. 414) in calling
the tribe Ahnenin ; whereas Gallatin (American Ethnological Society's Transac-
tions, Vol. II, cvi) calls it Atsina, Which is right P

Beise des Prinzen Maximilian zr Wied, Vol. II, pp. 499^ 500. — ^W, W. T.]

ARRAWAKS.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 71.— W. W. T.]

ATHAPASCANS.

[BrscHMANN's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm contains also an exhibition of the
pronominal prefixes, pp. 168 — 170. — W. W. T.]

TJeber die Volker und Sprachen Neu-Mexico's und der Westseite des Britischeu
Nord Amerika's. Mit einer s^stematischen Worttafel des Athapaskischen Sprach-
stammes. (Paper by J. C. E. Buschmann, read before the Berlin Academy,
January 22, 1857.)

ATNAS.

[Beference is erroneously omitted to the larger Vocabulary in Bar und
Helmebsen (97 words, by Von Wrangell), in the Table to p. 259.--W. W. T.]

212 ATNAHS — BODEGA.

ATNAHS, OR Chin Indians.

[The term " Kiim," retained from Jiilg, is simply a German translation of the
English word chin. These people are called by Mackenzie " Chin Indians,"
apparently on account of the projection of the lower part of the fiace, caused by
flattening the forehead.

H. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion, Vocab. E. pp. 570—629. (Words.)

H. Hale, Ethnography, etc., p. 536. (Grammar.)— W. W. T.]

Numerals 1 to 10 in " Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre," Vol. IT, p.
401, of : DuFLOT DE MoFEAS, Exploration duTerritoire de TOr^gon des Califomies et
de la Mer Yermeille, ex6cut^ pendant les annees 1840-42, 2 vols. Parisy 1844, 8vo.

AYMARA.

DiEQO DE Gfaldo, Arte de la Langua Aymara, con una silva de sus frases i su
declaracion. Chicuiiu, 1612, 8vo. (Printed, according to Barcia-Pinelo.)

[A. F. Pott, Die quiuare imd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the niunerals, pp.
73, 74.-W.W.T.]

BATEMDAKAIEE.

[The Batemddkaiee^ Clumeshdk, Kulanapo^ and Yukai of Gibbs are identical
with the " SevemovsJcia^^ or Chvachamayu^ of the Russians, as appears from a com-
_pwison of the Vocabularies. These are all but different names for the same tribe,
or of subdivisions of the same tribe. — W. W. T.]

BLAOKFEET.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 68.
— W. W. T.]

Blackfoot Vocabulary, pp. 348—352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die
wahrend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer Stammeerlebteuk^
Abentheuer imd Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgab^E^
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser nact*.
der Natm* entworfenen G«m&lden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissel^ Muquardt, 1851_,
8vo, pp. 382.

BODEGA.

[The Sodegan or OlamentJce Indians of the Russians (p. 20) are the same as the
TchoJcoyem of Gibbs (p. 184] and the San Bafael Indians of Hale. The Talaiui

BRAZILIAN. 218

of Hale (p. 180) and the T^tolumne tribes of Johnson (see "Califomians,'* p. 27)
are allied to them, at least in language.

U. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expe-
dition. San Raphael Vocab. No. 15, pp. 570-629.— W. W. T.]

BRAZILIAN.

Dictionarium Linguae Brasilicse, auctore Emm. Veiga, Lusitan. Cum Gram-
ixiatica et Catechismo. 4to. (Ck)mmunieate(l by L. Leon de Rosny.)

Memoria sobre a necessidades do Estudo e Ensino das Linguas indigenas do
^^^Tasil, por Francisco Adolfo de Yamhagen. Pp. 53 — 63 of: Revista Trimensal do
io de Janeiro, Tomo III, 1841, 8vo.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
^» 4, 7—10, 73 ; on names of the fingers, pp. 302 -304.— W. W. T.]

Biccionario da Lingua geral dos Indios do Brasil, reimpresso e augmentado com
^^i^ersos vocabularies, e offerecido a Sua Magestade Imperial por Joao Joaquim da
^ ilva Ouimaraes, Natural da Bahia. Bahia, Typ. de Camillo de Lellis Masson & Ca.,
^iia de Santa Barbara, n. 2, 1854, 8vo, pp. vi, 60, ii, 36.

The contents of this volume are :
iDiccionario anonymo da Lingua de Na9ao Guarani, pp. 1 - 60.
-A^ddenda, pp. i, ii.

\^ocabulario da Lingua principal dos Indios do Para, do qual usao differentes
^t>us da mesma provincia, pp. 1 — 7.

"S'^ocabulario da Na^ao Botocuda, pp. 8 — 12.
"Vocabulario da Na9ao Camacam Civilisada, pp. 12 — 14.
"Vocabulario da Na9ao Camacam Mongoyos, pp. 14—16.
^ocabulario da Na9ao Maconi, pp. 16 — 18.
"Vocabulario da Na9ao Malali, pp. 18 — 20.
"Vocabulario da !N'a9ao Patach6, pp. 20, 21.
"Vocabulario da Na9ao Tupinamb&, pp. 22. 23.
Tocabulario da Na9ao dos Tamoyos, p. 23.
Tocabulario da Na9ao Tupiniquins, p. 23.
Vocabulario da Tribu Jupur6ca, pp. 24, 25.
Vocabulario da Tribu Quat6, p. 25.
Vocabulario da Tribu Machakalis, pp. 26, 27.
Vocabulario da Tribu Mandacaru', p. 27.
Vocabulario da Tribu Mucury, p. 28.
Vocabularios de differentes Tribus, p. 29.

Itapucuru', Puris,

Macamecrom, Tabayara,

Molopaque, Timbira,

Nheengaibas, Xumanas.

214' CAHITA CALIFORNIAN LANGUAGES.

Yocabulario dos Indies das AJdeas de 8. Pedro e Almeida, pp. 30, 31.

Dialectos de Sao Pedro, pp. 31, 32.

Dialectos de Almeida, p. 33.

iN^otas para esclarecimentos, pp. 34, 35.

Index, p. 36.

On page 34 the following curious note oocurs : " Os idiomas das tribus Banebas,
e Uruquenas tem alguns nomes Hebreos, oomo por exemplo—Joa— Jacob — Jacobi
— Tomfe— Tomequi— Bayidu— JoanaA — Marian^. O que indica que os sens poyos
ua antiguidade tiyerao communica^ao com os Hebreos." — Credat Judseiis !

CAHITA

[Manual para administrar & los Indios del idioma Cahita los santos Sacramentos.
.... Compuesto por \m Sacerdote de la Compania de Jests, Missionero en las de
la Proyincia de Zynaloa. Mexico, 1741, 16mo, pp. 168. (A portion is in Spanish
and Cahita, very useful for studying the construction of the language.) — ^W. W. T.]

Die Lautyeranderung aztekischer Wdrter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endimg A M E dargestellt yon Joh. Cakl Ed. Buschmann. Aus den
Abhandlungen der K5nigl. Alademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem Jahre
1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.

CAIRNOS.

Fbanc. de la Puente, Catechismo de la Doctrina Christiana en el Idioma de los
Indios Caimos, Publ. por el Fr. Mateo Anguiano, Capuch., 1703, 4to. Mentioned
in Barcia's edition of Pinelo.

CALIFORNIAN LANGUAGES.

Philologie; Diyersit^ des Langues (in California and Oregon). Chap. XIII,
pp. 386—402 of: Duflot de Mofras, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Califomies et de la Mer yermeille. Paris, Bertrand, 1844.

M. DE MoFBAS gives, on pp. 391 — 396 of Vol. II, translations of the Lord's
Prayer in the following languages, yiz. : G-uiluco, Mission S. Francisco Solano ;
Choconyen, Bay del Sacramento; Jonkiousm^, Mission S. Rafael j Vall^ de
Tulares j Mission S. Clara ; Tatch^ or T^lami, Mission S. Antonio de Padua ;
Mission S. Ines ; Mission S. Fernando ; Mission S. JuHen ; Mission S. Juan
Capistrano j Mission S. Luys Rey de Francia ; Mission S. Diego ; Mission S,
Francisco de Borgia ; Mission S. Gertrudis j Mission S. Ignacio de Loyola.

Numerals 1 — 10 (Missions del Carmelo, La Soledad, San Luiz, San Juan,
Pima, San Gtibriel, Indiens Azt^ues), in the Tableau comparatif des Noma de

CAMACANS — CHEPEWYAN. 215

"Sombre, Vol. IT, p. 401, of: Dfflot dk Mofras, Exploration clu Territoire de
rOr6gOfn des Califomiofi et de 1a Mer yemieille, ex^'ut^ i)endaiit les ann^es
1840-42. 2 Told. PariM, Rvo.

CAMACANS.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare imd vigepimale Zflhlmethode. ()ii the nunierabi, p. 72.
— W. W. T.]

CANADA.

The oorrect title of Ledeeme^s work is : Doctrine Chrestienne du P. Ledesma,
de Is Comp. de Jesus ; tradiiite en langue Canadienne par un P^re de la m^ine
Compagnie (le P^re Breboeuf). Sonen^ Richard, 1630, pp. 28, 8vo. Reprinted in
Chaplain's Voyage in 1632.

[The numerals 1 — 10 are given in Rudioeb, Grundriss eincr Geschichte der
menaehlichen Sprache. ThL I, p. 123 {Leipzig^ 1782) ; and in A. F. Pott, Die
quinare und yigesimale Zahhnethode, p. 65. — W. W. T.]

CARIBS.

[The numerals of Essequibo (from Van IIeuvel) are given by M. Gallatin, in
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, Table to p. 114.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, }>p.
69-71.— W.W.T.]

CAYUBABAS.

f A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Z&hlmetho<le. On the numerals,
p. 74.— W. W. T.]

CHEPEWYAN.

[The first two sentences of what is said under this head apply, not to the
CkepeuyanSy but to the Chippeways. The former, so far from being a courtly
language, is one of the rudest and most uncouth that is spoken on the continent.
The blunder was probably introduced by Jiilg (see Carver, Chap. XVII), as Vater
well knew the difference between the two languages (Mithridates, Vol. Ill,
part 3, p. 419).

The last sentence also is not quite correct. It was not a " theory" of Gallatin's
that the Chepewyan belongs to the Athapascan family of languages. He gave the
nam^ of Athapascas to the tribes who speak the class of languages at the head of
which stands the Chepewyan, from Athapasca Lake, whioli stands in the middle
of their territory (Archfeologia Americana, "N'ol. II, ]>. 17).

216 CHEHALIS — CHIAPANECAS.

I would therefore propose to substitute the following heading : —
"The Chepewyans belong to the stock to which M. Glallatin has given the
common name of Athabascans, They call themselyes Sah-issah-dinne (Rising-
sun People), and extend from Hudson's Bay on the east, between the Eskimos
on the north and 'the Algonkins on the south, to Lake Athapasca on the west."
— W. W. T.]

CHEHALIS, SELISH.

Vocabulary of, in : The North-west Coast ; or. Three Years at Shoal-Water Bay.
Containing Personal Adventures, a Description of the Coast from Columbia River to
the Straits of Fuca, and an Account of Indian Customs, Superstitions, Music, etc.,
and of the Vocabularies of the Chehalis and Chinook Languages, and of the
" Jargon" of the North-west. With a general Description of Washington Ter-
ritory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and Illustrations, 12mo. New York, 1857.

CHEROKEE.

[^Tsa-la-ffi Tsu-le-hi-sa-u-hi, Cherokee Phoenix. Edited by Elias Boudinot.
Printed weekly by Isaac H. Harris, for the Cherokee Nation. New JEchota, Vol. I,
No. 1, Feb. 21, 1828, to Vol. V, No. 52, May 31, 1834 ; foUo. (Stopped then, to
collect funds ; perhaps not resmned.)

Besides a great number of public documents, passages from Scripture, hynms, and
other pieces in the Cherokee language and character, it contains the following : —

On the Cherokee Alphabet, Vol. I, No. 1.

On the Cherokee Nmnerals, Vol. I, No. 2.

Questions on the Language, by C. S. Rafinesqus, Vol. I, No. 22.

Answers to Prof. Rafinesque's Questions, by W. [Rev. S. A. Worcester], Vol. I,
Nos. 23, 25, 27.

Long Words. By the same. Vol. II, No. 1.

Inflections of Cherokee verbs : tsi-ne-ffa, I speak, by Gawolihoski, Vol. IT,
Nos. 33, 34, 35 ; ga-lu-i-hay I am tying, by the Rev. S. A. Worcester, Vol. II,
Nos. 37, 41.

Cherokee Advocate. Published [weekly] at Tahlequah, Cherokee Nation. Vol. I,
No. 1, Sept. 26, 184i, to Vol. IX, No, 22, Dec. 28, 1853 j foUo. The first editor
was W. P. Ross. (The pubUcation may have continued longer, but No. 22 of
VoL IX is the last of the copy in Mr. Peter Force's library, Washington.)

This newspaper, like the preceding, contains a great many papers in the
Cherokee language, which would be extremely valuable to the student of the
language.— W. W. T.]

CHIAPANECAS.

Fb. Domingk) de Lava, Obispo, Vocabulario de la L«igua de Chiapa. Men-
tioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

CIIINUK CHIPPEWAY. 217

CHINUK.

Numerals 1—10 in the Tableau comparatif des Noma de Nombre. Vol. II,
p. 101, of: DuFLOT DE MoFBAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Califomies et de la Mer vermeille, ex^cutee pendant les ann^ 184^-42. Paris,
1844, 2 vols., 8vo.

[Lieut. G. F. Emmons gives a brief Klatsop Vocabulary in : Schoolcraft's Hist.,
etc., of Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 223, 224.

The following items are to be added to those on the " Jargon," which should
have been put by themselves : —

Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Language of Oregon [English-French Jargon].
Waahington, 1853, 8vo, pp. 22. (Printed by the Smithsonian Institution for private
distribution.)

A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon [English-Chinook and Chinook-
English] ; to which is added numerous Conversations, thereby enabling any person
to speak the Chinook correctly. 3rd edit. Portland, O. T., published by S. J.
McCormick, 1856, 24mo, pp. 24. - W. W. T.]

A Vocabulary of, in : The North-west Coast ; or, Three Years at Shoal-Water
Bay. Containing Personal Adventures, a description of the Coast from Colmnbia
River to the Straits of Fuca, and an account of Indian Customs, Superstitions,
Music, etc., and of the Vocabularies of the Chehalis and Cliinook Languages, and
of the " Jargon" of the North-west. With a general Description of Washington
Territory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and Illustrations, 12mo. New York, 1857 .

CHIPPEWAY.

[Evans, James, The Speller and Interpreter in Indian and English, for the use of
the Mission Schools. In the Odjibwa tongue. New York, 1831, 12mo.

H. E. ScHOOLCBAPT, Summary Narrative of an Exploratory Expedition to the
Sources of the Mississippi River in 1820 ; resumed and completed by the Discovery
of its Origin in Itasca Lake, in 1832, etc. Philadelphia, Lippincott, Grambo, and
Co., 1855, 8vo, pp. 596.

This work contains '^ Examination of the Elementary Structure of the
Algonquin Language, as it appears in the Chippeway Tongue," pp. 442 — 447 ;
and also the four Lectures previously published in the " Expedition to Itasca
Lake" and " Oneota," pp. 453—515.

The Rev. Q-. A. Belcourt has composed an elaborate " Dictionnaire Fran^ais-
Sauteux," which will probably be published by the Smithsonian Institution. —
W. W. T.]

A Vocabulary of Chippeway Words, in H. W. Longfellow's Song of Hiawatha.
Cotton, 1855, 8vo.

F F

218 CBIBIQUANA — COMANCHE.

CHIRIGUANA (GUAEANI).

P. Diego Sahaniego, Yocabulario de la Lengua Chinguana. Mentioned in
Bareia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

CHOCHA.

Dramas allegoricos en Lengua Chocha, by the Fray Mabtin Aceyebedo, native
of San Ildefonso, in the proyince of Oaxaca, Mexico. He left his MSS. in the con-
vent of Oaxaca (De Souza).

CHOCTAW.

[There are some remarks on the language by James Haughton, in the
Massachusetts SEistorical Collection, Yol. IX, first series, pp. 95 — 97.

The Rev. Ctetjs Btington wrote, many years ago, a Grammar of the Choctaw
Language, which he is now engaged in revising for publication. — W. W. T.]

COCAMAS.

(? SOUTH AMERICA— GRAN CHACO.)

P. Raymukdo de S^- Cbtjz, Yocabulario de la Lengua de los Indios Cocamas.
Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

COCHIMI.

[F. S. Clavigbeo, Storia della California. Venizia, 1789, 2 vols., 8vo. Gram-
matical Notices, Yol. I, pp. 110, 264.— W. W. T.]

COCO-MARICOPAS.

[That this might be an Apache people was a conjecture of M. GtQlatin's, firom
their word for " man" (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. II,
p. xcii) ; but now that we have Apache vocabularies, the Coco-Maricopa language
is seen to belong to an entirely diflferent stock. — W. W. T.l

COMANCHE.

Names of Comanche Chiefs and Numerals (1—20), pp. 273, 274 of "Wm.
Bomaebt's Observations on the Indian Tribes in Texas," in Yol. II of: The
Journal of the London Ethnological Society. London^ 1850, 870.

CORA DAKOTA. 219

CORA.

[A. F. Pott, Die quiDare und yigeeimale Z&hlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
89, 90. -W. W. T.]

Die Lautveranderung aztekiflcher Worter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
BoiloriBche Endung A M £ dargestellt von JoH. Cabl Ed. Buschmanv. Aus
den Abhandlungen der Kdnigl. Akademie der WissenBchaften zu Berlin aus dem
Jahie 1856. Berlimy 1857, 4to, pp. 118.

CREOLE, NEGRO-ENGLISH.

[B. SoUTHEY gives a sketch of the language in an article on the Negro-English
New Testament : Quarterly Beview, Vol. XLIII. London^ 1830, pp. 553 — 564.
— W. W. T.]

CUMANAS.

The correct title of Tangues' work is : Principios y Beglas de la Lengua Cum-
managota general en yarias naciones que habitan en la proyincia de Cummana en las
Indias Occidentales, con un Biccionario. By Man. do Yangues. Burgos, 1683, 4to.

CUNACUNA.

[A. F. PoTT, Die quinare und yigesimale Zahlmethode. Numerals 1 — 10, from
Balbi, p. 72.— W. W. T.]

DAKOTA.

[P. Dv PoNCEAir, Comparatiye Table of the Sioux or Nadowessie Stock, com-
prdiending the Winnebago. In Note 16 to Edwards's Mohegan Ghrammar. (Mass.
Hist. Collections, Vol. X, second series, p. 151.)

H. C. Qabelentz, Grammatik der Dakota Sprache. Leipzi^y 1852, 8yo, pp. 64.

P. Huin?ALVi, A Dakota nyelv. Kiilon lenyomat a m. acad. ertesitobdl. (The
Dakota Language, extracted from the Bulletins of the Hungarian Academy.) Pesth,
1856, 8yo, pp. 55.

Dakota TaiDoxitku Kin^ or The Dakota Friend, published [monthly] by the
Dakota Mission. G. H. Pond, editor. 8t, Pauly Minnesota. Vol. I, Nos. 1—12,
Noy. 1850 to . Oct. 1851, 4to. Vol. IT, Nos. 1—8, Jan. 1852 to Aug. 1852, fol.
(The publication was suspended at this point, on account of Indian troubles.)

The Dakota Friend contains many articles in the Dakota language, besides
specimens of the language in short sentences, with interlinear English transla-
tions, etc.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und yigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
67, 68.— W. W. T.]

220 DAK[£N ESKIMOS.

DARIEN.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare iind Tigesimale Z^lhlmethode. On the numerals, p. 72.
— W. W. T.]

DELAWARE.

Ad Losskiel, p. 64. The German original was published at Barhy, 1789, Sto.
Delaware and Iroquois words, pp. 29, 30.

Six Delaware words, on page 125 of " G^eneral Parsons' Discoyeries made in tlie
Western Country." Article XI (pp. 119 — 127) of: Memoirs of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, Part 1. Boston^ 1793, 4to.

DIEGEis'OS.

[This name means the Indians of San Diego, so that there is no such name as
Deguinos. Their language belongs to what I haye termed the Yuma tongue,
dialects of which are spoken by rarious tribes on the Rio Colorado aad GUa^ e. g.,
the Mohave, Cuchan, and Coco-Maricopa. All the vocabularies (except the Diego
itself) here enumerated by Dr. Ludewig belong to different other stocks.

Dr. Buschmann's paper on the £[izh and Netela has been published separately
under the following title: Die Sprachen Kizh und Netela von Neu Califomien,
dargestellt von Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann (aus den Abliandl. d. Konigl. Akad. d.
Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1855). Berlin, 1856, pp. 31, 4to.~.W. W. T.]

ESKELEN.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethodc. On the numerals, pp.
63, 64.— W. W. T.]

ESKIMOS.

Schediasma hocce etymologico-philologicimi prodromum Americano Gronlandicum
in patronis appropriatum insinnat Twams AbeL EavnuB, 1783, 4to.

Vocabulary of the English, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 61—89 of:
Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North- West Passage,
a.id of a Residence in the Arctic Regions during the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832,
1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K-S.A., K.C.S., etc.. Captain m the Royal Navy.
Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. Ixmdon,
Webster, 1835, 4to, pp. xii, 120, cxliv, cii. 20 plates.

Dialogues in the English, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 91 — 104 of:
Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North- West Passage,

s

\

ETCHEMINS UOKUOTOQUIKN8ES. 221

and of a Beeidenoc in the Arctic Ri^oiis during the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832,
1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., etc.. Captain in tlie Royal Xavy.
Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. London,
Webster, 1833, 4to, pp. xii, 120, cxliv, cii. 20 plates.

Bemariu on the Eskimo Language, in the article " Eskimo," by UOssleb, Ersch
und Gruber^B Encyclopaedic, 1 Sect., Band 38, pp. 108—132.

TerzeichniBS der in Labrador befindlichen Landsaugethiere, WassenrSgel, etc., in :
Miinclmer Gelehrte Anzeigen, 1844, Nos. 52, 53 (with the names in the Eskimo
language).

fA. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Z&hlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 2, 3.— W. W. T.]

Greenland Numerals (I— 10, 16—30), pp. 208, 209, of P. C. Southebland, on
the Esquimaux, in VoL lY of the Journal of the London Ethnological Society.
London^ 1854, Svo.

" Die Sprache der Eskunos auf Gronland," article by W. Schott, in : Magazm
fiir die Literatur des Auslands. Berlin, 1856, Nos. 38, 39.

ETCnEMINS.

[Fbsd. Kidder, Vocabulary of the Openango or Passamaquoddy Language, in
Schoolcraa's History, Condition, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. V, p. 690.— W. W. T.]

FLATHEADS.

[J. HowBE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages, in : Proceedings
of Philological Society, Vol. IV. Lotulon, 1850, pp. 199— 206.— W. W. T.]

FOX ISLANDS.

[Here, too, should be inserted the title of Saucr's work (see under " Aleutans,"
p. 4), as Billings's vocabulary was taken in Sithanak, and corrected in Unalashka,
both of which belong to the Fox Islands.— W. W. T.]

GE, GEIKO.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 73.
— W. W. T.]

GORGOTOQUIENSES.

p. Gaspab Ruiz, Aleman, Graniatica de la Lengua Gorgotoquiense en el Peru.
Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinclo, but not known to be printed.

222 OUABANI HUASTECA.

GUABANI.

P. Ant. Ruiz de Montoya, L'Arte, Bocabulario, Catedsmo y Tesoro de la
Lengua Guarani de la Proyincia del Paraguay y Bio de la Plata. Madridy 1639.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 6,
7, 60, 61, 301 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, jwfe.— W. W. T.]

GUAEAPUAVA.

A district in Brazil, inhabited by the Games, Votoroes, Dorins,
and Xocrens. The idiom used by these Indians is probably
Guarani.

Words and Grammatical Notices, pp. 53, 54 of : Memoria sobre o Descobrimento
e Colonia de Guarapuava. Escripta pelo Padre Fbancisco dos Ohagas Lima. Pp.
43 — 64 of: Berista Trimensal, etc., Tomo lY. Sio de Janeiro^ 1842.

GUATUSOS.

" Les Indiens Guatusos du Nicaragua, par E. G. Squiee," in : Athenseum Fran-
cois, 22 Dec., 1855 ; and also in : Nouvelles Annales des Voyages.

GUAYCURU.

A few words on p. 31 of : Historia dos Indios Cavalleiros, ou da Na^ao Guaycuru.
Escripta no real presidio de Coimbra, por Fbai^cisco Bodsigues do Psade. Pp.
21 — 17 of : Bevista Trimensal do Instituto do Bio de Janeiro, Tomo I. Rio de
Janeiro, 1839.

GUYANA.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the mmierab, pp.
69-71.— W. W. T.]

HAIDAH.

Nmnerals 1 to 10, in the Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre. Vol. IT, p.
401, of: DuFLOT DE MoFBAS, Exploration duTerritoire de I'Ordgon, des Califomies
et de la Mer vermeille, ex6cutee pendant les annees 1840-42. Paris, 2 vols., 1844,
8vo.

HUASTECA.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
92 ; on the names of the fingers, p. 301.— W. W. T.]

Hudson's bay — inkuluchltjats. 223

HUDSON'S BAY.

[The term " Hudson's Bay Indians " is, properly, only another name for Chepe-
wyans. The yocabukiy of Chappell therefore, which is Cree, or Knistcneaux, does
not belong here.— W. W. T.]

HURONS, WYANDOTS.

Six Wyandot Words, on p. 125 of " General Parsons' Disooyeries made in the
Western Country." Art. XI (pp. 119 — 127) of: Memoirs of the American Academy
of Arts and Sciences, YoL II, Part 1. Boston^ 1793.

[A MS. Wyandot Grammar of 213 pages, small 4to, is in the possession of Prof.
J. W. Gibbs, of Yale College.— W. W. T.]

A community of Indians of the Huron-Iroquois family (the same with the " Five
Nations" and " Six Nations"), hving at Caughnawaga on the St. Lawrence, nearly
opposite Lachine, and a few miles above Montreal.

The settlement dates back to the year 1680, when Louis XY made a grant of it
to these Indians. They are adyanced in civilization, and, from their staunch
loyalty and good services in the troublous year 1837, are in good favour with the
British power.

A Yocabulary, consisting of the numerals to above 100, and upwards of forty
of the oonmionest words and brief sentences, is in the possession of Thomas H.
Gladstone, Stockwell, near London, collected by him in July, 1856.

INKULtJCHLIJATS.

[These belong not to the *' Eskimo," but to the Kenai stock, as is correctly stated
by Jlilg. Dele the heading " Kangjulit" the dialects of which class (spoken by the
Tshnagmjuts and by the Kwichpaks and Kuskokwimjuts, see p. 98) are of the
Eskimo fiunily.

Loentenant Zagosein's Inkilik and Inkalit-jugelnut Yocabularies are printed in
the following works : —

I. 'Zapiski Busskago Gbographitsheskago Obshtshestva (Memoirs of the
Bussian G^graphical Society), Yol. II. 8t. Petershurff, 1847, 8vo (I cannot
give the page of the 1st edition) ; 2nd edition, St. Petershwrg^ 1849, pp. 246 —
249.

H. Denkschrifben der Bussischen Gbographischen G^ellschaft zu St. Peters-
burg, Yol. I (Gkorman translation of the above, containing Yols. I and II of
the original). Weimar, 1849, 8vo, pp. 354—358.

in, A. Erman, Arehiv fiir Wissenschaftiiche Kunde von Bussland, Yol.
YH. Serlin, 1849, 8vo (from the Bussian, by W. Schott), pp. 481 — 487.

lY. J. C. E. Buschmann, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856,
4to, pp. 269— 312.— W. W. T.]

224 IROQUOIS — KADJAK.

IROQUOIS.

Ad Losskiel, p. 87. The Gbrman original was published at Barhy^ 1789, 8to.
Delaware and Iroquois words, pp. 29, 30.

lOWAY.

[W. Hamilton and S. M. Ieyin, An Elementary Book of the loway Language,
with an English translation. loway and Sac Mission Press^ Indian Territory, 1843.

The title of the Grammar by these gentlemen should read as follows : —

W. Hamilton and S. M. Irvin, An loway Grammar, illustrating the Principles

of the Language used by the loway, Otoe, and Missouri Indians. loway and Sac

Mission Press, 1848, 16mo, pp. 152.— W. W. T.]

KACHIQUEL.

The following three are mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known
to be printed: —

Fb. Domingo de Vico, Dominicano, Vocabularios i Arte de la Lengua Cachiquel
i de la Yera Paz i de otras seis.

Eb. Benito de Villacanas, Dominicano, Arte i Vocabulario de la Lengua Cachi-
quel (mentioned likewise by Clavigero).

Fe. Alonso de Betancfb, Arte i Vocabulario del Idioma de Guatemala
(Quich6?).

PHiLiPPrs Ruiz del Coeeal, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Indios de
Guatemala, llamada Cachiquel (communicated by L. L^n de Eosny).

Numerals, in : NouveUes Annales des Voyages, VoL IV (1840), pp. 8 — 36.

KADJAK.

[The reference should not hare been omitted to the longer Vocabulary ist Bar and
Hebnersen's Beitrage (97 words, by Von Wrangell), in the table to p. 259 of Vol. I.

The title of Venjaminov's work should read : —

Ivan Venjaminov, Zamjetshania o Koloshenskom u Kadjakskom Jazykakh.
St. Petershwrg, 1846, 8vo.

Zagoskin's Kadjak Vocabulary (made up from those of Billings and Lisiansky)
is printed also in the Memoirs of the Russian Geographical Society (Russian), 2nd
edition, VoL'II, pp. 250—266 ; and in the German translation, Vol. I, pp. 359 —
374.

A. E. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, p. 61. —
W. W. T.]

KARITIS— KONZA. 225

, KARITIS.

Fb. Bebnabdo Manetense, Capuch., Catechismo para los Karitis, Indios do
Brasil ; en Portugues i Indio. 1709, 8vo. Printed, according to Barcia-Pindo.

KINAT.

[That Zagoskin speaks of four dialects of this language is probably a mistake.
At all ercnts, he gives Vocabularies only of two, the Inkilik and Inkcdit-Jugelnut.
These were first printed in the Memoirs of the Russian Geographical Society, YoL
IL 8t. Petersburg, 1847 (2nd edition, pp. 246 -249).— W. W. T.]

Ueber die Yerwandschaft der Kinai IdiOme des Bussischen Kordamerika*s mit
dem grossen athapaskischen Sprachstamme. Paper by J. C. E. Buschmann, read
before the Berlin Academy on May 18, 1854 (extract in the Monatsbericht der
K. Preuss. Akademie der Wisflcnschaften, Mai, 1854, pp. 231 — 236).

KIUIUI.

[A F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
72.— W. W. T.]

KNISTENOS.

[Edw. Chappell, Narrative of a Yoyage to Hudson's Bay in H.M.S. " Rosa-
mond ;" containing some Accoimt of the North-eastern Coast of America^ and of
the Tribes inhabiting that remote Region. London, J. Mawman, 1817, 8vo, pp.
266—279.

Say's Yocabularies, appended to Long's Expedition, do not comprise the Knis-
teno. The Yocabulary appended by Pickering to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar is
made up from Harmon and Mackenzie. — W. W. T.]

KOLOSHES.

[J. C. E. BuscHMANN, Die Pima Sprache und die Sprachen der Koloschen (from
Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1856, pp. 321 —
432). Berlin, 1857, 4to. Contains a variety of observations on the language and
its affinities, pp. 380—389, and a comparative table of alphabets, with an index to
the same, pp. 398—427.

[A, F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
62, 63.— W. W. T.]

KONZA.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
67.— W. W. T.]

G G

226 KUSKOKWIMJUTS — MAYA.

KUSKOKWIMJUTS.

[Zagoskih's Tshnagmjut and KwikhpaJc-Kuskohwimjut Vocabularies are prints
also in the Memoirs of the Russian Geographical Society (Russian), Vol. II, 2nd
edition, pp. 250—266, and in the German translation, Vol. I, pp. 359 — 374. —
W. W. T.]

KUTCHIN.

[J. A. ISBESTEB, A short Vocabulary of the Loucheux Language, in : Proceed-
ings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850, p. 185.

Also in : R. G. Latham's Natural History of the Varieties of Man. London,
1850, 8vo, pp. 29V, 298.— W. W. T.]

LIPANS, LAPANAS.

Indians of Texas, belonging to the Apache stock. They hunt
over the country between the Guadalupe and the Rio Grande.

A few Lipan Words, p. 278 of: Wm. Bollaert's Observations on the Indian
Tribes in Texas, in Vol. II of the Journal of the London Ethnological Society.
London, 1850, 8vo.

MAHA, OMAHA.

[A. F. Pott, Die. quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
67.-W. W. T.]

MAIPURES.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
U, 15.— W. W. T.]

MAYA.

Fr. Alonso de la Solana Franciscano, Vocabulario muy copioso de la Lengua
de Jucatan o Maia i Epanola. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo.

Fr. Luis de Villalpando, Franciscano, Arte i Vocabulario de la Lengua de
Yucatan. This work and the following are mentioned by both Barcia-Pinelo and
Clavigero, but not known to be printed.

Fr. Bernardino de Vaxladolid, Orbis Pictus, in Latin, Spanish, and Maia.
" Un Tomo como al que esta pintado, los ponia su nombre Latino, CasteUano i el
que le correspondia en esta lengua de los Indios."

MAME. 227

Fb. Juak db Acebedo, Franciscano, Arte breve le la Lengua Jucatlieca. Men-
tkmed by Baroia-Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

Fb. Aktonio db Cittdad Real, Vocabulario Castellan-Jucateco i Jucateco-
CSHstdlan, i un Calepino en 6 Tomos cada uno de 200 pliegos. According to
Barcia-Fiiielo and Clayigero, but not known to be printed.

* 0ASFAB Antonio, Yocabulario do la Lengua de Jucatan.

Fb. Juan Oobonel, Frandscauo, redujo el Arte antiguo de la Lengua Jucateca i
mas brevedad i clardad. This and the preceding are mentioned by Barcia-Finelo,
bnt not known to be printed.

[The American Bible Society, in New York, possesses a MS. Dictionary Maya-
Spanish-English and English-Spanish-Maya, compiled by the Bey. John Kingdon,
who died in Monrovia, on the eo€»t of Africa, in the year 1855 ; also a MS. trans-
Istion of Beltran's Grammar, by the same.

Buz, in his Pre&ce, speaks of a Ghrammar by J. Nabciso, of Herranz and Quiros,
pnnted at Madrid in the year 1838.

A. Gallatin treats of the numerals in : Transactions of the American Ethno-
logical Society, Vol. I, pp. 51 — 55, and Table to p. 114.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und yigesimale Zahhnethode, pp. 93—96 j names of the
fingers, p. 301.

C. B. Helleb, Beisen in Mexiko. Leipzig, 1853, 8vo. Grammatical Bemarks,
pp. 381—385 ; Numerals and a few other words, pp. 386—388 — W. W. T.]

MAME.

Don Felipe Bnz Coeeal, Arte i Vocabulario de la Lengua de Guatemala.
Printed according to Nic. Antonio and Barcia-Pinelo, and called in the Mithndates
III, 2, p. 10, " Vocabularium Pocomamum." L. Leon de Bosny commimicates the
same title, but designates the language as Kacchiquel. (See under.)

Jjomcos is called Larios by Barcia, and his " Arte" stated to be printed in 1607.

An " Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Mam " is said to have been written by a
" Fadbe Beinoso," which was printed at Mexico in 1644. No copies known in
Furopean libraries. De Souza quotes a few words from it, viz. : —

Chiy soft.

Af water ; ha or haa, in the Maya, Kachiquel, etc.

Mama, old.

Man, father.

Tuuh, woman.

Kolf evil.

Kih, sun ; Maya, kin ; Quiche, kir ; Kachiquel, keile.

228 HAN DANS — MEXICAN.

MANDANS.

" Details sur la Nation des Indiens Mandans, extraits du Voyage dans Tinterieur
de TAmerique du Nord, ex6cut^ pendant les ann^ 1832, 1833, 1834, par le Prince
Max. de Netwied," in : Annales des Voyages, 1841, Vol. IV, pp. 5 — 47.

Mandan Vocabulary, pp. 348—352 of: Die Indianer Nord America's und die
wahrend eines achtj&hrigen Aufenthalts unter tlen wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, Ton 0. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfiisser nach
der- Natur entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissely Muquardt, 1851,
Svo, pp. 382.

MARAMOMISIOS.

p. Maiojel de Vega, Gatecismo, Dicdonario i Gramatica de la Lengua de los
Maramomisios, Indios del Brasil. According to Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to
be printed.

MASSACHUSETTS.

[The Comparative Vocabulary in Note 16 to Edwards's Mohegan Ghrammur was
compiled not by " T. Say," but by the editor. Dr. J. Pickering, who derived the
Massachusetts vocabulary from Eliot. — W. W. T.]

MATLAZINGA.

Fb. Andbes de Castbo, Franciscano, Vocabulario, doctrina Christiana i Sermones
en Lengua Matlazinga. — Arte de aprender las Lenguas Mexicana i Matlazinga. Ac-
cording to Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero, but not known to be printed.

MESSISSAUGAS.

[Here, too, the preceding (Massachusetts) remark implies. The few words of this
language are taken from Smith Barton.— W. W. T.]

MEXICAN.

Ad p. 112, line 8, Molina : reprinted in 1606, 4to, according to Barda's edition
of Leon Pinelo, where it is also stated that Hebnakdo de Eibas, an Indian, assisted
Molina in compiling his dictionary.

Ad p. 113, line 16, Squieb : and pp. 216, 217 of the German transloHon by
Karl Andree. Leipzig, Lorck, 1856, 8vo.

MEXICAN. 229

Ad p. 113, lino 37, Molina: reprinted ibid. 1678, Sto, according to Barcia-
Finelo.

Ad p. 115, line 8, Bangel : mentioned as printed in Barcia-Pinelo.

The work of Paredes (p. 114) is, properly speaking, only an extract, not a new
edition of the " Arte" by Carochi.

TuFiN, Chasl. de, Arte Novissima de Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1753, 4to.

Numerals (1 — 21, 30, 800, 8000),'Tabla arimetica comparada de los Mejicanos y
Tarascos. P. 68 of : D. Benito Maria de Moxos, cartas Mejicanas, 2^ edicion.
Chnova, Pillas, s.a. (1839), 8vo.

Numerals 1 — 10 in the Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre, Vol. II,
p. 401, of: DuFLOT DE MoFRAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des Cali-
fomies et de la Mer vermeille, execut6e pendant les ann6es 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris^
1844, 8to.

An article by Mr. Aubin, of Paris, ** Langue Amdricaine ; Langue, Litterature et
Ecriture Mexicaines," in : Encyclopedic du XIX™« Si^le, Tome XXVI, Supple-
ment, pp. 500—507.

An article on Aztec Picture-writing by E. Q-. Sqvieb, in : New York Tribune,
Nov. 24, 1862.

Die Spuren der Aztekisohen Sprache im noerdlichen Mexicfo, 1^ Abtheilung.
Paper by J. C, E, Busohmann, read before the Berlin Academy of Sciences,
Feb. 9. 1854.

The same. 2^ Abtheilung. Read April 27, 1854.

These papers are now printing, and will form a supplementary volume to the
Transactions of the Berlin Academy of 1854.

Ghrammatische Darstellung von vier Spraohen des nord-westlichen Mexico's.
Paper by J. C. E. Buschmann, read before the Berlin Academy, May 22, 1854.

[A. P. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp,
97, 98 ; on the names of the fingers, p. 301,

C. B. Helleb, Reisen in Mexiko. The numerals and a few other words, pp,
385— 388.— W. W. T.]

M. L. Leon de Rosny, of Paris, announces a new edition of the Dictionary of
Molina, preceded by a Ghrammar of the Mexican language, which will be published
in 4to, under the following title : Vocabulario de la Lengua Mejicana por el P. Fr,
Alonzo de Molina ; nueva edicion pubUcada segun el original impreso en Mejico,
con una version francesa, i precedido de un compendio do la gramdtica Mejicana i
de observaciones sobre los diferentes idiomas de M^jico, por L, L^on de Eosny.
(Esta nueva edicion se publicara en cuarto d dos columnas, con magnificos typos y
en papel solido.)

The following works are mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but are not
known to be printed : —

Fb. Antonio Dayila, Dominicano, Arte para saber la Lengua Mexicana, reduciendo
SUP elegancias a metodo.

230 MICMAC — MIXTECA.

Fb. Jtjus Baptista, Franciscano, Yocabulario ecclesiastico en Lengua Mexicana,

Fb. Antonio de los Beyes, Dominicano^ Arte de la Lengua Mexicana, con
algunas curiosidades importantes (chronologicas).

Fb. Juan Fucheb, Franciscano, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana.

D. EuaENio Bomebo, Canonico de Huaxaga, Arte para aprender las Lenguas
Mexicana i Totonaca.

Fb. AiiONSO DE Hebbeba, Franciscano, Dicdonario Mexicano.

CiiAYiaEBO, in his Catalogue of G-ranunars and Dictionaries of the Languages of
New Spain, mentions : —

Fbano. Ximenes, Grrammar and Dictionary.

Bebn. de Sahagtjn, Ghrammar and Dictionary. (Contradicted by Barcia, who
designates it as being a Latin grammar.)

Bebn. Mebcado, Ghrammar.

Ant. Datila Padilla, Ghrammar.

Babnaba Faez, Grammar.

Ant. de Toyab Montezuma, Grammar.

Jos. Pebez, Gtrammar, printed.

Gaetano de Cabbeba, Grammar.

Anton. Cobtes Canal, GJrammar, printed.

•

MICMAC.

[For " Terre Neuve Islcmd^'* read Newfoundland.

J. HowSE, Yocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, in : Vvo-
ceedings of Philological Society of London, Vol. IV, pp. 104— 112.— W. W. T.]

MILCOCAYAC.

{Mikokayak is an error of Jiilg's, which is corrected in his errata. — W. W. T.]

MINSI.

[The Comparative Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar (as
observed before) is not by Say, but by Pickering, who obtained the few words of
this dialect from Smith Barton and Heckeweldeiu — ^W. W. T.]

MIXE.

Ag. Quintana, Gramatica y Diccionario (Clavigero).

MIXTECA.

Fb. Domingo de Santa Mabia o de Hinojosa, Dominicano, Arte i Ensenanza
do la Lengua Misteca. Mentioned m Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not knovm
to be printed.

MOCOROSI MOHEGAN. 231

Autos Sacramentales en Lengiia Mixteca, by the Fray Martin Aceyedo, native
of San ndefonso, in the province of Oaxaca, Mexico. He left his MSS. in the
Convent of Oaxaca (De Souza).

MOCOROSI.

The title, as given by Barcia, is : Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Mocorosi.
Mexico^ 1599, 4to.

MOHAWK.

[Many additional words are given by M. Gtdlatin, from E. S. Dwight, in the
" Supplementary Vocabulary," Archfieologia Americana, II, pp. 383 — 397.

Eev. A. Elliot's Vocabulary is also reprinted (omitting the numerals) in
Schoolcraft's Hist., etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. II, pp. 482—493.

Rev. Mr. Hawley, Mohawk Numbers, from Pres. Stiles's MSS. ; in Collections of
Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. IX, first series, p. 137. — W. W. T.]

MOHEGAN.

[The Vocabulary of 45 words in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Gk-ammar is
extracted by the editor. Dr. Pickering, from the Grammar itself. He also gives
another (of 11 words) from Rev. "W. Jenks.

For " T. Say's," in the last paragraph of p. 124, substitute " the Editor's."

The full title of the "American Museum,'* mentioned on p. 125, is "The
American Museum ; or. Repository of Ancient and Modem Fugitive Pieces, etc..
Prose and Poetical, VoL V. Philadelphia : Printed by Mathew Carey, 1789." 8vo.
It was in this volume (pp. 22 — 25, 141 — 144) that the edition of Edwards's
Grammar, printed at Philadelphia, in 1789, as stated by Dr. Ludewig on p. 124,
appeared. The words " Columbus, May, 1787, pp. 672," should be erased. They
are derived from the Mithridates (III, 3, p. 391), where they stand thus : " Colimib.
May 1787. S. 672." My friend Peter Force, Esq., of Washington, whom I con-
sulted as to what this could mean, has solved the riddle thus. The Columbian
Magaxmey of the year 1787, contains on page 672 a notice of the death, on the 12th
September, of "old Zachariah, regent of the Mohegan tribe of Indians, in the
lOOth year of his age." Among the memoranda of one of the authors of the
Mithridates relating to the Mohegans was > a reference to this passage, which
accidentally got inserted in the place where we find it in their work, with the
typographical error of " May" for Mag. Ludewig, in attempting to make it more
intelligible, rendered it still worse.

The "Specimen of the Moheagan Language" in the Massachusetts Historical
Society's Collections, Vol. IX, first series, is simply a vocabulary. — W. W. T.]

232 MtTNDKUCUS — NANTICOHE.

MUNDRUCUS.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 73.— W. W. T.]

MUSKOGHEE.

[The Vocabularies in Gtellatin's Synopsis are found on pp. 307—367, 382—396,
405, 406.— W. W. T.]

MUTSUNS.

[A tribe of Indians living in the country around the Mission of
San Juan Bautista, in Monterey Co., California. Their lan-
guage appears to be identical with that of the Mission of La
Soledad, on the Salinas River (see under ^^ Diegefios," p. 63),
and with that of the Rumsens or Achastlians of the Mission of
San Carlos, near the city of Monterey.

P. Felipe de Abboyo, Alfiskbetico Arroyiielo de espresiones de estos Indies
Mutsunes de San Juan Bautista. Aiio de 1815, fol., pp. 94. A MS. collection of
words and phrases j to which are appended catechetical exercises, forms of prayer,
and specimens of native music, belonging to the Hbrary of the Bishop of Monterey.
The Smithsonian Institution is having a copy made of it. — W. W. T.]

MUYSCA.

Ad p. 129, line 25, Chables de Pabavet. The title is " Memoire sur TOrigine
Japonnaise, Arabe et Basque des Peuples du Plateau de Bogota ;" not " Memoria
sobre el origen Japones," etc.

Medeano, Arte de la Lengua del Nuevo Keyno de Q-ranada. Mentioned in
Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
88, 89.— W. W. T.]

NAGRANDANS.

[E. Or. Sqfiee's Vocabulary is reprinted in the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, pp. 101, 106-110, 112, 113 j and the grammatical
rules and forms in pp. 101— 105.— W. W. T.]

NANTICOKE.

[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar was derived by the
editor. Dr. Pickering, from Murray and Ileckewelder. — W. W. T.]

NARKAOANSGTT — ONEIDA. 233

NARHAGANSETT.

[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwarda^s Mohegan Ghtimmar was derived by the
editor, Dr. Pickering, from that of R. A. Williams.— W. W. T.]

NAVAJO.

Yocabulary of upwards of sixty words in Nabajo and English, pp. 419, 420, of:
Bl Gringo ; or, New Mexico and her People. By W. W. H. Davis. New YorJc^
Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.

NEW BRUNSWICK.

[The expression " all these," copied from Howse, refers to the words and phrases
of his New Brunswick Vocabulary, or Micmacy under which head this Vocabulary'
should have been entered. — W. W. T.]

NEW GRANADA.

Glossary of Words in use in New Ghranada, pp. 569—573 of: New Granada :
Twenty Months in the Andes. By Isaac F. Holton, M. A., Professor of Chemistry
and Natural History in Middlebury College. With Maps and Illustrations. New
York, 1856, royal 8vo, pp. 606.

The above Glossary does not, strictly speaking, fall within the range of our
inquiries ; but as the words occurring in it are of Indian origin, or else, being
Spanish, are used in a different sense from thaj given in dictionaries, or applied to
objects unknown in the temperate zone, we felt some hesitation to exclude it.

NUTKA.

Numerals 1—10 in the Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre. Vol. II,
p. 401, ofi DiTFLOT DE MoFBAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Califomies et de la Mer vermeille, execute pendant les ann^es 1840-42. Paris^
1844, 2 vols., 8vo.

ONEIDA.

[The Vocabulary in Schoolcraft's " Indian Tribes" is the same (omitting the
numerals) as in the " Notes on the Iroquois." As, however, they are ascribed to
different sources, I have applied to Mr. Schoolcraft, who thus explains the apparent
discrepancy : " The Oneida, taken by myself and by my nephew, E. U. Sherman,

H H *

234 ONONDAGA OTOMl.

was obtained firom young Skeiiando, the grandson of the noted chief of that name,
and Johnson. Both are Oneidas, and the authority is equal. Mr. Sherman quoted
one person, I another. They were both present while I took my part of -the
vocabulary, sometimes one giving an explanation, and sometimes the dtherJ*
~W. W. T.]

ONONDAGA.

[The Vocabulary in the " Indian Tribes" is the same (omitting the numerals) as
in the " Notes on the Iroquois." These also are ascribed to different sources,
which Mr. Schoolcraft thus explains : " I spent several days at Onondaga Reserva-
tion (having a census to take, and Indian prejudices to overcome), conferring with
the two leading chiefs. Captain Frost and Abraham Le Fort. The latter gave me
the words of my form for a vocabulary, which form coincided very nearly with M.
Gttllatin's, but did not finish it. When I published these vocabularies in the

* Notes on the Iroquois,* in 1847, I preferred to give, until I could complete mine,
M. Ghdlatin's list. . When, in 1852, 1 went to Philadelphia to print Yol. II of my

* History,* etc., it is my impression I accidentally left the MS. of this vocabulary
behind. From the insertion of Le Fort's name where you find it, it appears that I
expected it to be forwarded to me in season for the press, and forgot to strike out
my authority when thus disappointed.*' — W. W. T.]

OSAGE.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 67.— W. W. T.]

• OTO.

[The reference to Pickering's Note 16 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar should
have been inserted, if at aU, under the head of " Words and Vocabularies," as it
contains nothing about the Oto but eight words in M. Duponceau's Comparative
Table, p. 151.— W. W. T.]

OTOMI.

Barcia-Pinelo also mentions the Otomi works of Rangel 9.nd Palacios ; so does
Clavigero, who, in addition, gives the title of the Vocabulary of P. Juan de Dios
Castro, and speaks of an Otomi Dictionary by N. Sanchez.

" Demonstracion y Explicacion del Alfabeto del Idioma Othomi, con sus propios
caracteres," pp. 1—17 of: Breve Compendio de todo lo que debe saber, y entender
el Cristiano, para poder lograr, ver, conocer, y gozar k Dios Nuestro Sefior en el
Cielo eternamente. Dispuesto en Lengua Othomi, y construido literalmente en la

PAWNEE PIMA. 235

Lengua CastelLma por el P. Fr. Antonio de Guadalupe Ramirez, Predicador
Apostdlico, y ex-Guardian del Apost61ico Colegio de Propaganda Fide de N. S. P. B.
Francisco de Pachucha. Villa de Chuidalupe, 1784, 4to, pp. xvi, 80.

A Grammatical Outline of the Otomi Language, by E. BdDiGEB, on pp. 358 — 261,
VoL YII, third section, of: Ersch und Gruber's Encyclopsedie. Leipzig, 1836, 4to.

Eman. J9'ax£Ba's " Dissertatio de Lingua Othomitorum" is also separately printed.
PMladelphia, 1838, 4to, pp. 48.

N.B. For Notices of the same, see: Gdttinger Gtelehrte Anzeigen, 1836,
pp. 321—343 ; and : Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, VoL V,
pp. 355—361.

[The numerals are given by M. Gallatin in the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. I, Table to p. 114.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
90, 91 ; on the namea of the fingers, p. 301.— W. W. T.]

PAWNEE.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinaro und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 68.— W. W. T.]

PENNSYLVANIANS.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 64.— W. W. T.]

PENOBSCOT.

[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar is derived by the
editor. Dr. Pickering, from a MS. of the French Missionaries who had resided with
the tribe.— W. W. T.]

PIMA.

Numerals 1 — 10 in the " Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre," Vol. II,
p. 401, of : Duflot de Mofeas, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon des CaU-
fomies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42, 2 vols.
Paris, 1844, 8vo.

[The Vocabulary in the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II, is copied by M. GhJlatin from Dr. Coulter's, in the Royal Geograpliical
Society's Joiumal.

J. C. E. BuscHMANN, Die Pima-Sprache und die Sprache der Koloscheu.
(From Abhandlimgen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlui,

236 PINA — QUICHE.

aus dem Jahre 1856, pp. 321 — 432.) Berlin, 1857, 4to. Contains the Pima Texte
and Grammatical Observations from Pfefferkom, in the Mithridates, corrected and
greatly extended, pp. 353 — 365 ; and a Vocabulary, collected from printed sources,
with remarks on the same, pp. 367 — ^375. — ^W. W. T.]

PINA.

Yocabulario de la Lengua Fina, por P. Santiago Sedelmaib, Missiouario de los
Pinas, en la Nuera Yiscaya. 1764. MS., according to De Souza.

PIRO.

The pueblos that still speak the Pii^o language are Taos, Tezuque, Sandia, Isleta,
and Isleta of the South. (See W. W. H. Davis, El Gringo ; or, New Mexico and
her People. New TorJc, Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.)

popoluca.

Fe. Fbancisco db Joyal, Art«, Vocabulario, Doctnna Christiana i Sermones en
Lengua Popoluca. Both Barda-Pinelo and Clavigero mention this work as printed.

PUEBLO INDIANS.

A Complete Vocabulary of "Words in the Languages of the Pueblo or Civilized
Indians of New Mexico. In the language of Pueblo Indians of —

1. Santo Domingo, San Felipe, Santa Ana, Silla, Laguna, Acoma, Coohiti.

2. San Juan, Santa Clara^ San Ildefonso, Pojuaque, Nambe, Tezuque.

3. Taos, Picons, Sandia, Isleta.

4. Jemez and Old Pecos.

5. Zum.

6. Moqui.

Pp. 157--159 of: El Gringo ; or, New Mexico and her People. By W. W. H.
Dayis New York, Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.

QUICHE.

[A brief Vocabulary, extracted from the Lord's Prayer as given by Stephens, and
the numerals (also from Stephens), are given by M. GaUatin, in : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, pp. 9, 10, 275, and Table to p. 114.

A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
92, 93.— W. W. T.]

QUICUUA — SAN JUAN CAPIBTBANU. 237

QUICHUA.

BtfcLa-Finelo mentions "Juan de Ysga, Arte e Budimentos de Gramatica
QuichuA. Impreso en Lima;" and states that "Fb. Mastik ds Yictobia, del
Orden de la Meroed, fue el primero que redujo h arte la lengua del Inca.'

»

riccarees.

Biccaree Yocabulaiy, pp. 34i8 — 352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die
wiihrend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer St&mme erlebten
Abentheuer nnd Schicksale, von G-. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom YerfiEusser nach
der Natur entworfenen G^emalden. Zweite Ausgabe. SrUwelj Muquardt, 1851,
Svo, pp. 382.

RUMSEN.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zc^methode. On the numerals, p. 63.
— W. W. T.]

SAHAPTIN.

[Dr. Scovleh's Yocabularies are printed also in the Edinburgh New Philosophical
Journal, YoL XLI, pp. 190—192.

J. HowsE, Yocabularies of certain North American Languages, in : Proceedings
of the Philological Society of London, Yol. lY. Okanagan Yocabulary, pp.
199— 204.— W. W. T.]

SAN GABRIEL, KIZH.

Galifomjan Indians, mentioned already under " Diegefios," pp. 62, 63, to
which add —

JoH. Gael Ed. Buschmann, Die Sprachen Kizh und Netela von Neu Califomien.
Abhandlung gelesen in der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, October 25,
1855, pp. 601 — 531 of the " Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-historischen Klasse"
of said Academy for 1855, and with separate title. Berlin, Diimmler, 1856, 4to.

SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, ACAGCHEMEM,

NETELA.

Califomian Indians, for which see the article " Diegenos," pp. 62, 63, adding —
JoH. Gael Ed. Bttschmann, Die Sprachen Kizh und Netela von Neu Galifomien.
Abhandlimg gelesen in der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, October 25,
1855, pp. 501 — 531 of the "Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-historischen Klasse"
of said Academy, 1855, and with separate title. Berlin^ Dummler, 1856, 4to.

238 SAINT John's inoians — suoshonees.

SAINT JOHN'S INDIANS.

Vocabulajy of the Faesainaquoddi, by Fbedeeick Kiddee, pp. 689, 690, Vol. V,
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.

SANTA BARBARA.

[A. P. Pott, Die quinare nnd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 63.
— W. W. T.]

SAPIBOKONI.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. Numerals 1 — 10, from
Balbi, p. 74.— W. W. T.]

SEMINOLES.

[A letter addressed to the Indian Bureau by Frederic Kidder, of Boston, states
that he is in possession of a MS. Vocabulary of the language. He says : " It
contains at least four or five hundred words, and was got up with much care, partly
by Lieut. Cdsey and other persons, one of them an old Indian trader." (School-
craft's History, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. V, p. 689.)— W. W. T.]

SENECA.

[Moegan's League of the Iroquois contains also words and grammatical remarks,
pp. 395— 410.— W. W. T.]

SHAWANEES.

Six Shawanese words on page 125 of " Greneral Parsons' Discoveries made in the
Western Country," Article XI, pp. 119 — 127, of: Memoirs of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, Part 1, Boston^ 1793, 4to.

[The two imperfect Shawanee lists of words in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegau
Grammar were collected by the editor. Dr. Pickering, from Edwards's Q-rammar
and from Johnston. — W, W. T.] ,

SHOSHONEES.

[N. J. Wyeth, Indian Tribes of the South Pass of the Rocky Moimtaiiis, etc.,
in : Schoolcraft's History, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. I, pp. 216, 218.— W. W. T.]

SIOUX SQCALLYAMISH. 239

SIOUX.

Sioux Vocabulary, pp. 348 — 352 of: Die Indianer Nord Amerika*8 und die
wahrend eines achtjahngen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrw Stamme eriebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, von Q-. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfeaser, nach
der Natur entworfenen Gbmalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Brussels Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.

SITKA.

Numerals 1 — 10 (Sitka and King George's Island) in the " Tableau comparatif
des Noms de Nombre," Vol. II, p. 401, of: Duplot de Mofbas, Exploration du
Territoire de 1' Oregon des Califomies et de la Mer vermeille, ex^ut^ pendant les
ann^ 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris^ 1844, 8vo.

SJEVERNOVTSI.

[The Kussian word " Sevemovskia'^ is not the name of a people or language, but
a plural adjective agreeing vdth' slova (words). '^ Severnovzer" has a German
termination. The proper title for this hmguage would have been the native name,
Kvakhamaju. The Batemdakaiee, Chotveshaky Kulanapo, and Yukaiy are the same,
or dialects of the same language.— W. W. T.]

SONORA

(LANGUAGES OF).

Pos Libros dc los diferentes Idiomas que se usan en la Provincia de Sonora, by
Francisco Loaiza, Mexican Jesuit, and Missionary in Sonora, in 1736. The MS.
exists in the Mission of Yecora (De Souza).

Parallelen Sonorischer imd Mexicanischer Worter. Paper by Joh. Cabl Ed.
BuscHKANN, read before the Berlin Academy, Nov. 22, 1855.

Die Lautveranderung aztekischer WSrter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
Bonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von Joh. Cabl Ed. Buschmaitn. Aus den
Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.

SQUALLYAMISH.

-[These are the Sktvale, or Nasqualli/, of Hale. See under " Flatheads," p. 73.
'W. W. T.]

240 ' STONE INDIANS TAIIAHUMARA.

STONE INDIANS, ASSINEBOINS.

I

[The Vocabulary mentioned under this head should have been placed along with
'the others of the same dialect under the general head of "Dakota." It giyes no
support to the exploded notion of Heckewelder and other early writers, that the
Assineboins belong to the Iroquois stock. — W. W. T.]

TABALOSA.

P. Litis Teettkl, Ghramatica de la Lengua Tabalosa del Peru. Mentioned by
Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to be printed.

TACULLIES.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the nmnerale, p. 66.
-W. W. T.]

TAMANAKI.

Ad YAifOTJES (written by Barcia, languas), Barcia states that Fe. Mabtin
I^uiz Blanco published, in 1663, an abbreviated and corrected edition of the
Principios, etc., of Yangues j adding thereto a " Diccionario de las Lenguas de los
Indios Cumanagotes i Palenques j" and that in 1683 he published another, " Arte i
Vocabulario, con Catecismo i Directorio para confesar los Indios.'

))

Ad Tauste. Barcia-Pinelo states that Tauste is only the editor of the " Arte i
Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Caribes de Nueva Andalusia" of Fb. Joseph de
Cababantes.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare imd vigesimale ZShlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 13, 14 J on the pronouns, p. 108 note ; on napaes of the fingers, p. 302. —
W. W. T.]

TARAHUMARA.

[A, F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 10— 13.— W. W. T.]

Die Lautveranderung aztekischer W6rter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von Joh. Cabl Ed. Btjschmann. Aus den
Abhandlungen der KSniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin^ 1857, 4to, pp. 118.

TARASCA — TIMBIRAS. 241

TARASCA.

Numerab (1--21, 80—800, 8000), Tabla Aritmetica comparada de los Mgicanos
y Tarascos. P. 68 of: D. Benito Mabia de Moxos, Cartas Mejicanas. 2^ edic.
Oenoa, tjp. L. Fellas, s. a. (1839), 8vo.

Note. — ^The Grammars by Gilberti and Lagunas are also mentioned in
Baroia's edition of Finelo.

TCHINKITANE.

(Russ. sitb:a sound.)

Vocabulaire des Tchinkitan^ns. Pp. 587 — 591 of: ETiEKins Mabohaio),
Voyage autour du Monde, pendant les ann^s 1790, 1791 et 1792. T. I. Paris, VI.
. (1798), 4to. (From the Collections of Captain Chanal and Sni^geon Roblet.)

TEHUELHET.

[H. Hale, Ethilographj and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion, p. 656.— W. W. T.]

TEPEGUANA.

Die Lautverandenmg aztekischer Wflrter in den sonorischen Spracnen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von JoH. Carl Ed. Buschmahn. Aus den
Abhandlungen der K5niglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, ans dem
Jahre 1856. Serlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.

TEXAS.

[The numerals of " certain Indian tribes between the Rio Norte and San Antonio
of Texas," are given by M. Gallatin, in the Transactions of the American Ethno-
logical Society, Vol. I, ^. 53, and Table to p. 114. Also by A. F. Pott, in Die
quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode, p. 69. — ^W. W. T.]

jicarillas.

[" T}icorillas^^ is a misprint in Simpson^s Report for JicarillcKy which has been
copied by Buschmaim. — ^W. W^ T.]

TIMBIRAS.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
72, 73.— W. W. T.]

I I

242 TIMCACA — T8HCKT8HI

TIMUACA, TIMUQUANA.

P. AvDBEB YiTO, (Ingles), Gramatica, Diocionario i CateciBmo en Lengua dc
Mariland en la Florida. 1642. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not
known to be printed.

The complete titles of Pareja's books are :

Confessionario en Lengua Oastellana y Timuquana. Con algunos consejos para
animar al penitente. Y assi mismo van declarados algunos effectos j prerrogativas
deste sancto sacramento de la Confession. Todo muy ytil y provechoso, assi para
que los padres confessores sepan instruyr al penitente como para que ellos aprendan
k saberse confessar. Ordenado por el Padre Fr. Francisco Pareja, Padre de la
Custodia de Santa Elena de la Florida. Keligioso de la Orden de nuestro Seraphieo
Padre San Francisco. Impresso con licencia en Mexico^ en la Emprenta de la
Yinda de Diego Lopez Daualos. Ano de 1613, 12mo, 238 leaves.

Cathecismo y Examen para los que comulgan en Lengua Castellana y Timuquana.
Por el Fr. Francisco Pareja. Mexico, en la imprenta de Juan Ruyz, 1627, 8vo.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 66.— W. W. T.]

TLASCALTECAS.

Himdertachtzig WurzelwSrter aus der Sprache der Tlaskalteken im Dorfe Isalco
im Staate San Salvador (19'ahual of the Balsam Coast), aufgezeichnet und zusam-
mengesteUt nach Gallatin's Systeme zum Gebrauche fiir vergleichende Wort-
forschung. Pp. 505 — 507 of: Wanderungen durch die mittel-amerikanischen
Freistaaten Nicaragua, Honduras und San Salvador. Mit Hinblick auf deutsche
Emigration imd deutschen Handel, von Dr. Carl Scherzer. Mit 2 Karten.
Braunschweig^, G. Westermann, 1856, 8vo, pp. xx, 516.

TOTONACA.

AiTDBBAB DB Olhoz, Gbtunmatica et Lexicon Linguse Mexican®, Toton&quse et
Huastecfls. Mexico, 1560, 2 vols. 4to.

Both Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero mention this book as printed.

D. EuGBNio RoMEBO, Canonigo de Huaxaga, Arte para aprender las Lenguas
Mexicana y Totonaca. Mentioned by Barcia-Pinelo.

[A, P. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zllhlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 89.— W. W. T.]

TSHUKTSHI.

[The article under this heading may be corrected as follows : — ^They occupy the
north-eastern comer of Asia and the opposite shores of Russian America. Those in

TUBAR UOALENTSI. 243

Asia consist of two different races, the sedentary or ftshingy and the nonuid or
reindeer Tshuktshi. * The name Tshuktshi belongs properly only to the latter, who
are allied by lineage and speech to the Koriaks. The former call themselves
NammoUf and belong, like those in America, to the Eskimo stock. It is, of course,
with these only that we have here to do.

Lieut. Zaooskin, Short Comparative Dictionary of the Dialects of the Nammols
, and Xadjaks with those of the Inhabitants of the Coasts of Behring's Sea. (The
Nammol words from Dr. Bobeck.) Printed in Zapiski Eusskago G^graph.
Obshtshestva, Vol. II, 2nd edition, pp. 250 — 266. Also in the German transla-
tion, Denkschriften der Buss. G^gr. G^sellsch., Yol. I, pp. 359 — 374. And in
' Ennan*8 Arohiv fur wissensch. Kunde von Russland, Vol. VII, pp. 488 — 511.

J. Klapboth, Asia Polyglotta, pp. 323 — 325 ; Atlas, fol. xlix— Ivi. (In Jiilg,
but omitted by Ludewig.)

A F. Pott, Die quinare imd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
58— 60.— W.W.T.]

TUBAR.

Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 189 — 141. Lord's Prayer, with some gram-
matical annotations.

TUCUMAN.

P. Pedbo de Anasco, Vocabularios, Catecismos, Confesionarios i Gramaticas eu
diversas Lenguas del Tucimian. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not
known to be printed.

TULARENA.

Gramatica del la Lengua Tulareua, por el P. Abboyo, de la Mission de S. Ines.
MS. mentioned by M. Duflot de Mofras, Note 1 to p. 388, Vol. II.

TUSCARORA.

Tuscarora Vocabulary, pp. 348 — 352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's imd die
wahrend eines achtj&hrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer St&mme erlebteu
Abentheuer imd Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch heraus^egeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Ver^ser nach
der Natm* entworfenen G^mftlden. Zweite Ausgabe. Brussels Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.

UGALENTSI.

[This is the tribe called by some writers UgaljaJchmjuU or Ugaljakhmutsi,
They sjwak a dialect of the Kinai^ under which general head the other vocabularies
uf their language arc referred to.

244 UTLATECA — VIRGINIAN.

Here, as in some other instances, reference to the Comparative Vocabulary (of
97 words) in the TaSle to p. 259 of Baer und Hehn^*86n'8 Beitrftge, Tol. I, is
erroneously omitted. — ^W. W. T.]

UTLATECA.

Hervas (and after him Yater) classes this language with Quiche and Kachiquel,
as spoken on the Pacific side of Guatemala, north of !Nicaragua. Squier supposes
it to be identical with the Quich^.

Arte de la Lengua Utlateca, muy bien ordinada, por el Fray Mabia Mabth^ez,
Dominicano. Mentioned by Barcia-Finelo, but not known to be printed.

Doctrina Christiana en Lengua Utlateca por Fbaito. Mabboquik. Mexico,
apud Joannem Faulum, 1556, 4to.

UMPQUA.

f^umerals 1 to 10, in " Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre," Vol. II, p.
401, of : DuPiOT DB MoTBAS, Exploration duTerritoire*de I'Or^gon, des Califomies et
de la Mer yermeille, ex6cut^ pendant les ann^ 1840-42, 2 vols. Faris, 1844, Syo.

UNALASHKA.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und Tigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
61, 62.^W. W. T.]

UTAHS.

[Edwin Bbtakt, What I saw in California : being the Journal of a Tour, by
the Emigrant Boute and South Pass of the Bocky Mountains, across the Continent
of North America, the Ghreat Desert Basin, and through Califomia, in the years
1846, 1847. NetD York, D. Appleton and Co., 1848, 12mo. Contains a Vocabulary
of 29 words on p. 165.— W. W. T.]

VIRGINIAN.

A Dictionarie of the Indian Language, for the better enabling of such who shal
be thither 'ymployed. Pp. 183—196 (two columns) of: The Historic of Travaille
into Virginia Brittania; expressing the Cosmographie and Comodities of the
Country, together with the Manners and Customes of the People, gathered and
observed as well by those who went first thither as collected by WiUiam Strachey,
Gent., the first Secretary of the Colony. Now first edited firom the original
Manuscript in the British Museum, by R. H. Major, Esq. London, printed by
the Hakluyt Society, 1849, 8vo, pp. viii, xxxvi, two not numbered, altogether
204 pp.

HtrSCOS — YARCBA. 245

HUECOS.

[The name " Wacoes" has no right to an existence, it being but an English
transcription of the Spanish appellation Huecos (erroneously printed Nuecos on
page 198) apphed to these Indians. According to Lieut. Whipple, they call them-
selves Talleimtsus.—W. W. T.]

WAICURI.

[Father Begert's very curious accoimt of the language is contained on pp.
177 — 194 of the " Nachrichten." It comprises, besides the general remarks on the
characteristic features of the language, the Lord's Prayer and the Creed, both with
literal and free translations, and the conjugation of a verb. — ^W. W. T.]

WEAS.

[A small Algonkin tribe, located, with the Fiankeshaws, on the Osage Biver.

The Wea Primer, Weii MUs-nH-ku-ne, to teach the Wea Language. Cherokee
Nation, Mission Press, 1837, 16mo, pp. 16.— W. W. T.]

WITCHITAS.

[The first edition of Capt. Marcy's Beport is, " Washinffton, Bobert Armstrong,
public printer, 1853, 8vo (32nd Congress, 2nd Sess., Senate Ex. Doc. No. 54)," in
which the vocabularies are on pp. 307 — 310. — ^W. W. T.]

•WOCCON.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zfihlmethode. On the numerals, p. 68.
-W. W. T.]

YAQUI, HIAQUI.

Mithridates, Vol. m, part 2, pp. 157, 158, " Lord's Prayer, with grammatical
notes."

. YARTJRA.

[A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 15, 16.— W. W. T.]

246 ZACATECAS ZAFOTECA.

ZACATECAS.

• #

Arte y Yocabulario del Idioma de Iob Zacatecas, pop Fr. Fedbo Esfinabeda.
Written about the year 1565, and mentioned by De Souza ae haying existed in the
archiyes of the Conyemt of the Yilla del Nombre de JDios.

^AMUCA.

[A. F. Pott, Die qninare und yigesimale Zahlmethode. On the nmnerals, p. 74.
^W.W.T.]

ZAPOTEOA, ZACAPULA.

Febia's Yocabulary is also mentioned by Barcia-Pinelo, and Fozo^s Grammar
by Clayigero.

Barcia-Pinelo mentions moreoyer that Fr. Salyadob de S. Cipbiaito, Domini^
cano, wrote '* De los Indios de la Proyincia de Zacapula, en la Lengua de ella."

INDEX.

A

Abbttibbb (Knistanaax), 04.

Abenaki, or Wapanachki, 1, 210.

Abipones, 2, 210.

Acadians, or Sonriqnois, 177.

Acagchemem (Diegeuos), 62.

Aceawaj, 2, 79.

Achagaas, 8.

Achastlians fRamsen), 163.

Acherekotti (Tamanaqne), 180.

Acherigotea (Caribs), 28.

Acoma, or Keres (Pueblo Indiana), 02.

Adaize, 8.

Aglegmates, Agolegmiitet, 8.

Agoneaaeah (Iroquois), 87.

Agna (Omagua), 137.

Ahnahawajs, Ahwahaways CCrowa), 98.

Ahnenin (Arrapahoe), 12.

Ah-wash-tes (Costanos), 93.

Aimborea, or Engerekmung, 67.

Airiko (Betoi), 18.

Alaaapas (Texas Indians), 186.

Alasar (Minetaresj, 110.

Aleutans, i.

Algonquin, 0, 210.

Allakaweah (Crowa), 58.

Allentiac, Guarpes, Mileoeayao, 7, 210.

Almeida (Brazilian), 214.

Al-tah-mos (Costanos), 68.

Ameriseoggins (Abenaki), 1.

Amores, or Engerekmung, 67.

Andaquies, 7.

Antis, 8.

Ao-ges (GeJ, 76.

Apaehes, 8, 211.

Apache^ de Nabojoa (Navi^bs), 183.

Apiacas, 8, 211.

Apinages, 8.

Apolista (Yuracare), 206.

Arauoans, 0, 211.

Arda, 12.

Arecuma (Guyana), 70.

Ariearas, or Riccarees, 163.

Aripe (Waikur), 108.

Ark (Sitka), 176.

Arrapahoes, 12, 211.

Aroaquis (Oregones), ISO.

Arrawaks, Arrowaks, 13, 211.

Assineboins, or Stone Indians, 177.

Assinibnles, or Stone Indians, 177.

Assinipoils, or Stone Indians, 177.

Atalalas (Vilela), 106.

Athapasca, 14, 211.

Atna, 14, 211.

Atnah, Chin, or Kinn Indiant, id, 212.

Atnah (Flathead), 72. ,

Atorajs (Guyana), 70.

Atsina (Arrapahow), 12.

Attakapas, 15.

Attikameg fKnistenauz), 04.

Ature, 16 ; (Saliva), 166.

Anca, or Arauoans, 0.

Avanes CMaipures), 104.

Avarigotes (Caribs), 28, 180.

Aymara, 16, 212.

Aymores, or Engerekmung, 67.

Ayrate (Cherokee), 37.

Aztek, or Mexican, 111.

B

Bakra (Creole), 54.
Baniba, Baniwa, 17, 214.
Ban6, 17.

Batem-da-kai-ee, 17, 212.
Baure (Moxa), 126.
Bayano, 18.
Beaver Indians, 18.
Bethuck, 18.
Betoi, 18.

Bigbellies (Minetares), 110.
Billechoola (Haeeltzuk), 80 ; (Naaas In-
dians), 130.
Blackfeet, 10, 212.
Blackshoes (Crows), 58.
Blancos (Costa Rica), 54.
Blood Indians,' or KiiJma (Blackfeet), 10.
Bodega, 20, 212.
Borrados (Texas Indians), 186.
Botocudos, or Engerekmung, 67, 213.
Boutomoras (Botocudos), 67.
Brazilians, or Tupis, 20, 218.
Bugre, 25.

248

1NJ)EX.

CabaroB, 25.

Gaddoes, 2d.

Cadodaquioas, or Caddoes, 20.

CahiU, 26, 214.

Cahuillos, 26.

Caipotorade (Zamuca), 207.

Caimos, 214.

Californians, 26, 214.

Callilebet (Tehuelhet), 184.

Camacans, 27, 213, 219.

Camoyes (Yuma), 205.

Canada, 27, 215.

Canacata-ges (GSs), 75.

Caniha (Qaichna), 162.

Canishana, 28.

Carajas, S8.

Caribs, 28, 215.

Caribi-Tamanacas (Guyana), 79.

Caribisi (Guyana), 79.

Cariri, or Sabuja, 164.

Carriers, or Tacullies, 178.

Casamee fHaidah), 80.

Catawba, 82.

Cathlascons, 82.

Cavalleros (Guaykuru), 78.

Gaveres (Maipures)* 104.

Ca>wi*08, or Cahuillos, 26.

Cayapos, 82.

Cayowas (Guarani), 76.

Cayubabas, 88, 215.

Cayuga, 88.

Cayuse (Wailatpu), 199.

Celdales, or Tzendales, 198,

Ceris, 84.

Cerros flifainas), 108. *

Chacahuaxti (Totonaka), 190.

Chahtah, or Choctaw, 46.

Chamers (Osages), 189.

Chanos (Vuta), 198,

Chapacura, 84.

Chapopines (Texas Indians), 186.

Charcas (Aymara), 16.

Charruas (Puelches), 155.

Chavantes, or Cherentes, 86.

Chayma, 84.

ChecaUsh, Chehalisb, or Selish, 72, 216.

Chechehet (Puelches), 155.

ChemehueTi, 85.

Chepewyan, 85, 215.

Cherentes, 86.

Cherohakah, or Nottoways, 185.

Cherokee, 87, 216.

Chetimachas, 88.

Cheyennes, or Shyennes, 175.

Chiapanecas, 30, 216.

Chibcha, or Muysca, 128.

Chicachas, or Chickasaw, 89.

Chichimecs (Mexicans), 111.

ChickaUis, or Tsihailish (Flatheads), 78.*

Chickasaw, 39.

Chikkasas, or Chicachas, 89.

Chilake, or Cherokee, 87.

Chilcart (Sitka), 176.

Chilicothe (Shawanoes), 172.

Chilidugu, or Araucans, 9.

Chilts, or Tsihailish (Flathead), 7U.

Chimano, 89.

Chimmesyans, 40 ; (Haeeltzuk),80; (Naasn
Indians), ISO.

Chin Indians, or Atnah, 15 ; or Nagailer, 1 78.

Chinanteka, Cinacantequa, 40.

Chinchaisuyu (Quichua), 159.

Chinuk, 40, 217.

Chippeways, 41, 217.

Chiquitos, 45.

Chiriguana (Guarani), 75, 162, 218.

Chirupa (Maipure), 104.

Chocha, 218.

Choco, Cholo, 47.

Choctaw, 46, 218.

Cholo, 47.

Cholona (Peru), 162.

Chondal, Woolwa, 48.

Chonos (Vuta), 198.

Chopunish, or Sahaptin, 170.

Chorotega, 48.

Chorti, 48.

Chow-e-shak,48, 212.

Chuchu (Moxa), 126.

Chunos (Vuta), 198.

Chunupies (Vilela), 196.

Chuntaquiros, 49.

Chwachamaja, or SeTemovskia, 170.

Cinakantequa, or Chinanteka, 40.

Cinaloa, 49.

Clamets, or Lutuami, 100.

Clatsop (Chinuk), 41.

Cobeu, 49.

Cocanas, Cocamas, Cocuannas, 49, 218.

Cochimi, 49, 218.

Chochitemi (Eeres), 92.

Cochiti (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Cochnewagoes (Mohawk), 122.
Cocknawaga, or Cochnewagoes (Mohawk),

122.
Coco*maricopas, 50, 218.
Coconoons (California), 27.
Coconucos, 50.
Cocopas, 51 ; (Yuma), 205.
Coeurs d'Aleine, or Skitsuish (Flathead),

72.
Colastukweck, or St. John's Indians, 165.
Coluz (Californians;, 26.
Comanches, 51, 218.

Comeya (California, San Diego), 26, 62.
Conchas (Chickasaw), 89.
Concho, 52.
Conibos, 52.
Copeh, 62.
Cora, 62, 219.
Cora (Waikur), 198.

INDEX.

249

Comeilles, or Crows, 5H.

Coroados, or Coropos, 08.

Coronado (Mainas), 103.

Coropos, or Coroados, 53.

Corregai\je8, 58.

Costa Bioa, 04.

CoAtaooB, 6d.

Coutanies, or Katan^, 98.

Corareoa (Chiquitos), 40.

Cowelits, or Eawelitsk (Flathead), 78.

Craikmouses (Botocudos), 67.

Cran-ges (Qes), 75.

Crans, or Timbiras, 187.

Cree, or Kniatenaox, 94.

Creek, or Mnskoghee, 127.

Creole, 54, 219.

Crowg, 08.

Cacban« or Yuma, 205.

Cuciqaia (Chiquitos), 40.

Culilan Canny (Tehuelhet), 184.

Cumana, 58, 219.

Curaanagota (Tamanaque), 180.

Cumshawa, or Camshewar (Queen Char^

lotto's Island), 157; (Haidah), 80.
Conacuna, 59, 219.
Coravfts (Chiquitos), 46.
Curetn, 09.

Curuminaca (Chiquitos), 46.
Cushna, 09.
Cusoo (Quichua), 158.

Dahkotah, or Sioux, 59, 219.

Darien, Dariel, 61, 220.

Dauri (Guyana), 79.

Delaware, or Lenni Lenape, 68, 220.

Deguino (California), 26, 62, 220.

Diegenos, 26, 62, 220.

Diggers (California), 26.

Diggers of Napa Valley (California), 26.

Dirians (Chorotega), 48.

Divihet (Fuelches), 155.

Djoe tongo (Creole), 56.

Dogrib, 66.

Dtinne, or Athapascan, 14.

E

Ecclemaches, Eskelen, 68.

Echeloots (Chinuk), 41.

Eelikino (Sitka), 176.

Ehatsar (Minetares), 119.

Ehnek, 67.

Eijiguaijegi, or Guaykuru, 78.

Ekklemaches (Eskelen), 68.

Ele, 67.

Enagna (Omagua), 136.

Enakaga (Guaykuru), 78.

Enimaga, or Eochaboth (Guaykuru), 78.

Engerekmung, or Botooiidos, 67,

Esooples, or Skoffles, 176.
Eskelen, 68, 220.
Eskimos, 69, 220.
Eslenes, or Eskelen, 68.
Etchemins, or St. John's Indians (Abe-
naki), 165, 221.
Eudeve (Opata, Pima), 139, 149.

Fall Indians, or Alasar (Minetares), 1 19 .

FiUjayas (Texas Indians), 186.

Flatbows, or Kutanae, 98.

Flatheads, 72, 221.

Flathead (Atnah), 15.

Florida Indians, or Timuaca, 187.

Follaties, or Tuhwalatis, 202.

Fox Islands, 74, 221.

Foxes and Sacs, 160. ,

Friendly Village, Maokensde's (Haeeltzuk),

80.
Fucu Strait, 74.
Fuegians, or Pescherai, 149.

GaUbi (Caxibs), 28.

Galzanes, or Koltschanes, 06«

Ge, Geiko, Ges, 74, 221.

Geiko, Ge, or Ges, 74, 221.

Gens de Piti6 (Shoshones), 174.

G6s, 74, 221.

Gherins (Botooudos), 67.

Gogoyans, or Cayugas, 83.

Gorgotoquienses, 221,

Greenlanders (Eskimo), 69.

Grosventre (Minetares), 119.

Guachire (Caribs), 28.

Guaicur, or Waikur, 198.

Guaiqueries (Caribs), 28.

Guajiquero (Lenca), 100.

Guambias (Coconuoos), 00,

Guanas, 70.

Guaques, 70.

Guarani, 70, 213, 22^5.

Guarapuava, 222,

Guarayi (Guarani), 70.

Guarpes, Allentiac, Milcoeayac, 77^

Guasaya, 77.

Guatos, 77j Quato, 213,

Guatusos, 222,

Guaykuru, 78, 222.

Guenoa, 79.

Guentuse (Guaykuru), 78, 222.

Guinau (Guyana), 79.

Guyana, 79, 222.

Guypunavi (Maipure), 104,

Haeeltzuk, 80.
Hah-wal-ooes (Yuma), 200.

KK

250

INDEX.

Haidah, 80, 222.

Hailtsa, or Haeeltzuk, 80.

Haiti, 81.

Hennega (Sitka), 176.

H'hana (California), 26.

Hiaqui, or Yaqui, 203, 245.

Hie tans, or Comanches, 51.

Hitchittees, 81.

Hochelaga, 82.

Hochungorah, or Winnebago, 200.

Hoodsunhoo (Sitka), 176.

Hoo-pah, 82.

Horoje, or Winnebago, 200.

Huachi, or Chapacnra, 34.

Huasteoa, 82, 222.

Hadson'ei Bay Indians, 83, 223.

Huecos (Wacoes), 198.

Hailliche Vuta (Araucans), 9, 197.

Hnmurano Maiiias, 103.

Harons, 84, 223.

Huzzaws, or Osages, 139.

laakema, or Wallawalla (Sahaptin), 170.

Jaconaiga (Abipones), 2.

lahycos, or Ges, 74.

lakons, 85.

Japurin, or Yarnra, 204.

Idibae (Darien), 61.

lemez (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Jetans, or Comanches, 51.

Illinois, 86.

Indiens ventrns (Crows), 58.

Indians du Sang, or Kahna (Blaokfeet), 19.

Inganos, 86.

Inies (Caddoes), 25.

InkalitYugelnat (Kinai), 92.

InkUik (Kinai). 92.

Inkuluchliiats. 86, 223.

Intibucas (Lenca), 100.

loways, 86, 224.

Ipas (Vilela), 196.

Iqaitos, 87.

Iroquois, 87, 224.

Isistine (Lule), 100.

Isleta (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Issati (Sioux), 59.

Isty-semole, or Seminoles, 169.

Itapucuru (Brazilian), 213^

Ite, Itenes, 88.

Itonama, 88.

luiadge (Guaykuru), 78.

Juporocas (Botocudos), 67, 213.

luris, 89.

KAcchi, or Kachiquel, 89, 224.
Ka4jak, 90, 224.
KalMlen (Brazil), 20.

Kahna (Blackfeet), 19.

Kake (Sitka), 176.

Kallapuiah, or YamkalUe, ^2.

Kalcliaqui (Quichua), 159.

Kalina, Kalinago (Caribs), 28.

Kalisteno, or Knistenaux, 94.

Kamakan (Menieng), 110.

Kanas (Aymara), 16.

Kancbis (Aymara), 16.

Kangiilit, or Inkiiliichliiat, 86.

Kanzas, Kansas, 97.

Kanze, or Konza, 97.

Karaikas (Pescherai), 149.

Karalits, or Greenlanders (Eskimo) , 69.

Karankas (Aymara), 16.

Karina (Caribs), 28.

Karitis, 225.

Kasnas (Aymara), 16.

Katahba, Catawba, 32.

Kattanahaws (Minetare), 119.

Kaveres (Maipure), 104.

Karasumsenk (Narraganset), 131.

Kawelitsk (Flathead), 73.

Kawitches, 91.

Kechi (California), 26 ; (Diegenos), 63.

Kechua, or Quichua, 158.

Keechies, or Kichais, 92.

Keesam (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157.

Kemenetes (Pescherai), 149.

Kenai, or Kinai, 92.

Kenaize, or Kinai , 92.

Kennekas (Pescherai), 149.

Keres, 92, 154.

Kettlefalls, or SoaiaUpi, 73.

Keyes, Eeyus, or Kichais, 92, 198.

Kichais, 92.

Kiche, or Quiche, 157.

Kigamee (Queen Charlotter's Island), 157.

Kikatsa (Crows), 58.

Kikkapu, 92.

Killamuks, or Nsietsbawus (Flathead), 73.

Killamuks (Lower), or lakons, 85.

Killisteno, or Knistenaux, 94.

Kinai, 92, 225.

King's River Indians (California), 26, 62.

Kinn Indians, Chinn, or Atnahs, 15.

Kioways, 94.

Kiriri, or Sabuja, 164, 225.

Kiskapocoke (Shawanoes), 172.

Kitunaha, or Kutanae, 98.

Kiwomi, or Tihuex (Keres), 92, 187.

Kizh (Kish), or San-Gabriel (Diegenos),
62, 237.

Kliketats (Sahaptin), 170.

Knistenaux, 94, 225.

Kochaboth (Guaykuru), 78.

Kokama (Omagua), 137.

Kollaguas (Aymara), 16.

Koltshanes, 96.

Koluches, 96, 225.

Konages, or Kadja'c, 90.

INDEX.

231

Konza, 07, 2*25.

Kooyou (Sitka), 176.

Kristenaux, or Knistenaux, 04.

Kulanapo, 97, 212.

Kulino, or Chiniano, 89.

Kullespelm (Blathead), 73.

Kunaguara (Caribs), 28.

Kupeno (Moxa), 126.

KuHkokwims, or Kushkakchwakmutes, 08.

Kutabba, or Catawba, 32.

Kuskokwimjuts, 226.

Kutanae, Kutnelia^ Kutani, 98.

KatcbiD, 99, 226.

Kwaiantl (Flathead), 73.

Kwalbioqua, or Tlatskanai (Tahkali), 179,

189.
Kwenaiwitl (Flathead), 78.
Kwigpak (Inkuluchliiat), 86.
Eyganieft, or Kigamies (Haidab), 80.

La Soledad (Diegenos), 63 ; see also Mut-

suns, 232.
Laguna (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Lamano (Quicbua), 109.
Lamissa, or Laraano, 159.
Lapanas, or Lipans, 226.
LaymoD, 99.

Lenni Lenape, or Delaware, 63.
Lenca, 09.

Lipaus, Lapunns, 226.
Loucheux, or Kutcbin, 99.
Liipakas (Aymara), 16.
LuTe, 100.
Lutuami, 100.

Macamecrom (Brazilian), 213.

Machakulis (Brazilian), 213.

Mackenzies f Illinois), 86. .

Maconis, 101, 213.

JVIacos (Saliva), 1(}6.

Macoussies (Guyana), 79.

Mag Headings, Indians ut (California), 27.

Maha, 101,226.

Maba-os (Youmas), 205.

Mabikan, or Mohegan, 128.

Maia, or Maya, 102.

^lainas, 103.

Maiongkong (Guyana), 79.

Maipures, 104, 226.

Makuw (Upper California), 26.

Makoby, 10->.

Malalis, 105, 218.

Mame, Pokomam, 105, 227.

Manaos, 105.

Mandacaru (Brazilian), 213.

Maudans, 106, 228.

Manibas, or Baniwas, 17. 214.

Manoas, or Manaos, 105.

Manos de Perro (Texas Indians), IHC

Maopityan (Guyana), 70.

Mapoje (Saliva), 166.

Maqua, 106.

Marabe (Pueblo Indians^, 155.

Maradifos. (Shoshonees), 174.

Maramomisios, 228.

Maropa fYoracare), 206.

Mascbacaris, 107.

Massachussetts Indians, 107, 228.

Massit (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157.

Mataguaya, 109. ~

Mataras (Lule), 100.

Matlazinga, 109.

Mauvais Monde (Oogrib), 66.

Mawakwa (Guyana), 79.

Maya, Maia, 102, 226.

Mayorunas, 110.

Mbaya, or Guaykuru, 78.

Mechchaooh (Mohegans), 123.

Mekos (Mexicans), 111.

Menieng, 110.

Menomonies, 111.

Mequachake (Shawanoes), 172.

Mescalos (Texas Indians), 166.

Messisaugas, 111, 228.

Mexicans, III, 228.

Miami, 116.

Micmac, Mikm^, 117, 230. .

Mije, 117.

Milcocayac, Allentiao, Guarpes, 118, 230

MUicite, 119.

Minetares, 119.

Minsi, Ministi (Delaware), 68; 120, 280.

Miramichi (Micmac), 117.

Miskito, or Mosquito, 195.

Misteco, or Mixteka, 120.

Mitlantongo (Mixteka), I2U.

Mixe, or Mige, 117, 280.

Mixteka, 120, 230.

Mobilians (Chickasaw), 89.

Mobimi, 121.

Mochica (Yunga^, 200. *

Mochono (Moxa), 126.

Mocoby, 121.

Mocorosi, 122, 231.

Mohavi, 122.

Mohawks, 122, 231.

Mohegans, 123, 281.

Molele, or Waiilatpu, 109.

Molopaque (Brazilian), 218.

Molucbes, or Araucans, 9.

Mongoyoz, or Camacans, 27, 213.

Monoas, or Manaos, 105.

Monqui, or Waikur, 198.

Monsonik (Knistenanx), 94;

Montagnards, Mountaineeni, 107.

Montauks, 173.

Morotoco (Zamuca), 207.

Mosotie (Moxa), 120.

252

1ND£X.

Mosquito, 12d.

Moiintaineers, or Sheshatapoosh, 176.

Moxa, MoBsa, 126.

Moyave, or Mohavi, 122.

Mozka, or Muyska, 128.

Machquanh (Mohegans), 123.

Machojeones (Mossa), 126.

Mucury (Brazilian), 213.

Mahhekanew Indians (Algonqoin Mohe-

gan), 6, 123.
Munseyi, or Minsi (Delaware), 63, 230.
Miindrucus, 127, 232.
MuraSr 127.
Muskoghee, 127, 232.
Mutsuns, 232.

Mutaricus, or Mundrucus, 127, 232.
Muysca, 128, 232.
Myncquesar, Myncknssar, 129.

N

Naass, 130.

Nabadaches (Caddoes), 29.
Nadowessies, Sioux, Dahkotahs, 59.
Nagailer, or Tacullies, 178.
Nagrandans (Chorotega), 48, 130, 232.
Naguegtgaguehee (Abipones^, 2.
Nak-nanouks (Botocudos),^67.
Nahuatl, or Mexican, 111.
Namollo (Tshuktshi), 191.
Nandakoes (Caddoes), 25.
Nanticohe, Nanticoke, 130, 232.
Narragansett, 131, 233.
Nasqually, 73.
Natches, 132.

Natik, Nadik (or Massachusetts Indians),
107.

Nangatuck Indians (Fequot), 149.

Navajos, 132, 233.

Negro-Dutch (Creole), 56.

Negro-English (Creole), 64,

Negro-French (Creole), 67.

Negro-Portuguese (Creole), 56.

Negro-Spanish ('Creole), 67.

Nehethawa (Enistenaux), 94.

Nenawehk (Knistenaux), 94.

Netela, or San Juan Capistrano (Diegeno),
63, 237.

Newfoundland, 133,
. New Brunswick (Mikmak), 117, 133, 233.

New Granada, 233.

Nez-Perces, or Sahaptin, 170.

Nheengaibas (Brazilian), 213.

Nihaloitih (Qhinuk), 41.

Ningre (Creole), 54.

Nipissing (Algonquin), 134.

Nippegon, or Winnebagos, 200.

Niquirans, 134.

Noana (California), 26.

Norton Sound, 134.

Nottoways, 136.

Nova Scotia (Mikmak), 117.

Nouros (Brazilians), 20.

Nsietshawus (Flathead), 73.

Nuecos (misprint for "Huecos"), or Wa-

coes, 198 ; see also page 246.
Nusdalum, 136.
Nutka, 136, 233.

Ocoles (Vilela), 196.
Oje (Tamanaques), 180.
Ojibois (Chippewayj, 41.
Ojibways, or Chippeways, 41.
Okanagan (Sahaptin), 170.
Okanagan (Atnah), 16.
Oktolaktos, or Otoes, 140.
Olamentke, or Bodega, 20, 212.
01-hones (Costanos), 63.
Omagua, 136.

Omaha, or Maha, 101, 226.

Oneida, 137, 233.

Onondaga, 138, 234.

Ontoampas (Vilela), 196.

Opata, or Tequima, 139, 185.

Opatoro (Lenca), 100.

Oregones, 139.

Orejones (Texas Indians), 186.

Orelhudos (Oregones), 139,

Oristine (Lule), 100.

Orotinans (Chorotegans), 48.

Osages, 139, 234.

Osawses, or Osages, 139, 234.

Otchagras, or Winnebagos, 200.

Othouez, or Otoes, 140.

Otakapu, or Attakapas, 15.

Oto, Otoes, 140, 234; (loways), 87.

Otomi, 141, 234.

Ottare fCherokees), 87.

Ottawas, 143.

Ottogami, Onthagamies, or Sacs, 165.

Ottomacque, or Ottomaku, 143.

Ottomaku, 143.

Otuquis, 144.

Ous, or Osages, 139.

Oyampis, 144.

Pacaliuches (Texas Indians), 186.

Pacaos, Pacoas (Texas Indians^, 186.

Pacasas (Aymara), 16.

Pacaguara, 144.

Paduca, or Comanche, 51.

Paegans, or Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.

Pahoja (Otoes), 140.

Pah-utah, or Chemehnevis, 35.

Pajalates (Texas Indians), 186.

Paiconeca, 146.

Paiure (Tamanaque), 180.

Pakasas (Aymara), 16.

Palaihni, Palaiks, 145.

INDEX.

253

Palencas (Tamftnaqne), 160.

Pamanes (Texas Indians), 186.

Pflxnaqaes (Texas Indians), 186.

Pampas (Puelches), 155.

Pampa del Sacramento (Pern),

Pampopas (Texas Indians), 186.

Pampticough, 145.

Pani, or Pawnee, 147.

Panos, 146.

Papoloka, Popoluka, 152.

Para (Brazilian), 213.

Parechi (Tamanaques), 160.

Pareni Parenes (Maipure), 104, 146.

Pariagotos (Tamanaque), 180.

Parias, (Tamanaque), 180.

Pasaines (Vilela), 196.

Passa (Peru), 162.

Passamaquoddi (St. John's Indians), 165.

Patachos, 146, 213.

Patagonians, or Tebuelhet, 184.

Paunaca (Paiconeca), 145.

Paunch Indians (Crows), 58.

Pawnees, 147, 235.

Payagnas (Guaykuru), 78.

Paycob-ges (Ges), 75.

Pebas, 147.

Pecos, or Yemes (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Pehuenche (Araucans), 9.

Pelus, or Wallawallas (Sahaptin), 170.

Pend d'Oreilles, or Kullespelm (Flathead),
73.

Penobscot, 147, 235.

Pennsylvaniaus, 148, 235.

Pequod (Narraganset), 131.

Pequot, 149.

Pescherai, 149.

Petiguaren (Brazil), 20.

Pianoghotto (Guyana), 79.

Piaroas (Saliva), 166.

Piankasbaws, 149.

Picaneiix, or Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.

Picori (Pueblos Indians), 154.

Pieds noirs, or Blackfeet, 19.

Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.

Pihniques (Texas Indians), 186.

Pikunche, or Puelche (Araucans), 9.

Pima, Pimo, 149, 235.

Pina, 236.

Pinalefios (Apaches), 150.

Pinols, or Pinalefios, 150.

Piquas (Shawanoes), 172.

Pirinda, 151.

Piro, 161, 236.

Piros (Chuntaquiros), 49.

Piscous, or Piskwans (Flathead), 73.

Pojuaque (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Pojuate (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Poko-mam (Mame), 105.

Pokonchi, Poko-man, 161.

Polindaras (Coconucos), 50.

Ponchas, Poncars (Maha), 101.

Ponderays, or EaUespelxn (Flathead), 73.

Ponkata-ges (Ges), 75.

Popoluca, Papoloka, 152, 286.

Pottawatome, 153.

Pouteotamis, or Pottawatome, 158.

Powhattans, 153.

Poyes, Poyus (Vuta-Huilliche), 198.

Prince William's Sound, 154.

Puans, or Winnebagos, 200.

Puctunc (Maia), 102.

Pueblo Indians, Keres, 154, 236.

Puelche, or Pikunche (Araucans), 9.

Puelches, 155.

Puemaja (Yuma), 205.

Puncaws, or Ponchas (Maha), 101

Puquini, 156.

Pujunis (Sacramento Indians), 165.

Purugotos (Caribs), 28.

Purjs, Paris, 156, 213.

a

Quadus, 156.

Quappas, 156.

Quaquare (Ele), 67.

Quaquas (Saliva), 166.

Quato (Brazilian), 213; Guato, 77.

Queen Charlotte's Island, 157.

Quemaja, or Camoyes (Yusma, Cuchan),

205.
Quengues, or Cayuga, 88.
Queres, or Eeres, 02, 154.
Quiche, 157, 236.
Quichua, 158, 236.
Quime, or Cochitemi (Eeres), 92.
Quintikuk (Narraganset), 181.
Quito (Quichua), 158.
Quoddi, or Passamaquoddi (St. John's In<

dians), 166.

Badigeurs (Shoshonees), 174.
Ricaras, Biccarees, 163.
Biccarees, or Bicaras, 168, 237.
Boamaino (Mainas), 108^ '
Bo-mo-nans (Costanos), 58.
Boot-diggers (Shoshones), 174.
Bucahee (Abipones), 2.
Bumsen, Bunsienes, 163, 237; (see also
under " Mutsuns," 232).

s

San Aldefonso (Pueblo Indians), 155.

Santa Anna (Pueblo Indians), 156.

San Antonio (DiegeSios), 62.

Santa Barbara, 167, 238.

Santa Clara (Pueblo Indians), 155.

San Diego (Diegenos), 62.

San Domingo (Pueblo Indians), 155.

254

INDEX.

San Felipe (PueUo Indians), 155.

San Gabriel (Diegenos), 62, 237.

Saint John's Indians, 165, 238.

San Jnan (Pueblo Indians) 155.

San Juan Capistrano (Diegenos), 62, 237.

San Lais Obispo, OtJifomia (Diegenos),
62. .

San Mignel (Diegefios), 62.

San Baphael (Diegefios), 62, 212.

Sabuja, or Eiriri, 164.

Sao Pedro (Brazilian), 214.

Sacramento Indians, 164.

Upper Sacramento Indians (California and
Sacramento), 27, 164.

Sacs, Saki, Sakewl, 165.

Sahaptin, or Shahaptan, 170, 237.

Saki, 165.

SaUva,.166.

Samipaos (Texas Indians), 186.

Samuca, or Zamuca, 207.

Sankikani, 166.

Sapibokoni, 168, 238.

Sarabeca, 168.

Saramacca (Creole), 56.

Saste, or Shasties, 168.

Satrahe, or Eiccarees, 163.

Satsikaa (Blackfeet), 19.

Sauks, Sawkis, or Saki, 165.

Sautenx (Chippeway), 41.

Savaneric, 168.

Sehaak Canny (Tehnelhet, 184.

Sekumne (Sacramento Indians), 165.

Selish, or Flatheads, 72.

Seminoles, 169, 238.

Seneca, 169, 238.

Seris, or Ceris (Pima), 84, 150.

Serpens, or Shoshones, 174.

Serranos (Tehuelhet), 184.

Setaba, or Passa (Quichua),- 162. .

Sevemovskia, 170, 212, 239.

Shahaptan, 170.

Shara, or Cheyennes, 175.

Shasties, 168.

Shawhays, or Cheyennes, 175.

Shawanoe, 172, 238.

Shebayi, 173. -

Sbeshatapoosh, 176.

Shushwapumsh (Tsihaili-Selish), Flat-
heads, 73.

Shinicooks, 173.

Shoshonees, 174, 238,

Shushwap (Flathead), 73.

Shyennes, or Cheyennes, 175.

Sicaunes (Tacullies), 178.

Sjevemovtsi, Severhovskia, 239.

Silla (Pueblo Indians j, 155.

Similaton (Lenca), 100.

Sinaloa, or (.'inaloa, 49.

Sioux, or Dahkotah, 59, 239.

Sirionos (Guarani), 75.

Sitka, Sitcha, 175, 239.

Situga (Betoi), 18.

Sketapashoish, or Skoffies, 176.

Skitsuish (Flathead), 73.

Skittageets (Queen Charlotte's Island),

157.
Skoffies, 176.
Skwale (Flathead), 73.
Slave Indians (Dogrib), 66.
Smallrobes (Blackfeet), 19.
Snake Indians, orShoshnees, 174.
Soaiatlpi (Flathead), 73.
Soerigong (Guyana), 79.
Sonora, 239.

Souliers noirs (Crows), 58.
Souriquois, 177.
Spokein (Flathead), 72.
SquaUyamish, 177, 239.
Sticke^n (Sitka), 176.
Stone Indians, 177, 240.
Sussee, Sursee, 178.

Tabalosa, 240. .
Tabayara (Brazilian),. 21 3.
Tacames (Texas Indians), 180.
Tacana (Yuracare), 206.
Tachies, orlnies (Caddoes), 25.
TaculUes, or Tahkali, 178, 240.
Tacunas, or Ticunas, 187.
Tahkali, or Tacullies, 179.
Tah-le-wah, 179.
Talamanca (Costa Rica), 54.
Talatui, 180. .
Taluhet (Puelches), 155.
Tamanaque, Tamanaki, 180, 240-
Tamoiae, Tamoyos (Brazil), 21, 213.
Taos (Pueblo Indians), 155.
Taparita (Ottomaku), 143.
Tapiguae (Brazil), 21.
Tapiis (Chiquitos), 46.
Tappen (Brazil), 20.
Tarahumara, 181, 240.
Tarasca, 182, 241.
Tariana, 183.
Taruma (Guyana), 79.
Tatimolo (Totonaka), 190.
Tatiquilhati (Totonaka), 100.
Taurai (Guyana), 79.
Tchekto (Tschuktchi), 191.
Tchinkitane, 24U
Tchnagmjutes, or Kuskokwims, 9 n
Tcho-ko-yem, 184, 212.
Tchuktchi (Aglegmutes), 3, 191.
Tecunas, or Ticunas, 187.
Teguas, or Tiluex (Keres), 187.
Tehama (California), 26.
Tehuetches fPuelches), 155.
Tehuelhet, 184, 241.
Tehuel Cunny (Tehuelhet), l«l.
Tepeguana, 185, 241.

Tepoikoluk (MiilefcB), 130.
Tequima, or OpaU, ISS, IBft.
Terrs nenve lelud (Mikmak), IIT.
Teauqiie (Pueblo ludiuH), 13S.

Th.ii

IndiBDB, 186, S

1,66.

TiWcBcoUi (Gujuia), T9.

Ticoritlu, erroneouil; Kir " JicuIUm,"

ise, 241.
TicoDM, or TicnnaB, 18T.
Tihuei. 9H, IBI.
Tikomeri (Mom), 128.
Tikmi«,jir Ciiiiofliio, 3U.
Timbirai, 187, 213, 2il.
TimuacB, 18T, 242.
TimuieanB, or Timnae*, 18T, 243.
Tiim^',orAlhapiu>ua, 14.
Tinquft, 18a

Ti?erighotto (Gnyum), 79.
TUhiako (Uiilcka), ISO.
TlakatBt, or Kjiketut (Saliaptin}, ITO.
TbimaU, or Lutaanii, 100.
TUoauaUh, TloqoaUb, Itl8.
TUpanckB. 1^.
TlascoltFcas, ISfl, li43.
T!BUap(ChiDuk1, 41.
TlutskBDu (Tohkali), 179, 169.
TniuTiii,MKiDai, 9i(.
Toha, or Mocoby, 121.
TokBntin (Omagiui), 137.
TDkbdoe (Lole), 100.
Tolteka (Meiioui), lit.
Touocoli (LqIk), 100.
Tunu-i>iuH.b (MobegHSB), 103.
TotonacB, 190, 243,
Tankailfiitlin (Spokein, Flathend), T3.
TaUDBk (SacTBineiito Indians}, lUS.
TarhiakiUus (KoluBcboa), 9B.
Tabiunk (Cbinuk), 41.
Tihaaginjulea, or KuskukiriiaB, DS.
TuhngkUbl, 101. '
TabuklBbJ, 191, 243.
Teibaili-Seljib (I'lathead), 73.
Tljniu, or Kinai, 92.
Tuapukfl (CarihB), 28.
TDbar, 102, 243.
Tucano. 102.
Tucumtn, 243.
Taomias, qr Ticauas, 187.
Tabvalatl (Yamkallie), 202.
Tulare lAka Indiima (Califoraians, 26,

lUUKarseD (SitkuJ, ITO.
iiDimimioi (Druil), 3t.
DURbase, 192.
uulumiie (CBlifbroiuDB), ST, 213.

Ualnamben, 104,

llBia-Mukuru (Tanunaque), 180.

Uuvca-Faccill (Tuoanaqas), 180.

Uobee, 194.

'Ugalentsi, TlgileDti, Wi, 243.

ligaljuebmuUi (Kinui), U3 ; see also □

der "t]gBlentai,'-a43,
rkahipn, or Kikkopu, 82.
Umpqua, or Tabkali, ITO, 105, 244.
Unalashka, 1H6, i4i.
Uoaktblgo (DoUware), 93.
llaaml (riDlavare), SS.
Onehagog (Shinieooks), 178.
Upsaroka (Craws), 08.
Unibae {narten), 61.
Uruqiienas (Utaiilian). 314.
UlBh, lllli, %U.

Dugami, or Sua and FoiaB, ICS.
Udnteca, 244.

ValieatcB (CobU B)ca},a4.
VeuadoB (Teiss IndiuiB), 15<
VUeU, 196.
TirginianB, 197, 244.
Viiu-Hnilliche, 107.

Waccoft, or WokkimB, 201.
Wacawaj, or Aooaway, 2.
WacMB, 108 (ought to b« "Hoeoos,"

244).
Wahtwii, or Uandana, lOS.
Walitohuna, or Otoes, 140.
WaliUiktak, or Otosa, 140,
Wsilmr, 198, 245.

Wiu]

Mpo, n9.

Waijamaia (Gajana), 78.
Wakaikama (Chinnk ). 41.
Wakaab, or Nutka, 1S.\

WuD

l» (Sah

), tl3.

WapikOflohki, or At
Wapbiana (Guyana), TO!
Wapisian-raraaana (Gnjana), 7
Warau (Guyana), 79,
Wiim.w», lH!f,
Waahas, or OasgoB, ISO.
Wallala (Cbinuk), 41.
'Wawab, or Oaages, 130.
Weas, 245.
Wee- jot, 200.
WeiW-pek, 200.
wmamel (Yamkallia), 202.

256

INDEX.

WUletpoos (Waiilatpu), 109.
Winnebagos, 200.
WUh-osk, 201.
Witchitas, 201, 245.
WoccoDS, Wokkons, 201, 245.
Woolwa, Chondal. 48.
Woyawai (Guyana), 79.
Wyandots, or Hurons, 84, 223.

Xumanas (Brazilian), 213.

Yacana-Ctumy (Tehuelhet), 184.

Yagaas, 203.

Yakanaku, or Pesoherai, 149.

Yakema, or loakema (Sahaptin), 171.

Yameos, 203.

YamkaUie, 202.

Yam-pai-o (Ynma), 205.

Yankitlan (Mixteka), 120.

Yanktons, Yanktonans, 203.

Yaoi(Carib8),28.

Yaqui, 40, 203, 245.

Yarora, 204, 245.

Yeconoampas (Vilela), 96.

Yete (Omagaa), 137.

Ypapana (Totonaka), 190.

Yucuatl, or Nutka, 135.

Yugelnut (Kinai), instead of Ingelmut, 93.

Yukai, 205, 212.

Yule, 205.

Yumas, 205.

Yunga, 206.

Yunka-Mochika (Ynnga), 206.

Yuracares, 206.

Yuris, or luris, 80.

Yunmagua (Omagua), 136.

Zacapula, Zapoteca, 246.

Zacatecas, 246.

Zamuca, 207, 246.

Zapari, 207.

Zapoteca, 207, 246.

Zeona, 208.

Zoe (Cinaloa), 49.

Zoque, 209.

Zuiii (Pueblo Indians), 154.

Zutugil (Kachiquel), 89.

THE END.

London: Printed by Thomas Harrild, 11, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street

EEEATA.

I-AOB LINE

2

5

40

6

10

7

14

8

8

8

10

8

11

10

32

11

3

11

19

12

22

12 5

14 18
16 33

17

23

28

24

32

10

33

14

35

36

26

37

28

45

17

50

29

52

14

52

19

54

10

55

23

55

24

67

32

58

2

68

3

ddd to AcCAWAT, " Wacawoyo."

for Daves read Davies.

for Langue read Tongue.

for Guarpos read Griiarpes.

for puellos read pueblos.

ybr Atnapascan rea«? Athapascan.

for Tinalfenos read Pifialenos.
after 6 vols, insert Folio.
after pp^ 330 insert This edition
is without the "Vocabulario
aque se anada la Doctiina
Christiana."

after 6 vols, insert Folio.

Arda, afier Doctrina Christiana,
etc.^insert This language being
entirely unknown, the Lord's
Prayer is given from the above
book,
from the bottom, for Vol. II
read Yol. III.

for Ticorillas read Jicarillas.

disconnect the words " New
edition, enlarged (by D. de
Gualdo?)" from the title to
which they are attached, and
connect them with the subse-
quent title, line 34, to which
they belong.

for Isanno read Isauna.

for Purugotos read Purugotes.

for Kutahba read Katahba.

for Queugues read Quengues.

head-line and lines 4 and 8, for
Chemehnevi read Cheme-
huevi.

for Ticonlla read Jicarilla.

for 914 read 415.

for L'Ance read I'Anse.

for Nuevo read Nueva.

for Putor read Putos.

for Najarit read Nayarit.

for KonigUchen read Kaiser-
lichen.

for Page 117 read Page 88 of
Vol. I.

for 1 vol. read 2 vols.

for Dominque read Domingue.

for en la langue read en langue.

after Fran9aises insert Par M.
Goux,

I PA.Q

59

61
61
62
64

67
67

67
67

68
69
69
69
70

70
70
70
70
71
74
%
75
76
79
80
81

86

86
86

87
87
87

89

90
90

■ LIMB

9 from the bottom,ybrNadowe88ier

read Nadowessies.
3 transpose after line 4.

last liiie,jforUrabao r^flwiUrabae.

26 & 35, for Boscara read Boscana.
32 add " The Germtm original was

published at Barby, 1789, in

8vo."
14 for Ququaro read Quaquaro.
article EAe^Ansert after Gilii,

" Balbi Atlas Ethnographique.

Tab. XLI, No. 647."
18 for Amores read Aymores.

13 from the bottom, ybr plain read

simple.
Last line, for Sutel read Sutil.

2 for pays de read paso del.

3 for nord^te read noroeste.
16 for Karalis read Karalit.

29 for a voyage read a second voy-

age.

30 for 182i read 1824.

30 after 4to add pp. 559 — 569.

42 for Schubert read Schubart.

43 for Index read Register.

18 for Helmesen read Helmersen.
9 for Aleutan read Aleutian.

30 for Guararo read Guarano.

31 for Chiviguana read Chiriguana.
34 for Fullah read Foulah.
16ybr Tamanaken reoc^Tamanacan.
34 for Camshava read Oumshawa.
24 for Chatahsochee read Chata-

hoochee.
20 for Inkuluchliiate read Inkii-

liichluat, and omit Kangjulit.
22 for Eskimo read Kenai.

27 & 28, dele from Kwigpak to 512,

and read Yocabularv of the In-
kiliks proper and of the Inkar
lits-Yugehiut, pp. 481 — 487.

5 for Iowa r^ad loway.

6 for Otae read Otoe.

7 for Iowa Mission read loway

and Sac Mission Press.
a/5Jcr luris «w*er< Jicarillas. (See
imder " Ticorillas " in the
Addenda.)

14 f(yr du read de.

29 for Robeck read Eobek,

258

£BBATA.

r«Ol LIMB

91 11 for d'lle read de File.

91 31 for Kawitechen read Eawitches.

92 3 for Tiguex read Tihuex.

93 2 for dutinguishes four read fur-

nishefl Tocabularies of two.
93 3 dkle MDong which are, and for
InkaUt, and Ingehnut read
] nkaUt-Tugehiut.

93 27 for Inkilik, lukaUt, and Ingel-

mut read Inkilit and Inkalit-
Yugehiut.

94 24 for Moon read Moons.

95 40 for Caoltere read Carlton.

96 11 for and read or.

98 4 & 18 fw Tchwagmjutes read

Tshnagmjntes.
98 7 for Kuskokwina read Kuskok-

wim.
100 15 for Isiftine read Isistine.
100 7A for Vf read \\\,

103 5 from the bottoro, for Kingdom

read Kmgdon.

104 4 for Maranou read Maranon.
104 17 f(yr Ayanoe, Kavere, read Ayane,

Cayere.
104 18 for GKiypimavoereadf Qnipunaye.
106 26 for Upsasoke read Upearoka.

113 35 for 1855 read 1555.

114 11 for propiedad read propriedad.
114 12 for Biblioteca read Bibliotheca.
114 \% for Catredratioo read Cathe-

dratico.
114 17 for Sacalo read Sacado.

117 9 from the bottom,ybr Terre neuye

Island read Newfoundland.

118 29 dele Mikokayak — (an error of

Jiilg's, corrected in his erratft) .

122 6 for the read a.

125 8 dele Columbus, May, 1787, pp.
672.

130 2 from the bottom, for Murray
Vans read Vans Murray.

136 7 for anno read alio.

136 9 for nordeste read noroeste.

138 16 for Forst read Fort.

140 5 from thebottom,/orWimiepago
and Otoe Dialects reckd Winne-
bago Dialect.

140 6 for Royet read Boret. »

141 2 afler Indians insert to.

143 13 for Ottowwaws read Ottawwaws.

148 29 for 198 read 19, 7.

149 11 for Kamanetes read Kemenetes.

150 14 for 161, 162 read 461, 462.

r*»C LIVE

152 12 for T. read J.

152 15 for Hues read Hues.

153 12 & 26,/ar Pottawatame read Pot-

tawatome.
158 3 after Antigua dele the comma,

158 38 for Manle read Maule.

159 3 for Tucaman read Tucuman.

160 27 & 28, for exploracioni read ex-

plorazioni.
163 15 for Xueco read Hueco.
163 20 for AchastHers read Achasthans.

163 26 for anno read aiio.

164 6 for Achasthers read Achastlians.
170 21 for you read yon.

170 26 & 29, for Chwachamaja read

Chwacharaaju.

171 21 for CUcatat read Klikatat.

175 2 from the bottom, for Archipel

read Archipelago.

176 6 for Eclikino read Eelikino.
176 7 for Kooyen read Kooyou.

176 25 for Massachueett read Massa-
chusetts.

178 11 for Saskatchewaine read Sas-
katchewan.

180 13 after Acherekotti insert Avari-
kotti.

180 30 after Paria insert a semicolon.

182 24 for Girolamo read Jeronimo.

185 24 for Girolamo read Jeronimo.

186 16 &29,/or Ticorillas read Jicarillas.

187 8 for Tiluex read Tihuex.

190 9 for Caja read Baja.

191 2 for Kadjah Islands read Kadjak

Island.
191 11 for Tschuktchi read Tchuktchi.
191 12 for. western read eastern.
191 15 for Wild read Nomade.
191 16 for Tchouktschee read Tchoukt-

chee.

191 24 for 407, 408 read 467, 468.

192 7 /or 3 read 2.

193 29 for Docimient read Documents.
195 19 for Ticorilla read Jicarilla.

197 34 for Vuta, Huilliche read Vuta-

Huilliche.

198 9 & 15, for Nueco read Hueco.

199 7 for T, read S.

201 5 for Boiloin read Boilyin ; and

insert commas after Boilvin
and after Cass.

202 18 for Kallapuiah read Kalapuiah.
202 28 for 9 read q.

204 9 for 3 read 2.

London : Printed by Thomas Harrlld, 11, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street

^^